oi.uchicago.edu/OI/DEPT/PUB/SRC/CHD/S2/CHDS2.html
oi.uchicago.edu/OI/DEPT/PUB/SRC/CHD/S2/CHDS2.html
210
209
šaptamenzu šappu- 
makes good sense but the lack of a DUG determinative makes ths doubtful. Alternatively, if one assumes a broader divergence or a divorce of the meaning of -enzu from the meaning “x-times” of the Hierogl.-Luwian and Lycian -su, perhaps a šap~
tamenzu was a vessel made up of seven parts (a septaplex vessel). This works well with Laroche’s original translation of 8-inzu, “octuplex, octad” (JCS 1:205, followed by Friedrich, HW 303 (“achtfach?”), Kro-
nasser, EHS 1:363). Again, however, the lack of a DUG weakens the argument. Perhaps then it was not the vessel holding the wine that is septaplex, but rather the number of offerings to be made, “nine sevenfold (offerings).”
Neumann, GsGüntert (1973) 279 (Šaptamaniga = “siebente Schwester”); Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 50 (ein Hohlmaß); Keller-man, Diss. (1980) 54 (“sept fois”); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 288 n. 14; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 45; not mentioned in Eichner, IE Numerals (1992) 83-85 (8-in-zu declared “not clear” on p. 86).
Cf. šiptamai-, šiptami-; 7; 8-inzu.
šappu- n.; (body part of certain animals); from OH/NS.†
sg. loc. or nom.-acc.? ša-ap-pu-i KUB 55.35 obv. 7 (NS).
inst. ša-ap-pu-it KUB 43.60 i 18 (OH/NS), KUB 60.75:6.
a. body part of a billy goat: MÁŠ.GAL-š–an ša-ap-pu-it walhdu UDU-ušš–an SI.HI.A anda walhdu “Let the billy goat hit him/it (i.e., an animal(?) mentioned as […-i]tšepa in i 5) with (its) š.; let the sheep hit him/it (with its) horns. (Let the mother sheep hit him/it with her tittita-)” KUB 43.60 i 18-19 (myth.?, OH/NS), ed. Poetto, °∑Î√ 1:117f. (“zoccolo”), Hawkins/Morpurgo Davies, FsGüterbock2 72 (no tr. of š., but reading UDU.NITA-ša-an for UDU-ušš–an, while noting that one would expect UDU.NÍTA-ša-an).
b. body part of a harziyalla- “salamander(?)/lizard(?)/snail(?)”: BIL.ZA.ZA–at iššit (dupl. ≠KA≈U±-za) [(dāi)…] katta pašzi har[(ziyallašš–at)] ša-ap-pu-it […] § ≠n–at±–kan BI[(L.ZA.ZA hallūwaš) … Í(D–at aruni pedai)] “The frog takes it with its mouth […] and swallows [it] down. The harziyalla-animal […-s] it with (its) šappu- § The frog […-s] it to the deep […]-s. The river carries it to the sea” KUB 60.75:4-8 (ritual), w. dupl. KBo 13.131 obv. 15-18, ed. StBoT 14:72f. | for harziyalla- see Friedrich HW 61 (“Eidechse”), Watkins, Kerns Mem. 345-48 followed by Puhvel, HED 3:209 (“snail”), and Siegelová, StBoT 14:41, 59 followed by Collins, Diss. 265-268 (“salamander”), Miller, JCS 54:87-89 (“gecko, salamander”).
c. part of an unknown animal or object: (In a list of materials subsequently used by the exorcist in a ritual:) lakarwan GIŠhatramiel […] / GIŠPÈŠ MUN GIŠHAŠHUR NA›ZÚ panku[r…] / ANŠE-aš (or: GÌR-aš) ša-ap-pu-i tepu lipš[anza] / 1-EN TÚG-TUM 1-ENN¨TUM KUŠNÍG.BÀ[R …] “la~ 
karwan, hatramiel, […], figs, salt, apples, flint(?), panku[r], (a model of?) a donkey (or: foot) a little bit scratched on the šappu-, one garment, one set of curtains” KUB 55.35 obv. 5-8 (ritual, NS), ed. Poetto, °∑Î√ 1:120 | we read ANŠE-aš instead of GÌR-aš since as a piece of equipment grouped with foodstuffs and garments to be used in a ritual a disembodied “foot” seems unlikely, whereas a real donkey or an image of one might well have been used.
Weitenberg, U-Stämme 171, reads šappu in the following passage and reasons from it that the word must be a u-stem neuter. We prefer to read the crucial word as an Akkadogram zappu(m) “tuft of hair, bristle”: [… (GA)]B–ŠU warhūÏš parā–ma SI.HI.A warhuiš [ZA?]-AP-PU-UM-ši-it (var. [Z]A?-AP-PU-ši-it) warhuiš “Its (scil. a wether’s) breast is shaggy. Further (its) horns are rough, its mane(?) is shaggy/rough” KUB 41.32 obv. 3-4 (incantation), w. dupl. KUB 41.33 obv. 5-6; cf. Weitenberg, U-Stämme 171. Our reading not only accounts for the -UM as mimation of the underlying Akk. word (Weitenberg proposes a possible n-stem neut. *šappun–šit > *šappum–šit citing gimzu and genzu), but also fits semantically the notion of warhui- “shaggy.” Since the reading [š]a-ap-pu-ši-it from the copy’s traces is not more convincing than [Z]A-AP-PU-ši-it, the passage therefore offers no certain evidence for the stem or meaning of šappu(i)-.
šappu- is not the normal word for an animal’s horn (SI = karawar). The meaning “hoof” proposed by Poetto is impossible since none of the various animals suggested for the harziyal(l)a- has hooves.  Its etymological connection with the verb šapp- “to slap, hit” or with šappai- “to peel, trim, scrape” is also doubtful.
Poetto, °∑Î√ 1 (1979) 117-121 (“zoccolo” [hoof], hierogl. Luw. kiput(a)- > šapp- “colpire, battere” + u, thus “l'organo per colpire,” “il batente”); Watkins, Kerns Mem. (1981) 346 (“kind of spikey horns”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 152 (“ein Körperteil,” “zu šapp- ‘schlagen’ sehr fraglich”), 171f.; Miller, JCS 54 (2002) 88; Francia, Or NS 73 (2004) 402 (“zampa” = paw, claw).
šapuhita n.; (a feature of the exta; prob. a Hurr. word); NH.†
IGI-zi TE.MEŠ n[i. …] / ši. ša-pu-hi-ta […] / zi. GAR-ri 12 ŠÀD[IR. … § “The first exta: the nipa~
[šuri …] the šintahi, š. […] the zizahi is placed. Twelve coils of the intestine […]” § KBo 22.264 ii 3-5 (oracle, NH), ed. Heinhold-Krahmer, AfO 35:102 (“Bedeutung unklar”); […]x ša-pu-hi-ta kiruhita ki. EGIR ki. […] KBo 24.126 obv. 35.
Wilhelm (pers. comm.) notes that the word can go back to either an adj. in -he/i- from a root šab- or a noun in -i from the same root with an extension -ūh- (šab–ūh–i; cf. šab–ūh–ātt(a)–ān “?” Mittani Letter i 95).
TU‡šapukki- see TU‡ša(m/n)pukki-.
(GIŠ)šarā- A n.; (a wooden object); NS.† 
GIŠša-ra-a-a-aš KUB 58.100 ii? 9, ša-r[a-…] KUB 42.45:10.
In an enumeration of materials: (“One small (i.e., miniature?) chariot, two mad[nanu-wagons, one …], one small (i.e., miniature?) wagon, two small (i.e., miniature?) beds … […]”) 2 GIŠ≠GA.ZUM± ŠA GIŠTAŠKARIN 2 GIŠša-ra-a-a-aš (var. ša-r[a-…])[…] “Two combs of boxwood, two š.” KUB 58.100 ii? 9 (rit., NS), w. dupl./par. KUB 42.45:10, ed. THeth 10:181f. (only KUB 42.45 and reading “ša-k[u-”).
Despite the fact that GIŠšarā- and GIŠšarra- (q.v.) occur in lists following combs, the writing of one with a single r and the other with a double, and the writing of this with a double plene a and the other without plene, make it seem likely that there are two separate words.
Cf. (GIŠ)šarra- A.
šarā B preverb, postposition, local adverb; 1. up, upwards, 2. above, upon, over, on top, 3. (idiomatically) available, at hand, at one’s disposal, stand ready, 4. (idiomatically, indicating completeness); wr. syll. and UGU; from OS.
Almost always written ša-ra-a, for example — OS from rituals and festivals listed in StBoT 26:158; KBo 22.2 obv. 5 (Zalpa tale, OS), KBo 7.28:40 (OH/MS), KUB 1.16 ii 34, 36, iii 35, 47, 51 (Political Testament, Hatt. I/NS), KBo 3.34 i 7, 13 (anecdotes, OH/NS), in HKM 24:15 (Ma®at letter, MH/MS) and passim see glossary in HBM 399, KUB 31.88 iii 8 (MH/MS), KUB 19.20 obv. 10 (Šupp. I), KUB 14.4 iii 5 (Murš. II), KUB 6.45 i 9 (Muw. II), KUB 31.66 ii 6 (Murš. III?), KUB 1.1 i 17 (Hatt. III), Bronze Tablet ii 8 (Tudh. IV), wr. UGU KUB 21.17 i 10 (Hatt. III), KUB 5.1 i 24, 32, 46 (Hatt. III?), KBo 4.14 iii 39, 40, KUB 26.1 iii 39 (Tudh. IV), KUB 26.32 i 3, 16 (Šupp. II).
Written “short” (ša-ra-) in ša-ra!-ma[(-wa)] KUB 60.113:5, w. dupl. ša-ra-a-ma-wa KUB 29.1 iv 14; kat-ta!(text ša)-ša-ra-(at-kan) KBo 21.22:37; ša-ra-am-mu for šarā–mu KUB 31.4 obv. 7, w. var. ša-ra-a-mu KBo 12.22 i 10.
šarā written as UGU: UGU does not occur in OS. In MH/MS it is used only for šarazzi in KUR.UGU. In NH it is used for both šarā and šer.
(Akk.) u É SIGﬁ?.[HI.A] umtalli = (Hitt.) nu É-er–mit āššawÏt ša-ra-a šunnahhun “I filled up my house with goods” Akk.: KBo 10.1 obv. 10, ed. Saporetti, SCO 14:77, 80, Hitt.: KBo 10.2 i 20-21 (ann. of Hatt. I, NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:44f., StMed. 12:36f.; (Akk.) [li-te-el-l]i (< elû) KUB 1.16 i 33 = (Hitt.) ša-ra-a ú-≠iš-ki±-[i]t-ta-ru ibid. ii 34, cf. HAB 64.
(Hurr.) [i]š?piyadi–l āšhū–i alË–ū–b hawurūnni = (Hitt.) […-]ulludduš–ma ša-ra-a nepiši maninkuwahhaš “and he made the […-]ulludduš reach up to heaven” KBo 32.14 rev. 36 (Hurr.) = rev. 42 (Hitt., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:88f. For Hurr. ašhu- (= Hitt. šarā) as a noun “upper side, top” (with possessive –i) see Neu, StBoT 32:186-188.
1. up, upwards — a. prev. 1' š. allapahh- and -kan “to spit up”: KA[≈U]–kan parā allapahhaš K[A]≈U-[alli …] anda immiyan dKumarbiš–kan kuit ša-ra-a al[lapahhaš] “Out of his mouth he spat spittle [and semen?] mixed together; that which Kumarbi s[pat] up, (…)” KUB 33.120 i 39-40 (Song of Kumarbi, MH/NS), ed. Kum. *3, 7, Hittite Myths2 43, LMI 130. 
2' š. ar- act. “to come up to, arrive up at”: māhhan–x[…] ša-ra-a ārti KUB 23.77:66 (treaty w. Kaška, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 121; [nu k]uedani ANA TÚL SÍSKUR Ëšzi n–at šipanzakandu [ša-r]a-a–at–kan ārškandu kuedani–ma [AN]A TÚL SÍSKUR NU.GÁL n–at–kan ša-ra-a imma ārškandu “Let them keep libating to and let them keep coming [u]p to [w]hatever spring has a ritual. Let them even keep coming up to whatever spring doesn’t have a ritual; (let them not leave it without cultic celebrations)” KUB 40.56 iii! 7-9 + KUB 31.88 iii 6-8 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 13.2 iii 4-7 (MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:144-147 (“e la si visiti”), Dienstanw. 47 (“soll man erst recht häufig aufsuchen”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:224 (“they must definitely attend to”) | note that the dupl. KUB 13.2 iii 4-5 has a different wording leaving out the šarā in line 5: n–at–ši Ëššandu arškandu “They must celebrate it for it (i.e., the spring) (and) keep coming (to it)” while retaining it in lines 6-7: n–at–kan ša-ra-a imma arškandu; GIM-an–ma–at É hilamni ša-ra-a aranzi “when they arrive up at the gate structure” VS 28.5 i 10 (fest., LNS); cf. in frag. context [… š]a-ra-a ari KBo 25.184 iii 12 (rit., NS); the prev. šarā w. v. ar- “arrive” is quite rare. It is more common with the -nu-causative šarā arnu- (see below).
3' š. arai- “to stand up, arise”: n–aš–kan GIŠŠÚ.A-az (var. ˜) ša-ra-a (var. UGU) [(hūdak araiš)] “He arose immediately from (his) chair” KUB 33.96 i 12 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.98:10a, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146f., tr. Hittite Myths2 57, LMI 151; cf. KUB 33.106 ii 28; cf. also [n]–aš ša-ra-a hūdak arāiš KUB 33.106 ii 2 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f.; cf. also KUB 12.65 iii 10 (Hedammu, NH) and KUB 36.24 ii 5; n–at UGU nūman arianzi iyannianz[i] “They do not want to rise and be on their way” KUB 56.17 obv. 16 (dream report, NH), ed. Klengel, FsPugliese Carratelli (differently), cf. s.v. nūman; since the simplex arai- already means “to arise,” its combination with šarā is rare. Its use in the Kumarbi cycle may be due to the formal and formulaic nature of Hurr. poetry. This construction takes -kan w. abl., but when no local expression is present it takes no local particle.
4' š. ark- mid. “to climb up”: (“The lion used to lie down under you [i.e., trees]; the leopard used to lie down under you”) hartaggaš–ma–šma[š] ša-ra-a arkiškitta “and the bear was climbing up you” KUB 29.1 i 29-30 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 26, Marazzi, VO 5:150f., Collins, Diss. 51; since ark- mid. itself construed with an acc. means “to climb (something)” (KUB 55.28 + Bo 7740 iii 4, 7, ed. Ünal, JCS 40:99, 101, discussion 106), the use of the prev. šarā is rare with it.
5' š. arnu- — a' (literally) “to bring up(wards)”: (Pišeni reports to the king that people are saying:) mahhan L[Ú.MEŠ U]RUGašg[a uwan]zi nu–wa–k[an par]ā EG[IR-anda pai]wani nu–w[ar–a]t ša-ra-[a arn]u[m]eni “As soon as the Kaška come, we will go after (them) and bring them up” HKM 24:8-10 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 158f.; (Make the two captives secure hand and foot and place them on horses, and let troops accompany them) n–aš–kan URUGašipūraz ša-ra-a SIGﬁ-in arnut “bring them up from Kašipura safely” HKM 65:11-12 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 244f.; [GIM-]an–ma–aš–kan URUHattuši / [š]a-ra-a arnuwanzi “When they bring them up to Hattuša” VS 28.42:6-7 (NS); uni–ma marruwašhan ša-r[a-a] URUAlašiyaz a[rnuan]zi “But [t]hey b[ring] that mar~
ruwašha- up from Alašiya (i.e., Cyprus)” KUB 44.63 iii 3 + KUB 8.38 iii 11 (med., NH), ed. StBoT 19:30 (without rest.).
b' (figuratively) “to bring up from sleep” > “to wake (someone) up”: nu–kan dU URUNerik / [ša]nizziyaz tešhaz ša-ra-a / [a]rnuddu “Let him wake up the Stormgod of Nerik from sweet dreams” KUB 36.90:5-7 (prayer, Tudh. IV), ed. KN 176f., Lebrun, Hymnes 364f., 369.
6' š. aruwai- “to bow, pay homage upward”: LUGAL-uš ša-ra-a aruwāizzi “the king pays homage upwards” KBo 17.75 i 37 (festival, OH/NS); LUGAL-uš 4 irhāizzi dUTU dU dMezzula dHulla § LUGAL-uš ša-ra-a UŠKE^N “The king worships four deities in sequence: Sungod, Stormgod, Mezzulla and Hulla; the king pays homage upward” KUB 11.26 ii 14-17 (festival fragment, OH/NS); this was probably some gesture or movement upwards which showed adoration, cf. Otten, ZA 53:177 (“erweist durch Handerheben … seine Reverenz”), HW2 A 359a (“‘sich nach oben verneigen’ d.h. indem er nach oben blickt”).
7' š. ašeš- and ašešanu- “to set upright”: (They will do thus: They will dispel the living Šaušgatti’s complaint against a dead woman before the [royal] deities) GIDIM–ya ša-ra-a ašešanuwanzi “they will also set (the image of) the deceased upright, (and they will take compensation and give it to the dead woman)” KBo 2.6 iii 44-45 (oracle question, NH), ed. Moore, JNES 40:50f. (“raise up”), van den Hout, Purity 210f.; cf. ibid. 61; cf. in broken context KUB 8.27 rev. 5, KUB 16.77 iii 10, 38; Puhvel, HED 1:210, notes the KBo 2.6 exx. and translates “they make the dead person lie in state”(?), although there is no suggestion in the context that she needed such a physical step, nor why šarā would be appropriate to such an idea; cf. nu ANA dIM Manuzi ša-ra-a ašešuwaš SISKUR šipandanzi “and they perform for the Stormgod of Manuzi the ritual of setting up” KBo 15.37 i 10-11 (hišuwaš-fest.), ed. van den Hout, Purity 236; nu 2 NINDAzipinni n–uš ŠA dIM dHebat–ya ša-ra-a ašešanzi “(They take) two sets of zipinni-breads, and set them up as (offerings) of Teššub and Hebat” KBo 5.1 ii 16-17 (rit., NS), ed. Pap. 6*f. (“holen sie hoch”) | contrast the zinnipi- and nahhiti-breads which “lie” (kitta, kianta) in the next clauses. 
8' š. au(š)- “to look up at, experience above” (w. and without -za): nu–za–[(kan dGILGAMEŠ-uš)] dUTU ŠAMÊ [(x) … (x-an š)]a-ra-a aušta “Gilgameš looked up at the Sun (lit. the Sungod of the Sky) [from the] f[orest(?)]” KBo 10.47c:28-29 + KBo 10.47h:4-5 (Gilg., NS), w. dupls. KUB 36.73:10-11, KUB 8.53 iv! 3, HT 10:14-15, translit. Myth. 128, tr. Beckman, in Foster, Gilg. 161; n–at SIGﬁ-in [i]ya nu–ddu[–za tuel ŠA DINGIR-LIM] / [DINGIR-LIM-]tar ša-ra-a aušdu [ …] “[M]ake it right. May he experience your [div]inity above, [O goddess]” KUB 7.8 ii 22-23 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:274, 278 (“experience (lit. look up at)”); [LÚ.MEŠMUŠE]N.DÙ–ma–kan ÍD-az ša-ra-a uškanzi ”The augurs look up from (or: in the direction of) the river” KUB 49.3 ii 6 (rit., NS); cf. KUB 31.101:33-34 | for the use of -za see Hoffner, JAOS 93:524.
9' š. ehu “come up!, get up!”: (IŠTAR calls out to the drunken and sleeping Hedammu) ša-ra-a–kan namma e[hu] “G[et] up at last!” KUB 33.84 iv 9 (Hedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:60f. iv 11 (“K[omm] wieder herauf!”); cf. KUB 33.122 ii 5 (Hedammu, NS); cf. w. uwa-,  below, 1 a 54'.
10' š. epp- — a' “to hold up, expose”: nu ANA dUTU URUArinna GAŠAN–YA ŠU-an ša-ra-a Ëppun nu kiššan AQBI “I held up my hand to the Sungoddess of Arinna, my lady, and spoke as follows (followed by a short prayer for divine aid)” KBo 3.4 i 22-23, ed. AM 20f. (“erhob ich die Hand”); perhaps influenced by Akk. nÏš qāti (“hand raising” a kind of prayer); nu–wa ANA dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠAN–YA ŠU-an ša-ra-a Ëppun nu–mu dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠAN–YA warriššišta “I held up my hand to IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady, and IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady, helped me” KBo 6.29 ii 9-11 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 48f.; ŠU.MEŠ–ŠUNU–ya ša-ra-a appiškanzi palwÏškan~
zi–ya “They hold their hands up and continually cry out” KBo 10.23 iii 4-6 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:12; EGIR-ŠU–ma EN-LUM KÙ.BABBAR ŠA 3 GÍN ša-ra-a Ëpzi nu–ššan IŠTU NAMMATUM KÙ.BABBAR TUR ŠA 3 GÍN wātar lāhui “Afterwards, the lord holds up (a piece of) silver of three shekels weight, and over (it) he pours water from a small silver measuring cup of three shekels weight” KUB 29.7 rev. 61-62 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 125, 132; n–an–za–an–kan A-az išhuziya[š pe]di ša-ra-a Ëpta “(The goddess IŠTAR of Šamuha) held him up from the water at his beltline (lit. at the place of the belt)” KUB 31.20 iii 2-4 + KBo 16.36 iii 5-7 (hist., NH), ed. Alp, Belleten 41/164:644f.; dIŠTAR-i[š ANA MUŠHed(ammu IGI-anda)] / NÍ.TE.MEŠ nekumanta ša-ra-≠a± (var. pa-ra-a) [(Ëpta) …] “IŠTAR exposed (lit. held up, var. held out) her nude body [before the serpent Hed]ammu” KUB 33.86 ii 9-10 (Hedammu myth, NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.56 iii? 5-6, ed. StBoT 14:54f. (“emporhielt”), tr. Hittite Myths2 54 §12.2; GÚ UGU lË Ëpti karū kuwapi µPU.LUGAL-aš BA.ÚŠ zik–ma GÚ UGU IŒBAT “Do not hold up your neck (i.e., be willful)! Formerly, when PU.LUGAL died, you held up your neck” KBo 4.14 iii 39-40 (treaty, Tudh. IV(?)), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:46, tr. Meriggi, WZKM 58:87 | for the historical setting of this document see Singer, ZA 75:100-123; n–ašta DUGišnūr[eš k]ueaz (sic) IŠTU GAD DINGIR-LIM kariyanteš n–at P¸NI LÚEN É-TIM ša-ra-a appanzi nu DUGišnuruš aušzi “They hold up before the ‘owner of the house’ the linen cloth of the deity with which the kneading troughs had been covered; he looks at the kneading troughs ((to see) whether the leftovers have risen)” KBo 15.33 ii 32-34 (rit. for dU of Kuliwišna, MH/MS), ed. Glocker, Kuliwišna 66-69; LÚ GIŠBANŠUR tūwaz ša-ra-a Ëpzi “The waiter held (it, i.e., the kaluhit) up at a distance” KBo 30.54 i 8-9 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH/NS); LÚ GIŠBANŠUR-aš [KUŠk]alūh[at] / [tūwaz š]a-ra-a Ëpzi KBo 34.159 obv. 8-9 (fest., MS); ta LUGAL-waš LÚhinkulaš paizzi ta NINDA.GUR›.RA ša-ra-a Ëpzi t–an paršiya n–an–kan ANA(?) GIŠBANŠUR katta d[āi] “The hinkulaš-man of the king goes and holds up a thick bread, breaks it, and l[ays] it down on the table” KUB 2.7 ii 8-12 (fest. of haste, OH/NS), ed. Nakamura, Nuntarrijašha- 150f.; cf. ša-ra-a appātar KBo 15.25 obv. 11, 24 (MH/NS); UGU appatar KUB 24.5 obv. 5, 28 (NH), KUB 9.13:14 (NH); ŠA MUŠEN–ya–(var. + an–)za–kan memian p[(eran)] ša-ra-a lË Ëpti (var. Ëpši) “Do not take a bird oracle (about it) beforehand for yourself” or “Do not use a bird oracle as an excuse (lit. do not hold up the word of a bird in front of yourself)” KBo 4.3 + KBo 19.64 ii 13-14 (Kup., Murš. II), w. dupls. KBo 5.13 iii 18-19, KUB 6.41 iii 37, ed. SV 1:126f. (“hole(?) auch kein Vogelorakel ein(?)”), tr. DiplTexts2 78 (“You shall not first take a bird oracle about it”); cf. ŠA MUŠEN–ma–za–kan uttar peran š[a-ra-a] / [lË kuit]ki Ëpti KUB 21.1 ii 73-74 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:64f., tr. DiplTexts™ 89; [n–at] / peran ša-ra-a Ëpdu n–at [MAHAR dUTU-ŠI uppau] ” KUB 13.1 iv (8-)9 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/MS), ed. StMed 14:179f.:304 (“porti la cosa alla luce”), translit. Dienstanw. 62, StMed 14:277 iv 23-24.
b' “to claim(?)”: nu–šmaš–kan kui≠n± arkam~
man ša-ra-a Ëpmi n–an ANA dIŠTAR URUŠa[m]uha GAŠAN–YA pË harkanzi “Whatever tribute I claim(?) from them (i.e., from the sons to whom he gave conquered lands), they shall present it to IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady” KUB 23.127 iii 6-8 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. NBr 48f. (“ich … beanspruche”); cf. HW™ and HED s.v. epp- and cf. in a similar mng. without šarā Bronze Tablet ii 23-24, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f.
11' š. eš- mid. “to take a seat above, sit down above”: [nu Í]DAranzahaš TI°MUŠEN-aš GIM-an tar~
naš [n–a]š URUAggade andan pait [n]–aš–za KUŠ!NA!-DU (text: URUNu-u-a-du) DÙ-at n–aš–za–kan INA GIŠKUNﬁ ša-ra-a ešat “The Tigris River took flight like an eagle, and went into the city Aggade. It became a … and sat down above on a ladder/stair” KUB 17.9 i 14-17 (Gurparanzahu and the Tigris River, NH), tr. Landsberger/Güterbock, AfO 12:56 (“setzte sich oben auf das GIŠKUNﬁ ”). 
12' w. ed- “to eat up”: našma–kan ÉSAG.HI.A kuiški ša-ra-a adān harzi “or if someone has eaten up (the contents of) the storage pits” KUB 13.2 iv 18-19 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:182f. (“o (se) qualcuno ha prelevato cibo dai granai”), Dienstanw. 51 (“Ob … jemand Speicher aufgezehrt hat”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:225 (“or eaten (from) the granaries”); although both English (“eat up”) and German (“aufessen, aufzehren”) have idioms using “up” in a non-literal sense, the situation here is complicated by the fact that the ÉSAGs are literally underground; cf. Hoffner, AlHeth 34-37, and see now archaeologically Seeher, SMEA 42:261-301; cf. also šarā šannapilahh- also with ÉSAGs (below, 4 d). Furthermore, the usual Hittite equivalent of “eat up” = “eat completely” is arha ed-. 
13' š. halzai- “to call up(wards), shout up(wards)” (opp. kattanda): U DUMU dIM MUŠIllu~
yankaš katta nu ša-ra-a [n]epiši atti–šši halzāiš “And the son of the Stormgod was with the Serpent, and (the son of the Stormgod) called up to heaven, to his father” KBo 3.7 iii 25-28 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:16, 19, tr. LMI 53, Hittite Myths2 13; nu–ššan ša-ra-a n[(epi)šaš] / [(≠DINGIR±.MEŠ-n)]aš iyauwa halzāiš “He called iyawa up to the deities of heaven” KUB 39.104 iv 9-10 (rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 30.34 iv 31-32; d¸laš ša-ra-a halziyau[(waš ŠA Labarna)] “¸la of Labarna’s shouting up (i.e., the divine ¸la who assists the Labarna to invoke the gods? or “of the calling up of the Labarna”)” KUB 40.108 v 4 (fest. of all the patron deities), w. dupl. KUB 2.1 iv 8-9 (NH), ed. McMahon, AS 25:126f., cf. 110f. | there may be a relation with the funerary rite of KUB 39.49:20-25 (cf. van den Hout in Hidden Futures 45), for which compare also KUB 30.28 rev. 1-12, w. dupl. KBo 34.80:1-8, ed. HTR 96f.; cf. similar combinations in the neighboring entries parā hantantannaš (KUB 40.108 v 2) and šarā appannaš (KUB 2.1 iv 12); (cf. šarā w. kallišš- and mema- 1 a 23' and 30', below).
14' š. han- “to dip up, scoop up, ladle up”: […]x-az KAŠ.GEŠTIN ša-ra-a hāniš[kizzi] “S/he keeps dipping up ‘beer-wine’ from the […]” KUB 47.62:10 (rit., NS). 
15' š. handai-: (Because you, gatekeeper, did not see me carrying my spear down from the citadel) mān–wa[–ka]n ša-ra-a–ma kuiš antūwahhaš handāizzi nu–war–an kuwapi autti “But if some person …-s up, when/where would you see him?” IBoT 1.36 i 57 (instr. for palace guards, MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:180f. (“Wenn sich aber irgendein Mensch hin aufbegibt”), AS 24:10f. (“if some man should attempt to go up”); possibly active used for middle; for a different usage see HKM 24:53-56 in 3 c, below.
16' š. har(k)- “to hold up”: n–at LUGAL-i tapušza aranta nu ŠU.MEŠ-uš ša-ra-a harkanzi “They stand beside the king and hold up their hands” KBo 4.9 i 47-48 (ANDAHŠUM-fest. for Zababa, OH?/NS), ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:24f., de Martino, Danza 63f. 
17' š. huek- “to pronounce incantations upwards”: nu–šma<š>–šan ša-ra-a hukki<š>kanzi “They will pronounce incantations up into you (trees)” KUB 29.1 i 42 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 12, 26 (“on fera monter des incantations vers vous”), Marazzi, VO 5:150f. (“su di voi”). 
18' š. huittiya- “to pull up, draw up”: mahhan–ma ŠÀ.GAL–ŠUNU zinnanzi n–aš–kan ANA GIŠKAK ša-ra-a huittiËzzi “When (the horses) finish (eating) their fodder, he draws them (i.e., their heads) up to the (tethering) peg” KUB 1.13 i 11-12 (Kikkuli, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 54f.; nu SÍGarašan dāi n–an–šan ANA BE_L[U_]TIM IŠTU GÌR.MEŠ–ŠUNU kËz kËzzi–y≠a± ANA SAG.DU–ŠU<NU> ša-ra-a huittiyai “She takes a woolen band and draws it up over the lords on both sides from their feet to their head(s) (and back down their backs)” KUB 27.67 iii 19-21 (Ambazzi’s rit, MH/NS), cf. par. w. correct SÍGašaran and without šarā ibid. ii 15-17, tr. ANET 348; […] ša-ra-a huit~
tiyawar IŠTU LUGAL ien[zi] KBo 21.41 rev. 3-4 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 122, 129; ša-ra-a huittiyawar dupšahinn–a QA_TAMMA–pat [iËzzi] ibid. rev. 16 + KUB 29.7 rev. 7 (ritual of Šamuha, MH/MS); n–aš EGIR SISKUR ša-ra-a(-)huittiyawaš tiyazi n–ašta LÚSANGA DINGIR-LAM āpitaz ša-ra-a 7-ŠU huittiyazzi EN.SÍSKUR–ya–kan 7-ŠU ša-ra-a huittiyazzi “He (i.e., the patient) takes care of the ritual of pulling-up. The priest pulls the deity up from the pit seven times and the patient pulls (him) up seven times” KUB 29.4 ii 18-21 (rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 46:281 (“evoking upwards”), Schw.Gotth. 16f., tr. Collins, CoS 1:174; nu–za ANA P¸NI EN–YA kuit ša-ra-a huit~
tiyan harku[n] “Given the fact that I had pulled up myself before my lord” KUB 19.23 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:27f. 
19' š. iya- mid. “to go up”: (When you go to Hayaša, you must not take your brother’s women or your sister [sexually], that is not allowed) [(kË)]z–ma–kan INA É.GAL-LÌ–YA ša-ra-a iy[a]ttati (var. iyattari) “And (when) you travel from there (lit. here) up to my palace, (that matter is also not allowed)” KBo 5.3 + KUB 40.35 iii 61 (Huqq., Šupp. I), w. dupl. KBo 19.44 + KBo 22.40 rev. 46, ed. SV 2.128f. (without the join and dupls.), StBoT 5:66, tr. DiplTexts™ 32; [mān–at–k]an ANA URU.DIDLI.HI.A–KA ša-ra-a iyanta[ri] / [n–aš pa]hši n–aš išhaššarwahheški “[When] they (i.e., Hittite troops) go up into your cities, [ca]re for [them] and treat them courteously(?)” KBo 10.12 iii 8-9 (treaty with Aziru of Amurru, Šupp. I), ed. Freydank, MIO 7:363, 370, tr. DiplTexts2 39 (“[Because] they will go up to your cities”); cf. KBo 5.9 ii 31-32 (Dupp.); nu–kan LÚUKU.UŠ LÚQARTAPPU–ya ŠA LÚ.MEŠ URUKašga URU-ri ša-ra-a lË iyantari “Let no warrior or chariot driver of the Kaška go up to the city” KUB 21.29 ii 6-8 (decree relative to people of Tiliura, Hatt. III), ed. González Salazar, AuOr 12:161, 167, tr. Kaškäer 146; (“And however many days are ascertained for it”) n–aš–kan UGU DU-ri EGIR-pa–ia–aš–kan šešuanzi GAM DU-ri “He (i.e., His Majesty) will go up and he will go back down to sleep” KUB 5.1 i 61 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:42f., tr. Beal, Ktèma 24:44f.; cf. without -kan KUB 22.70 obv. 77, rev. 36 (oracle questions, NH); (I became afraid, and speech became small in my mouth) nu–mu–kan memiaš tepu kuitki ša-ra-a iyattat “my speech came up somewhat limited” KBo 4.2 iii 43-44 (Muršili II’s Speech Loss), ed. MSpr. 4f., Lebrun, Hethitica 6:104, 109 (obv. 4-5); for memiya- as subj. of another verb w. prev. šarā cf. [namma–kan mān IŠTU KUR URUHatti kuiški HUL-luš] memiaš ŠA BAL ša-ra-a / [išparzazi] KUB 21.1 ii 58(-59) (Alakš., Muw. II); cf. KBo 5.13 ii 26-27, ed. 1 a 21' c' (išpart-), below. 
20' š. iyannai- “to go up”: µAppuš [(I)]ŠME n–aš–za EGIR-pa parna–šša iyann[i]š dUTU-iš–ma–ššan ša-r[(a-a nep)]iši iyanni≠š± “Appu heard and went back to his house; but the Sungod went up (in)to heaven” KUB 24.8 ii 10-12 (Appu story, OH?/NS), w. dupls. KUB 36.59 i 8-9, KBo 26.84:1-2, ed. StBoT 14:8f., -šan mng. 2 e 7'; cf. KUB 24.7 iii 61-62; n–aš–k[(an x) … š]a-ra-a iyanneš n–aš dU-ni GAM-an iyanneš KBo 26.58 iv 42-43 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KBo 26.59:28-29, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f.; (w. awan šarā) nu–mu–kan GUD-i GIM-an huittiyauwanzi harpiyahhut dU-nili–ma–mu awan ša-ra-a iyanni “Team up with me as with an ox in order to pull (a wagon); go up alongside me in true Stormgod fashion” KUB 6.45 + KUB 30.14 iii 71-73 (Muw. II prayer to dU Pihaššašši), ed. Singer, MuwPr 24, 42 (“Ascend with me”), tr. ANET 398 (“walk by my side”) | although it has sometimes been claimed (cf. HED A, s.v.) that awan never occurs outside of a combination with a second preverb and merely strengthens the latter, in the present combination awan seems to relate to the dat. -mu “together with me” and the šarā to the verb; nu–kan dKumarb[i(š arunazza)] ša-ra-a iyanneš “Kumarbi came up out of the sea” KBo 26.79:8-9 (myth, NS), w. dupl. KBo 26.109:7, ed. StBoT 14:68f. (as 1313/u + 1378/u). 
21' š. išpart- “to emerge, arise, spring up” — a' subj. a human being: ≠m±ahhan–ma–kan ABA ABI–YA µŠ[uppiluliuma LUGAL.G]AL UR.SAG ša-ra-a išparzašta [nu–]za–kan ANA GIŠŠÚ.A LUGAL-UTTI eša[t …] “When my grandfather Š[uppiluliuma, Great K]ing, Hero, emerged (lit. arose, sprang up) [and] sa[t] on the seat of kingship” KBo 6.28 obv. 16-17 (edict of Hatt. III), cf. Hatt. 105; ša-ra-a–ma[–wa kui]š kuiš LUGAL-uš išparzazi “[What]ever king emerges” KUB 31.66 ii 6-7 (dep., NH); kuišš–a–kan ¬ziladuwa DUMU–ŠU DUMU.DUMU–ŠU ŠÀ.BAL.BAL [(¬)]ziladuwa ŠA µHattušili ƒPuduhepa ša-ra-a išparzazi n–aš–kan ŠÀ DINGIR.MEŠ ANA dIŠTAR URUŠamu[(ha)] nahhanza Ëšdu “Whatever son, grandson, or descendant of Hattušili (and) Puduhepa arises (comes to the throne) in the future, let him be especially reverent among the gods to IŠTAR of Šamuha” KUB 1.1 iv 86-89 (Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 3.6 + Bo 68/76 + Bo 68/85 iv 46-48 (StBoT 24 pl. II), KUB 1.3 iv 8-12, ed. StBoT 24:30f.
b' subj. a deity: dIŠTAR-iš […] ša-ra-a išpar~
zašta KUB 33.108 rt. col. 6-7 (myth frag., NS).
c' subj. an utterance: KUR-TUM–ya–šši kuit hūman n–at–ši hūman–pat kuit hantezziuš auriuš nu–kan mān AWAT NA_RA_RI kuwapi ša-ra-a išpar~
zazi “Concerning the fact that the entire land belongs to him and that as a whole it forms his front line of border posts — if now a call for help arises from somewhere” Bronze Tablet iii 43-45, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:22f., tr. Hoffner in CoS 2:105; namma–kan mān IŠTU KUR URUHatti kuiški idaluš memiyaš ŠA BAL ša-ra-a išparzazi “If then from the land of Hatti some evil word of rebellion springs up” KBo 5.13 ii 26-27 (Treaty with Kupanta-dLAMMA, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:124f., tr. DiplTexts™ 77; cf. [n]ašma INIM BAL UGU išparzazi KBo 7.20 ii 6 (treaty frag., NH); cf. w. AWAT LÚ.KÚR KBo 5.4 obv. 18, and KBo 4.7 iii 31-32 (both treaties, Murš. II) | for a similar usage of uttar w. š. watku- see below 1 a 60'.
d' other subj.: mān–ma–kan kËdaš UD.HI.A.KAM markištauwar UL kuitki UGU išparzai “If in these days unexpected events (lit. taking (someone) by surprise) will in no way arise” KBo 41.201 ii 3-5 (oracle question, NH).
22' š. Ït (sg.), š. Ïtten (pl.) “go up!”: (“If (a guard) steps (there) at random, then the gatekeeper will angrily say to him”) naššu–wa–kan ša-ra-a Ït našma–wa–kan katta–ma Ït “‘Either go up (to the acropolis) or else go down’” IBoT 1.36 i 49-50 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:10f.; […-]x ša-ra-a INA KUR.UGU Ït “Go up into the Upper Country […]” HKM 96 rev. 4 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 300f.; kinun–a–kan kËz KUR-eaz ša-ra-a Ïtten dU-aš–(š)maš LUGAL-i maniahta “But now, go up from this country, the Stormgod has handed you over to the king” KUB 29.1 i 39-40 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss 12, 26 (“Maintenant montez de ce pays!”), Marazzi VO 5:150f., tr. ANET 357, cf. maniyahh- 2, 3, pai- A; [n]u–šši peran ša-ra-a KASKAL-ši Ïtten “Go up before him on the road” KUB 23.77:18 (treaty w. Kaška, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 119 | the peran is postpos. governing the -ši, while the ša-ra-a is a preverb; cf. 1 a 33' (pai-), below.
23' š. kallišš- “to call up”: d≠In±araš–a–z unut~
tat n–ašta MUŠIlluyanka[n] hantešnaz ša-ra-a kal~
lišta “Inara dressed herself up and called the Serpent up out of the hole (in the ground)” KUB 17.5 i 4-6 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:13, 18, tr. LMI 51, Hittite Myths2 12; cf. šarā w. halzai- 1 a 13', above and mema- 1 a 30', below. 
24' š. karp- “to lift up”: nu mahhan kÏ hūman handānzi nu GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A ša-ra-a karpanzi n–at–kan KÁ.GAL-TIM ŠA URUTawiniya katta pËdanzi “And when they arrange all this, they lift up tables and carry them down to the Tawiniya Gate” KUB 15.31 i 12-14 (evocation rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:150f., cf. scenes on the ∫nandık vase, T.Özgüç, TTKYayın V/43:94-95, Fig. 64 nos. 28, 29; nu DINGIR-LUM ša-ra-a karpanzi n–an INA É DINGIR-LIM arha pedanzi “They lift up (the statue of) the deity and carry it home to the temple (from the huwaši stone, where it had been entertained)” KUB 17.35 iii 15-16 (cult inv., NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 130, 143. 
25' š. kašdupai- “to spoon/ladle? up”: namma–kan LÀL Ì.GIŠ–ya ša-ra-a kašdupaizzi n–at–šan huprušhiya peššiyazzi “Next s/he spoons/ladles(?) up honey and vegetable oil and drops them on/in the huprušhi” KUB 15.42 iii 9-11 (rit., MH/NS); cf. KBo 23.46 rev. 9; […] šer papparšzi šer–a–š[šan …] / [… š]a-ra-a kašdupanda šer […] “He/she sprinkles […] on top; and on top [he/she …-s …] The things which had been kašdupai-ed (spooned/ladled?) up [he/she …-s] on top” KBo 12.122:8-9 (rit. frag., NS). 
26' š. lahhiyai- “to go up (against someone) on a campaign”: mānn–a–šši LUGAL KUR URUHatti ša-ra-a lahhiyaizzi “And if the king of Hatti goes up against him on a campaign” Bronze Tablet i 62 (no parallel to this line in KBo 4.10), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:12f. (“gegen die(se) hinauf zu Felde zieht”); this passage should be added to CHD lahhiyai- (p. 9) as a unique ex. w. prev. šarā.
27' š. leššai- “to gather up(wards)”: (He digs) EGIR-ŠU–ma–za GIŠšatta GIŠMAR GIŠhūpparann–a dāi nu–kan ša-ra-a lÏšaizzi “Afterwards he takes a šatta, a spade and a huppara-vessel, and he gathers up (the loose soil, stones, etc. from the holes)” KUB 15.31 ii 13-15 (evocation rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:156f., cf. leššai- b. 
28' š. lukke- “to ignite”: [… š]a-ra-a lukit Bo 6405 ii 8 (rit. of Allaiturahi), translit. ChS 1/5:172, Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:292 | an idiomatic usage (see below 4) for š. lukke- “to burn up” is possible as well.
29' š. manninkuwahh- “to make reach up to”: see KBo 32.14 rev. 42 (myth, MH/MS) in bil. sec. above.
30' š. mema- “to speak up(wards)” (opp. of kattanda); cf. šarā w. halzai- (1 a 13') and kallišš- (1 a 23') above: (In a funerary ritual:) nu–kan šuh[h]az kattanda 6-ŠU memai ša-ra-a–kan 6-ŠU mem[ai] “(one) speaks six times down from a roof, and (another) speaks (back) up (to him) six times” KUB 30.28 rev. 8-9 (rit. for Hamrišhara, pre-NS), ed. HTR 96f.; cf. w. kattan šarā, 1 c 4' b', below. 
31' š. nai- “to turn upward”: pattar–ma IGI.HI.A-wa ša-ra-a nāi “But the basket she turns holes (lit. eyes) upward” KUB 9.6 i 3-4 (rit., MH/NS), translit. Otten, LTU 37, see nai- 1 a 8', 2 b 3', and cf. 1 b; for turning the horn of the moon upward to heaven KUB 29.11 ii 9 see nai- 2 c 2'; for KBo 30.61 rev.? 3-4 (fest. frag.) see š. šakniya- 1 a 42'. For a different usage see 2 m, below.
32' š. ninink- “to get moving up(wards)”: obj. workers, cattle, sheep and equids: [(n–a)t–kan URU-ri] ša-ra-a nininkan[du] “Let them move the[m] up [into the city]” KUB 13.1 i (21-)22 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 40.57 i 6, ed. StMed. 14:76f., THeth 20:255 n. 966, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:222, cf. ninink- 2 a 2'.
33' š. pai- “to go up”: nu INA URUZippašna pāun nu–kan URUZippašnan GEﬂ-az–pat ša-ra-a pāun “I went to Zippašna and I went up Zippašna that same night” KBo 10.2 ii 48-50 (annals, Hatt. I/NS), ed. StMed 12:62f., Imparati, SCO 14:50f. (Akk. verb — probably a form of elû — is in lacuna in KBo 10.1 obv. 47-48); mān LÚUB¸RUM–ma kuedani uizzi [(n–aš mān) INA] É.DINGIR-LIM ša-ra-a pāuwaš “If a foreigner comes to someone, and if he is entitled to go up t[o] the temple (lit. he is one of going up)” KUB 13.5 ii 11-12 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.63 i 17, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 34f.; nu–kan INA 
HUR.SAGA[rinn]≠anda± GÌR-it ša-ra-a pāun “I went up onto Mt. Arinnanda on foot” KUB 14.16 iii 13-14, ed. AM 54f. iii 44; man–kan HUR.SAGTehšinan ša[-ra-a] pāun “I would have gone u[p] Mt. Tehšina” KUB 19.37 iii 49, ed. AM 176f.; cf. also ibid. iii 52-53, ed. AM 178f.; nu–kan LUGAL-uš šuhhi ša-ra-a paizzi “The king goes up to the roof” KUB 6.45 i 9 (prayer to Teššub of Kummanni, Muw. II), ed. Singer, MuwPr 7, 31; (When Anu finished speaking) n–aš–šan ša-ra-a AN-ši p[ait] “he fl[ew] (lit. went) up to heaven” KUB 33.120 i 37 (Song of Kumarbi, NH), ed. Kum. *3, 7, tr. Hittite Myths2 43, LMI 130; LUGAL-uš–šan / [halm]aššuitti ša-ra-a paizzi “The king goes up onto the throne dais” VS 28.10 i 8-9; cf. pai- A 1 e 4'-5', j 25'-26'; cf. also 1 a 22'. 
34' š. paddai- “to dig up”: daganzipušš–a ša-ra-a paddānz[i] “They dig up the dirt floors (lit. grounds)” KBo 24.93 iii 19 (fest. frag., NS), ed. padda- A 1 a, THeth 12:31f.; taknaz–kan kuit ša-ra-a padd[ait n–at–kan ābiya anda] peššiškizzi nu kiššan mema≠i± “What she [has] dug up from the earth, she throws [into the pit] and says as follows”: KUB 17.27 ii 6-7 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347 (differently); […] / ša-ra-a paddāi KUB 59.59 iii 8-9 (rit. frag.).
35' š. pË har- “to deliver up into”: IŠTU NINDA KAŠ.GEŠTIN INA É.DINGIR-LIM hūman ša-ra-a pË harten “Deliver everything up into the temple including the bread (and) beer(-)wine” KUB 13.4 i 60 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f. (“Of the bread, beer, (and) wine carry everything up into the temple”), AlHeth 218 (“keep everything in readiness up in the temple”), Süel, Direktif Metni 32f. (“tapınakta … sununuz”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218 (“keep all … up in the temple”).
36' š. pehute- “to lead up”: µDUMU-MAH.LÍL!-in pararahhiš ša[-ra]-≠a± URU-ya pËhute[t] “He chased DUMU-MAH.LÍL (and) led (him) up to the city” KBo 3.60 ii 9-10 (cannibal tale, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:106f., Soysal, VO 7:118 n. 38, cf. para~
rahh-; nu–kan LÚ.MEŠ IGI.NU.GÁL.HI.A hūmanteš URUŠapinuwa ša-ra-a pËhuter “They led all the blind men up to Šapinuwa” HKM 58:6-7 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 230f.; cf. HKM 24:50, ed. HBM 158-63; B´LI–NI–wa–nnaš lË harnikti nu–wa–nnaš–za B[(´LI)]–NI ÌR-anni dā nu–wa–nnaš–kan URUHattuši ša-ra-a pËhute “Our lord, do not destroy us! Take us, our lord, into your service and lead us up to Hattuša” KUB 14.16 iii 17-18 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 14.15 iii 47-48, ed. AM 56f.; cf. KBo 5.4 rev. 51 (Targ.).
37' š. penna- “to drive up”: [nu–za m]ahhan ABU–YA wa[lh]uwar aušzi [nu–kan INA] URUTu~
wanuwa ša-r[a]-a pennai “[And w]hen my father saw the a[tt]ack, he drove up [to] the city Tuwanuwa (hist. pres.)” KBo 14.3 iv 39-40 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:77; aši–ma HUR.SA[GAri]nnandaš mekki nakkiš … namma–aš me≠k±ki parkuš warhuišš–aš nam~
ma–aš NA›pËrunanz[(a nu–kan I)]ŠTU ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ ša-ra-a pennumanzi UL kišat (var. DÙ-ri) “That Mt. Arinnanda is very steep … furthermore, it is very high, it is densely forested, and furthermore it is rocky. Driving up with chariots (lit. horses) was impossible” KUB 14.16 iii 7-10, w. dupl. KUB 14.15 iii 39-41, ed. AM 54f.; nu–kan IŠTU [(ANŠE.KUR.R)]A.MEŠ kuit ša-ra-a pennumanzi UL kišat KUB 14.16 iii 11-12, w. dupl. KUB 14.15 iii 42-43, ed. AM 54f.; [dUT]U 
BE_L–YA kÏ GIŠ-ru mahhan waš[ān] / [n–at mahh]an ša-ra-a GIŠtarša penniyan har[zi] “[O Su]ngod, my lord, just as this tree is cover[ed and ju]st as [it] has driven up shoots(?)” KUB 12.58 iv 17-18 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 22f. 
38' š. pippa- “to turn over (upon/on top of)”: [… š]aštan ša-ra-a pippanzi “They turn over the bedding” KBo 24.26 overrun from the obv. written between iii 18 and 19 (festival fragment, MS); nu–d!du–ššan idalu~
watar kuiš ša-ra-a pippaš “Who turned evil over upon you, (now I will draw it away from you and throw it away, I will throw it (back) upon the man who caused the sorcery)” KUB 24.14 i 25 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:145 n. 23; (“The cook takes up plain stew (TU‡ pittalwan) from the pot and places it in front of the priest”) n–ašta UZUÌ ša-ra-a pippai n–at–šan katta ANA DUGDÍLIM.GAL MUŠEN hand[aizzi] “He turns animal fat over (on top of the stew) and arrang[es] it (i.e., the stew, with the fat on top) down on a bowl (in the shape of) a bird. § (Temple personnel are standing there; they eat before the god; but no one else eats)” KBo 23.67 iii 8-9 (Hurr. rit., NS); cf. KBo 23.23 obv. 26 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:206f. (“stülpt sie [hoc]h”); for the idiom (TÚG)šeknun šarā pippa- (a gesture with legal implications) see pippa- 2, šeknu- j and Prechel, FsPopko 281. 
39' š. peda- “to carry up”: (The guards give the spears which they are holding to the šalašha-man of the chair; when the light cart returns home, the šalašha-man gives the spears to the gatekeeper) n–at–kan Éhilamni ša-ra-a pËdai “and he carries them up to the portico” IBoT 1.36 iii 62 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:30f.; n–at išpantaz ša-ra-a šuhha pËdai “At night he carries them (sc. a spindle whorl and the stem of a reed) up to the roof” KUB 7.1 ii 18-19 (Wattiti’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:149, 151; dninattanniuš–ma–kan TUR.TUR-TIM GIŠ-rui ša-ra-a pËdanzi “But the small breads (in the shape) of Ninatta (and Kulitta) they carry up to the woods/tree” KUB 10.63 vi 5-6 (winter fest. for IŠTAR of Nineveh, MH?/NS), ed. dninattanni- a; cf. peda- B 1 a 1' b' 21''.
40' š. pittenu- “to whisk (something) up and away”: [… LÚ.M]EŠKISAL.LUH ša-ra-a pitten[u-…] KUB 16.6:9 (oracle question, NH).
41' š. šai-/šiye/a- — a' “to thrust/send up branches”: GIŠGEŠTIN–wa mahhan katta šūrkuš ša-ra-a–ma–wa GIŠmahluš šÏyaizzi LUGAL-š–a MUNUS.LUGAL-š–a katta šurkuš katta–ma (dupl. ša-ra-a[–ma]) GIŠmahluš šÏyandu “Just as the grapevine sends down roots and sends up shoots/branches, so may the king and queen send down roots and send down (var. better: up) shoots/branches” KUB 29.1 iv 13-16 (foundation rit., OH/NS), w. dupl. Bo 3612 iv 1, ed. Kellerman, Diss. 19, 31, Marazzi, VO 5:160f., cf. (GIŠ)mahla- b, šāi- B 6.
b' “to put headgear up on”: (“A palace servant gives garlands of anu-plant to the chief of the palace servants”) n–at LUGAL-i MUNUS.LUGAL–ya ša-ra-a ANA DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL–ya–ššan šiyanzi “and they put them up on (the heads of) the king, the queen, and on the royal princes” KUB 2.3 ii 48-50 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:65, cf. StBoT 27:79.
42' š. šakniya- “to anoint upwards(?)”: […] / ša-ra-a Ì-anzi […] KBo 30.61 rev.? 3-4 (fest. frag., MS), translit. DBH 2:86; cf. šakniya- b; or is this ni-an-zi from nai-, so Wegner, ChS I/3-1:145 (only translit.)?, cf. 1 a 31', above. 
43' š. šakuwai-/šakuwaya- “to look up(wards)”: (“O Sungoddess of the Earth, we keep taking this ma[tter … ]”) kÏ É-er kuwat tuhhaitt[a…] ša-ra-a nepiši kuwat šakueškiz[zi] “Why does this house gasp? Why does it(?) continually look up to heaven (for help?)?” KUB 7.41 obv. 10-11 (rit., MH/MS or early NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f., šakuwai- C 2 a. 
44' š. šakuniya- “to well/bubble up”: zik–kan mahhan šaku<n>iš GEﬂ-az KI-az purut EGIR ša-ra-a šakunieškiši “As you, O spring, keep welling up mud back from the Dark Earth, (in the same way remove evil uncleanness from the limbs of this person, the patient)” KUB 12.58 i 12-13 (Tunnawi’s rit, NH), ed. Tunn. 6-9 i 36-37, for further context see mudai- 2 and šak(k)uni- A/šakuniya- A.
45' š. šalai-, šaliya- “to drag up”: (The bear-men go to the pond) n–ašta UDU.HI.A-uš luliyaz [š]a-ra-a šaliyanzi “and drag the sheep up from the pond” KUB 58.14 rev. left col. 23-24 (OH/NS); cf. šallannai-/šalai- C/šaliya- d.
46' š. šunna- “to fill up”: (“[He] picks [up] a silver libation vessel and libates three times before the šura-s and three times before the stones §”) UGULA LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR kaluhit (var. kaluhat) ša-ra-a šunnai LÚGUDU⁄¤ QA_TAMMA šipanti LÚ GIŠBANŠUR kaluhat ša-ra-a šunnai LÚGUDU⁄¤ QA_TAMMA šipanti “The overseer of the table men fills up a (leather) kaluhat, the GUDU⁄¤-priest libates in the same way, the table man fills up a kaluhat, and the GUDU⁄¤-priest libates in the same way” KBo 30.54 i 5-8 (autumn fest.), w. dupl. ABoT 13 vi 11-15; cf. KBo 10.2 i 20-21 above, bil. sec.; cf. also KUB 8.80 ii 15. | the usage of š. šunna- could also be listed as idiomatic under 4.
47' š. dā- — a' “to take up, pick up”: ta āppa ša-ra-a / [(dāi)] nu LUGAL-un šuppiya[hhi] “He picks up (the pine cone) again (from the water) and sanctifies the king (with it)” KUB 34.123 i 10-11 + KBo 21.25 i 40-41 (rit., OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 17.11 i 24 + KBo 30.29:3-4 (OS), ed. StBoT 12:14f., for the dupl. cf. StBoT 25:65, Alp, Tempel 210f.; EGIR-az–ma–za LÚ.KÚR URUGašgaš GIŠTUKUL dān namma ša-ra-a dāš “But behind (my back) the Kaškaean enemy took up (his) weapon once again” KUB 19.10 i 16-17 (DŠ frag. 13), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:65; [(¬ag)]gatiuš–ma–wa kuiË[š išpariškimi] / [(a)]pāš–ma(var. + –war)–aš ša-ra-a d[āi (nu–war–aš–kan) ÍD-i anda] / išhūwaiškizzi “He takes up the hunting nets that I (the hunter) spread and casts them [into the river]” KBo 10.47c i 24-26 (Gilg., NH), w. dupl. KUB 8.56:12-14, rest. from KBo 10.47c i 17, w. dupl. KUB 8.56:4-5, both translit. Myths 123, tr. Beckman, in Foster, Gilg. 158; (“The river carried them (the children) to the sea in the land of Zalpuwa”) [DING]IR.DIDLI-š–a DUMU.MEŠ-uš A.AB.BA-az ša-ra-a dāer “And the deities took the children up from the sea (and raised them)” KBo 22.2 obv. 4-5 (Zalpa tale, OS), ed. StBoT 17:6f.; (“I went to Zalpa and destroyed it”) nu–šši DINGIR.MEŠ–ŠU ša-ra-a dahhun “and I took up its gods. (I gave three MADNANU-chariots to the Sungoddess of Arinna)” KBo 10.2 i 10 (ann., Hatt. I/NS), ed. StMed 12:32f., Imparati, SCO 14:44f.; cf. ibid. iii 4-5; (“I destroyed these lands”) āššu–ma–šši ša-ra-a dahhun “I took up their (lit. its) goods (and filled up my house with goods)” KBo 10.2 i 19-20, ed. StMed 12:36f.; cf. ibid. iii 8-9. 
b' “to take (control) over”: (The Hittite king writes to the Assyrian king: “You approached the east and made Mt. […] your boundary; you approached the west”) nu–za ŠA µŠuppiluliuma GIŠTUKUL tarhan[duš] ŠA DINGIR-LIM arkam~
manaš URU.DIDLI.HI.A ša-ra-a datta “and you took over the cities of the god’s tribute, (those formerly) vanquished (by) the weapon of Šuppiluliuma; (now what more will you write?)” KBo 18.24 iv 7-9 (letter, NH), ed. Heinhold-Krahmer, AfO 35:100, THeth 16:242f. (both reading tarhan as complete). 
c' “to elevate politically”: nu–mu ABU–YA DUMU-an ša-ra-a dāš nu–mu ANA DINGIR-LIM ÌR-anni pešta “Then my father took me up (as) a child and gave me to the goddess for service” KBo 3.6 i 15-16 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:4f. i 17-18; (Since at this time my brother had no son qualified to succeed) [(nu µU)]rhi-dU-an DUMU M[UNUS(EŠERTI)] ša-ra-≠a± dahhu[n (n–an I)N(A KUR URUKÙ.BABBAR-ti)] EN-anni [(t)ittanunun] “I took up Urhi-Teššub, the son of a secondary wife, and i[nstalled] him in rulership in Hatti” KUB 19.64 i 13-15 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. 1194/v:10-11 (StBoT 24 Taf. IV) + KUB 19.68 iii 2-3 + KUB 19.65 iii 2-3, ed. StBoT 24:20f. 
48' š. dai- “to place up on”: (The Stormgod has handed you [trees] over to the king) nu–šmaš–šan ša-ra-a KIN-ti tianzi šumašš–a šer hūinuzzi “and they will place the symbols of rule(?) on you, and he (i.e., the king) will make you run (across) above (as rafters), (and they will pronounce spells up into you)” KUB 29.1 i 40-41 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. (differently) Kellerman, Diss. 12, 26, Marazzi, VO 5:150f. | KIN-ti probably = aniyatti “regalia” a collective in -i rather than a loc.; even interpreting KIN-ti as collective acc., one could translate aniyatti as “equipment (for harvesting the timber)” here. 
49' š. tamašš- “to press, push up”: nu–za URUDUŠÚ.A [… š]a-ra-a tamāšdu “Let him/her push up(?) […] the chair” KUB 33.66 i 15-16 (OH?/MS), ed. Groddek, ZA 89:37, 39 (“Und [den] Stuhl […h]inauf bedränge er!”); because of the length of line 16 there may have been two sentences here. 
50' š. tarna- “to let (come/go) up”: (Himuili of Tapikka wrote to the king:) 100 ÉRIN.MEŠ GIBIL–wa–kan INA URUGašipura ša-ra-a tarnahhun “I have let 100 new troops (go) up to Gašipura” HKM 31:5-7 (MH/MS), ed. HBM 174f. (“habe ich nach Gašipura hinauf gelassen”); cf. HKM 36:32-33, HKM 45:16-17 (šarā tarnaddu); cf. HKM 43:3 below, 1 a 55' (s.v. uwate-); (If …,) nu–za–kan URU-ri ša-ra-a apūn tarnai “and (if) he lets that (person) (come) up into his city” KUB 23.72 obv. 34 (Mita, MH/MS), ed. Catsanicos, GsNeu (forthcoming), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:34, Beckman, DiplTexts2 162; cf. nu–wa URUDUzakkiuš karpdu nu–wa–kan MUNUS ŠU.GI ša-ra-a tarna≠u± “Let him lift the bolts and allow the Old Woman (to come) up” KUB 34.45 + KBo 16.63 obv. 9 (dep., MS), ed. StBoT 4:50f.; cf. KUB 13.1 i 27-28; n–aš–kan (var. nu–ššan) ša-ra-a (var. UGU) tarni “And let them (i.e., netherworld deities) come up” KBo 10.45 i 45 (rit. for infernal deities, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 i 27 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:120f. 
51' š. taškupai- “to raise a cry”: […-]šan ša-ra-a taškupi[škitten…] “Raise a cry (and send messengers to me)” KUB 31.105:20 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 139 (“empor Geschr[ei(?)”). 
52' š. tiya- “to stand/get up, arise, step up” (see also 4 i, below) — a' literal “to stand/get up, arise”: LUGAL-uš MUNUS.LUGAL-ašš–a ša-ra-a tienzi “The king and queen stand up” KBo 17.74 i 19 (thunder fest., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:12f.; n–e ša-ra-a ti≠Ën±zi nu āppa tienzi n–e aranda “They stand up, step back, and (then) they remain standing” KBo 20.12 i 6 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.74 i 5 + ABoT 9 i 6 (OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:10f.; nu LÚSAGI.A kuiš haššÏ tapušza paršnan harzi t–aš ša-ra-a tÏyazi “The cupbearer who has been squatting next to the brazier, stands up” KUB 25.1 vi 11-14 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., NS), ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:98f.; LUGAL-uš 1 NINDA.GUR›.RA paršiya § ašeššar ša-ra-a tiyanzi “The king breaks one thick loaf. The assembly stands up” KUB 11.13 v 24-25 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., NS); šumeš–a–šši peran ša-ra[-a tiy]atteni “You shall rise up before him (to oppose him)” KUB 13.27 obv.! 16 + KUB 23.77:5 (Kaška treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 118; dIŠTAR-iš–kan [(w)alliw(alliyaš tiyat nu AN)]A ŠEŠ–ŠU (var. 2 A[THUTI–Š]U) peran ša-ra-a tiyat (var. uiyat) “And boldly(?) IŠTAR took a stand, and before her brother (var. two b[rothers]) she stood up (var. sent)” KUB 33.92 iv 10-11 (Song of Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.113 i 7-9 + KUB 36.12 i 20-22, ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:10-13 w. nn. d and 19, cf. š. uiya-, below, 1 a 56'.
b' “to step up”: MUNUS.LUGAL–šan GIŠDAG-ti ša-ra-a tÏËzzi “The queen steps up onto the dais” KUB 27.69 ii 20-21 (fest. of the month, NS) | the -šan is due to the GIŠDAG-ti. 
c' “to set out”: µAziraš–ma LUGAL K[UR] U[RUAmurr]i IŠT[U ZA]G ≠ŠA± [KU]R URUMizri ša-ra-a tiyat n[–aš–za AN]A dUTU–ŠI LU[GAL KUR URUH]atti ÌR-nahtat “Aziru, king of Amurru set out from the borderlands of Egypt and subjugated [himself t]o My Majesty, ki[ng of H]atti” KBo 10.12 i 18-19 (Aziru treaty, Šupp. I), ed. Freydank, MIO 7:359f., 367 (“machte sich von der [Gren]ze … auf”), tr. DiplTexts2 37 (“came up from the gate of Egyptian territory”); mān KUR-TUM kuitki našma LÚMUNNABTUM ša-ra-a tÏËzzi n–at INA KUR URUHatti iyattari “If any land or fugitive sets out and comes to the Land of Hatti” KBo 5.9 iii 12-14 (Dupp., NH), ed. SV 1:20f. (“Wenn irgendein Land oder ein Flüchtling sich aufmacht”), tr. DiplTexts2 62 (“If some population or fugitive sets out”); nu–wa ša-ra-a tÏya nu–wa INA KUR Hatti arha Ït “Set out and go off to the land of Hatti” KUB 14.3 iii 64-65 (Tawagalawa letter, NH), ed. AU 14f. (“mach dich auf”).
53' š. tittanu- (see also 4 j, below) — a' “to erect”: n–at ša-ra-a tittanuandu “Let them erect it (i.e., an old stela which has fallen down)” KUB 13.2 iii 2 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:144f., Dienstanw. 46, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:224.
b' “to make (someone(?)) stand up”: mān[–an wemi]yaši n–an QA_TIHI.A–ŠU GÌR.HI.A–ŠU šiyā n–aš (error for n–an) ša-r[a-a] tittanut “When you [fi]nd [him], sting him on his hands (and) feet and make him(!) stand up” KUB 33.5 ii 5-7 (Tel. myth, version 2, OH/MS), ed. Mazoyer, Télipinu 54, 81, translit. Myth. 39f., tr. Hittite Myths2 18 | alternatively without ! “make them stand up” with the “them” refering to the hands and feet, indicating that they should start moving almost against Telipinu’s will. 
c' to put up on/in: takku GIŠ!APIN-an LÚ ELLUM kuiški tāi[Ëzzi (išhāš–ši≠š–an± wem)iezzi x–ŠU(?) GIŠappalašša≠š± ša-ra-a tittanuzzi t[(a G)UD.HI.(≠A±-it x)…] “If some free man steals a plow, and its owner finds it, (the owner) shall put [his …] up on/in the appalašša-, and he shall [pull?] with the oxen (or: the m[an shall die] with the oxen)” KBo 6.14 i 11-12 (Laws §121, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.25:8-9 (OS), ed. LH 110f., cf. Güterbock, JCS 15:70, JCS 16:18, 23 (x cannot be a, but perhaps h[u-it-ti-ia-zi] or L[Ú-aš a-ki]) | GUD.HI.A-it = comitative inst., apparently some sort of humiliation may have been intended (cf. KBo 10.2 iii 41-42), if not execution as in Law § 166, cf. LH 203 comments. Since the nature of GIŠappalašša- is unknown, the true sense of š. is difficult to determine.
54' š. uwa- “to come up” — a' in general: (Hattušili I says regarding his son:) [mān–aš aššuš] n–ašta ša-ra-a ui[škit]taru mā[n–ma–aš pugga]nza tÏËzzi … n–aš–kan ša-ra-a lË ui≠šk±itta n[–aš É-ri–ši Ëš]du “[If he behaves himself,] let him come up (to the palace) regularly. But if he misbehaves, … let him stop coming up. Let him [stay home]” KUB 1.16 ii 33-36 (political testament of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. HAB 6f., tr. Beckman, CoS 2:79 | for the inhibitive use of lË + “iterative” (-ške-) see Hoffner/Melchert, Mem.Imparati 381 §7.1; (Muršili says: “When I had set Kargamiš in order”) nu–kan IŠTU KUR URUKargamiš ša-ra-a uwanun nu INA KUR URUTegaramma andan uwanun “I came up from the land of Kargamiš and came into the land of Tegaramma” KBo 4.4 iii 18-19, ed. AM 124f.; kue–ma–mu AWATEMEŠ UL ištamašteni ammuk–ma–za–at ANA DINGIR.MEŠ arkuwar iyami–pat n–at–mu–kan UN-az (B: antuhšaš) KA≈U-az ša-ra-a uizzi–pat “What words of mine you do not hear, I will nevertheless make as a petition to the gods, and they will come up from my mortal mouth” KUB 6.45 i 29-31 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 i 30-32, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 9, 32 (“they merely emerge”); ša-ra-a–kan uwaši nepišaš dUTU-uš arunaz “You come up, O Sungod of Heaven, from the sea” ibid. iii 13-14, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 20, 39; (“Down in the Dark Earth stand bronze cauldrons. Their lids are of lead and their latches are of iron”) kuit andan paizzi n–ašta namma ša-ra-a UL uizzi “What goes in does not come out (lit. up) again. (It perishes therein)” KUB 17.10 iv 16-17 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), ed. Mazoyer, Télipinu 51, 79, tr. Hittite Myths 17; cf. similar KUB 33.8 iii 8-9 (OH/NS); w. uwa- ellipsed: n–ašta pattarpalhiš ÍD-az ša-ra-a taru.-iš “The (bird named) ‘broadwing’ <came> up from the river tarwiyalli-” KUB 18.5 ii 15 (bird oracle, NH); cf. ibid. iii 8; cf. Archi, SMEA 16:161; cf. also 1 c 2', below; INA KUR URUTūmmanna–ya kuwapi iyahhat nu–mu namma LÚ.MEŠ ŠU.GI–ya peran ša-ra-a UL uËr “When I marched to the land of Tummanna, even the elders did not come up before me again” (or “no longer came up before me”) KBo 5.8 iv 10-12 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 160f., cf. 1 a 9', above.
b' “to rise (dough)”: (“They hold up before the ‘owner of the house’ the linen cloth of the deity with which the kneeding troughs had been covered”) nu DUGišnuruš aušzi mān–kan ÍB.TAK› ša-ra-a uwan “he looks at the kneeding troughs (to see) whether the leftovers have risen” KBo 15.33 ii 33-34 (rit. of Storm-god of Kuliwišna, MH/MS), ed. AlHeth 136, 145f., HED 1-2:384, Glocker, Kuliwišna 68f., cf. putkiya-.
55' š. uwate- “to bring up”: ABI LUGAL IŠPUR š–an ša-ra-a uwater “The father of the king sent (word), and they brought him (sc. the miscreant) up (to the palace)” KBo 3.34 i 13-14 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 32f., Soysal, Diss. 11, 83; ÉRIN.MEŠ GIBIL mahhan ša-ra-a uwater “When they brought up the new troops” HKM 43:3 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 194f.; cf. ibid. 8-10, 13; cf. HKM 31:5-7, above, 1 a 50'; cf. also KUB 14.15 ii 9, ed. AM 48f., KBo 5.8 iv 19-20, ed. AM 162f.
56' š. uiya- “to chase/send up”: nu LÚ.KÚR hullanun n–an–kan INA HUR.SAGElluriya ša-ra-a uiyanun n–an–kan kuwaškinun “I defeated the enemy, chased him up onto Mt. Elluriya, and started killing them (-ške-form)” KBo 5.8 iii 29-31 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 158f.; cf. KUB 33.113 i 7-9 + KUB 36.12 i 20-22 with dupl. KUB 33.92 iv 10-11, and cf. KUB 13.27 obv.! 16 + KUB 23.77:5,  both above, 1 a 52' a'.
57' š. ūnh- “to suck up(wards)”: (The queen saw in a dream someone like her father again alive) nu–wa–kan ˚šaruntin mān kuin≠ki± annallin ŠA ABI ABI–YA (eras.)«KUR» ša-ra-a ūnheškizzi nu–war–an–kan ūhta “He was as it were sucking up some ancient spring of my grandfather, and he sucked it” KUB 31.77 i 10-12 (dream and vow text, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 266, 404 (“…wekte hij tot leven, en hij voedde hem als het ware”), 408 n. 3.
58' š. up- “to rise”: mān–ašta karūwarwar dUTU-uš nepišaz ša-ra-a ūpzi “When early in the morning the sun rises through the sky” KUB 31.127 + KUB 36.79 i 39-40 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:240 | for the perlative abl., see Melchert, Diss. 157, 208f., 292-295, 315-317, 361, 387f.; cf. also dUTU-uš ša-ra-a ūpta KUB 31.147 ii 18; cf. also KUB 10.92 vi 14 and KUB 13.4 iii 71-72 (below, b), where ūpzi is perhaps ellipsed.
59' š. uda- “to bring”: nu–kan URUNeriqqan URU-an NA›a!-ku-un GIM-[an] halluwaz witaz ša-ra-a udahhu≠n± “I brought the city of Nerik up like an aku-stone(?) from deep waters” KUB 21.19 iii 16-17 + 1303/u rev. 11-12 (prayer of Hatt. III and Pud. to Sungoddess of Arinna), ed. Sürenhagen AoF 8:94f., tr. Hittite Prayers 99; nu mān uwatteni n–aš≠ta± āš≠šu± ša-≠ra±-a udatten “And when you (gods whom I have invoked) come (up from the netherworld), bring up good things” KBo 7.28:40 (prayer to the Sungoddess of the Earth, OH/MS); ≠LÍL-ri±–ma–kan weši iya≠ta–y±a hamešhanza UGU udai “But spring brings up pasture-grass and luxuriance in the countryside” KBo 12.73 obv.? 3-4 (hymn to Adad, NH), ed. Laroche, RA 58:73, 75 (=18-19), cf. Goetze, JCS 18:91. 
60' š. watku- “to leap”: dU-aš–kan GIŠtiyaridaš ša-ra-a gagaštiyaš mān watkut “The Stormgod leaped up into the chariot like a gagaštiya-” KBo 26.65 = KUB 33.106 iv 21 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:30f.; [mā]n UN-ši ŠÀ–ŠU ša-ra-a watkuitta “if a man’s heart/innards leap up” KUB 30.67:6 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 171f., StBoT 5:194; cf. [… u]ttar kuitki [š]a-ra-a watkutta HKM 64:13-15 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 240-243 | for a similar usage w. INIM see š. išpart- 1 a 21' c'.
61' š. widai- “to bring up(wards)”: ƒAmmattallan kuit DUMU.MUNUS GAL INA É.GAL-LIM karuššiyantili ša-ra-a widāit “Because the Great Daughter secretly brought Ammattalla up (in)to the palace” KUB 22.70 obv. 72 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:76f.
It will be noted that šarā as a preverb w. verbs of movement often associates with locations customarily “up,” such as heaven (iyannai- KUB 24.8 ii 10-12, manninkuwahh- KBo 32.14 rev. 42), mountains (pai- KUB 14.16 iii 13-14, penna- KUB 14.16 iii 7-10), roof tops (pai- KUB 6.45 i 9, peda- KUB 7.1 ii 18-19), and cities (built on mounds) (iya- KBo 10.12 iii 8, KBo 5.3 + KUB 40.35 iii 61, KUB 21.29 ii 6-8, ninink- KUB 13.1 i 21-22, pehute- KBo 3.60 ii 9-10, HKM 58:6-7, penna- KBo 14.3 iv 39-40, tarna- KUB 23.72 obv. 34). 
b. adverb: nu–ššan KASKAL.MEŠ ša-ra-a [˜] / [arpūwa]nteš namma–at warhūiš “The roads up (the mountain to Timmuhala) are [ste]ep(?) and furthermore they are rough” KUB 19.37 ii 5-6 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 166f., rest. from KUB 19.37 iii 50, ed. AM 176f.
c. in combination with another preverb/adverb — 1' āppa šarā “back up”: (“We will go up”) [(U G)IŠŠUKUR ZAB]AR āppa ša-ra-a pËtumeni “and we will carry the bro[nze spear] back up” KBo 17.1 iii 16 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 iii 16 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:30f.
2' āppan šarā “up behind, up from behind”: mān tarwiyalliš tiyazi mān–kan EGIR-an ša-ra-a aššuaz uizzi n–at gimri arahza pānzi “If it (a bird) appears/approaches(?) tarwiyalli, if it comes up from behind from the ‘good’ direction, they go outside to the countryside” KBo 4.2 ii 27-28 (Huwarlu’s rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:93, 97; URUKuwaršauwantaz –ma–šši–kan EGIR-an ša-ra-a (var. URUKuršawantaš[coll.]–ma–kan EGIR UGU) UR.GI‡-aš NA›hūwaši ZAG-aš “Up behind in the direction of Kuwaršawanta his border is the Stela of the Dog” Bronze Tablet i 31 (treaty, Tudh. IV), w. parallel KBo 4.10 obv. 20-21, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:12f. w. comments on p. 34, translit. Garstang/Gurney, Geogr. 66, w. par. ed. StBoT 38:26f.; cf. pai- A 1 e 5', j 26'; (“And on this side, toward Kazzapa, the fort of the father of My Majesty is the border for it”) edizza–ma–šši URUTapapanuwaz nu–kan M¨LÛ parkuin kuwapi EGIR-an ša-ra-a uwaši nu šarāzziyatar irhāš “While on that side, in the direction of Tapapanuwa — when you climb up the Bare Peak from behind — the height is its border” KUB 19.37 ii 29-31 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 170f.; (“He will kill you”) našma–wa–ddu–za–kan [E]GIR.KASKAL-NI MUNUS.LUGAL kuinki EGIR-an ša-ra-a tittanuzi “Or, on the return journey the queen will put someone on your tail (lit. set someone up behind you) (and they will kill you)” KUB 54.1 i 28-29 (NH), ed. Archi/Klengel, AoF 12:53f., 58; našma–šši–kan DINGIR.MEŠ UGU DINGIR.MEŠ ŠAPLITI kuiški HUL-uwanni EGIR-an ša-ra-a tiyan harzi “If someone has put heavenly deities or underworld deities on his tail for evil purposes” KUB 21.27 + 676/v iii 19-20 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:114f. (“oder ob sich ihm irgendeiner der Oberen und Unteren Götter hinter dem Übel aufgestellt hat”), Lebrun, Hymnes 333, 339 (“ou si quelque dieu céleste [ou infer]nal est entré en hostilité envers lui”); n–aš–kan 1-aš 1-edani kunanna EGIR-an ša-ra-a lË kuiški dāi “Let no one put them (i.e., the others) on the other person’s tail to kill (him)” KBo 5.4 rev. 13 (Targ.), ed. SV 1:62f. (“hinterm Rücken … zu töten unternehmen”), tr. DiplTexts2 72 (“secretly try to kill”). 
3' awan šarā: (“[When] the entire deity is ascertained, I will plate him (i.e., the statue) all the way (ank[u]) [when i]t(?) (i.e., the statue grammatically?), however, is not ascertained”) «nu ANA d» nu ANA dŠaumatar[i …] / […] hališšianda awan ša-ra-a DÙ-mi “then for Šaumatar[i] I will make […-s] plated from the sides up(?)” KUB 15.19 obv.? 9-10 (dreams and vows, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 240, 378 (“beroemd maken”), 380 note 3, for preceding context see šakuwaššar(a) 1 d; cf. KUB 6.45 + KUB 30.14 iii 71-73, cited 1 a 20', above. 
4' kattan šarā — a' “from bottom to top”: (“Let the moat (Akk. ≠HI±RˆTUM) be six gipeššar deep and four gipeššar wide. Before it runs full(?) of water”) [GAM?] ša-ra-a IŠTU NA› (eras., coll.) talhāndu “let them pave [it from bottom] to top with stones” KUB 31.86 ii 12 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:110f.:103 (restoring [n–at] rather than [GAM], translit. Laroche, RHA XV/61:127 (differently), tr. Goetze, JCS 13:69 (differently), McMahon, CoS 1:223 (no tr. of [GAM?] šarā), cf. Košak, Linguistica 33:110 (w. coll., against CHD patalhai-), for ibid. ii 11 see HW2 s.v. arnu- 335a | for hirËti as Akk. lw. in Hurr., perhaps in the meaning required here see KBo 32.14 rev. 35, ed. StBoT 32:88f. (= Hitt. hūtanuš rev. 41; cf. KUB 31.86 ii 6-7); kat-ta!-ša-ra–at–kan NA›-ta wedan “It was built with stone from bottom to top” KBo 21.22:37 (benedictions for Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Kellerman, Tel Aviv 5:200, 202; (Down in front of the statue of the deity a practitioner opens an ābi-pit with a knife) n–an–kan witenaz [kattan?] ša-ra-a ārrÏËzzi “and he washes(?) it (common gender: the deity or the pit?) from [bottom] to top with water (and pours into the pit beer, wine and sweet oil)” KBo 17.94 iii 23-24 (rit., NH). 
b' “up from below”: takku–kan UN-an GIŠNÁ-anteš kattan ≠š±a-ra-a šiyanzi n–aš–šan [GÙB-l]a lagāri “If the bed-clothes poke a man upwards from below, and he falls out on the left, (that man will become angry)” KUB 29.9 i 26-28 (šumma alu omens, NH), ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79f.; nu–wa–kan ANA dKuma[rbi …] / [… ÍD-za takn]aza GAM-an ša-ra-a eh[u] “Come up from below, [from the river,] from the ea[rth], to Kumarbi” KUB 33.122 ii 4-5 (fragment of the Kumarbi Cycle, MH?/NS), ed. HW2  E 19f., StBoT 14:50f.; n–aš–kan DINGIR.MEŠ-aš kuedaš […] namma anda nu kattan ša-ra-a apuš taran[zi] “And those deities with whom he is, answer (lit. speak) up from below” KUB 30.28 rev. 5-6, ed. Otten, HTR 96f.; cf. w. mema- ibid. 7-8, 10-11; cf. also 1 a 30', above; cf. w. halzai- KUB 39.49:21, ed. van den Hout, Hidden Futures 43, cf. 1 a 13'.
c' (figuratively):  [nu] µ[Z]idanta[š A]NA µHantili [katt]an [(ša-ra)]-a ulešta nu HUL-lu utt[ar iË]r “Zidanta allied himself with Hantili (lit. up from below), and they [did] the evil thing (i.e., regicide)” KBo 3.1 i 31-32 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 11.1 i 33, ed. THeth 11:18f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:195 (differently); n–an–kan GAM UGU–ma lahiyaizzi DINGIR-LUM–an piešti “Shall he attack it (lit. up from below) and will you, O god, give it to him?” KUB 5.1 i 68 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:44f. (“von unten nach oben”), tr. Beal, Ktèma 24:45 (“from above and below”). 
d' (idiomatic) kattan šarā epp-“to slander, defame”: see lala- 1 a 1' citing (Sum.) ŠÀ.GAR.RA = (Akk.) A-KÍL KAR-ŠÍ = (Hitt.) GAM-an ša-ra-a kuiš appeškizi KBo 13.1 iv 19 (lex.), and KUB 40.65 + KUB 1.16 iii 8-9 (political testament of Hatt. I, NS); possibly the same as the mng. in 1 c 4' c';  nu–war–an–kan DINGIR-LIM EN–YA [E]GIR-an [iy(ahhut)] nu–wa–za–kan apËl (var. apËlla) ≠É±-er GAM-an ša-ra-a Ëpdu “Go after him (the offender), O god, my lord! And may he defame/disgrace his house” KUB 13.4 i 65-66 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.63 i 12(-13), ed. Chrest. 150-153 (without dupl.), Süel, Direktif Metni 32f. (“altını üstüne getirsin”), 128 (comments), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218 (“May he seize his house from bottom to top” ) | our restoration iyahhut based upon KUB 22.70 obv. 37 and limited space in break.
5' peran šarā: this is not a real double preverb/adverb; rather peran and šarā operate separately from one another, the former usually as a postposition; cf. w. ar- (mid.) KUB 13.4 i 22, below, 3 a; w. epp- KBo 4.3 + KBo 19.64 ii 13-14, KUB 21.1 ii 73-74 and KUB 13.1 iv 9, all 1 a 10' a', above; w. Ït KUB 23.77:18, above 1 a 22'; w. tiya- KUB 13.27 obv.! 16 + KUB 23.77:5 and KUB 33.92 iv 10-11, above, 1 a 52' a'; w. uiya- KUB 33.113 i 7-9 + KUB 36.12 i 20-22; w. uwa- KBo 5.8 iv 10-12; or occasionally as a separate adverb; cf. KUB 21.1 iii 50-52 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iii 66-69, 3 d below; cf. peran 3 c, 1 c 1' a', 12 h. 
6' šarā katta–ya “up and down(?)” or “above and below(?)”: KUB 33.120 ii 70 (Song of Kumarbi, MH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths™ 44.
7' šarā peran (aššuwaz/kuštayaz): n–ašta TI°MUŠEN! ÍD-az ša-ra-a peran aššuwaz uit n–aš–kan ÍD-an āppa uit “An eagle came up from the river in front on the good side. And it came back towards the river” KUB 18.5 ii 12-13 (bird oracle, NH); cf. ibid. + KUB 49.13 ii 24-25, 32-33, 36-37, and passim; namma–aš–kan ÍD-az ša-ra-a peran kuš. uit “Then it came up from the river in front on the kuštaya-side” ibid. iii 14; see similarly n–ašta ÍD-az ša-ra-a kalmušiš harranÏšš–a peran aššuwaz uËr n–at–kan ÍD-an āppa uËr “A kalmuši-bird and an eagle came up from the river in front on the good side. And they came back towards the river” ibid. ii 44-45 | ÍD-an is an acc. of direction. Athough that usage was no longer productive in NH it was carried over as a technical expression (cf. in MS in KUB 31.101:18).
2. above, upon, over, on top (apparently more or less synonomous w. šer)— a. w. š. allappahh- and -kan “to spit on” w. d.-l.: n–aš–kan ANA ANŠE.HI.A anda neyanzi nu–šma<š>–kan EN. SISKUR ša-ra-a allapahhi “They wind them (i.e., silver beads) about the donkeys, and the sacrificer spits on them” KUB 24.12 ii 8-9 (taknaš dUTU rit., NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 88f., see nai- 5 a 2' for reading ANŠE.HI.A rather than GÌR.HI.A, and correct the reading at lala- n. 2 c. 
b. w. eš- “to be up”: kuitman–ma–kan dUTU-uš nūa ša-ra-a nu GIŠnathita išparranzi “While the sun is still up, they spread the beds” KUB 10.92 vi 14-15 (fest. for Teššub, NS); n–ašta kuitma<n> dUTU-uš ša-ra-a nu–za ≠hūdāk± war[pd]u “While the sun is up, let him promptly ba[th]e himself. (Let him promptly arrive in the morning at the time the gods eat)” KUB 13.4 iii 71-72 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 160f., Süel, Direktif Metni 70f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220; (“The water which is outside the city, [do not use(?)] it”) ša-ra-a–kan kuit wātar n–at l[Ë …] “What water is up, do not [use(?)] it (… Bring water for the god’s daily bread only from the Gaurya and Dunnariya forests)” KUB 31.113:3 (instr. frag.?, NS), ed. KN 130f. (“dort oben (in der Stadt ist)”), cf. šaklai- 2.
c. w. eš- “to take a seat above, sit down above”: INA 3 KASKAL-NI–ma–za LÚSANGA GIBIL [ANA?] LÚSANGA LIBIR-RU ša-ra-a ešari nu–šmaš KÚ-zi NAG-zi “On the third time the new priest takes his seat above the old priest. They eat and drink” KUB 17.35 i 26-27 (cult inv., NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 124f., 138 (“sit up”). 
d. w. hat- “to dry up”: ša-ra-a–ma GIŠ-ru hazašta “Above, the tree dried up” KUB 12.62 obv. 8 (myth, pre-NH/NS). 
e. w. huek- “to slaughter over”: (“They spread out … foliage…”) namma–an–šan GIŠlahhurnuziaš ša-ra-a hukanzi “Then they slaughter it over the foliage” VBoT 24 ii 35-36 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 110f. | on the hypothesis that this means with the neck turned upwards see Hoffner, JBL 86:399, and Gurney, Schweich 30; nu–ššan MÁŠ.GAL.ŠIR GIŠlahhurnuziyaš ša-ra-a hūkanzi KBo 17.105 iii 28 (MH/MS); cf. (GIŠ)lah(h)urnuz(z)i- f, where šarā immediately following the locative is taken as equivalent to šer “on top of”; [nu–]ššan (var. ≠n±–ašta) 1 GUD.MAH 1 UDU.NÍTA–ya ŠA dZiparwa ištanani GIŠeyani ša-ra-a hūkanzi “One bull and one wether they slaughter on the altar of Ziparwa at the eya-tree” VS 28.20 i 6-10 (rit. for Ziparwa, NS), w. dupl. KUB 25.33 i 6-8 (NS), cf. van den Hout, BiOr 56:146.
f. w. huinu- “to make run above”: KUR-e LÚ.KÚR-uš-ša (var. nu LÚ.MEŠ KÚR-aš) huit[arr–a katta harnamniškiz(zi)(?)] šarāzzi kattirr[i huinuškizz(i katterra–ma)] ša-ra-a (var. še-≠e±-[er]) huinuškizz[i] “He [stirs(?)] up the lands of the enemy [and the w]ild animals: he makes the upper (things) [ru]n below, and makes the lower (things) run above” KUB 33.115 ii 5-7 (Song of Silver, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.18 ii 16-18, ed. Hoffner in FsOtten2 153f. w. nn. 68-70, tr. Hittite Myths2 49 (differently) | in this text šarā huinu- and šer huinu- appear to be interchangeable; cf. also KBo 32.14 rev. 46, ed. StBoT 32:91 where obj. is šamanuš, cf. šam(m)ana- 1 c; and KUB 29.1 i 41 where trees are the obj. 
g. w. iya- act. “to inflict on”: [k(uwa)]t ša-ra-am-mu (var. ša-ra-a-mu, ta-ra-mu) kiššan iyatten nu–mu–ššan kÏ yukan išhai[(šte)n] “Why have you (pl.) inflicted (lit. made) on me the following and imposed this yoke on me?” KUB 31.4 obv. 7 + KBo 3.41:6 (OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 12.22 i 10-11, KBo 13.78 obv. 7-8, ed. Otten, ZA 55:158f. (“brachtet ihr solches über mich” without rest. kuwat), Soysal, Hethitica 7:174, 179 (“[W]arum handeltet ihr so an mir”), tr. Hoffner, CoS 1:184.
h. w. ištamašš- “to hear up above”: (Tašmišu cried out three times) nu–ššan ša-ra-a [nepi]ši DINGIR.MEŠ-muš ištama[š]šer “and up in [hea]ven the gods heard (the sound)” KBo 26.65 iv 16-17 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:30f. (as KUB 33.106, without the join), tr. Hittite Myths2 64 (“up in heaven the gods heard”), LMI 162 (without KBo 26.65, erroneously follows Güterbock and ANET 125 in assuming two clauses “e andò su nel cielo e gli dei udirono ciò”), cf. -šan B 1 a 2' d'; since in nu–ššan µKeššiš parā ANA DAM–ŠU–pat iš[tamašta] KUB 33.121 ii 6 (cf. -šan B 2 f 2' c') ištamašš- and a directional expression show that for the Hittites the movement in hearing was from the hearer to the source of the sound (“Kešši listened only to his wife”), it is probably better to take šarā here as synonymous with šer.
i. w. ištantai- “to tarry up above”: ƒPattiyaš–wa–kan kuit INA É.[G]AL-LIM ša-ra-a ištatāit “Because Pattiya tarried up in the palace” KUB 22.70 obv. 44 (oracles on cult of the god of Arušna, NH), ed. THeth 6:66f.; cf. ibid. rev. 4, 6, ed. THeth 6:82f.
j. w. lahuwai- “to pour over”: nu MUNUS ŠU.GI wātar GAL-az našma hūpparaz ANA 2 BE_L SÍSKUR parā Ëpzi NA›nitri–ya–kan anda šuhhan nu–za–kan 2 BE_L SÍSKUR wātar INA SAG.DU–ŠUNU ša-ra-a lāhuwanzi ŠU.HI.A–ya–za–kan IGI.HI.A arranzi “The Old Woman holds out water to the two sacrificers in either a cup or a huppar-vessel, and natron has been poured into (the water); the two sacrificers pour the water over their heads and wash their hands (and) eyes” KBo 39.8 iv 21-25 (2Mašt., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 46:104f., Rost, MIO 1:364-367. 
k. NINDAšarā marrant-: q.v., here?
l. w. maušš- “to fall upon/on top of”: […] / GAM pittāer x[…] / EGIR-an pittā[er …] / […] / ša-ra-a maušše[r…] KBo 19.80 rt. 9-12 (hist., NH), cf. maušš- b 8' and piddai- B 5 k. Since one does not “fall upwards,” it is hard to see how this can be mng. 1.
m. w. nai- “to divert (an irrigation canal) from upstream”: KBo 6.26 i 18-21 (Laws §162, OH/NS) see nai- 1 a 9'. For a different usage of š. nai- see 1 a 31', above.
n. w. papparš- “to pour over”: GIM-an–ma–aš–kan ÍD-an tap[uš]a ari nu–šmaš–kan wātar ša-ra-a papparškanzi “But when it (the army?) reaches the side of the river, they pour water on them” KUB 17.28 iv 53-55 (rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 3:151 (“über”), tr. Beal, Magic and Ritual Power 74 (“splash them”); nu MUNUS ŠU.GI wātar išnann–a dāi nu![(–šmaš–≠kan± wātar)] ša-ra-a papparšzi “The Old Woman takes water and dough, and pours water on them (i.e., the sacrificers and consecrates them. Then she swings the dough over (šer arha) them)” KBo 39.8 ii 21-22 (2Mašt., MH/MS), w. emendation and restoration following KBo 2.3 i 34-35 (1Mašt., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 46:73, Rost, MIO 1:354f.; ≠nu–kan MUNUS ŠU.GI ANA± 2 BE_L SÍSKUR wātar ša-ra-a papparšzi n–aš parkunuzi “The Old Woman pours water on the two sacrificers and purifies them” KBo 39.8 iii 20-21, ed. StBoT 46:85, Rost, MIO 1:358f. 
o. w. peššiya- “to toss over/upon”: (He who brought evil upon you, now I am drawing it away from you) n–at arha peššiškimi n–at–šan ša-ra-a alwanzeni UN-ši peššiškimi “I am throwing it away, and tossing it upon the sorcerer” KUB 24.14 i 27-28 (Hebattarakki’s rit., NH); (“Then the Old Woman takes [the blue wool] and the red wool and unravels(?) it”) tuËqqaš ša-ra-a pe≠šš±ezzi “She tosses it over/upon the body (of the sacrificer)” KUB 12.58 i 32 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 10f. (= i 56) (“throws it over”), cf. partai-; nu–za MUNUS.LUGAL 1 GIŠmārin dāi nu Ì.UDU GIŠmārita[z] (coll.) dāi nu–ššan ANA 4 halhaltumariyaš ša!-ra-a peššiyazi “The queen takes one spear and with the spear takes sheep fat and tosses (it) upon the four corners” KUB 43.56 ii 15-18 (Kuliwišna rit., MH?/NS).
p. w. šehuriya- “to urinate on”: (In a dream of the queen: “The chariot drivers mock me. They even led those small(?) horses away from me”) taršitta–ya–wa–mu UL kuiški ša-ra-a–ya–mu–kan UL kuiški šËhuriy[a]t “None trampled(?) on me; none urinated on me” KUB 31.71 ii! 9-11 (NH), ed. van den Hout, AoF 21:309, 312, THeth 6:122-124, Entrikalar 97f., THeth 20:188f. w. n. 699. It is difficult to see how “upwards” would be implied by š. with this verb.
q. w. šeš- “to sleep up above”: (“Let him quickly come up to spend the night in the temple …”) nu 1-aš 1-aš INA É.DINGIR-LIM ša-ra-a šËšūwanzi lË–pat karštari “Not a single person shall neglect to sleep up in the temple” KUB 13.4 iii 5-6 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 156f., Süel, Direktif Metni 54f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:219; cf. also KUB 13.4 iii 30.
r. w. dai- “to place on”: nu ZAG-za kuit harzi n–at ištan[ani] ša-ra-a GIŠilani dāi “What he holds on/to the right he places on the step of the alt[ar] (lit. on the alt[ar] on the step)” KUB 41.53 iv 7-8 (fest. of haste, LNS).
s. w. wemiya-“ to detect above”: nu tezzi [kāš–wa] / [šak]uwayanza(?) (coll. photo H. A. Hoffner) [Ëš]ta nu ša-ra-a n[(epeš)] wemiškit “He says: [‘This one w]as [se]eing(?), he could detect the sky above, (but now he has been blinded)’” KBo 6.34 i 11-13 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.13 rev.! 1, ed. StBoT 22:6f. i 17-19 w. differing coll. on p. 23 ([kui]t TI-anza); cf. nu ša-ra-a dUTU dSÎN wemi[-…] / [ša]-ra-a nepišaš MUL.HI.A-uš we[mi-…]. KBo 26.105 iv? 12-13 (myth, NS); cf. w. UGU (prob. = šarā) KUB 13.28 + KUB 40.61:6-7 (NH).
t. other: perhaps here 1 c 3'.
It is often difficult to decide whether a particular usage belongs under mng. 1 or mng. 2. For example usage 2 e has been understood by Hoffner and Gurney as “to slaughter (w. neck?) upwards (mng. 1).” Usage 2 n may just as well mean “splash” > lit. “sprinkle upwards (mng. 1)” as understood by Beal (cf. also 4 h). Similarly, one could imagine spitting upwards (mng. 1 rather than 2 a), and urinating upwards (mng. 1 rather than 2 p), although the latter is difficult to picture in the only example. With lahuwai- (2 j) perhaps the author thought of moving the vessel of water from hand level up to head level (mng. 1) before dumping it. Even with peššiya- (2 o) one might imagine a throw with a big arc (“to toss over/up on”) being the reason for using šarā rather than šer. However, all of these usages make easier sense as “on/above” and there are a number of usages in mng. 2 that are hard to explain with any other meaning. 
3. (idiomatically) available, at hand, at one’s disposal — a. š. ar- mid. “to be at hand, be available, be/stand at one’s disposal, stand ready”: (You [pl.] must keep my royal words) nu URUHattušaš ša-ra-a arta “then Hatti will be at your disposal, (and you will [keep your land paci]fied)” KUB 1.16 iii 47 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14f. (“ragend dastehen”); cf. also ibid. iii 33-36; (But you must be reverent toward the word of the gods:) nu NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A–ŠU<NU> išpanduzzi–šme[t] / [paršu]r–šemet–a memal–šemet ša-ra-a artaru “Let thick bread, libation wine, stew, and groats be at their disposal” ibid. iii 50-51, ed. HAB 14f.; mān 12 LÚ.MEŠ MEŠEDI–ma ša-ra-a UL arta “But if twelve guards are not available” IBoT 1.36 i 11-12 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:6f., cf. 46; NINDA-aš–ši wātar nu hūman ša-ra-a artari UL–aš–ši–ššan kuitki waggāri “She has bread and water; everything is at (her) disposal; she lacks nothing” KBo 4.8 ii 9-10 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188; cf. HW2 and HED s.v.; cf. also Güterbock’s remarks (AfO 38-39:132-137) about the library catalogue entries; (“Are men and gods different? No. Their disposition is quite the same”) ÌR–ŠU kuwapi ANA EN–ŠU peran ša-ra-a artari “When a slave is standing ready (lit. upright) before his master” KUB 13.4 i 22 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 148f. (“stands before”), Süel, Direktif Metni 22f. (“huzuruna çıktı©ı zaman” lit. “önünde ayakta durdu©u zaman”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:217 (“stands before”).
b. š. eš- act. “to remain at hand”: ≠3?± URU-LUM andurza KÙ.BABBAR arahza […] / [š]a-ra-a ašanzi “ three(?) (models of) cities, silver on the inside, […] on the outside, remain at hand” KUB 42.84 obv. 1-2 (description of metal objects), ed. THeth 10:154f. (“are on top”), Siegelová, Verw. 126f. with n. 1 (who reads ŒÚ-LUM “Broschen” [brooches, pins], instead of URU-LUM) | for Hittite models of cities in gold and silver in votive texts see Hoffner, IEJ 19:178-180; compare the statements at the end of the following paragraphs (lines 4, 8, 10, 14, 22, 27) about the whereabouts of listed objects. 
c. š. handāi- “to make available, lay up”: namma apūn ÉRIN.MEŠ URUKašepūra EGIR-an–pat tiya nu–za NINDAtūmatin ša-ra-a mekki handāiddu ŠA MU–za–kan anku NINDAtūmatin ša-ra-a handāiddu “Then support that army of URUKašepura, and let it lay(?) up for itself much tūmati-bread; let it lay(?) up for itself even a year’s supply of tūmati-bread” HKM 24:53-56 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 162f. (“zurüsten,” “aufbereiten”); for a different usage of šarā handai- IBoT 1.36 i 57 in 1 a 15', above.
d. š. warišša- “to come to help”: našma LÚ.KÚR GUL-ahzi nu pË harzi zik–ma peran ša-ra-a UL wa[(rrišš)]atti nu LÚ.KÚR UL zahhiyaši “Or (if) an enemy attacks and holds (his gains), but you do not show up in advance available with help and you do not fight the enemy” KUB 21.1 iii 50-52 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iii 66-69, ed. SV 2:74f., tr. DiplTexts™ 91 (“lend assistance in advance”); cf. š. 1 c 5', above. 
4. (idiomatically, indicating completeness) — a. š. anš- “to wipe up”: [mar]ihšiwalit–ma–at SÍG-nit UGU ānšan Ëšdu “But let it (the evil sorcery) be wiped up with uncarded(?) wool” KUB 24.11 iii 11-12 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:44f. iii 25-26 (differently) | for marihšiwali-, a Luw. adj., see (SÍG)marihši- where the Luw. form marahšiwali- is cited from KUB 25.39 iv 5. When anš- takes a prev., it is usually arha, less often katta; use w. šarā is rare. 
b. š. ed-: see 1 a 12' above.
c. š. lukke-: see 1 a 28' above.
d. š. šannapilahh- “to empty (completely) out”: nu–wa–kan imma ÉSAG.HI.A kuiËšqa halluš eniuš–ma–wa–kan ÉSAG.HI.A karū mān ša-ra-a šannapilahhanteš “Some storage pits were quite deep; and these storage pits were as if already emptied out” KUB 31.71 iii! 8-11 (dream of the queen, NH), ed. Werner, FsOtten1 327f., van den Hout, AoF 21:310, 318, cf. mān 1 d and šannapilahh- | since the ÉSAG silos are dug into the ground (AlHeth 34-37, Seeher, SMEA 42:261-301) emptying them out entailed bringing things up, so this could just as well be šarā mng. 1.
e. š. šanh- “to clean (completely) out”: [t]akku ilaš kardi–šmi naššu–ma dUTU-waš [i]štarningaiš kardi–šmi n–at–kan ša-ra-a [š]āhten “If weakness is in your heart, or the ailment of the Sungod is in your heart, clean it (i.e., your heart) out” KUB 29.1 i 46-48 (foundation ritual, OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 12, 27, Marazzi, VO 5:152f.; (“Moreover, the water pipes (artahhiuš) [in (your) to]wn should [no]t be clogged”) n–aš–kan [(MU.KAM-ti)] MU.KAM-ti ša-ra-a šanheškandu “Therefore let them be cleaned out annually” KUB 31.89 ii 19-20 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.86 ii 31-32 + KUB 40.78:5-6, ed. StMed 14:122f., Dienstanw. 44, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:223; (“Let them patrol the water pipes (artahhiš) of the bath house, of the house of the cupbearer and of the portico, and inspect them”) kuiš–a–kan wetenaza šahāri n–an–kan ša-ra-a šanhandu “Let them clean out whatever one is clogged with (dirty) water” KUB 13.2 ii 22-23 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:132-135, Dienstanw. 45, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:223; cf. šanh-; cf. also VS 28.111 rev. 4.
f. š. šart- “to smear”: µPappan–a LÚuriannin ša-ra-a [(šarter)] “And (as a penalty) they smeared up Pappa, the urianni-man” KBo 3.34 i 7 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 48.77:3, ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 30f. w. n. 9 (“sciacquarono verso l'alto”), 78, Soysal, Diss. 10, 83 (“schleiften sie hinauf”), cf. StBoT 23:143 (“‘spülte’ man nach oben”), Mestieri 267 (“sopra spalmarono”), Melchert, JAOS 122:327 (“slap about the face, rough up”), Ünal, FsHoffner 397f.; cf. šart- a.
g. š. šunna-: see 1 a 46' above.
h. š. šuppiyahh- “to consecrate completely, perform the consecration completely”: haššan–kan peran d[āi] UGULA LÚ GIŠBANŠUR ša-ra-a šu[ppiyahhi] “(Someone) pl[aces] the brazier in front. The foreman of the table-men conse[crates] (it) completely” (or: splashes holy water upward (mng. 1) at it?) KBo 23.75 rev. 5-6 (fest. frag.); UGULA LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM haššÏ 3[-ŠU (šipanti UGULA LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBA)NŠ]UR ša-ra-a šuppiyahhi KUB 43.30 ii 2-3 (fest., OS), w. dupl. KBo 21.88 iii 4, translit. StBoT 25:76; UGULA LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR ša-ra-a šuppiyahhi KUB 43.30 ii 10 (fest., OS); cf. ibid. 3, 14, translit. StBoT 25 p. 77. 
i. š. tiya- — 1' “to be completed, covered (w. units of space)”: (“Then he drives back. He makes them run 10 IKUs”) [nu 3 DAN]NA ša-ra-a tÏËzzi “[and three DAN]NA’s are completed (by the horses)” KBo 3.5 iv 4 (Kikk. II, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 98f., w. n. 116 (cf. also ibid. 348, where a mistake for š. tittanu- is assumed); this would seem to be the intransitive counterpart of šarā tittanu- cf. 4 j, below.  For a different mng. see 1 a 52', above.
2' š. tiyant- “completely, (fully) provided”: [mān] tuk ANA DINGIR-LIM kūn EZEN›.ITU.KAM ša-ra-a tiyantan ≠Ëšš±anzi katta–kan UL kuitki dāliškanzi n[u] KIN SIGﬁ-ru “If they should perform this monthly festival for you, O god, completely, and not leave out anything, then let the KIN-oracle be favorable” KBo 14.21 i 25-27 (oracle question, NH), for [mān] cf. i 51; n–aš mān IŠTU GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A NINDA KAŠ U IŠTU GEŠTIN hūmandaz ša-ra-a tiyanta UL Ëššatteni “If you do not perform them (the festivals) fully provided with all the oxen, sheep, bread, beer, and wine” KUB 13.4 i 46-47 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f. (“you do not perform them set up with”), Süel, Direktif Metni 28f. (“(kurban masasının) üstüne konmu® … kutlamazsanız”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218 (“set up”); cf. ibid. i 50; nu m≠ān± […] ANA DINGIR-LIM EZEN› taršaš ša-ra-a tiya≠n±ta[n] Ëššanzi “If they should perform for the deity the festival of taršaš […] fully provided(?)” KBo 14.21 iii 51-53 (oracle question, NH); cf. EZEN› KA≈IM […]x–za–ma–aš ša-ra-a tiyanteš Ëššanzi KUB 58.15 i 5-6; šarā tiyant- could be the passive part. of šarā dai- “to place up” or it could be the active part. of šarā tiya- lit. “to step up” used as passive to šarā tittanu-; cf. approximate synonym šakuwaššar 1 b.
j. š. tittanu- (see also 1 a 53', above) — 1' “to finish, complete” — a' in general: nu–šmaš UD-aš ITU-aš MU-ti meyaniyaš SÍSKUR.HI.A EZEN›.HI.A kiššan ša-ra-a UL kuiški tittanuwan harta “No one finished the daily, monthly and annual rituals and festivals for you (pl.) (as we have)” KUB 17.21 i 21-23 (prayer of Arn. I and Ašm., MH/NS), ed. Kaškäer 152f. (“hat dargebracht”), Lebrun, Hymnes 134, 143 (“avait fait monter”), tr. ANET 399.
b' w. inf. “to finish (doing something), to (do something) completely”: nu tuel ŠA dUTU URUArinna himmuš SÍSKUR.HI.A EZEN›.HI.A iyauwanzi ša-ra-a tittanuškanzi “They finish worshipping your images, performing/celebrating your rituals and festivals, O Sungoddess of Arinna” KUB 24.3 i 23-25 (hymn and prayer of Murš. II), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:20f. (= ii 12-14) (“they continually carry out”), Lebrun, Hymnes 158, 167 (“on assure constamment la célébration”); LÚ.MEŠSIMUG.A–ma DINGIR-LAM KÙ.GI ienzi ANA DINGIR-LIM–ma aniūr–šet mahhan n–an aniyauwanzi 
QA_TAMMA ša-ra-a tittanuwanzi EGIR-an išga~
ranta–ya–šši NA›kunnanaš mahhan ŠA KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI … AŠ.ME.HI.A … n–aš iyauanzi QA_TAM~
MA ša-ra-a tittanuwanzi “The smiths make the god (of) gold. They finish making him (the god) according to the god’s (ritual) protocol. And they finish making the solar disks (etc.) in the same way as the things stuck on the back of it made of silver, gold, (and various precious stones)” KUB 29.4 i 6-9, 11-12 (rit. for dividing the Night Deity, NH), ed. StBoT 46:273f. (“they set up to fashion her new image … they set up to do likewise”), Schw.Gotth. 6f. (“bemühen sie sich, dieses (Götterbild) auszuführen … diese herzustellen, sind sie ebenso bemüht”), tr. Collins, CoS 1:173 (“they treat it for celebrating … they proceed to make in the same way”); nu–≠š±maš 1 ŠÂTU memal [and]a immiyanda pi[a]nzi ŠA HA.LA–ŠU–ya ha[l]kin ša-ra-a tittanuanzi “They g[i]ve them one S¨TU-measure of meal mixed [i]n and they finish making their gra[i]n ration” KUB 1.11 i 34-36 (Kikk. III, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 108f.; cf. Goetze, JCS 16:33. This usage is similar to inf. + zinna- or aš(ša)nu- and is the opposite of inf. + epp- or sup. + dai-/tiya-.
2' (w. units of time and space) “complete, fulfill, finish, cover” — a' (w. units of space) “to cover (a distance)”: (“In one day he drives two and a half DANNA. He makes them run in (anda) seven IKU. But when he drives them back, he makes them run in ten IKU”) nu 3 DANNA ša-ra-a tittanuanzi “They cover three DANNA” IBoT 2.136 iv 46 (Kikk. II, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 102f.; cf. KUB 2.12c i 7 (Kikk. I, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 56f. i 41-42; KUB 1.11 i 41 (Kikk. III, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 110f.; KBo 3.2 obv.! 3 (Kikk. IV, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 126f.; on this usage see Goetze, JCS 16:33 and Güterbock, JAOS 84:271; cf. 4 i, above; see also Melchert JCS 32:53-56.
b' (with obj. units of time) “to complete, finish, fulfill”: tepawe–wa–mu pedi pau[wanzi …] kuitman–wa–šši MU.KAM.HI.A kuiËš daranteš nu–war–aš–za ša-ra-[a] tittanuzi “[The Stormgod told me to] go to the tepu pedan until he shall fulfill (or: finish) the years which were decreed for him” KUB 33.106 ii 5-7 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f., tr. Hittite Myths2 62; (“For eight nights they bring them (i.e., the horses) up for driving six DANNA …”) nu kuitman 8 MU_ŠU ša-ra-a tittanuanzi “While they are completing the eight nights, (they continue to eat their rations)” KBo 3.5 i 61 (Kikkuli II, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth 84f.; (“If a woman is seated on the birthstool and […]”) ITU.HI.A–ya karū ša-ra-a tittanuzi “And she has already completed the months” KBo 27.67 rev. 2 (birth rit., NS), ed. StBoT 29:218f. (“piled up (i.e., completed)”), 220 (comments). 
k. š. warišša- see 3 d above.
šarā “upwards” appears to be a fossilized allative (case in -a) of an old ablauting noun, of which šËr “above” is the bare stem locative showing the e-grade of the root. Cf. tËgan/tagnā and pËr/parna. 
HroznŸ, SH (1917) 183 (“auf, über, hinüber” = Sum. UGU); Götze, Hatt. (1925) 70f. (“auf, hinauf,” answers the question “whither?,” not “where?”; list of exx. as preverb w. verbs of motion); Pedersen, ArOr 5 (1933) 180-182; Güterbock, JAOS 84 (1964) 271 (šarā tittanu- “cover a distance”); Otten/Souc√ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 49, 86; Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 220 (šarā tittanu-, temporal); Hoffner in FsGüterbock2 (1986) 88 (as a preverb, negated).
Cf. NINDAšarā marrant-, šarazzi(ya)- A, šarazziyahh-, šarazziyatar, šarazziyaz, šarazeške-, šËr.
(GIŠ)šarra- A n. com.; (an item of toiletry); NH.†
sg. nom. GIŠšar-ra-aš KUB 7.53 i 19 (NH), šar-ra-aš KUB 42.33:4 (NH); acc. GIŠšar-ra-an KUB 12.58 iii 6, 12 (NH).
(“If it is a man, a set of black tunics, a set of black leggings(?) (are used). They plug his ears with black wool. Nine small combs of boxwood”) 1 GIŠšar-ra-aš ŠA GIŠTAŠKARIN TUR “one small š. of boxwood, (two black TIYADUs, nine soldier-breads …)” KUB 7.53 i 19 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 4f. (“brush??”); kāša GIŠšar-ra-an harmi “Now I hold a š. (Whoever was disabling (arha šarra- lit. “separating off”; cf. šarra- D 2 a 1') for himself each of the (his) twelve body parts using an evil impurity, now I am separating off from each of your twelve body parts the evil impurity, sorcery, āštayaratar, anger of the gods, and fear of the dead. May they be separated off from him (sc. the patient))” [nu–]kan GIŠGA.ZUM.HI.A GIŠšar-ra-an pattar TÚGGÚ.È.[A GEﬂ TÚGGAD.DA]M GEﬂ kuit–ši–ššan kuit anda Ëš[ta n–a]t EGIR-an ÍD-i tarnai “The combs, the š., the basket, the [black] tuni[c], the black [leg]gings(?), whatever wa[s] on him, she consigns [i]t to the river” KUB 12.58 iii 6, 12-14 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 16f.; […] / 6 šar-ra-aš […] ŠUŠI 8 GA.ZUM SÍG Z[U·.AM.SI] “six š.-s, […] 68 i[vory] combs (for) wool, […]” KUB 42.33:4-5 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 68f. w. n. 3 (“Schaber” = scraper), translit. THeth 10:176f. (“spatula”). 
Since the word occurs with “comb” (GA.ZUM), Goetze guessed that it might have meant “brush.” However, because of a possible relation to the verb šarra/e- “to separate off,” the suggestion of Sommer, HAB 89f. (“ein Instrument zum Ausreißen von Haaren (Pinzette)”), that š. is an instrument with which things can be removed from a body, like tweezers or a scraper (cf. Košak, THeth 10:176f.; Siegelová, Verw. 69 w. n. 3) cannot be excluded.
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 52 (an article of toiletry made at least partially of wood, perhaps “brush”); Sommer, HAB (1938) 89f. (“ein Instrument zum Ausreißen von Haaren (Pinzette)”); Güterbock, apud HW (1952) 184; id., Oriens 10 (1957) 356 (perhaps “spatula”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 69 n. 3 (“Schaber, Schabemesser?”).
Cf. šarra- D/šarre- v., šarra- B n., (GIŠ)šarā- A.
šarra- B, šarran- n. com.; 1. portion, share, 2. (takšan šarra-) half part, half, 3. division, factional strife, dissension, alienation; from OH.
nom. šar-ra-aš KBo 10.7 ii 33 (NS), KBo 10.50:(4) (NS), KUB 48.119 rev.? 16, 17 (Tudh. IV), šar-ra-a-aš KBo 10.7 ii 37 (NS).
acc. šar-ra-an KUB 13.4 i 57, iv 18, 19 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 19.67 i 26 (Hatt. III), KUB 21.17 ii 2, 3 (Hatt. III), KUB 17.35 iii 10 (Tudh. IV), šar-ra-(ma-aš-ma-aš) KUB 17.35 iii 11 (Tudh. IV).
gen.? šar-ra-na-a[š] KUB 11.1 iv 16 (Tel./NS), šar-ra-aš KUB 13.4 i 56 (pre-NH/NS).
abl. šar-ra-az KBo 3.67 iv 6 (Tel./NS), KUB 21.19 i 12 (Hatt. III), šar-ra-na-za KUB 11.1 iv 18 (Tel./NS), šar-ra-an-za KUB 21.17 ii 2 (Hatt. III).
The n-stem forms come from KUB 11.1 (Tel. pr., NS) and KUB 21.17 ii 2 (Hatt. III). For šar-ra-na-za KUB 11.1 iv 8 the dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 6 offers šar-ra-az (see 1 a, below).
Given the lack of wordspace in […Š]A dU(-)šar-ra-an KUB 10.92 vi 17 (colophon, NS), we suppose it to be a divine name followed by a (Hurrian?) epithet (thus van Gessel, OHP 790) or a compound name.
1. portion, share: ANA DINGIR.MEŠ–za menahhanda KUR.KUR.HI.A URUHatti šar-ra-az ŠA dU URUNerik dU URUZippalanda DUMU–KA nakki~
yanni handa datta “You, (Sungoddess of Arinna,) as opposed to the (other) gods, took the Hatti lands as a share (abl. “sharewise”?) befitting the dignity of the Stormgod of Nerik (and) the Stormgod of Zippalanda, your son(s?)” KUB 21.19 i 11-13 (prayer to the Sungoddess of Arinna, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:88f. (“vom Anteil”), Lebrun, Hymnes 310, 317 (“comme part”), cf. Friedrich, HW 184 (“zu gleichen Teilen, halb und halb”), Haas, KN 108 (“zu gleichen Teilen”), Melchert, Diss. 368 (lists this passage under “adverbial ablatives” and translates “as your portion”); [ša]r-ra-aš 2 ZA.HUM KÙ.BABBAR ŠA dU […] / [ša]r-ra-aš 10 ZA.HUM KÙ.BABBAR ŠA dU […] / ŠA µ[Ša]rpa-dLAMMA § [š]ar-r[a-aš] dPirwaš ŠA LUG[AL …] šar-ra-aš dU É-TIM GAL ŠA x[…] U ŠA LUGAL URUTummann[a …] / “[A p]ortion (consisting of) two silver jugs belonging to the Stormgod […], [a po]rtion (consisting of) ten silver jugs belonging to the Stormgod […] of [Ša]rpa-LAMMA. § [A p]ort[ion] belonging to Pirwa of the Kin[g …] / A portion (belonging to) the Stormgod of the Palace (lit. big house) of […] and of the King of Tummann[a…] VBoT 108 i 16-21 (inv., NS); (“Concerning the fact that (the oracle) was unfavorable”) […] ŠA DINGIR-LIM šar-ra-aš ŠA DIN[GIR-LIM …] UL SI≈SÁ-at The portion of the deity (and) the […] of the deity was not ascertained” KUB 18.40 rev. 6-8 (oracle question, NH). 
2. takšan šarra- “half part, half”: (“Those who are lords of the army walk apart into two groups”) nu–kan takšan šar-ra-aš ANA µŠahurunuwa EGIR-anda tiyazi takšan šar-ra-aš–ma–kan ANA µLUGAL-dLAMMA EGIR-anda tiyazi “Half step behind Šahurunuwa, and half step behind LUGAL-aš-LAMMA” KUB 48.119 rev.? 16-18 (Tudh. IV), ed. del Monte, OA 17:180f., de Roos, Diss. 298, 438; (“They divide the young men into two (groups) (takšan arha šarra-) and name them”) nu–šmaš takšan šar-ra-an LÚ.MEŠ URUHatti halzeššanzi takšan šar-ra–ma–šmaš LÚ.MEŠ URUMāša halzišanzi “They call half of them ‘Men of Hatti’ and they call (the other) half of them ‘Men of Maša’ (… They fight)” KUB 17.35 iii 10-11 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 129, 143; (“I attacked those which were the chief towns of the Kaška, Halilaš and Dudduška”) n–aš IŠTU NAM.RA GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A [š]a-ra-a dahhun n–aš URUKÙ.BABBAR-ši arha udahhun “I took them up with their civilians to be resettled, cattle and sheep and brought them off to Hattuša” KBo 3.4 i 33-34 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 22f.; cf. ibid. iv 31-32, ed. AM 128-131; (“I did not take [it all]”) «[n]–at–za» takšan / šar-ra-an–za dahhun takšan šar-ra-an–ma ANA µ.dSÎN-dU EGIR-pa pehhun “I took half of it, and I gave back half to Arma-Tarhunta” KUB 21.17 ii 1-4 (Hatt. III), ed. THeth 4:22f. | emending to šar-ra-an«-za» is possible as well; (“When you farmers of the deity bring in the harvest”) nu takšan šar-ra-an mematteni takšan šar-ra-an–ma–za–kan anda šannatteni “you declare half, but (the other) half you conceal. (And later you proceed to divide it up among yourselves)” KUB 13.4 iv 18-20 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 76f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220; (If you temple personnel do not carry forth to the gods the things that you are required to) n–at takšan šar-ra-aš takšan šar-ra-an (var. šar-ra-aš) pešteni “(And) you give half of half (var. by halves) of it/them (-at)” KUB 13.4 i 56-57 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.63 i 5, ed. Chrest. 150f. (“share by share”), Süel, Direktif Metni 30f. (“yarım yarım”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218 (“(divided) into several portions”); cf. takšan šar-ra-an peškanzi KBo 14.21 i 80; KUB 16.31 iii 7; 2-an šar-ra-aš IBoT 4.42 obv. 10, KUB 16.53 obv.? (7) (all oracle questions, NH), KUB 26.69 vi 10, 14 (depos., NH), ed. StBoT 4:44f.; broken in KUB 31.76 i (2), and restorable in KUB 24.8 iv 23-25, w. dupls. KUB 43.70a:4-5 and KBo 26.85:3-4 (Appu), ed. StBoT 14:12f. 
3. division, factional strife, dissension: ANA DUMU.M[EŠ …] ištarna šar-ra-aš kÏšari “There will be division among the children […]” KBo 10.7 ii 32-33 (omen apodosis, NS), ed. DBH 12:27, 30 (“Zwist(?)”), 258; šar-ra-a-aš–kan (var. [šar-r]a-aš–kan) KUR-ya (var. KUR-e) an<(d)a> paizzi “Factional strife will enter the land” KBo 10.7 ii 37 (omen apodosis, NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.50 ii? 4, ed. DBH 12:27, 30, 258; mān UN-ši šar-ra-aš nak[kešzi] … […] šar-ra-an arha dānzi “If dissension haunts a man … […] They take away the dissension [from him?]” KUB 46.42 iii 5", 8" (rit., LNS); cf. ibid. 13; for a possible attestation of “division (of a god)” see KUB 46.40 obv. 1-3, s.v. šarra- D 2 a 3' b.
Götze, NBr (1930) 21-23; Friedrich, HW (1952) 184; Süren-hagen, AoF 8 (1981) 100f. 
Cf. šarra- C, šarra- D, ZITTU, HA.LA.
šarra- C in SISKUR šarraš n.; (mng. unkn.).†
sg. gen. šar-ra-aš KBo 33.20 i 1, KBo 23.42 rev. 29 (MH/ENS).
mān–za ANA dU kuiš SISKUR šar-ra-aš šipanti “If someone offers the sacrifice of š. to the Stormgod” KBo 33.20 i 1 (rit., MH/NS), ed. ChS I/2:125; cf. KBo 23.42 rev. 29 (rit., colophon of seventh tablet SISKUR šarraš, MH/ENS), ed. ChS 1/2:143'.
There are too many possibilities to be certain about this word. š. could be šarra- A (the implement), šarra- B/šarran- “portion, share,” or šarra- B “dissension” in an objective gen. (“ritual against ... ”). It is also possible that the Hurrian SISKUR šarrašši- “ritual of kingship” was considered by some Hittite scribes to be a Luwian genitival adjective and converted to a normal Hittite genitive.
Salvini/Wegner, ChS I/2/I (1986) 8 (“Ritual mit unklarer Benennung”); idem, ChS I/2/II: 93 (“Bezeichnung eines Rituals”).
Cf. šarra- A, B, D, šarrašši- B, C.
šarra- D, šarre-, šarriya/e- v., 1. to divide (up), distribute, apportion (to, w. d.-l.), to split up (act and mid.), 2. to divide by splitting off > to split, divide, separate (something, acc.) off, cut off, withhold (something) from (someone), 3. to cross, traverse, pass through, transgress (command, oath, etc.); from OS.
pres. sg. 2 šar-ra-at-ti KBo 10.12 ii 39, 46, iii 34 (Šupp. I), KBo 4.3 i 23, 32, 34 (Murš. II), KBo 4.10 obv. 15 (Tudh. IV).
sg. 3 šar-ra-a-i KUB 13.4 i 59 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 10.2 iii 16 (Šupp. I), KUB 40.13 obv.! 8, šar-ra-i KBo 5.9 ii 37 (Murš. II), KUB 27.68 i 11, ša-a-ar-ri KBo 29.133 iii 12 (MS), KUB 20.16 i (14) (MS), w. dupl. KBo 29.86 obv. (14) (MS), KUB 54.10 iii 14 (NS), šar-ri KUB 54.10 i 2, iii 3 (NS), KBo 29.116:6 (NS), ša-ar-ri KUB 35.4 iii 7, šar-re-e-ez-zi KBo 6.34 i 45 (MH/NS), šar-re-ez-zi KBo 6.34 ii 46, iii 20, 40, iv 7, KBo 21.10 i 6 (MH/NS), KBo 13.164 iv 8 (NS), KUB 30.24 ii 2 (NS), šar-ri-ia-zi KUB 5.6 iii 27 (NS), šar-ri-ia-iz-zi KUB 39.17 ii 2 (NS).
pl. 1 šar-ra-u-e-ni KUB 24.8 iv 5 (pre-NH/NS).
pl. 2 šar-ra-at-te-ni KUB 13.4 i 58, iv 20 (pre-NH/NS).
pl. 3 šar-ra-an-zi KBo 6.2 iii 8, 10, 11 (OS), KBo 6.3 ii 19, iii 10, 12, 13 (OH/NS), KUB 1.17 iii 29, 43 (OH/NS), KUB 17.21 iv 17 (MH/MS), KBo 16.27 ii (7), (12) (MH/MS), KUB 20.52 iv 11 (MH/NS), KUB 43.56 ii 26 (MH/NS?), KUB 17.35 iii 9 (Tudh. IV), KUB 49.101 i 9 (NH). 
pret. sg. 1 šar-ra-ah-hu-un KUB 21.17 ii 6 (Hatt. III).
sg. 3 šar-re-et KUB 36.106 rev. 5 (OS), KBo 2.5 iii 32 (Murš. II), šar-ri-i-e-et KUB 32.133 i 3 (Murš. II), šar-ra-aš KUB 23.72 rev. 3 (MH/MS), KUB 26.43 obv. (4), w. dupl. KBo 22.55 obv. (5) (Tudh. IV), ša-a-ar-aš SBo 1 Text 15:6, Bo 90/732:62 (OS).
pl. 1 šar-ru-me-en KUB 31.76 obv. 10 (NH), šar-ru-um-me-en ibid. 6, KUB 40.86 obv. 7 (NS), KUB 40.87:(2) (NS), KUB 40.91 iii 10 (NS).
pl. 3 šar-re-er KUB 17.21 iii 3, 8, 10 (MH/MS), KUB 31.124 ii (18) (MH/MS), Bo 69/673 obv.? 6 (Soysal, ZA 95:133f., OH/NS), KBo 22.6 iv (11) (OH?/NS), KUB 31.59 iii 12, KUB 33.98 iii 7, Bo 3617 i 9 (Otten/Siegelová, AfO 23:32, 34), šar-ri-i-e-er KUB 14.8 obv. 19, 36 (Murš. II), KBo 2.5 iv (13) (Murš. II), šar-ri-e-er 650/u + KUB 14.11 ii 6 (courtesy of Wilhelm., Murš. II), KUB 14.14 obv. (22) (Murš. II), Bo 3078 ii (8) (AfO 23:32f., 35)
imp. sg. 2 šar-ri KUB 29.4 iii 27 (NH), KUB 24.7 iii (66) (NS).
mid. pres. sg. 2 šar-ra-at-ta KBo 16.47:14 (MH/MS), KUB 14.1 obv. 42 (MH/MS), KBo 11.72 ii 38 (MH?/NS).
sg. 3 šar-ra-at-ta-ri KUB 26.62 i 42 (MS), KUB 13.7 i 8 (MH/NS), KBo 5.6 i 23 (Murš. II), KUB 25.3 iii 22 (NS), Bo 4897 iv 14 (Alp, Tempel 82), šar-ra-ta-ri KUB 10.21 ii 18 (OH/NS), šar-ra-at-ta KUB 1.16 ii 50 (OH/NS), KUB 23.68 rev. 27 (MH/NS), KUB 40.13 rev.! (13) (MH/NS), šar-ra-ad-da KBo 6.34 ii 11, 24 (MH/NS). 
pl. 2 šar-ra-ad-du-ma KBo 8.35 ii 16, 22 (MH/MS), KUB 26.87:9 (OH/NS), šar-ra-at-tu-ma KBo 3.28 ii 21 (OH/NS), KBo 3.27 obv. 25 (OH/NS). 
pl. 3 šar-ra-an-ta KBo 25.192 obv. 6 (MS), šar-ra-an-ta-ri IBoT 1.14:5, KBo 27.42 iii (4) (NS), IBoT 4.66 obv. 3 (NS). 
pret. sg. 1 šar-ra-ah-ha-at KUB 30.10 obv. 12 (OH/MS); sg. 3 šar-ra-at-ta-at KUB 14.1 rev. 20 (MH/MS), KUB 23.11 obv. 14 (MH/MS), KUB 23.72 obv. 14 (MH/MS), KUB 12.65 iii 11 (pre-NH/NS); pl. 3 šar-ra-an-ta-ti KUB 30.12 obv. 18 (MH/MS), šar-ra-an-da-at KBo 3.4 ii 53 (Murš. II), KUB 14.15 iii 30 (Murš. II), KBo 16.34:(9) (ENS?).
inf. šar-ru-ma-an-zi KUB 10.89 i 16 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 20.40 rt. col. 9 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 25.9 iv 33 (NS), KUB 41.42 iii 6! (NS), šar-ra-an-[n]a KUB 11.1 iv 17 (Tel./NS).
verbal subst. nom.-acc. šar-ru-mar KUB 2.8 ii 46, v 28 (OH/NS), KUB 10.81:9; gen. šar-ru-ma-aš KUB 13.4 i 57 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 42.16 ii? 9 (NS).
supine ša[(r-ri)-i]a-u-wa-an KUB 11.1 iv 14 (Tel., NS),  w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 1 (NS), šar-ri-ia-u-an KUB 43.70a:2 (NS).
part. sg. com. nom. šar-ra-an-za KUB 50.93 iv 12 (NH), KUB 46.40 obv. 1 (NH).
neut. nom.-acc. šar-ra-an KBo 16.25 i 34 (MH/MS), KBo 5.7 rev. (8), 22, (23), 25, KUB 13.4 iii 18 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 31.76 i 2 (NH), šar-ra-a<-an> KBo 5.7 rev. 9 (MS).
pl. nom.-acc. šar!?-ra-an-ta KBo 11.32 rev. 58 (NS).
broken šar-ri-ia-u-w[a-…] KBo 22.120:9 (NS), w. dupl. šar-ra-u-w[a-…] KBo 20.49:17 (MS), šar-ri-ia-an[-…] KBo 10.7 ii 40 (NS).
imperf. pres. sg. 1 šar-ri-iš-ki-mi KUB 12.58 iii 10 (NH); sg. 2 šar-re-eš-ki-ši KUB 31.127 + KUB 36.79 i 31 (OH/NS); sg. 3 šar-re-eš-ki-iz-zi KUB 13.4 iii 5 (pre-NH/NS), šar-ri-iš-ki-iz-zi Hulin, AnSt 20:156:5.
pl. 3 [ša]r-ri-iš-kán-zi KBo 10.18 rt. col. 6 (NS), šar-ra-aš-kán-zi KBo 32.13 iii 2 (MH/MS), KUB 11.34 iv (10) (MS or ENS), šar-re-eš-kán-zi KBo 15.69 i (7) (MH/NS), KUB 20.40 rt. col. 7, KBo 25.184 ii 15 (NS).
pret. sg. 2 šar-ri-[iš]-ki-it KUB 12.58 iii 7 (NH); sg. 3 šar-ra-aš-ki-it KUB 23.72 obv. 37 (MH/MS). 
pl. 3 šar-ri-iš-ker KBo 4.4 ii 9 (Murš. II), [šar-r]e-eš-ker KBo 4.4 i 46 (Murš. II).
mid. pres. sg. 2 šar-ra-aš-ki-it-ta KUB 36.75 + Bo 4696 i 8 (OH/MS) (Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:231f.), KUB 31.133:(11) (OH/NS), KUB 31.134:(4) (OH/MS), [ša]r-ri-iš-ki-it-ta KUB 24.3 i 55 (Murš. II); sg. 3 šar-ra-aš-ki-it-ta KUB 13.5 ii 13 (pre-NH/NS), šar-re-eš-kat-ta KUB 13.5 iii 31 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 13.4 iii 61 (pre-NH/NS), [šar-re]-eš-kat-ta!-ri KUB 13.6 iii 12 (all pre-NH/NS).
pl. 2 šar-ra-aš-ki-it-tum-ma KUB 34.75:5 (MS); pl. 3 ≠šar-ri±-iš-kán-ta-ri KUB 43.22 iv 7.
verbal subst. nom.-acc. šar-ra-aš-ki-u-wa-ar KBo 13.2 rev. 6 (NS).
The oldest texts show a root thematic class verb, mi-conjugation with diagnostic forms šarrezzi, šarranzi, šarret, šarrer, šarratta, šarra/eške- (Oettinger, Stammbildung 287).
NS forms presupposing a stem šarr(i)ye-: šar-ri-i-e-et KUB 32.133 i 3 (Murš. II), šar-ri-i-e-er KUB 14.8 obv. 19, 36, KBo 2.5 iv (13), šar-ri-e-er 650/u + KUB 14.11 ii 6, KUB 14.14 obv. (22) (all Murš. II), ša[(r-ri)-i]a-u-wa-an KUB 11.1 iv 14, w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 1 (both Tel./NS), KUB 43.70a:2, as well as the broken šar-ri-ia-an[-…] KBo 10.7 ii 40. 
All hi-conjugation forms (šuhha-class II 2 a and lāg- class II 1 b) are secondary and belong to the late MH and NH periods (for II 2 a forms see Stammbildung 287f. and for II 1 b forms see Stammbildung 425 and ša-a-ar-ri, above). 
(Sum.) [NAM.TAG.MU] = (Akk.) [se-er-t]i = (Hitt.) šar-ra-aš-ki-u-wa-ar KBo 13.2 rev. 6, for restorations see MSL 13 pp. 47, 221.
(Akk.) ištu riksÏ–kunu lā te-ti-qá-ma “You must not overstep your regulations” KBo 1.1 rev. 23 (Šattiwaza treaty), ed. Weidner, PD 24f. = (Hitt.) nu–kan išhiu[l–šemet ?] / [lË šar-ra-a]t-te-ni “You [must not transgres]s [your(?)] treaty” KUB 26.34 rev. 5-6, ed. Laroche, Ugar. 6:369f.
1. to divide (up), distribute, apportion, split up (act. and mid.) — a. w. obj. of act.subj. in mid.) (no particles) — 1' act.: (“There remain, however, twelve oxen and 300 sheep”) n–an huišwandan šar-ra-an-zi “They divide them up (into groups) alive” KUB 9.3 iv 8-9 (fest. for Telipinu, MS), ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:61f.; cf. KUB 53.17 ii 17 (fest. for a prince, NS); cf. KUB 53.4 rev. 15-18 (fest. for Telipinu, NS); cf. also Law § 53 quoted below 1 c 1'; (“Thus speak the goldsmiths: ‘[Wh]en(?) they brought out the silver cups and the … andāuwandana’”) [Éar]zanaš GAL.HI.A andāuwantann–a [an]zāš LÚ.MEŠKÙ.DÍM šar-ru-me-en “‘we goldsmiths divided up the cups (and) andāuwantanna of the arzana-house’” KUB 31.76 obv. 9-10 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:22f. (differently); cf. KUB 40.86 obv. 7; (“The haliyami-men place a taparwašu-bread beside the brazier”) t–an šar-ra-an-zi § kuitman–ma NINDAtaparwaašu[n] šar-re-eš-kán-zi LÚ.MEŠGAL[A SÌR-RU?] § mahhan–ma NINDAtaparwaašu šar-ru-ma-an-zi tarup[tari] “and they divide it (up). § While they are dividing up the taparwašu-bread, the lamentation-priests [sing]. § But when the dividing up of the taparwašu-bread is finished, (the barbers sweep the ground)” KUB 20.40 rt. col. 5-9 (monthly fest., NS), ed. StBoT 37:520f., w. rest. after par. KUB 10.89 i 16-17; GAL LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI LUGAL-i tarkummiyaizzi NINDAtaparwašuš waššūwanzi NINDAwagatašš–a šar-ru-ma-an-zi “The chief of the bodyguards announces to the king the covering of the taparwašu-breads and the dividing of the wagata-breads” KUB 25.9 iv 31-33 (fest. at Arinna, NS), ed. Gonnet, Mém.Atatürk 64f.; NINDA.GUR›.R[A] paršiya t–an šar-ra-a[n-zi] KBo 30.153 iii 5-6 (fest. naming NIN.DINGIR, NS); […] NINDA.ZU·.HI.A šar-ra-an-zi KBo 20.61 ii 15 (storm fest., OS?); [NINDA Ì.E.D]É.A šar-ra-an-zi VBoT 34 rev. 6 (ANDAHŠUM-fest.); nu ikunan UZU.Ì šar-ra-an-zi “They divide up cold (solidified?) fat” KBo 4.9 v 47 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH?/NS), ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:54f.; [(LÚ.MEŠ KAŠ.LÀL)] KAŠ.LÀL šar-ra-an-zi “The mead(?)-men apportion the mead(?)” KBo 22.195 ii 5-6 (OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 25.12 ii 8f. (OS), ed. StBoT 28:34, StBoT 27:75 (“The mead men distribute mead”); [(m)]ān–aš (var. C: mān) attiš TI-išwanteš šar-ra-na-a[š? šer?] / [kuw]atqa weriezzi kuit–ašta!(text: kuit-ašša, var. A -ašta) šar-ra-an-[n]a KA≈U-az weriezzi n–ašta É-erza parā peššiyandu n–aš–kan šar-ra-na-za–pat (var. šar-ra-az–pat) šamendu “If he calls on them, his living ‘fathers’ (i.e., parents?) at some point (kuwatqa) concerning a share (of the patrimony), whatever he orally asks to divide up (or: to be divided up), let them expel (him) from the household. Let him forfeit the aforementioned share” KUB 11.1 iv 16-18 (Tel. pr., OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 12.7:1-3 (A), KBo 3.67 iv 3-6 (C), ed. THeth 11:52f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:198 | alternatively, following the variant reading mān and reading šaran–a[šta] one can also translate “If (his) parents are (still) alive and he demands (his) share […] at some point”; uncertain because broken […]x GIŠwarhušdu šar-ra-an-zi KUB 55.5 iv 25 (nuntarriyašha-fest., NS), ed. Nakamura, Nuntarrijašha- 51, 53, translit. StBoT 15:20; namma–kan GEŠTIN IŠTU É dM[(aliya)] ŠA 3 DUG GEŠTIN šar-ra-an-zi “Then they divide up wine from the temple of Maliya from (lit. of) three wine vessels (and they carry it to five temples in different vessels)” KUB 20.49 i 1-2 (hišuwaš-fest., MH/NS) | the particle is probably because of the ablatival noun phrase; cf also 1 a 6', below. 
2' mid. used as passive: (Everyone is seated for the banquet) TU‡.HI.A takšan šar-ra-at-ta-ri “The stews are divided in half (… The stews are finished)” KUB 20.76 i 15 (fest., NS), ed. Gonnet, Mém.Atatürk 48f. (“est répartie”); TU‡.HI.A 2-an šar-ra-ta-ri KUB 10.21 ii 17-18 (fest., OH/NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 83f.; for other exx. see StBoT 5:153 §4; [GIM-an–m(a TU‡.HI.A h)]anti šar-ra-an-ta-ri “And [when] the stews are divided into separate portions” IBoT 4.66 obv. 3 (winter fest., NS), w. dupl. KUB 20.68 i 4. 
3' middle — a' w. arha: (“Uhha-ziti died in the midst of the sea”) DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU«NU»–ma–za arha šar-ra-an-da-at “His sons, however, split up. (One was still in the midst of the sea, while the other, Tapalazunauli, came away from the sea)” KBo 3.4 ii 52-53, ed. AM 60f.; (“The enemy arrives at night”) namma–aš arha šar-ra-at-ta-ri “and then splits up (i.e., deploys)” KBo 5.6 i 22-23 (DŠ frag. 28), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:91 (“deploy”); cf. [… LÚ.M]EŠ URUHušutila arha šar-ra-an-t[a-at] KBo 16.34:9 (hist., pre-NS/ENS?).
b' w. hanti: (“I went […]”) ÉRIN.MEŠ-az–miš–a hanti šar-ra-at-ta-ti “But my troops split up into separate (groups)” KUB 58.48 iv 15-16 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. van den Hout, JNES 50:194, 196; ÉRIN.MEŠ-az panku[š] handi šar-ra-at-ta-ri “All the troops will split up into separate (groups). (People will sell their own children)” KUB 34.14 + KBo 34.122 iii 11-12 (omen apodosis, NS), ed. DBH 12:122 (“wird zweigeteilt werden”); cf. 1 a 2'.
4' verbal noun: [… TÚGik]kuwaniya šar-ru-ma-aš “[so-many garments] of the city of Ikkuwaniya for distribution” KUB 42.16 ii? 9 (inv.), ed. THeth 10:39, 41 (“divided”), Siegelová, Verw. 408f. (“der Teilung”), cf. Neu, GsKronasser 133.
5' w. takšan arha/arha takšan “divide into half/into two (groups): LÚ.MEŠGURUŠ takšan arha šar-ra-an-zi “They divide the young men into two (groups) (They name them. Half (takšan šarran) of them they call the ‘Men of Hatti’ and half of them they call the ‘Men of Maša’)” KUB 17.35 iii 9 (cult inv., NH), ed. Ehelolf, SPAW 1925:270, Carter, Diss. 129, 143; cf. KUB 29.45 i 7, ed. Hipp. heth. 170f.
6' w. hanti: (After bringing wine from the temple of Maliya to various temples of other deities) NINDA–ya–kan IŠTU É dMāliya–pat ANA GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A–ŠUNU–šan Ékarimni Ékarimni hantÏ šar-ra-an-zi “And the bread from the same temple of Maliya they divide up individually temple by temple for their tables” KBo 20.114 vi 20-24 (hišuwaš-fest., MH/NS) | for the particle -kan see 1 a 1' last ex., above.
7' w. arha hanti (mng. uncertain): [(nu–šša)]n MUNUStarpašganaš pËdi [w]ahnuškiwan dā[i] § [mā(n? MUNUStar)]pašganaš wahnumanzi KASKAL-an a[(rha hanti ša-a-)]ar-ri “A tarpašgana-woman begins to dance (lit. turn or whirl) in place. § When(?) the tarpašgana-woman …(?)’s the path for dancing (lit. turning), (they give her a bronze cup)” KBo 29.86 obv. 12-14 (cult of Huwaššanna, MS), w. dupl. KUB 20.16 i 13-14 (MS) | is she ‘cutting’ a path in the crowd for her to dance?; (“Or the enemy will strike”) [… (arha)] hanti šar-ri-ia-an[-…] KBo 10.7 ii 39-40 (omen apodosis, NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.50 ii 7, ed. DBH 12:27, 30 (“[das Heer(?)] wird zweigeteilt(?) werden”).
b. w. dir. obj. (expressed or implied) in acc. and noun or pronoun as indirect obj. in d.-l. — 1' without arha: [µŠ]ahurunuwaš–za GAL NA.GADA ANA DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU É–SU kišan šar-[r(a-aš)] “Šahurunuwa, the chief NA.GADA, divided his own estate among his children as follows” KUB 26.43 obv. 4 (confirmation of a will, Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KBo 22.55 obv. 5, ed. Imparati, RHA XXXII 24f., 207 n. 1 | -za has possessive value (“own”); ŠA µHappuwaššu GAL DUMU.MEŠ.É.GAL ANA DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU ša-a-ar-aš LUGAL.GAL ISSˆ–MA ANA Labarna DUMU.LUGAL IDDIN “The great king has appropriated what Happuwaššu, the chief of palace attendants had divided among his sons, and assigned (it) to Labarna, the prince” Bo 90/732:62-63 (land deed, OS) (courtesy G. Wilhelm); cf. similarly SBo 1 Text 15:6, translit. LS 342 | for broken spellings (-VC-VC-) to write intervocalical double consonants see Hoffner/Melchert, grammar forthcoming; apāt–ma hūman (i.e., five GUZ.ZA cloths) ANA É.GIŠ.KIN.TI šar-ra-an-zi “But they apportion all that to the workshop” KUB 52.96 obv. 7-8 (inv., NS), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 358f. (“verteilt man an die Werkstatt”), tr. Archi, KUB 52 Inhaltsübersicht no. 96; (“They put down soldier-breads, but they pick these up (again) and carry them out”) <<MUNUS.MEŠ!>> MUNUS.MEŠtaptari šar-re-eš-kán-zi “They apportion (them) to the female mourners” KBo 25.184 ii 15 (funerary rit., NS), ed. van den Hout, ICH 2:202, 207 (differently); (“He breaks one thick bread”) n–an [DINGIR.MEŠ-aš] hazziwiaš pËdaš šar-ra-i “He apportions it to the cult places [of the gods]” KUB 27.68 i 10 (fest. of Nerik, NS), ed. Haas, KN 300f. (“und zerteilt es”); cf. also peda- A d 1' e'; ta LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR TU‡ Ì tianzi ta hūmanti šar-ra-an-zi “And the table-servers set out oily stew/soup. And they apportion (it) to every person” KUB 25.9 iv 18-20 (fest. at Arinna, NS), ed. Gonnet, MémAtatürk 62f.; cf. IBoT 1.14:4-5, ed. Alp, Tempel 77f.; (“The table-servers put down tooth-bread, cheese and fruit […]”) Éhilamni pera[n] hūmanti–ya šar-ra-an-zi “They apportion (it) in front of the portico also to everyone” KBo 17.75 iv 15 (storm fest., OH/NS); cf. IBoT 1.29 rev. 10-13 (fest. of procreation, MH?/MS?); nu walhi ANA DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL <LÚ>MEŠEDIHI.A hūmandāš ašešni–ya hūmanti šar-ra-an-zi “They apportion walhi-beverage to all the palace servants, royal bodyguards, and to the entire congregation” KUB 1.17 iii 40-43 (fest. of the month, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 37:430f. 
2' w. arha: (Concerning the following provisions which are prepared …) nu hūmanti [«ar]ha» (partially erased) arha šar-ra-an-zi “They divide (them) up for each (participant)” KUB 32.123 ii 41-42 (Ištanuwian fest., NS); cf. KBo 24.28 + KBo 29.70 iv 13-14; KBo 13.164 iv 8; KBo 29.133 + KBo 34.222 iii 11-12; KAK.HI.A–ŠUNU–ma–šši šer arha šar-ra-an-du “Let them divide(?) their pegs(?) over him/it” KUB 24.7 iii 69, ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:230f. (“Sie sollen aber ihre Pflöcke über ihm abbrechen”), tr. Hittite Myths 66 (“Let them … their pegs away from over him”); cf. Hoffner, FsLacheman 193 (no tr.).
c. w. obj. and -za or a corresponding clitic pron. co-referential with the subj. of the verb — 1' without arha: (“If a man having a GIŠTUKUL-obligation and his associate live together, if they have a falling out”) [(t)]a–z É–SUNU šar-ra-an-zi “and they divide their household among themselves, (if there are ten persons (lit. heads) on his land, the man having a GIŠTUKUL obligation takes seven, and the associate takes three)” GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A gimra–šaš Q[(¸TAMMA)] / šar-ra-an-zi “They divide the cattle and sheep on his land in the same way. (If someone holds a royal grant by tablet)” mān–za A.ŠÀ.HI.A-n–a (var. mān–za–an A.ŠÀ.HI.A-an) k[(arūilin)] šar-ra-an-zi “(or) if they divide old (i.e., inherited?) land among themselves (then the man having a GIŠTUKUL obligation takes 2/3 (lit. two parts/shares), and the associate takes 1/3 (lit. one part))” KBo 6.2 iii 8-11 (Law §53, OS), w. dupls KBo 6.3 iii 10-13 (OH/NS), KBo 6.6 i 13-17 (OH/NS), ed. LH 64f., HG 34f.; (“When the sons of Appu grew up, … the evil brother spoke to the just brother”) [weš]–a–wa–za šar-ra-u-e-ni nu–wa–nnaš a[rhayan e]šuwaštati … [n]u–za LÚ.HUL-aš LÚ.NÍG.SI.SÁ-ašš–[(a) š(ar-ri-ia-u-an)] dāer … nu–z[a takšan šarran] LÚ.HUL-aš ŠEŠ-aš dā[(š) nu takšan ša]rran <ANA> LÚ.NÍG.S[I.S(Á ŠEŠ-iš)-š(i pāiš)] “Let us divide (our estate) among ourselves and live se[parately]. … Evil and Just began dividing among themselves. … Brother Evil took [a half-part] for himself and gave [a half-p]art to his brother Just” KUB 24.8 iv 5-6, 21-25 (Appu myth, pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 26.85:1-4, KUB 43.70a:2-5, ed. StBoT 14:12f., tr. LMI 170f., Hittite Myths™ 84; cf. KUB 11.1 iv 14, w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 1 (Tel.pr. OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:52f.; and cf. KUB 11.1 iv 16-18, w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 3-6, cited 1 a 1', above.
2' w. arha: (“When the gods established heaven and earth”) [(nu–za DINGIR.MEŠ)] arha šar-re-er (dupl. [šar-r]i-e-er) “the gods divided (them) up among themselves, (the heavenly gods took heaven and the underworld gods took the earth and the underworld. So each took something for himself)” Bo 3617 i 8-12 (mythology in rit.), w. dupl. Bo 3078 ii 9 and KBo 13.104 + Bo 6464 ii 5, ed. Otten/Siegelová, AfO 23:32, 34-35; namma–šmaš hāli arha šar-ra-an Ëšdu “Then let the watch be divided up among you” KUB 13.4 iii 18 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 158f., Süel, Direktif Metni 56f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:219; (“Or when you fill (the god’s granary with) grain, half you declare, but half you conceal”) nu–šmaš–an uwatteni EGIR-zian arha šar-ra-at-te-ni “Later you proceed to divide it up among yourselves” KUB 13.4 iv 20, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 76f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220; (“They (i.e., the Kaška) plundered the silver, gold, rhyta, cups of silver, gold, and copper, your bronze implements and your garments”) n–at–za arha šar-re-er § LÚ.MEŠSANGA šuppaeš–a–za … LÚ.MEŠAPIN.LAL LÚ.MEŠNU.KIRIﬂ arha [(šar-re-e)]r nu–uš–za ÌR-nahher § GUD.HI.A–KUNU–y[(a–šmaš UDU.HI.A–K)]UNU arha šar-re-er A.ŠÀ A.GÀR.HI.A–K[(UNU–ma–z NINDAharš)]ayaš GIŠKIRIﬂ.GESTIN.HI.A DUGišpant[(uzziyaš)] arha šar-re-er “They divided them up among themselves. § Also the consecrated priests, … the farmers (and) the gardiners they divided up among themselves, and enslaved them. § Your cattle (and) your sheep they divided up for themselves. And your fields and meadows, thick breads, vineyards, (and) offering vessels they divided up among themselves. (The Kaškeans took them for themselves)” KUB 17.21 iii 3-4, 6-10 (prayer of Arn. and Ašm., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 31.124 ii 15-21, KUB 48.108 iii 1-4, ed. Kaškäer 156-159 (“haben … unter sich aufgeteilt”), Lebrun, Hymnes 137, 145 (“ils se sont partagé”), differently Goetze, Tunn. 45 (“took possession of”), ANET 399 (“They shared out these things among themselves”); (“The singers and the temple men take for themselves (-za da-) the [dough(?)] of the kneeding trough (and) cheese”) UZUšuppa–z huišu arha šar-ra-an-zi “They divide up the raw meat among themselves” KUB 17.24 ii 7 (witaššiaš-fest., pre-NH?/NS); (“In the time of the father of His Majesty we stole two cups of mitešna-silver”) nu–war–aš–za µŠEŠ-anza, µ3-ašša-x[…] ammuk µMudareš arha šar-ru-um-me-en “and we — Nananza, 3-ašša[…] and I, Mudari — divided them up among ourselves. (For each of the three shares (lit. places) there were twenty shekels, that was a total of one mina twenty shekels. I sold mine to Karpani, the merchant)” KUB 40.91 iii 9-10 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:30; cf. KUB 31.76 obv. 5-6 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:22f.; (“Then before Hebat they libate two cups filled with wine. They hand them (the cups) over. Those who carry the gods (i.e., their statues)”) n–an–za arha šar-ra-an-zi “divide it (i.e., the wine) up among themselves” KBo 21.34 i 54 (fest., MH/NS); cf. KUB 12.58 iii 6-11, above, 1 b 2'.
3' w. takšan: (If a free man and a slave girl are single, and they live together and have children, but later become estranged or each finds a new partner …) nu–za É-er takšan šar-ra-an-zi “They shall divide up the house(hold) equally among themselves. (And the man shall take the children, with the woman taking one child)” KBo 6.3 ii 19 (Law §31, OH/NS), ed. LH 40, 184f. | for šieleš “single” see Hoffner, FsdeRoos (forthcoming).
4' w. arha takšan: n–at–za MUNUShuwaššanale[š / LÚ.MEŠ(?)] ≠É.DINGIR±-LIM–ya arha takšan šar-ra-an-zi “The huwaššanalli-women and the temple [personnel] divide them (i.e., the tables) into two (groups)” KUB 54.13 obv. 10-11 (cult of Huwaššanna, NS), translit. StBoT 15:24; cf. KBo 29.141 rt. col. 9 (NS), w. dupl. KBo 29.142:5 (MS).
2. to divide by splitting off > to split, divide, separate (something, acc.) off, to cut off, withhold (something, acc.) from (someone, d.-l.) — a. to split, separate (something, acc.) off (usu. w. -ašta or -kan, sometimes w. arha) — 1' in general: (As soon as she finishes [her spell]) nu šenuš namma [o-o-o-o]-zi n–aš–kan mān šar-ra-ad-da-ri “she again […-]s the images, and when she separates them off, (she places some on the left and some on the right)” KUB 24.13 iii 6-7 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Goetze, Tunn. 72f. (“departs”), Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:106f. (“aufteilt”), tr. Kronasser, EHS 1:504 (“entfernt sich(?)”); nu–kan apāt kuit arha karū šar-ra-an namma–ya–kan EGIR-an x[…] NA›NUNUZ arha šar-ra-an-zi 
KI<.MIN> “Regarding that which has been already separated off, they will later even further separate off the bead(s)(?). ‘Ditto’ (meaning repetition of the question: Is the god angry on this account?)” KUB 49.101 i 8-9 (oracle question, NH); naššu LÚ-ni našma MUNUS-ni paprannaš uddananza UZUÚR.HI.A-ša arha šar-ra-an §… kāša GIŠšarran harmi nu–za kuiš 12 UZU[ÚR] idalauwaz paprannaz arha šar-ri-[iš]-ki-it kinuna–tta IŠTU 12 UZUÚR idalu papratar alwazatar āštayaratar DINGIR.MEŠ-aš karpin aggandaš hatugatar awan arha šar-ri-iš-ki-mi [n–a]t–ši awan arha šar-ra-an Ëšdu “Or (if) a man’s or a woman’s bodyparts are disabled (lit. separated off) with a word/words of impurity. §… Now I am holding a šarra-. Whoever was disabling (lit. separating off) each (-ške-) of (his) twelve body parts using an evil impurity, now I am separating off from each of your twelve body parts the evil impurity, sorcery, āštayaratar, anger of the gods, and fear of the dead. May they be separated off from him (sc. the patient)” KUB 7.53 i 5-6 followed KUB 12.58 iii 6-11 as part of the same tablet (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 4f. and 16f. (“who disabled,” “am breaking clear,” “be broken clear”), but cf. HAB 89f. (“reissen”), differently Kronasser, EHS 1:504 (“entfernen”); cf. KUB 7.53 i 6, ed. Tunn. 4f. | Goetze’s tr. “disabled” is understandable if a person’s limbs are separated from his/her control. The person affected is indicated either by -za (if identical to the subject of the clause), an enclitic pronoun (-tta, -ši) or a dat.-loc. of a noun (LÚ-ni, MUNUS-ni). Word associations help magic work: GIŠšarra- q.v. alternates with the verb š.
2' (from something) w. abl. and -ašta or -kan:   (“15 \ IKU of field”) INA KASKAL URUHatti–kan ZAG-az 28 IKU UŠALLUM RE_T GUD.HI.A [IŠTU] É LÚurianni–kan ZAG-az šar-ra-an 18 IKU A.ŠÀ IŠTU É dHalara–ka[n š]ar-ra-an 2 \ IKU 3 gipeššar GIŠTIR n–ašta anda 3 ME 25 GIŠ.HI.A 1-NUTIM É.HI.A ŠA É µKarpani É ƒZithariya kuit n–ašta apËz šar-ra-an “on the Hattuša road, on the right. Twenty-eight IKU of field, meadow for pasturing cattle, split off(?) from the estate of the urianni-official, on the right. Eighteen IKU of field split off/separated from the temple (lands) of Halara. Two and a half IKU three gipeššar of orchard, in which there are three hundred twenty-five trees. One building complex, which belongs to the estates of Karpani and Zithari, split off/separated from those” KBo 5.7 rev. 21-25 (LSU 1, MH/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:350f. (“getrennt, abgetrennt”); cf. ibid. 8, 9.
3' to split off a deity by creating a duplicate cult statue, temple and cult for the deity elsewhere — a' act., w. and without abl., w. -kan and sometimes -za: DINGIR-LIM-niyatar–ma–za–kan šar-ri “Divide off your divinity. (Come to those new temples)” KUB 29.4 iii 26-27 (rit. for the division of the deity of the night), ed. StBoT 46:289f., SchwGotth 24f. (“Nimm dein Götterbild in Besitz”), tr. Collins, CoS 1:175 (“divide your divinity”), cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:505, and cf. Oettinger, Stammbildung 290 n. 65 (“verlass”), Goetze, Tunn. 45 (“show possession”); ABBA–YA–za–kan kuwapi µDudhaliyaš LUGAL.GAL DINGIR GEﬂ IŠTU É DINGIR GEﬂ URUKizzuwatni arha šar-ri-i-e-et “When my ancestor, Tudhaliya, the Great King, divided the Deity of the Night off from the temple of the Deity of the Night in Kizzuwatna (and worshipped her separately in a temple in Šamuha)” KUB 32.133 i 2-3 (Murš. II’s division of the deity of the night), ed. THeth 46:312, SchwGotth 58, cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:504f. (“brachte weg, siedelte um”); DINGIR-LIM–ma–kan kuiš arha šar-ru-m[a-an-z]i SI≈SÁ-at “The god who was determined for division (and for transportation to the town Zithara)” KUB 5.6 ii 70-71 (oracle question, NH), cf. AU 285 (“abgebrochen”), retracted in HAB 89f., 243, differently Kronasser, EHS 1:532 (“zum Wegbringen”); namma–za–kan dLIŠ URUŠamuhi ANA PA_N ŠEŠ–YA šar-ra-ah-hu-un nu–šši É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ INA URUUrikina iyanun “Then during the reign of my brother (Muwatalli II) I divided Šaušga in Šamuha, and I made (new) temples for her in Urikina” KUB 21.17 ii 5-6 (Hatt. III), cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:532, differently Goetze, Tunn. 45 (“took possession”); cf. KUB 50.93 iv 12 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 5.6 iii 27 (oracle question, NH), reading after Friedrich, HW 184 and Oettinger, Stammbildung 284, different tr. Kronasser, EHS 1:532 (“transportieren”). It seems unlikely that Hattušili would have been allowed to remove the chief deity of an important Hittite city to another city. Also, it seems in keeping with šarra-’s usual meaning “to divide” that he divided the divinity’s cult, leaving the original statue and cult in Šamuha, while starting a new cult for the same deity in Urikina. See Beal, Magic and Ritual 197-208.
b' participle: BE!-an–kan UN-ši DINGIR šar-ra-an-za UN-an–ma […] / [n]–at–za DÙ-zi n–at BE-an TA ŠUTI an[da] aranna SI≈SÁ-ri nu[…] / BE-an–ši šarraš–ma TA IKRIBI anda aranna UL SI≈SÁ-ri “If for a person a deity is to be divided but/and […] the person (obj.), he will worship it (i.e., the divine statue(?), or: he will make it his own(?)). If it (i.e., the statue(?)) is ascertained to be attained (by him, lit.: to come to him) through a dream (Akk. šuttu), then […], but if the division is not ascertained to be attained by him (lit.: to come to him) because of a vow, then […]” KUB 46.40 obv. 1-3 (NS) | the translation given here is tentative only; the opposition between the alternatives mentioned may be in the fact that dreams were often followed up by vows which may have been mentioned in the break at the end of line 2. 
b. to cut off, withhold (something, acc.) from (someone, dat.-loc.): kunn–a–wa–šši Ú.SAL-LAM dUTU-uš āra iyan hark nu–war–a(n)–ši–ššan šar-re-ez-zi hannari lË kuiški “O Sungod, keep making this meadow proper for him. Let no one withhold it from him (or) contest (his right to it)” KUB 30.24 ii 1-2, ed. Kassian et al., Funerary 384f. (“take it away from him”), HTR 60f. (“und niemand soll sie ihm entreissen <oder> gerichtlich anfechten”), cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:504f. (from verb šarraye-) | the parallel passage KUB 30.24a i 10, ed. HTR 58f., where both verbs are used in two separate clauses shows that the use of -šan is not just due to influence from hannari which usually has -kan or -šan in this construction; (“If a man marries a virgin”) [nu] apËdani <ANA> MUNUS-TI haššatar ar[mahhatarr–a(?)] šar?-ri-iš-kán-ta-ri “and abilities to give birth [and even] to co[nceive(?)] are withheld from that woman” KUB 43.22 iv 6-7 (NS), translit. Ünal, AoF 25:116 (w. different restorations), cf. 115 (“von ihrer paternalen Sippe getrennt wird”) | one would expect the verb to be in the singular with the two neut. subjects; (If you ever take for yourselves the food intended for the god’s festival and do not bring it to him) n–at takšan šarraš takšan šarran (var. šarraš) pešteni nu–šmaš kÏ šar-ru-ma-aš uttar SAG.DU-az GAM-an kittaru n–at–kan lË šar-ra-at-te-ni kuiš–at–kan šar-ra-a-i–ma n–aš aku “but rather you give it (to the god) as half of a half (var. by halves). Let this action of withholding (it) be a capital offense for you. Do not withhold it. Whoever withholds it, will be put to death” KUB 13.4 i 56-59 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 30f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218; .
3. to cross, traverse, pass through, transgress (a command, oath, etc.) (generally w. -ašta or -kan when a real or metaphorical boundary is crossed) — a. to cross (a threshold): (You, your wives, your children, and your servants should eat and drink the god’s leftovers on the day they are offered or at most over three days. But if a privileged foreigner visits someone, [(if he)] has the privilege of going up to the temple) DINGIR.MEŠ-naš–kan LUGAL-ašš–a [(kattaluz)zi] šar-ra-aš-ki-it-ta “and he is accustomed to crossing the gods’ and the king’s  threshold, (let [(hi)]m [escort] him up. Let him eat and drink)” KUB 13.5 ii 12-13 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 40.63 i 18-19 (H), KUB 13.4 ii 1-2 (A), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 34-37 (“e®i©inden geçerse”), differently Chrest. 152f. (“opens the door”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218; kuiš–pat–kan imma kuiš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš GIŠkattaluzzi šar-re-eš-ki-iz-zi (var. šar-ri-iš-ki-iz-zi) “Whoever customarily crosses the god’s threshold” KUB 13.4 iii 4-5 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. AnSt 20:156, line 5', ed. Chrest. 156f., Süel, Direktif Metni 54f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:219; n–ašta ŠAH-aš UR.GI‡-aš GIŠkattaluzzi lË šar-re-eš-kat-ta (dupl. [šar-re-]eš-kat-ta!-ri) “May a pig (or) dog never cross the threshold (of the god’s kitchen)” KUB 13.4 iii 60-61, w. dupl. KUB 13.6 iii 12 (+) KUB 13.19 obv. 3, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 185, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220; restored by Laroche, Myth 132, into KUB 8.48 i 21 (Gilg.). 
b. to pass through (a doorway): nu–k[(an n)]epišaš KÁ-aš [zik–pat aššanu]wanza dUTU-uš šar-re-eš-ki-ši (dupls. [(ša)]r-ra-aš-ki-it-ta) “[You alone, O establish]ed Sungod, pass through the gate of heaven” KUB 31.127 + KUB 36.79 i 30-31 (solar hymn, OH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 31.134:4 (OH/MS), KUB 31.133:11 (NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:240; cf. n–ašta nepišaš KÁ-uš zik–pat [aššanuw]anza dUTU-uš šar-ra-aš-ki-it-ta KUB 36.75 + Bo 4696 i 7-8 (OH/MS), translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:231f.; similarly KUB 24.3 i 54-55 (prayer, Murš. II); LUGAL-uš GUB-aš andurza … tepu pËdan EME-aš hantānza annariš tarpiš SIPPU šar-ru-mar … ekuzi “The king standing inside drinks (several gods and) the ‘Small Place,’ the ‘True Tongue,’ the annari- and tarpi-demons, and ‘Passing Through the Doorway’ (i.e., death?)” KUB 2.8 v 17, 25-28, 30 (ANDAHŠUM for LAMMA of Tauriša, NH?/NS), and similar lists in KUB 10.81:1-11, KBo 4.13 vi 31-38 + KUB 10.82:3-10, KBo 13.176:1-12, and also KUB 2.8 i 24-28, ii 8-14, 44-46 | SIPPU (SÍ-PU) = Akk. “doorframe, doorjambs” (cf. CAD sippu 1 a 1'); since Hebrew saf (< *sipp-) means “threshold” SÍ-PU may stand for Hitt. kattaluzzi-.
c. to transgress (borders): (Do not covet any Hittite territory, do not take for yourself any Hittite territory) … zik–ma–kan ZAG-an šar-ra-at-ti “But (if) you transgress the boundary (and you take something, this is a crime against the oath gods. You transgress (šarra- D 3 d 1') the oath of the gods)” KBo 4.3 i 32 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:118f. (“verletzest”), tr. DiplTexts™ 76; (“transgress”) (“Protect the land and borders which I gave to you”) lË–aš–kan šar-ra-at-ti “Do not transgress them” KBo 4.10 obv. 15 (Ulmi-Teššub treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 38:24f. (“überschreite sie nicht”).
d. to transgress/violate (an oath) — 1' (act.): (“(The Kaškeans) come and take the gifts, then they swear (oaths), but when they arrive back (home)”) n–ašta lingāuš šar-ra-an-zi “They transgress the oaths” KUB 17.21 iv 16-17 (prayer of Arn. and Ašm., MH/MS), ed. Kaškäer 160f. (“die Eide brechen”), Lebrun, Hymnes 140, 147 (“ils rompront … l’accord”), tr. ANET 399f.; kuedani–kan UD-ti NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM šar-ra-an-z[i] “On whatever day they transgress the oath” KBo 16.27 ii 12 (treaty, MH/MS), translit. Kaškäer 136; cf. ibid. ii 7; n–ašta kuiš kūš NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM šar-re-ez-zi “Whoever transgresses these oaths” KBo 6.34 ii 46 (Soldiers’ Oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:10f. (“übertritt”), cf. p. 112 (“übertreten (geistig)”); cf. ibid. iii 39-40, ed. StBoT 22:14f.; and passim in this text; cf. kuiš–kan kūšš–a NˆŠ DINGIR.MEŠ šar-re-ez-zi (dupl. [ša]r-ra-at-ta) ibid. i 34, w. dupl. KUB 40.13 rev.! 13; perhaps cf. KUB 31.103:21-22 (MH/MS); (“Because the Hittites and Egyptians were sworn by the Stormgod of Hatti and it happened that the Hittites turned around”) nu–kan NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM LÚ.MEŠ URUHatti hūdāk šar-ri-i-e-er (var. šar-ri-e-er) “and suddenly the Hittites transgressed the oath” KUB 14.8 obv. 18-19 (PP2), w. dupl. KUB 14.11 + 650/u ii 3-4, ed. Götze, KlF 1:208f. (“brechen”), Lebrun, Hymnes 205, 211 (“avaient violé le serment”), tr. ANET 395, Beckman, CoS 1:158; kinuna–kan lingauš kuit šar-ri-iš-ker “Because now they (i.e., the people of Kinza) had transgressed the oaths” KBo 4.4 ii 9, ed. AM 112f.; cf. KBo 4.3 i 23 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:116f.:35; KBo 5.13 iii 12, 15, 20-21 (Kup.), ed. SV 1:126-129; nu–ššan MA_M´TU šar-ra-i “He (Duppi-Teššub) will be transgressing the oath” KBo 5.9 ii 37 (Dupp. treaty), ed. SV 1:18f. 
2' (mid.): lingainn–ašta UL kuššanka šar-ra-ah-ha-at “I never transgressed an oath” KUB 30.10 obv. 12 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 112, 116 (“je n’ai transgressé de serment”), tr. ANET 400, Hittite Prayers 32; mān–ašta kūš–a lingāuš šar-ra-ad-du-ma “But if you transgress these oaths” KBo 8.35 ii 16 (treaty w. Kaška, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 111 (“brecht”); cf. nu–kan mān linga[u]š šar-ra-ad-du-ma ibid. ii 22; (“If, however, you do not fight him”) nu–kan kāšma NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM zik šar-ra-at-ta “right then you transgress the oath” KBo 16.47:13-14 (treaty, MH/MS), ed. Otten, IM 17:56f.; cf. also KBo 6.34 ii 10-11 (Soldiers’ Oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:8f., tr. Collins, CoS 1:165; kuiš–a–kan kË NˆŠ DINGIR.MEŠ šar-ra-ad-da ibid. ii 23-24; and cf. n–ašta NˆŠ D[(INGI)]R.MEŠ šar-ra-an-ta-ti (dupl. šar-r[i-…]) KUB 24.4 + KUB 30.12 obv. 18 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.3 ii 29; n–ašta lingaen šar-ra-at[-ta/ti] KUB 36.108 obv. 10 (Pilliya treaty, Zidanta II/OS), ed. Otten, JCS 5:129. The equivalent in Bo©azköy Akkadian treaties of this phrase is nÏš ilāni etËqu, ištu māmÏti etËqu, and ištu riksÏ etËqu; see lingai- 1 f, Goetze, Tunn. 46 n. 142; cf. also above in the bil. sec.
e. transgress (words) [… t]uppiaš uttār šar-re-et “He transgressed the words of the [t]ablet” KUB 36.106 rev. 5 (treaty w. Hapiru, OS), ed. Otten, ZA 52:218; cf. KBo 3.27 obv. 24-25 (edict, Hatt. I/NS); n–ašta uttar [lË k]uiški šar-ra-at-ta “Let [no o]ne transgress the words” KUB 1.16 ii 49-50 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 8f. (“Gebot … übertreten”), tr. Beckman, CoS 2:80 (“transgress”); (“The words which were set down [for him]”) apāš–at–kan hūmanta šar-ra-aš “He transgressed them all” KUB 23.72 rev. 3 (Mita, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:36 (“violated”), DiplTexts™ 162 (“transgressed”); cf. KBo 22.6 iv 10-13 (Šar Tamhari, OH?/NS), ed. Güterbock, MDOG 101:21, 23; memiyan–ma–kan LÚ.MEŠ URUHatti–pat hūdāk šar-ri-i-e-er “But the men of Hatti themselves suddenly transgressed the word” KUB 14.8 obv. 36 (PP2, Murš. II), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 206, 212 (“ont violé”), tr. Hittite Prayers 59, Beckman, CoS 1:152; nu–kan mān zi[k µAlakšand]uš kÏ tuppiyaš [A]WAT´MEŠ šar-ra-at-[ti kuit–kan k]edani ANA ØUPPI kittari “If yo[u Alakšand]u transgress these [w]ords of the tablet, [whatever] is placed on [t]his tablet” KUB 21.1 iv 31-33 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:80f. (“brich[st]”), tr. DiplTexts™ 92; (My father did not let evil-doers live during his reign) kinun–a LUGAL-uš idalu mekki ūhhun ta LUGAL-wa<š> uddārr–a–met lË šar-ra-at-tu-ma “But now I, the King, have seen much evil. Do not transgress the words of me, the king, either” KBo 3.28:20-21 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Soysal, Diss. 32, 91.
f. transgress (oath/words—from context): mān–at–kan taknaš dUTU-uš šar-ra-at-ta–ma “But if you, O Sungoddess of the Earth, transgress it (… Let the oath gods of this ritual come and seize you)” KBo 11.72 ii 38 (rit. for Sungoddess of the Earth, MS); lahhiyauwaš–za / [uttar] UL imma šek[t]eni šer–ašta kuitki šar-ra-an “Do you actually not know [the matter] of campaigning: that something concerning (it) has been transgressed?” KBo 16.25 i 33-34 (instr., MH/MS), ed. Rizzi Mellini, FsMeriggi™ 522f.:45 (“in qualche modo c’è trasgressione”) | due to the presence of the -ašta this is assumed to refer to the “transgressing” of an oath rather than the “dividing up” of rations; perhaps also KUB 13.4 i 58-59 cited 2 b above. 
g. (w. 1-anki and 1–ŠU) to cross (a section of territory) all at once (without an object, and therefore without local particle): (“When the Irširra-deities heard the words, they hurried; they sped; they arose from their stools”) [(n–at)] 1-anki šar-re-er “They crossed all at once. (They arrived at Kumarbi’s)” KUB 33.98 iii 7 (Ullik. I, NH), w. dupl. KBo 26.61 iii 16-17, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:154f. (“at once they covered the way”), cf. Goetze, JAOS 69:180 (“they traveled without interruption”); cf. KUB 33.106 ii 29 (Ullik. III A, NH); n–aš–kan taknaš ÍD-ašš–a KASKAL-an GAM-an arha [pait] 1-anki–ya–aš šar-ra-at-ta-at “He (i.e., the Great Sea) [traversed] the path of the Netherworld and (its) river. He crossed (the distance) in one (stage)” KUB 12.65 iii 10-11 (Hedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:50f. (“Es legte (die Strecke) auf einmal zurück”), tr. Hittite Myths™ 53 (differently); cf. HAB 90 (“es schritt mit einem Schritt?? hinüber”); cf. KUB 33.115 iii 14 (Song of Silver, MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, FsOtten™ 155f., Hittite Myths™ 50 §5.3.
HroznŸ, SH (1917) 16 (“(Schwure) brechen”); Sommer, OLZ 24 (1921) 197; Friedrich, ZA 35 (1923) 172; Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 50 (“Grundbed. ‘trennen’”); Götze, AM (1933) 309 (w. -kan “übertreten, überschreiten,” mid. w. -za “sich trennen”); Sturtevant, JAOS 54 (1934) 400 (“to open (double doors)” < “divide, break”); Sommer and Falkenstein, HAB (1938) 87-90, 243 (“(Schwelle, Grenze) überschreiten” < “trennen, teilen”; not “brechen,” 1-anki š. “schreiten mit einem Schritt(??) hinüber,” use of -ašta, -kan); Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 45-48 (“break off, split off, separate, w. -za to split off for oneself, take possession of, usurp; divide; distribute; our mng. 2 “break off, upset,” not “transgress, cross”); Gurney, AAA 27 (1940) 83 (“pass through (a gate); violate (a pledge)”); Güterbock, JCS 5 (1951) 154f. (tr. of 1-anki š.); Kronasser, SchwGotth. (1963) 53; Carruba, Or NS 33 (1964) 414 (on -ašta); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 504, 531-33 (three verbs: šarra- “durch-, überschreiten” [our mng. 3], šarra- “teilen, ver-, austeilen” [our mng. 1], šarraye-/šarriya- “entfernen, amovere” [approx. our mng. 2]; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 152-154 nos. 1-2 (“(Eid, Gebot, Worte) brechen, übertreten, verletzen,” “(Tore, Schwelle) überschreiten, durchschreiten”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 284-290 (OH, MH mid. largely = “(Eid) übertreten,” act. usually “teilen,” NH act. usually both, mid. is reflexive, reciprocal, and passive); CHD L-N (1980) 67f.; Beal, Magic and Ritual (2002) 197-208 (with deities).
Cf. GIŠšarra- A, šarra- B, C, TÚGšarriwašpa-, takšan šarra-.
šarra- E (mng. unkn.).†
[…] ≠a±uliš šar-ra tar-ru artari “The auli- (i.e., the throat, or a blood offering) will stand widely š.” KBo 9.49 obv.? 14 (medicine), ed. StBoT 36:48, 50.
šarai- v.; to unravel(?).†
pres. sg. 3 ša-ra-a-an-zi KBo 5.1 iii 53 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 48.124 obv. 14 (NH).
verbal subst. gen. ša-ra-a-u-wa-aš KUB 36.2b ii 11 (NS); here?. 
inf. ša-ra-a-u-an-zi KBo 5.1 iii 54 (pre-NH/NS).
(“The katra-woman takes the BALAG-instrument. She calls in the gods. The sacrificer and the patili-men sit down to eat. They eat and drink. But when the seven large bowls (DUGDÍLIM.GAL) arrive”) nu MUNUS.MEŠkatrËš TÚG-an ša-ra-a-an-zi § mahhan–ma TÚG-an ša-ra-a-u-an-zi zinnanzi “The katra-women unravel(?) cloth. § When they finish unraveling(?) the cloth (they collect the red wool and place it on the cloth, and they make a šurita)” KBo 5.1 iii 52-55 (pre-NH/NS), ed. Pap. 10*-13* (“zupfen(??)”), StBoT 29:118f. (“unravel(?) (thereby fashioning a ball of yarn(?))”), HW™ A 211a (“zerreißen die k. das Gewand”); here?: (“[…] dLAMMA in heaven […], in those years […] there were no wolves[…]”) ša-ra-a-u-wa-aš […] “[…] of š. […]” KUB 36.2b ii 11 (Kingship of dLAMMA myth, NS), translit. Myth. 33, tr. Hittite Myths2 46 (“of weaving(?)/woven cloth(?)”). Cf. šariya-, below.
Cf. šurita.
šarak(k)u(i)- v.; to water(?), give water to(?); from OH/NS.†
part. pl. nom. com. ša-ra-ku-wa-an-te-eš KUB 35.148 iii 39 (OH/NS).
imperf. imp. pl. 3 ša-ra-ak-ku-uš-kán-du KBo 3.8 ii 8 (NH), ša-ra-ak-ku-iš-kán-du Bo 4010:2 (NH) (Oettinger, Stammbildung 336).
(“I will fix the puppy with (my eyes) … and say as follows: § ‘It is treated, it is treated’ (or: ‘The livestock, the livestock’ (cf. UDU iyant-)) ”) dakkudakuwan[teš] iyanzi ša-ra-ku-wa-an-te-eš iyan[zi] “‘They make (them) sheltered, they make (them) watered(?). (They have sheltered the oxen in the kizzumiya-building. They have sheltered …-s in the pens. They [have sheltered] the dogs in the kennel(?))’” KUB 35.148 iii 38-39 (Zuwi rit., OH/NS), ed. Collins, JCS 42:215; (“He says: ”) «kuiš–wa» kuiËš–wa hatešta!nteš [karāt]iš nu kÏ ša-ra-ak-ku-uš-kán-du “‘Whatever [inner par]ts are dried up, may they continually water(?) this/these. (May they not [appr]oach the child. May they stand entirely away from it)’” KBo 3.8 ii 8-10 (Wattiti’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:150f. (no tr.).
The word is considered by Oettinger, Stammbildung 336, to belong to the verb šarkuwe-/šarkuya-. As there are no known verbs of dressing or undressing nor articles of clothing in either context, it seems better for the time being to keep šarak(k)u(i)- apart from šarkuwe-, q.v. and to follow Melchert, AHP 169, linking it to šakruwai- q.v.
NINDAšaraman, (NINDA)šaramman-, (NINDA)šaramn-, (NINDA)šaram(m)a- n. neut.; bread allotment(?); from OS.
sg. nom.-acc. NINDAša-ra-a-ma-an KBo 30.82 i 12 (NS). 
dat.-loc. ša-ra-am-ni KUB 31.91:2 (MH/NS), NINDAša-ra-am-ni KUB 49.95 i 5 (NS), NINDAša-ra-am-ma-ni KBo 11.36 v 17 (OH?/NS), ANA 1 NINDAša-ra-a-ma KBo 20.67 + KBo 40.60 iii 17 (MS).
gen. NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš KBo 25.15 i 7 (OS), ša-ra-am-na-aš KUB 7.17:9, 16 (NS), KUB 31.57 iv 9 (OH/NS), ŠA 1 NINDAša-ra-a-ma KBo 20.1 iii? 1 (OS).
inst. NINDAša-ra-am-ni-it KBo 17.29 + KBo 20.1 ii 10 (OS), KUB 53.4 obv. 30 (NH?/NS?), ša-ra-am-ni-it HKM 36 rev. 36 (MH/MS), KUB 13.2 ii 12 (MH/NS).
abl. [NIN]DAša-ra-am-na-az KBo 25.106:9 (OS), ša-ra-am-na-az KBo 3.4 ii 69, 73 (NH), ša-ra-am-na-za KBo 16.1 iv 29 (NH), ša-ra-am-ma-na-az KBo 19.53 iii? 5 (MS?), ša-ra-am-ma-az KUB 32.123 ii 44 (OH/NS). 
collec./pl. nom.-acc. NINDAša-ra-a-ma KBo 20.3 iii 12 (OS), KBo 25.23 rev. 1, 2 (OS), KBo 25.31 iii 9 (OS), KBo 16.68 ii 15 (MS), KBo 20.67 + KBo 40.60 iii 15, 17 (OH/MS), KBo 25.109 ii 14, iii 12, 16 (MS), KBo 10.30 + KBo 16.77 iii 3, 8, 12, 28 (NS), NINDAša-ra-ma KBo 20.10 i 6 (OS), KUB 11.34 v 33 (MS?), NINDAša-ra-am-na KUB 39.7 ii 5 (NS), KUB 25.12 v 9 (NS), ša-ra-ma KBo 20.10 i 6 (OS), NINDAša-ra-am-ma KUB 30.24 ii 18 (NS), KUB 25.17 vi 9 (NS), KUB 10.88 i 12 (NS), NINDAša-ra-a-am-ma KUB 39.13 iii 43 (NS), NINDAša-ra-am-ma-na KUB 25.12 v 21 (NS).
nom.-acc. sg. or pl. NINDAša-ra-am-ma KUB 30.41 iii 11 (OH/NS).
pl. dat.-loc. NINDAša-ra-a-ma-aš KBo 20.27 rev. 10 (OS), NINDAša-ra-am-ma-aš KUB 20.28 ii 5, 10 (OH/NS), NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš KUB 11.24 vi 9, 14 (OH/NS), KBo 4.9 i 24, iv 20, 42, v 1, 7 (OH?/NS), NINDAša-ra-am-ma-na-aš KBo 4.9 iv 13, 48 (OH?/NS), KUB 11.29 v 20 (NS).
pl. or sg. gen. NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš KBo 25.15 i? 7.
The restoration [ša-r]a?-am??-na-az, KBo 3.38 obv. 18 (Tale of Zalpa, OH/NS), suggested by Eichner, Die Sprache 20:185, has to be rejected after photo collation (see photo StBoT 17 pl. IV).
This noun is an ablauting neuter n-stem with sg. nom.-acc. šarāman, archaic pl. nom.-acc. šarāma, and oblique stem šaram(m)n- also with assimilation šaramm-. The archaic pl. nom.-acc. šarāma is replaced by regular šaramna/šaramma. See Melchert, Die Sprache 29:2-3, but for šarāma, Gertz, Diss. 28-29. 
a. as nom. subj. of mid. v. or acc. obj. of act. v. — 1' subj. of mid. halzai- “to be summoned, to be announced”: (At the mištili-time the king proceeds to the inner chamber) [NIN]DAša-ra-a-ma halziya “bread allotment(?) is announced” KBo 17.74 iv 36 (thunder fest., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:34, similarly ibid. ii 26, iv 33; NINDAša-ra-am-ma NA›huwašiy[a] / peran halziya “The bread allotment(?) is announced before the stela” KUB 30.41 iii 11-12 (fest., OH/NS?); cf. KBo 20.10 i 6 (OS), KUB 56.52 obv. 32 (MS), KUB 58.19 rev. 12 (NS), KBo 30.82 i 10-12 (NS). 
2' obj. of handai- “to arrange, to lay out, to prepare”: NINDAša-ra-am-ma GIM-an ŠA LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL U ŠA DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL LÚ.MEŠDUGUD n–at QA_TAMMA handānzi “Just as the bread allotments(?) of the king, queen, and of the princes (and) dignitaries are (arranged on their eighteen tables), they arrange them (i.e., the bread allotments(?) on the forty-three tables of the countries) in the same way” KUB 10.88 i 12-14 (fest., NS), ed. Archi, TTKYayın IX/8:204. 
3' obj. of pai- “to give, supply”: nu UD.KAM-aš NAPTANU GAL halziya pangawi MUNUS.MEŠtap~
dara[š] NINDAša-ra-am-ma pianzi “The main meal of the day is announced. They give bread allotments(?) to the congregation (that is,) to the tapdara-women (or: to the congregation (and) the tapdara-women)” KUB 30.24 ii 17-18 (funeral rit., NS), ed. HTR 60f., tr. Alp, Song 64 (tapdara-women are subject of sentence); 15 NINDAša-ra-a-ma LÚAGRIG URUWattaruwa ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUAngulla pāi “The administrator of the city of Wattaruwa supplies fifteen bread allotments(?) to the men of the city of Angulla” KBo 10.30 iii 3-5 (MELQ´TU-list, NS), ed. StBoT 28:106, similarly ibid. iii 8-10, 12-14, KBo 16.77 obv. 14-16 (OH/NS); 1 UDU 20 NINDA.HI.A 20-iš 2 NINDAwag[eššar 15-i]š 2 DUG marn[uan] 15 NINDAša-ra-a-ma LÚAGRIG URUK[ara]hna ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUA[ngulla] pāi “The administrator of K[ar]ahna supplies one sheep, twenty loaves weighing twenty (measures), two wa[geššar]-breads weighing [fifteen] measures, two jugs of marnuan, (and) fifteen bread allotments(?) to the men of (the city of) A[ngulla]” KBo 16.68 + KBo 38.10 ii 4-6 (MELQ´TU-list, OH/MS), ed. StBoT 28:111; similarly KBo 16.68 ii 14-16 + KBo 16.79:6-8 (OH/MS?); n–aš ašešanzi nu–šmaš NINDAša-ra-a-ma [pian]zi akuwanna–ya–šmaš pianzi “They seat them, [giv]e them bread allotments(?) and give them something to drink” VS 28.7 i 13-14 (mugawar, Murš. II), ed. Pecchioli Daddi, AoF 27:345, 347.
4' obj. of peda- “to carry (away)”: ŠA DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI–ya NINDAša-ra-am-ma danzi n–at–kan pËdanzi “They take the bread allotments(?) of the princes, palace attendants and the bodyguards and they carry them (away)” KUB 2.15 vi 10-12 (fest., NS).
5' obj. of da- “to take”: (“The cupbearer who has been squatting near the hearth gets up, bows to the king”) ta–z NINDAša-ra-am-ma dāi t–ašta pËdai “And he takes a bread allotment(?) for himself and carries (it) away” KUB 25.1 vi 15-17 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH/NS), ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:98f.; ŠA DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL NINDAša-ra-am-ma-na danzi n–at parā pËdanzi “They take the bread allotments(?) of the princes and carry them away” KUB 25.12 v 21-23 (fest. of haste, NS), ed. Nakamura, Nuntarriyašha 244f.; cf. KUB 2.15 vi 10-12 cited above; NAPTANIM LÚ.MEŠDUGUD arnuwanzi ŠA DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL LÚ.MEŠ MEŠEDI NINDAša-ra-am-ma danzi “The dignitaries bring the meal; they take the bread allotments(?) of the palace attendants (and) the bodyguards” KBo 11.28 iv 10-12 (autumn fest., NS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 155, 161 (differently); mān nenkunatar kiša nu NINDAša-ra-a-ma [dāi nu DUGQULL]U šiËšnit šunnanzi n–at ANA LÚ dIM pianzi “When satiation (nenkunatar) occurs, [he takes] a bread allotment(?), (and) they fill [a QULL]U [-container] with beer and give it to the Man of the Stormgod” KBo 25.109 iii 12-13 (rit., MS), ed. Neu, NABU 1997:131f.; similarly ibid. ii 18-19, iii 16-17.
6' obj. of dai- “to place, to put”: DUMU-aš Éarzana waganna eša NINDAša-ra-am-ma tiyanzi “The son/prince sits down to eat in the arzana-house. They serve (lit. place) bread allotments(?) (for him)” KUB 53.17 iii 19-20 (fest., NS); adanna–ma INA É LÚMUHALDIM halziyattari nu–ššan NINDAša-ra-am-na ANA GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A LÚ.MEŠSANGA tianzi “The meal (lit. to eat) is announced in the House of the Cook. They place bread allotments(?) on the tables of the priests” IBoT 1.29 obv. 54-55 (fest. of procreation, MH?/MS?); andan GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-aš ANA LÚ.MEŠUB¸RI NINDAša-ra-a-ma 5.ÀM MIŠLAM tianz[i] “Inside in the tent they place for the guests five half bread allotments(?) each” KBo 20.74 ii? 11-12 + KBo 30.152 rt. col. 6-7 (fest., MS).
7' obj. of uda- “to bring”: [(1)]5 NINDAša-ra-a-ma (var. NINDAša-ra-am-ma) LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR udanzi “The table servers bring fifteen bread allotments(?)” KBo 25.31 iii 9 (fest., OS), w. dupls. KBo 20.32 ii 1-2, KUB 56.46 ii 26 (both OH/NS).
b. in abl. and inst. — 1' abl. meaning “from”: nu kÏ halkueššar kuit handan … § hantezzi–ma UD-ti šarā danzi INA UD.2.KAM–ma ša-ra-am-ma-az danzi GA.KIN.AG.HI.A–ma EMŒU apË–pat EGIR-pa danzi “This provision for the cult which has been prepared … § On the first day they take (it) up. On the second day, however, they take (it) from the bread allotment(?). But those same (people) take back the cheeses (and) rennet” KUB 32.123 ii 38, 43-45 (Ištanuwa fest., OH/NS), ed. Badalì/Zeilfelder, HS 104:73f. (“von oben”), translit. StBoT 30:308 | š. is very difficult to explain as a comitative. Perhaps a partitive abl.: “takes some of the bread allotment(?).”
2' as comitative inst. or abl. — a' w. arnu- “to move, transport”: [… URUHurš]anašša ša-ra-am-ma-na-az arnunun “I brought [… Hurš]anašša together with the bread allotment(?)” KBo 19.53 iii? 5 (ann., Šupp. I).
b' w. eš- (mid.) “to sit down”: [k]Ï PA_NI DUMU.LUGAL NINDAša-ra-am-ni-i[t tiyanzi n–at] NINDAša-ra-am-ni-it ešanta “These (sc. the functionaries enumerated in obv. 24-28) [take their stand] together with the bread allotments(?) in front of the prince, [and] they sit down together with the bread allotments(?)” KUB 53.4 obv. 29-30 (fest. for Telipinu, NH?/NS?), ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:74, 77 (differently).
c' w. -za peran huinu- “to take charge of (someone)”: (although without det., still bread provisions): (As Muršili II besieged the city of Puranda; Tapalazunauli, who was in that city, fled at night from Puranda because he was afraid) DAM–SU–ya–wa–z[(a DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU NAM.RA.MEŠ–y)]a ša-ra-a-am-na-za peran hu[(inut nu–wa)]r–an–kan katta pËhutet “He took charge of his wife, children, and persons available for resettlement, together with (their) bread allotments(?), and led them (collec. sg.) down” KBo 16.1 iv 29-30 (AM), w. dupl. KBo 3.4 ii 72-73, ed. AM 64f.; cf. KBo 16.1 iv 24-25, w. dupl. KBo 3.4 ii 69-70, ed. AM 62f. (“ließ er … von ihrem Zufluchtsort(?) abmarschieren”), Grélois, Hethitica 9:63, 81 (“fait sortir [devant] … de la citadelle”) | alternatively, -za peran huinu- could be taken lit. “to cause someone to run before oneself” with š.as adv. šaramnaz (q.v.) “form above” (“He made his wife …run before him from above”) as per Melchert, Die Sprache 29:1f.
d' w. da- “to take”: kūn–ma–wa namma ÉRIN.[M]EŠ ša-ra-am-ni-it dahhun nu–war–an–kan INA URUIšaš parā nehhun “Then I took this troop together with (their) bread allotment(?) and sent it to the city of Išaš” HKM 36 rev. 34-36 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsMeriggi2 21, HBM 184f. (“aus dem Palast”). 
e' w. dai- “to put, place, deposit”: (Let the firewood be sealed; thereafter annually let an inventory of the firewood be made) nu ša-ra-am-ni-it (var. d.-l. ša-ra-am-ni) katta zikkiddu “And let him keep depositing (the firewood) together with the bread allotments(?)” KUB 13.2 ii 12 (BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.91:2 ed. StMed 14:126f. (“e lo ponga col sopra sotto”), Dienstanw. 44 (“und wieder mit dem Behälter(?) hinlegen”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:223 (“and deposit it with the šaramna-”).
c. in loc. — 1' w. iškar- “to line up”: (They say tališa) LÚ.MEŠhaliyamiËš NINDAša-ra-am-ma išgaranzi § LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM–ma–ššan UZU.Ì zeyanta NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš šer arha išgaranzi “(and) the haliyami-men line up bread allotments(?); the cooks line up cooked (broiled) fat (pieces) all over the bread allotments(?)” KBo 4.9 i 21-24 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH?/NS).
2' w. paršnai- “to crouch, to squat”: (The bodyguards who stand at the right side of the table come back) n–at apËl NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš šer paršnanzi “And they squat (each) over his own bread allotment(?)” KBo 4.9 v 1-2 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH??/NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:63f.; similarly ibid. v 7-8; (Three body guards come in) tā GÙB-laza NINDAša-ra-am-ma-aš (var. NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš) awan (var. Õ) katta (var. kattan) parašnanzi “And they squat on the left alongside the bread allotments(?)” KUB 20.28 ii 9-11 (spring fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 11.24 vi 14-15.
3' w. dai-: see above b 2'e'.
4' w. tiya- “to take up a position”: n–aš ŠA DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL NINDAša-ra-am-ma-na-aš (var. NINDAša-ra-am-ma-aš) šer tiyazi “He takes up a position over the bread allotments(?) of the palace attendants” KBo 4.9 iv 12-13 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KUB 11.29 iv 14-15 + KUB 41.52 rev.! 15-16, ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:39f., Badalì, SEL 2:60, 62; cf. ibid. iv 19-20, 42, 48-49; KUB 25.16 i 47 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH/NS); KUB 10.3 ii 2, 31 (ANDAHŠUM-fest.); KUB 25.3 ii 9-10 (fest.) | šer correctly as “over” by Goetze, JCS 1:85 n. 18; Archi, VIII. TTKongr 202f. renders NINDAšaramnaš šer in KUB 10.3 ii 3, 14 and 31 as “für die šaramma-Brote”; GAL DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL paizzi NINDAša-ra-am-ma-aš (var. NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš) šer tapušza (var. Õ) tiyazi “The chief of the palace servants goes (and) takes his stand on the side over the bread allotments(?)” KUB 20.28 ii 5-6 (NS), w. dupl. KUB 11.24 vi 8-9, ed. Archi, VIII. Türk Tarih Kongresi 203 (“stellt sich daneben für die šaramma-Brote”); IBoT 4.61 ii 2-3 (fest., OH/NS).
d. in lists (mostly in gen.): [1] LIM NINDA.HI.A 25-iš 1 ME NINDAwageššar 10-iš 1 ME NINDA.HI.A GIŠBANŠUR-aš NINDAhāliš 15-iš 1 LIM NINDA.HI.A ša-ra-am-na-aš NINDAhāliš 16-iš 1 LIM NINDA.HI.A NINDAhāliš ŠA ÉRIN.MEŠ 20-iš 3 ME NINDAZI.HAR.HAR-aš 20-iš 3 ME NINDA.ÉRIN.MEŠ 30-iš “1,000 loaves of 25 measures, 100 wageššar-breads of 10 measures, 100 loaves of hāli-bread of the table of 15 measures, 1,000 loaves of hāli-bread of bread allotments(?) of 16 measures, 1,000 loaves of hāli-bread of soldiers of 20 measures, 300 ZI.HAR.HAR breads of 20 measures, 300 soldier-breads of 30 measures” KUB 31.57 iv 6-13 (list of allocations, NS), ed. Haas, KN 118f. | except for the first item (25), the size of the measure increases as the list continues (10, 15, 16, 20, 20, 30). Bread allotments(?) are among the smaller items and are higher in numbers. The wageššar breads (crackers?) are the smallest, followed by the two hāli-s, of which that of š. is one; 1 NINDAtunik 40-iš 1 NINDAšiluhān 90-iš 1 NINDAkaharËz 70-iš 1 ša-ra-am-na-aš hāliš 1 UZU HA.LA 1 hūpparaš šemeh[unit šūš] KUﬂ.HI.A-an hāl[iš …] 3–ŠU MAHI[Œ] KUB 7.17:13-19 (list of allocations, NS) | here the size of the bread allotment(?) is not given, the three preceding breads being rather large; […LÚ]arnālaš 20 NINDAša-r[a-am-n]a-aš hāliš ≠10± […] hāliš 15-iš 10 [NINDA]tunik […] KBo 17.14 i! 3-4 + KBo 20.4 i! 1-2 + KBo 20.16 i! 18 (MELQ´TU-list, OS), translit. StBoT 25:38f.; […-i]t LÚhamÏni 20 NINDAša-ra-am-na-aš hā[liš …] KBo 25.15 i 7 + KBo 20.2 i 6 (MELQE_TU-list, OS), translit. StBoT 25:47; § [L]Ú.MEŠ GIŠBAN[ŠUR …] / 5 NINDAša-r[a-a-ma danzi] / [p]ataš–šma[š–at–kan] / [i]šparranzi [LÚ.MEŠdamšatalleš(?)] / [k]uwapitta NINDA[ša-ra-a-ma] / 1 UZU HA.LA tianz[i] “The table men [… take] five bread allotments(?) and spread [them] out at their feet. [The damšatalla-men] place a bread [allotment(?)] (and) one meat portion in each place” KUB 54.75 obv. 1-6 (frag. of fest., NS), w. restorations based on KBo 20.32 ii 1-7 (OH/NS); LÚSAGI.A DINGIR-LIM LÚMUHALDIM DINGIR-LIM NINDAša-r[a-a-ma …] / ŠA 1 NINDAša-ra-a-ma-ma 1 NINDApiyantal[liš …] / 3 NINDA MIŠLU 20-iš \ NINDAZI.HAR.HAR 20-iš […] / [20?]-iš 5-ŠU MAHIŒ “The cupbearer of the deity (and) the cook of the deity […] š. One piyantalli-bread of one š. […] three half breads of 20 measures, one half ZI.HAR.HAR-bread containing 20 measures, […-bread] of [20?] measures, kneaded (lit. beaten) five times” 665/u rt. col. 8-11, ed. Alp, Tempel 204f., THeth 21:134f. | in this listing one piyantalli-bread is made from a bread allotment(?); piyantalli- bread (q.v.) is eaten by priests, but not allowed to their family and dependents. It must be a high quality confection; cf. AlHeth 179.
Goetze drew the conclusion from several passages that š. could denote a bread container, and he was later followed in this view by Popko (for lit. see below). But since the determinative NINDA regularly indicates breads and cakes, and there is no parallel known to us of the determinative referring to what the noun holds, and since no passage explicitly demonstrates that šarāma(n) is a container for bread, we judge that in all its occurrences it denotes a type of bread or cake.
While the abl. šarammanaz with the verb arnu- in KBo 19.53 iii? 5 might mean “from the š.,” the verbal expression -za peran huinu- “to take charge of (someone)” in KBo 16.1 iv 29-30 does not favor this understanding. Since the inst. and abl. cases have comitative uses (“together with”), one could apply that interpretation to the abl. and inst. examples treated above. peran huinu- (in KBo 16.1 iv 29-30) always takes human objects, but this need not apply also to the comitative term. Thus, “he took charge of (the people) together with (their) bread allotments(?)” in KBo 16.1 iv 29-30. 
Alp (FsMeriggi™ 17-25) argued for šarāma(n) “palace” and NINDAšarāmna- “palace bread.” He was at least partially followed by Neu (StBoT 26:159f. n. 471), who, however, did not attempt to argue the case. 
Neu (StBoT 26:159 n. 469, NABU 1997:132) also saw a collective force in some occurrences of šaramma, identifying the final -a as the collective ending. For this reason and because this collective form is sometimes accompanied by the numeral 1, he used quotation marks around the label “Pl.,” intending collective.
Götze, AM (1933) 220 n. 1 (“Behälter” oder “Zufluchtsort”); Alp, Beamtennamen (1940) 18 n. 5; idem, AnDergi 2 (1944) 791f.; Goetze, JCS 1 (1947) 83-85 (receptacles, baskets or plates, “bread basket”); Alp, Belleten XVIII/72 (1954) 456-458 (“Up town(?), acropolis(?), above(?)”), 458 (“a pastry which came from above, that is from the acropolis(?)”); Forssman, KZ 79 (1965) 20-23 (“oben befindlich”); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 28 (reporting Forssman’s “oben befindlich”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 179-181 (not a container for bread, but the bread itself, as the det. indicates; it might have received its name by virtue of its being a type of provisions laid by against siege in the acropolis. He further compares it w. Akk. ŠA BIRTI “provisions of the citadel”); Alp, FsMeriggi™ (1979) 17-25 (without det. “Palast”; w. det. “Palastgebäck”); idem, Belleten XLIII/170 (1979) 273-280 (“saray; saray böre©i(?)”); Archi, VIII. Türk Tarih Kongresi I = TTKYayın IX/8 (1979) 202-205 (served to the royal family and guests in the cult meal of festivals); Oettinger, FsKronasser (1982) 172 n. 42 (adj.: šarā + mna “oben befindlich”); Melchert, Sprache 29 (1983) 1-3 (šaramnaz with inst. abl., šaramnit is an adverb “(down) from above”; (NINDA)šaram(m)a-/šaramna- is bread “used for the top layer” of sandwiches or layer-cakes); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 159f. nn. 468-472 (šaramna- without det. “Palast,” following Alp; (NINDA)šarama(n)- “Brotsorte” without commitment to Alp’s “Palastbrot”); Oettinger, IBS-VKS 37 (1986) 35 n. 123 (not an adj. “oben befindlich,” but šaramnaz and šaramnit < šaram(m)an- “oberer Teil,” “Burg,” “Oberteil des Sandwich”); Popko, AoF 23 (1996) 99f. (“Behälter für Brot”); Neu, NABU 1997:131f. #143 (š. is not a waterproof container for bread); Popko NABU 1998:53 # 51; Pecchioli Daddi, StMed 14 (2003) 127 n. 334. 
NINDAšarā marrant- (a bread/pastry with something melted/glazed(?) on top); from MH/NS.†
sg. nom. com. NINDAša-ra-a mar-ra-an-te-eš KBo 10.34 i 11 (MH?/NS), Bo 4999 iv 21 (AlHeth 181), [ša-ra-a] mar-ra-an-te-eš Bo 3465 i 13 (Taracha, Ersetzung 30 w. n. 45).
(“Six loaves of haršpawant-bread, six [loaves of] thin [bread] of (i.e., made with) oil”) 5 NINDAša-ra-a mar-ra-an-te-eš “five breads/pastries melted?/glazed(?) on top” KBo 10.34 i 11 (enthronement rit., MH?/NS); … TU‡ haršpawan[teš TU‡ ša-ra-a (mar-ra-an-te-eš) TU‡ (BA.BA.ZA)] TU‡ memal … “soups (made of) haršpawant-bread, [soups (made of)] melted[-on-top] pastry, porridge, soups (made of) meal …” Bo 3648 i 20-21, w. dupls. Bo 3465 i 13-14, KUB 12.16 i 12 (NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 30f., cf. 244. Broken NINDAša-ra(-a)-x[…] is probably the more common NINDAšaraman-, q.v. See discussion s.v. marra- 1 e.
Hoffner, Or NS 35 (1966) 394f.; id., AlHeth (1974) 181; Taracha, Ersetzen (2000) 106f.
Cf. marra-; šarā; NINDAšermarranteš.
šarāmnaz adv.; from above.† 
ša-ra-a-am-na-az KBo 5.2 ii 19 (MH/NS), [ša]-ra-a-am-na-za KUB 45.12 ii 5 (NS), KBo 14.116 iv (9) (NS).
(The exorcist breaks a mulati-bread next to the water and places it down on the ground) memall–a ša-ra-a-am-na-az arha išhuwāi ša-ra-a-am-na-az–ma–kan (var. ša-ra-a-am-na-za–ma–kan) ANA NINDAmulāti šer šuhhāi “And he pours out meal from above; from above he pours (it) on top of the mulāti-bread” KBo 5.2 ii 18-20 (rit. of Ammihatna, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 45.12 ii 4-6, cf. memal c 1' b' 1'' b''; (In fragmentary context) nu NINDAmiumiuda [IŠTU] É LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙ udanzi [n–at ša-r]a-am-na-az paršiyanzi “They bring sweet breads [from] the bakery and crumble [them] from above” KBo 14.116 iv 7-9 (fest., NS), cf. Neu, NABU 1997:132 (comitative abl., “zusammen mit šarāman-Broten”), Popko, NABU 1998:53 (differently).
š. is an adverbial abl. from an adj. *šaraman-/*šaramn- “(being) on top/above.”
šarran- see šarra- B n. or partic. of šarra- D v.
šara(p)p-, šarip- v.; to sip; from MS.†
pres. sg. 3 ša-ra-pí KUB 27.29 iii 9 (MH/NS), ša-a-ra-pí KUB 34.97:15 (pre-NS).
 inf. ša-ri-pu-u-wa-a[n-zi] KBo 24.27:11 (NS), KUB 27.58 i 6 (NS), [š]a-ri-pu-u-wa-an-zi KBo 29.131:3 (NS), KBo 14.94 iii (22)(NS), [ša-r]i-pu-wa-an-zi KBo 29.144:7 (MS), perhaps FHL 4 rt. col. 4.
verbal subst. gen. ša-ra-ap-pu-wa-aš VBoT 24 iii 17 (MH/NS), ša-ri-pu-wa-aš KUB 17.23 i 10, 15 (NS), š[a]-ri-pu-u-wa-aš KUB 17.23 ii 43 (NS).
imperf. pres. sg. 3 ša-a-ra-pé-eš-ki-iz-zi KUB 34.97:17 (pre-NS).
The attestation ša-ri-ip-pu-w[a…] KUB 32.19 iv 47 (cf. Oettinger, Stammbildung 54) is a Hurrian word in a Hurr. context, see GLH 216, ChS I/1:232.
(“The sacrificer piles (them) up seven times”) […] ša-ra-pí nu pāši 7-ŠU “He sips and swallows seven times” KUB 27.29 iii 9 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), ed. ChS I/5:137; [… K]UKUB arha ša-a-ra-pí “He sips out [of] a/the pitcher” KUB 34.97:15 (rit., pre-NS); […BE_]LTI É-TIM ša-a-ra-pé-eš-ki-iz-zi “[The la]dy of the house repeatedly sips […]” ibid. 17; (“9 dishes consisting of”:) TU‡ UZU TU‡ harki ša-ra-ap-pu-wa-aš TU‡ GÚ.TUR “meat stew, white soup for sipping, lentil soup, (chick pea soup, porridge(?), sweet cake, honeyed meal, sweet milk)” VBoT 24 iii 17 (MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112f., translit. AlHeth 98; (“Afterwards nine stews are made: …”) GA KU‡ ša-ri-pu-wa-aš “sweet milk for sipping” KUB 17.23 i 9-10 (mugawar, NS); [EGIR-Š]U–ma–kan M´ GA ša-ri-pu-wa-aš ŠU.KIŠSAR […] anda udanzi “Afterwards they bring in whey(?) for sipping, ŠU.KIŠ-vegetable, [and …]” KUB 17.23 i 15-16 (mugawar, NS); cf. A GA š[a]-ri-pu-u-wa-aš ibid. ii 43; [… MUNUSalh]uitra EN.SISKUR dT[unapi ] / [… ha]ntezzi ša-ri-pu-u-wa[-aš(?)] / [ŠU.KIŠ]SAR tianzi “[The alh]uitra-woman (and) the sacrificer place [… f]irst for sipping (and) ŠU.KIŠ-vegetable for T[unapi]” KUB 27.58 i 5-7 (Cult of Huwaššanna, NS), similarly KBo 24.27:11, KBo 29.131:3, KBo 29.144:7 (all cult of Huwaššanna). 
The immediate context with paš- “to swallow” strongly suggests the meaning “to sip.” Doubtless onomatopoetic; compare English “slurp” and “sip.” The twice attested plene spelling in the first syllable suggests that the first vowel was real.
Meriggi, RHA XVIII/67 (1960) 103f. (“nippen(?), buvoter, siroter”); Friedrich, HW 2.Erg. (1961) 22; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 304, 520; Poetto, JIES 2 (1974) 435-438 (< srap-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 54, 426 (šarāp-/šarËp-); Eichner, GsKronasser (1982) 25; Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 137.
Cf. šarupp-.
šarārmiSAR n. neut.; (a plant); from MS.†
nom.-acc. ša-ra-a-ar-miSAR KBo 11.19 obv. 3, 12 (NS), ša-a-ra-a-ar-miSAR KBo 19.141:5.
Hurr. abs. ša-ra-ar-mi KBo 2.21:9 (MH/MS?); essive? ša-ra-a-ar-ma KBo 20.129 iii 9 (MH/MS); frag. KBo 19.141:9.
(“[I] pour a little barley flour into a bowl”) […] šānakugullanSAR ša-ra-a-ar-miSAR aš[Ïeba hurpi …] “[I take] šānakugullan-plant, š.-plant, aš[Ïeba-substance, (and) hurpi] (and I mix it/them together with the barley flour)” KBo 11.19 obv. 3 (Šalašu’s rit., NS), ed. ChS I/5:218; (“Barley flour which with water […]”) [… š]ānaku<k>ullašSAR ša-ra-a-ar-miSAR ašÏeba hurpi imiyan “[…] šanakukkullaš-plant, š.-plant, ašieba-substance and hurpi are mixed together KBo 11.19 obv. 12, w. par. KBo 19.141:4-6 (pre-NS?), ed. ChS I/5:220, 224.
For further discussion see the remarks on these passages under šanak(k)uk(k)ulla(SAR).
Haas/Wilhelm, Or NS 41 (1972) 6; Ertem, Flora (1974) 49. 
šarašši- A adj. or n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.†
sg. nom. ša-ra-a-aš-ši-iš KBo 24.56A i 6 (NS), ša-ra-aš-ši-iš KUB 60.5:4.
Both attestations occur in broken context. Nothing in the fragments points to Hurrian context and/or a connection with Hurr. šarrašše- “kingship.” Note also the single -r- as opposed to the consistently double -rr- in the latter. KBo 24.56 (translit. StBoT 30, 375f.) has been interpreted so far as a fragment with Luwianisms of which the word in question probably because of the -ašši-extension would be one; cf. Melchert, CLL 189 (“?”) and Hajnal, 125 Jahre Indogermanistik Graz 167 (“zu GW [adv.] kluw. šarra, heth. šarā?”). However, 1 ša-ra-aš-ši-iš ZABAR in KUB 60.5:4 (cf. van den Hout, BiOr. 51:121, for par. KBo 22.142 rev. 3-7; misread as “ša-ra-na-iš” by Popko, Or NS 61:470) in a list of further metal objects. This seems to be a noun rather than an adj., although it might be a substantivized adj. It could be the same object as the alleged Luwian adj. šarāššiš of KBo 24.56 where we find smiths mentioned in the two following lines: LÚ.MEŠSIMUG.A-aš i 7 and LÚ.MEŠKÙ.DIM-aš i 8.
šarrašši- B Luw. adj.; of kingship; from MH/MS.†
Luw. sg. nom.-acc. neut. šar-ra-aš-ši-an-[za] KUB 11.31 vi (1), 3 (Tudh. III/MS), [ša-r]a-aš-ši-ia-an-za KUB 30.43 iii 15 (NS).
[DU]B.3.KAM SÍSKUR šar-ra-[aš-ši-an-za m]ān–za LUGAL-uš AN[A dU / SÍS]KUR šar-ra-aš-ši-an[-za DÙ-zi / EGIR?]–ma–z ANA d[Hebat / SÍSKUR] allaššiyanz[a DÙ-zi] “Third tablet, ritual of kingship: When the king [performs] the kingship ritual for [the Stormgod] and [later(?)] the queenship ritual for [Hebat]. (§ [When] Tudhaliya, the great king, son of Arnuwa[nda sat down] on the throne of his father, the[n] they [performed] this ritual)” KUB 11.31 vi 1-6 (colophon, rit., MH/MS?), ed. Laroche, Anadolu O.S. 2:9, StBoT 3:47, for the dating see StBoT 21:12 | for the restoration of the Luw. neut. in -ša/-za see the following quote; DUB.3.KAM Š[A SÍSKUR ša-r]a-aš-ši-ia-an-za “Third tablet o[f the ritual(s) of ki]ngship” KUB 30.43 iii 15 (shelf list, NH/NS), ed. CTH pp. 177f.
For this form see Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:125, and van den Hout, KZ 97:71f. Its relation to šarrašše/i- (see below) is that of purulliyašši- to purulli- A/B (q.v.).
šarrašše/i- C n.; kingship; Hurr.; from MH.†
d.-l. (or Hurr. essive) šar-ra-aš-ši-ia KUB 9.28 iv 20 (MH/NS), KBo 15.43 obv. 7 (MH/NS); gen. šar-ra-aš-ši-ia-aš KBo 8.86 obv. 5 (MH/MS), KBo 10.34 i 2, (10) (Tudh. III/NS), šar-ra-a-aš-ši-ia-aš KBo 10.34 iv 13 (Tudh. III/NS), KBo 8.88 obv. 8 (MH/MS?).
stem form or Hurr. absolutive šar-ra-aš-ši KBo 8.86 obv. 16 (MH/MS).
a. ritual of kingship: (When the king sits down for kingship) [nu] ANA dU SÍSKUR šar-ra-aš-ši-ia-aš U ANA d[Hebat SÍSKUR] allāššiyaš šipanti nu ANA SÍSKUR ša[r-ra-aš-ši-ia] kÏ dan[zi] “he offers the kingship ritual to the Stormgod (i.e., Teššub) and the Queenship ritual to Hebat. They take the following for the kingship ritual” KBo 10.34 i 2-4 (rit., Tudh. III/NS), ed. StBoT 3:47f.; [DU]B.1.KAM SÍSKUR šar-ra-aš-ši-ia[-aš] µDudhaliyaš–za–kan DUMU µArnuwand[a] LUGAL.GAL kuwapi ANA GIŠŠÚ.A ABI–ŠU eša[t] nu kÏ SÍSKUR šar-ra-a-aš-ši-ia-aš apiya iËr “First tablet, ritual of kingship: When Tudhaliya, son of Arnuwanda, the Great King, sat down on the throne of his father, then they performed this kingship ritual” KBo 10.34 iv 10-14 (colophon of rit., Tudh. III/NS), ed. StBoT 3:48. 
b. song of kingship: LÚ.MEŠNAR šar-ra-aš-ši-ia-aš [(SÌR)] SÌR-RU “The singers sing the song of kingship” KBo 8.88 obv. 8-9 (rit., MH/MS?), w. dupl. KBo 8.86 obv. 5 (MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:260f., translit. ChS I/9:171.
c. other: mān dU-ni d[U]TU-i–ya šar-ra-aš-ši-ia šipanti “When they sacrifice to the Stormgod and to the Sungoddess for kingship, (they sacrifice one bull and one lamb and they burn them)” KUB 9.28 iv 20 (rit. for Heptad, MH/NS); [...]x ANA dU šar-ra-aš-ši-ia [... ANA dHeba]t allaššiya šipanti “He sacrifices [...] to the Stormgod for kingship and [... to Heba]t for queenship” KBo 15.43 obv. 7-8 + KBo 35.212 obv. 1 (rit. of Palliya, MH/NS), translit. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:251, without the join piece for which see Groddek, Hethitica 14:32; cf. KUB 45.76 obv. 16 and 800/w obv. 10-11 (StBoT 3:49); cf. [...] šar-ra-aš-š[i]-ia šippanduwanzi [(?) šar]ā karpanzi KUB 45.77 i? 9-10 (MH/MS); (“Afterwards they sacrifice the following in the temple of Hebat: One [sheep], one bird for burning in front”) ≠1 UDU± šar-ra-aš-ši-ia allaššiya kipuššiya “One sheep for kingship, queenship, (and) kibuššiya” IBoT 3.148 ii 17-18 (evocation rit., NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:216f.; [...]x-šiya šar-ra-aš-ši-ia lāršiya [...] KBo 24.40 rev.? rt. col. 7 (hišuwa fest., NS); cf. also KUB 42.90 obv. 7 (hišuwa-fest.), KUB 15.20 iii 5 (vow, NH); 1 SILA› 1 NI[NDA.GUR›.RA o-]x-huzi (or -u]zzi) kipini dU-uppi hanumašši ušt[ašši o-]x-rešši kammirši šar-ra-aš-ši mali nan[ki ...] KBo 8.86 obv. 14-16 (rit. for Mt. Hazzi, MH/MS), translit. ChS I/9:172; cf. similar 1 NINDA SIG dHanumanzi uš!tanzi x[...] gamerši šar-ra-aš-ši mali nanki e[rši ...] KUB 27.1 ii 2-3 (fest. for IŠTAR of Šamuha, NH), ed. ChS I/3-1:38f., 42; cf. in Hurr. context KUB 27.28 iv 4.
Hurrian abstract formation in -a-šše from Hurr. šarri “king,” which was borrowed in turn from Akk. šarru. 
Goetze, RHA V/39 (1940) 194 n. 6; Laroche, Anadolu O.S. 2 (1955) 9 n. 2; idem., RA 54 (1960) 193 w. n. 3; Kümmel, StBoT 3 (1967) 48f.; Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 68, 125; Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 216f.
šaratar n. neut.; (mng. unkn.).†
sg. nom.-acc. ša-ra-ta-ar KUB 36.20:7 (NS), less likely (see below) ša-ra-a-tar KBo 8.19 obv. 9. 
In a broken context of a historical fragment, transliterated following the spacing of the published copy: n–aš GÁN-i nu[…] / [š]a-ra-a-tar a[n?-…] / [x] É gurda-x[ …] KBo 8.19 obv. 8-10 (hist., NH). Considering the historical context, the different spelling of šaratar and photo collation (S. Košak), it seems more likely that we should ignore the rather irregular horizontal spacings in this fragment and read: n–aš–kan IN[A …] / [š]a-ra-a tar-n[a?-…], in which case this is obviously not an occurrence of šaratar. 
In a broken context near words for ornaments (unuwašhuš line 6) and a diadem (KILˆLU line 8): [… u]nuwašhuš anda dÉ.A[ …] / […-]al ša-ra-ta-ar–še[t …] / [ …]x KILˆLU-wašša–wa iš-x[…] KUB 36.20:6-8 (frag. of Kumarbi cycle myth, NS), translit. Myth. 168. 
With its context of adornments and headwear š. might fit a meaning “its embroidery, sewn on decorations” for ša-ra-ta-ar–še[t], which would make possible a connection with the verb šariya- B.
Cf. šariya- B. 
šarawar n.; (mng. unkn., perhaps unfavorable weather conditions such as a violent storm or a blizzard); from OS.†
 sg. erg. (or abl.) ša-ra-u-na-an-za KUB 18.11 obv. 5 (NH); nom.-acc. ša-ra-a-u-wa-ar KUB 32.117 obv.! 3 (OS), KUB 35.164 rev.! + KBo 25.139 rev. 4 (MS?), KUB 7.13 obv. 30 (NS), ša-ra-u-wa-ar KUB 8.66 rt. col. 5 (NS); broken: ša-a-ra-a-u-wa-[…] Bo 7247:3 (StBoT 14:75).
If the erg. šaraunanza belongs here š. is a noun of the ašawar, ašaun- type. For the gen. šarāuwaš see šarai-.
a. in context with other meteorological phenomena: (“When we [go bac]k on the second day I bow. He bows to the [go]d. I take the waters and […] him in […]”) [… na]ššu ša-ra-a-u-wa-ar n[a]ššu–ma haršiharši […]x hËyaueš–a “[…] either š. or thunderstorm […] and rains” KUB 32.117 obv.! 3-4 + KBo 19.156 obv. 11 (Palaic rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:221, StBoT 30:39, for the date see Groddek, AoF 25:240f.; […]x šËr ú-i-[t]e-ni ša-ra-a-u-wa-ar […]x umËni mān haršiharši našma […]x kÏša n–an anni parānta umËni “above in the water we see š. [and …]. If a thunderstorm or a […] happens, we will see it across there(?)” KBo 30.39 + KBo 25.139 rev. 4-6 + KUB 35.164 rev.! 1-3 (Palaic rit., OH/MS), translit. without KBo 30.39 in StBoT 25:226, for the date of the manuscripts see Groddek, AoF 25:240f. 
b. in a literary simile: (Hedammu spoke to IŠTAR: ‘What kind of a woman are you?’ IŠTAR replied:) ammuk–za MUNUSKI.SIKIL hart[a-/g[a-(coll. photo)…] nu–mu ša-ra-u-wa-ar GIM-an HUR.SAG.MEŠ-uš lahhurnuzz[i …] “I am a … maiden. Foliage [covers?] mountains like a š. for me” (IŠTAR continued talking. She flattered Hedammu, and tried to seduce him(?).) KUB 8.66 rt. col. 4-5 + KUB 33.86 iii 3-4 (Hedammu myth, NS), ed. StBoT 14:56f. (“Ich bin das zor[nige] Mädchen und mich (überkommt) Groll, wie die Berge Bewuchs [überzieht]”), Friedrich, ArOr 17/1:240f. (“sie [gab?] mir wie eine Aufgabe(?) die Berge zum Opfertisch(?)”), 253 (“sie [gab?] mir wie eine Tagesaufgabe(?) die Berge als Arbeits-tisch(?)”), tr. Hittite Myths 51 (“The mountains [spread out(?)] their greenery for me like a woven cloth(?)”), tr. LMI 142 (“e mi (invade) l’ira come il fogliame (invade) le montagne”) | the word order renders unlikely those interpretations which take š. as the subject of the verb in the lacuna. Followed by postpos. GIM-an, š. appears rather to be the comparison “like a š.” If the verb to be restored is “cover,” the subj. is the foliage; if “spread out,” the mountains. 
c. with terms for the Stormgod’s anger and its manifestations: […-(wa kāša)] dU-aš karpin kartimmiattan nahš[ar(attan werit)eman] ša-ra-a-u-wa-ar tarmānun mitānun “Now I have nailed down and secured with red wool the Stormgod’s wrath, anger, fearsomeness, terror, and š.” KUB 7.13 obv. 29-30 (rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 46.56 obv.? 15-16 (NS), ed. (SÍG)mitai- (= šawar “sullenness”).
d. unclear: (“Concerning the fact that [you have approved (celebrating) the pu]rulli-[festival] not at the (appropriate) time”) […] kuit ša-ra-u-na-an-za [k]arū harzi “[and] that š. already holds […] (have you, O deity, approved (celebrating) the purulli-festival […]?)” KUB 18.11 obv. 5-6 (oracle question, NH).
Since š. occurs in a chain with haršiharši “thunderstorm,” it is also likely to be a meteorological phenomenon. In the chain with various terms for anger and fright, one might suspect that šarawar is merely a mistake for šawar “sullenness.” However, since all of these are undesirable attributes of the Stormgod, one could imagine how a scribe could have thought of šarawar “(a violent storm).” If lahhurnuzzi is covering the mountains like š. (covers a mountain), then perhaps š. means “blizzard” or “storm clouds.” Unfortunately the passages are too broken to postulate a translation with any confidence. There appears to be no relationship between this word and šarai-, although in the Hedammu passage (see b) there could be word play, if the foliage covers the mountains like a š. (sounds like an “embroidered garment”).
Götze/Pedersen, MSpr (1934) 31 (= šawar “Groll”); Friedrich, ArOr 17 (1949) 240f. (“Aufgabe(?)”), 253 (“Tagesaufgabe(?)” < šarāi-); Friedrich, HW (1952) 184 (> šarai-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 68 (= šawar “Groll”), 504 n. 3; Siegelová, StBoT 14 (1971) 75 (“Groll, Zorn” = šawar); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 158f. n. 467; Hoffner, Hittite Myths (1990) 51 (“a woven cloth(?)”). 
šaraz(z)i(ya)- A adj. and adv.; 1. (adj.) upper, superior, upperworld, 2. (adj., figuratively) superior, 3. (adv.) above; opposite of kattera-; from OH; written syll. and UGU-(az)zi-.
sg. nom. com. ša-ra-a-az-zi-iš KBo 34.34:11 (OH/NS), ša-ra-a-az-zi-<iš> KUB 33.68 iii 7 (OH/MS), ša-ra-az-zi-iš KBo 15.9 i 14 (NS), KBo 6.29 ii 7 (NH), UGU-zi-iš KUB 17.14 obv.! 16, KUB 53.53 iii 2 (NS), UGU-az-zi-iš KBo 15.2 i 23. 
acc. com.(?) ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-an KUB 33.62 ii 4 (MH/MS). 
nom.-acc. neut. ša-ra-az-zi KUB 10.18 i 13 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 30, 43 (pre-NH/NS), ša-ra-a-az-zi KUB 13.20 i 34 (MH/NS), KUB 26.9 i 6 (MH/NS), KBo 22.80 right col. 4 (NS), ša-ra-zi KBo 10.2 iii 23 (OH/NS), UGU-zi KUB 3.95:5 (NH). 
dat.-loc. (and allative) ša-ra-az-zi KUB 33.70 ii 7 (OH/ENS), KBo 20.51 i 12 (MS), KBo 34.280 iii 5 (NH), ša-ra-a-az-zi Bo 69/1256 + KBo 4.2 i 35 (pre-NH/NS), IBoT 1.36 iv 16 (MH/MS), KBo 5.6 iii 33 (Murš. II), VS 28:5 i 13 (LNS), ša-ra-zi IBoT 3.1:10 (OH/NS), ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia KUB 52.95 iv 4 (NS), KBo 19.138 obv. 7 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 12.5 i 2, iv 18 (MH/NS). 
gen. ša-ra-a-az-zi-aš KUB 33.68 iii 9 (OH/MS), ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-aš KUB 31.127 + KUB 36.79 i 40 (OH/NS), KBo 34.34:11 (OH/NS), UGU-aš KUB 34.71 i 5 (NS). 
abl. ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-az KUB 25.37 obv. 25 (NS), ša-ra-az-ia-az KBo 16.56:14 (MS?); see also lemma šarazziyaz. 
pl. nom. com. ša-ra-a-az-zi-iš KUB 33.68 iii 9 (OH/MS), KBo 34.34:13 (OH/NS), UGU-zi-iš KBo 15.9 i 18 (NS), UGU-az-zi-iš KUB 17.14 obv.! 17 (NS), KBo 15.2 i 25 (NS), UGU-zi-uš KUB 17.14 obv.! 20 (NS), KUB 24.12 iii 8, 10 (MH/NS), UGU-az-zi-uš KUB 17.14 rev.! 17 (NS).
nom.-acc. neut. ša-ra-az-zi KUB 13.2 iii 27 (MH/NS), KBo 6.29 ii 11 (NH).
UGU or UGU-TI standing for š. always occurs in combination with KUR (URU)UGU-(TIM) KBo 4.4 ii 16, KUB 14.16 i 26, KBo 3.4 iii 69, 70 (all AM), Hatt. i 26, 27, iv 3, 4, etc.; cf. [KUR UR]UUGU-TI KBo 11.40 vi 5 = [KU]R URUI-LI-TI KUB 40.107 rev. 20 (fest. for dLAMMA, both NS), ed. AS 25:130f.
(Sum.) [NIM] = (Akk.) [elû] = (Hitt.) ša-ra-zi KUB 3.94 i 14; (Sum.) [BAL] = (Akk.) [e-lu]-ú = (Hitt.) UGU-zi KUB 3.95:5, MSL 3.79.
The a-stem, unambiguously attested in the sg. acc. šarāzziyan only, is the original stem that later switched to an i-stem.
1. (adj.) upper, superior, upperworld — used in connection with — a. physical location, etc.— 1' a gate: LUGAL-uš ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia KÁ.GA[L] šarā ari “The king arrives up at the upper gate” KUB 52.95 iv 4-5 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., NS); mān 2 Éhila[mmar–ma] n–at–kan kattera KÁ.GAL-TIM šarā uwanzi ša-ra-a-az-zi–ma–at–kan KÁ.GAL šarā UL uwanzi “But if there are two portico[es], they (i.e., spear-men) come up to the lower gate; however, they shall not come up to the upper gate” IBoT 1.36 iv 15-17 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:34f., Rost, MIO 11:198f.; mahhan–ma kË hūitar ša-ra-az-zi[-ia-az] Ékašgaštipaz KÁ.GAL-az katta ari “But when these wild animal(-figurines) arrive down from the upper main gate” KBo 10.24 i 10-13 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:16, cf. StBoT 27:61 | for kašgaštipa- see StBoT 27:115f.
2' a window: n–aš ša-ra-az-zi GIŠAB-ya tapušza tiyazzi “And she (i.e., the queen) steps to the side of the upper window” KUB 27.69 v 4-5 (fest., OH/NS), ed. StBoT 37:530f.; cf. also KBo 19.138 obv. 7 (pre-NH/NS); KBo 30.60:9. 
3' a portico: nu–kan šuppiš LÚSANGA ŠA Éheštā U 3 LÚ.MEŠ Éheštā ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia Éhilamni ištarni pedi anda tianzi “The holy priest of the hešta-house and three men of the hešta-house step into the middle of the upper portico” VS 28.5 i 11-14 (fest., NS), ed. Otten, OLZ 50:390 n. 2; cf. IBoT 3.1:10-11 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH/NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 284f., Haas/Wäfler, UF 9:120 (both w. different line numbering). 
4' a building: mān–za MUNUS.LUGAL INA URUŠamūha É ABI ABI dUTU-ŠI ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia–ššan ANA É-TI šer dIŠTAR URUTamininqa MU-ti! mËya≠ni± iËzzi “When the queen worships IŠTAR of Tameninqa in Šamuha in the house of the grand-father of His Majesty up in the upper building/chamber in the course of the year” KUB 12.5 iv 17-20 (fest., MH/NS), ed. Danmanville, RHA XX/70:53f., similarly ibid. i 1-3, cf. meya(n)ni a 2' a' 1"; Éheštā ša-ra-az-zi kattËr kuwapi w[(etešnaš)] GIŠ-ru “Wherever in the upper (or) lower hešta-house there is construction(?) timber” KUB 30.32 i 11-12 (inv., MS?), w. dupl. KBo 18.190:6, cf. luri-, Haas/Wäfler, UF 8:96f. (differently).
5' a citadel (gurta-): [(n)]u ša-ra-a-az-zi (var. ša-ra-az-zi) gurti ŠA d[Kubaba (U ŠA)] dLAMMA ma[(n)inkuwan] UL kuinki tarnaš “On the upper citadel he let no one in[to the presence(?) of Kubaba] (and) LAMMA” KBo 5.6 iii 33-35 (Deeds of Šupp. I), w. dupl. KBo 39.280 iii 5-7, ed. DŠ 95.
6' a stela: ta šarā ša-ra-az-zi NA›ZI.KIN paizzi “And he (i.e., the king) goes up to the upper stela” KUB 10.18 i 13-14 (fest., OH/NS).
7' a road: […]–šan ša-ra-az-zi KASKAL-ši tiya “Step onto the upper road” KUB 33.70 ii 7 (missing god, OH/ENS), translit. Myth. 101.
8' lands: (“In the morning when the Sun(god) rises through the sky”) nu–ššan ša-ra-a-a[(z-z])i-ia-aš u[tn]Ëaš (var. KUR-eHI.A) katterašš–a utneyaš hūmandaš [(t)]uel–pat dUTU-waš <(lalukkimaš)> tiyari “<(the radiance)> of you alone, O Sun(god), appears on all the upper and lower lands” KUB 31.127 + KUB 36.79 i 40-42 (prayer to the Sungod, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.133:19-20, ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:240, emended from similar KUB 30.11 obv. 1-2 + KUB 31.135 obv. 9-10 + KBo 34.22 obv.? 8-9, ed. lalukkima-; cf. The Upper Land province: KUR UGU KBo 3.4 iii 69, 70 (AM); Hatt. passim; KBo 13.76 rev. 9; KUR URUUGU KBo 4.4 ii 16 (AM); KUR URUUGU-TIM KUB 14.16 i 36 (AM); KUR URUUGU-TI Hatt. passim; cf. bil. sec., RGTC 6:293f. (“Oberes Land”), RGTC 6/2:117, RLA s.v. Oberes Land. 
9' a leg of a bed: n–an ša-ra-az-zi ANA GÌR GIŠNÁ […-]an katta tianzi “They put it (bread) down […] at the upper leg of the bed” KBo 20.51 i 12-13 (cult of Huwaššana, MS) | the “upper leg” presumably means “the leg at the head of the bed”; one should probably restore [EGIR]-an “behind” or [per]an “before” or [aw]an. 
10' a door socket: āp[pa–ma 1 NINDA.SIG … wawarkimi ša-]ra-a-az-zi katter[i o-]x takkui dagānz[ipi …] “Ne[xt one thin bread …] at the upper [door socket], at the lower [door socket …], on the Dark Ear[th]” KBo 24.71:10-11 (rit., NS), ed. ChS I/5:348 (restoring kattere[zz]i), cf. also THeth 12:128f. (restoring [DINGI]R.MEŠ) | our restoration requires atypical word order; it is preferable to restoring katere[zz]i since this would be the only instance of this adj., and it is against the traces seen in the copy; the restoration [DINGI]R.MEŠ fits the traces, but one expects such a d.-l. to have either A-NA preceding or -aš phonetic complement.
11' a musical instrument: [n]–ašta mān ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-az [GIŠhuhupa]laz arhaya lahūwāri n–at–kan katta ape[z katt]erri GIŠhuhupali lahūwāri “And if it (sc. the marnuwan) flows out of the upper [huhupa]l, then it flows down from that into the [low]er huhupal” KUB 25.37 i 25-27 (Lalupiya rit., NS), ed. Melchert, HS 101:230, Güterbock, FsHouwink ten Cate 65.
12' a lip: [… š]a(?)-ra-az-ia-az pūriyaz “From the upper lip” KBo 16.56:14 (rit., MS?), ed. Kühne, FsOtten 162f., cf. puri- A where we emended <-zi->.
b. deities or humans belonging to the upperworld versus the netherworld — 1' deities: nu–šmaš UGU-zi-uš (var. UGU-zi-iš, UGU-az-z[i-…) DINGIR.MEŠ kūn šekten “You should recognize this one (i.e., the substitute king), O upper-world gods” KUB 17.14 obv.! 20 (subst. rit., NS), w. dupls. KBo 15.9 i 18, (KBo 15.2 +) Bo 8033 i 28 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:152), ed. StBoT 3:58f. (“ihr oberen Götter, merkt euch den!”); [DINGIR.ME]Š KU[R-T]I DINGIR.MEŠ URU-LIM HUR.SAG.MEŠ ÍD.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ ABI A[MA] [DINGIR.ME]Š LÚ.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ UGU-az-zi-uš DINGIR.MEŠ dapiante[š] “[The god]s of the country, the gods of the city, mountains, rivers, the gods of father (and) mo[ther], the male (and) female [god]s, all the upper-world gods” KUB 17.14 rev.! 16-17 (subst. rit., NS), ed. StBoT 3:60f.; cf. UGU-zi-uš DINGIR.MEŠ KUB 24.12 iii 8-9, 10 (rit., MH?/NS).
2' a human being (who serves as a substitute for the king): (The king speaks as follows): kāš–wa–mu UGU-zi-iš (vars. ša-ra-az-zi-iš, UGU-az-zi-iš) TI-anza P¨HŠU kāš–ma–wa–mu šË[naš] katterraš P¨HŠU “This one (i.e., the living prisoner of war) is an upper-world living substitute for me, while this figur[ine] is a netherworld substitute for me” KUB 17.14 obv.! 16-17 (subst. rit., NS), w. dupl. KBo 15.2 i 23-24, KBo 15.9 i 14-15, ed. StBoT 3:56f. (“Dieser (ist) der lebendige oberirdische Ersatz für mich, dieses Ersatzbild aber (ist) der unterirdische Ersatz für mich”) | for P¨HŠU for Akk. pūhu see StBoT 3:81. 
2. (adj., figuratively) superior — a. a legal case or claim: DˆNAM ša-ra-az-zi katterahhi lË katterra šaraz<zi>yahi lË kuit handan apāt Ïšša “He (i.e., the governor) must not make superior cases lose; he must not make inferior ones win. You, do what is just” KUB 13.2 iii 27-28 (BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 48, StMed 14:154f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:224; similarly KUB 13.20 i 34-35 (instr. of Tudh., MH/NS), ed. šarazziyahh- b; (Let us bring our lawsuit to the gods) nu–wa–za mān zik DI-ešnaza ša-ra-az<-z(i)>-iš nu–wa tuk šarazziyahhandu mān–ma–wa–za ammuk–ma DI-ešnaza ša-ra-az-zi-iš nu–wa ammuk šarazziahhandu § nu–wa ANA dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠAN–YA ŠU-an šarā Ëppun nu–mu dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠAN–YA warriššišta nu ša-ra-az-zi katterra–ya anda ˚maruwāit “If you have the superior case in the litigation, let them declare you as the winner; if, however, I have the superior case in the litigation, let them declare me as the winner. I held up my hand to my lady IŠTAR of Šamuha, and my lady IŠTAR of Šamuha helped me, and she … maruwai-ed above and below” KBo 6.29 ii 4-12 (shorter version of Hatt.), w. dupl. 509/u (Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:84) + KUB 21.15 ii 8-13, ed. Hatt. 48f. (“ …. Und IŠTAR, meine Herrin, kam mir zu Hilfe, und zwischen dem, der die Oberhand bekommt, und dem, der unterliegt, schied sie, und Himmel und Erde übergoß sie”).
b. designating “words”(?): tarahhun–at–za UH‡-naš uddār [ku]e ≠uddār± [ša-ra-]az-zi n–at–za ammel uddanānteš tar[ahh]er “I have vanquished them, the words of sorcery. [Wh]ich words are [supe]rior? My words van[qui]shed them” KUB 17.27 iii 8-9 (rit., MH/NS), ed. ChS I/5:194 (w. different restorations), tr. ANET 347.
3. adv. “above” (opp. kattera-): nu ša-ra-a-az-zi nepi[š]aš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš piddāši kattanda dankui taknÏ kar[uiliyaš] DINGIR.MEŠ-aš piddāši “Above, you make an allotment to the cele[s]tial gods, below, in the netherworld, you make an allotment to the pri[meval] gods” KUB 31.127 ii 1-3 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 96, 103, cf. piddai- C; kuttann–a kattan ša-ra-zi!-ia IŠTU KÙ.BABBAR hališšiyanun “And I plated the wall below and above with silver” KBo 10.2 iii 23-24 (annals of Hatt. I, NS), ed. StMed 12:70f. (“dal basso all'alto”), Imparati, SCO 14:52f. (translit. ša-ra É-še-ja), tr. TUAT I/5:463 (“(von) unten (bis) oben”); nu ša-ra-a-az-[z]i kattirri–ya kuwapi URUHattuši LÚ.MEŠEN.NU.UN BÀD tar[n]anzi “Whenever in Hattuša above and below (i.e., in the upper and lower cities) they station wall watchmen” (let them not place them without consulting you, the city-governor) Bo 69/1256 + KUB 26.9 i 6-7 (HAZANNU instr., MH/NS), ed. Otten, Or NS 52:134f. | tr. thus rather than “in upper and lower Hattuša” (mng. 1) due to the position of kuwapi; ANA 4 halhaltumari–ya–ššan ŠA É-TIM [KÁ-š]a GIŠkattaluzzi GIŠhattalwaš GIŠ-ru<i> katteri ša-ra-az-zi [SÍG]ašāran kuwapiya 2-ŠU hamanki “In the four corners of the house, at the threshold [of the door], on the wood of the door bolt, below and above, everywhere two times, he binds strings [of wool]” KBo 4.2 i 29-31 (incant., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:90, 96, similar ibid. 34-36, 42-44.
Friedrich, ZA 35 (1924) 16 (“der obere”); Götze, Hatt. (1925) 91; Lohmann, IF 51 (1933) 319-326; Otten, Or NS 52 (1983) 139.
Cf. šarā, šaraz(z)iyahh-, šarazziyatar, šarazziyaz, šarazeške-.
(KUŠ)šarazzi- B n.; (mng. unkn.); from OH.†
inst. KUŠša-ra-az-zi-it KBo 17.43 i 12 (OS), ša-ra-a-az-zi-it ibid. i (9), KBo 17.18 ii (14) (OS).
LÚNAR-šiyaš–aba arāi ta ganenantaš tarukzi ša-ra-a-az[-zi-i(t)] papparškizzi … LÚmenean KUŠša-ra-az-zi-it (var. [ša-ra]-≠a±-az-zi-it) walhzi “The singer(?) gets up and whirls around, crouching. He sprinkles using a (leather) š.… He hits the archer(?) with the š., (when he goes forward, he strikes the LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·)” KBo 17.43 i 9-10, 12 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.18 ii 10-11, 14 (OS), ed. de Martino, La danza 69f., translit. StBoT 15:104f., cf. Watkins, in Mellink, Troy and the Trojan War 55f. (“He asperses with a leather water bottle”), cf. LÚmeneya- a | for the grammatical form of ganenantaš (gen.) cf. arandaš s.v. ar- and ašandaš s.v. eš- | for the reading -aba see Neu, StBoT 26:112 n. 392, 257 | for the reading LÚNAR rather than LÚLUL in KBo 17.43 and LÚHUŠ in KBo 17.18 see Güterbock, FsKraus 88, and note that both signs are broken in such a way that both may actually have had the horizontal of a NAR in front.  See also Soysal, BiOr 61:373, who argues that LÚLUL-šiya- = LÚtarašiya- should not be translated “singer/musician” (LÚNAR =  LÚhazinirtalla-  and LÚkinirtalla-).  Cf. LÚtarašiya-.
E. Masson, RHR 213 (1996) 36f. (“lanière en peau de bête”).
šaraz(z)iyahh- v.; to make (a litigant or a legal case) prevail or win (in a lawsuit), rule in favor (of a litigant or legal case) (opp. of katterrahh- “to make lose, rule against”); from OH/NS.
pres. sg. 3 ša-ra-az-ia-hi KUB 13.2 iii 28 (MH/NS); pl. 2 ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-ah-te-ni KUB 13.20 i 35 (Tudh. II/NS).
pret. sg. 1 ša-r[a-azziyahhun(?)] KBo 22.81 rev.? 5 (OH/NS); sg. 3 ša-ra-a-az-z[(i-i)]a-ah-ta KUB 1.1 iii 23, w. dupl. KUB 1.7 ii 18, ša-ra-a-zi-ia-ah-t[a] KUB 19.67 i 15 (both Hatt. III).
imp. pl. 3 ša-ra-az-zi-ia-ah-ha-an-du KBo 6.29 ii 5 (Hatt. III), ša-ra-az-zi-ah-ha-an-du KBo 6.29 ii 8.
a. w. obj. a litigant and abl. hannešnaz: nu–mu ŠEŠ–YA kuit[ ANA µdSÎN]-dIM DINGIR[-LIM-it] DI-ešnaz ša-ra-a-zi-ia-ah-t[(a)] (dupl. ša-ra-a-az-z[i-i]a-ah-ta) “Because my brother [with (the help of)] the deity ruled in my favor over Arma-Tarhunta in a legal case, (I never again fell victim to his malice)” KUB 19.67 i 14-15 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KUB 1.1 iii 22-23, ed. StBoT 24:18f.; (Hattušili, King of Hakpiš, says to his nephew, the emperor Muršili III: “You are a Great King, and I only a petty king. Come, let us stand in court before the Stormgod, my lord, and IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady”) nu–wa–za mān zik DI-ešnaza šaraziš nu–wa tuk ša-ra-az-zi-ia-ah-ha-an-du mān–ma–wa–za ammuk–ma DI-ešnaza šarazziš nu–wa ammuk ša-ra-az-zi-ah-ha-an-du “If you have the superior case in the litigation, let them rule in your favor; if, however, I have the superior case in the litigation, let them rule in my favor” KBo 6.29 ii 4-8 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 48f. 
b. w. obj. a lawsuit, case, or claim, acc. hanneššar: nu šarāzzi DI-šar lË katterrahtËni katterra–ma hanneššar lË ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-ah-te-ni “Do not rule against superior legal cases, and do not rule in favor of inferior legal cases ” KUB 13.20 i 34-35 (instr., Tudh. II/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:394f., 407; DˆNAM šarazzi katterahhi lË katerra ša-ra-az<-zi>-ia-hi lË kuit handan apāt Ïšša “He (i.e., the governor) must not make winning cases lose; he must not make losing ones win. You, do what is just” KUB 13.2 iii 27-28 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. StMed 14:154f., Dienstanw. 48 (“Eine gute Rechtssache soll er nicht unterliegen lassen, eine schlechte nicht obsiegen lassen”), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:224; nu DˆNU kuitki ša-r[a-zziyahhun] KBo 22.81 rev.? 5 (prayer, OH/NS), cf. […katte]rrahhun in line 7.
Friedrich, ZA 35 (1924) 16; Götze, Hatt. (1925) 91; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 428; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 250, 252.
Cf. šaraz(z)i(ya)- A.
šarāzziyatar n. neut.; uppermost point, summit, high ground; Murš. II.†
sg. nom.-acc. ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-tar KUB 19.37 ii 31.
nu–kan M¨LÛ parkuin kuwapi EGIR-an šarā uwaši nu ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-tar (written over eras., var. [MU]-LU-U) irhāš parā–ma A.ŠÀA.GÀR ŠA URUTimmuhala wemiyaši nu M¨LÛ irhāš “When you climb up the Bare Peak from behind, the summit (var. hill) is the border. Further on you reach the fields of Timmuhala, the hill is the border” KUB 19.37 ii 30-33 (ann., Murš. II), w. par. KUB 31.39 rev. 7, ed. AM 170f. Since M¨LÛ agrees with common gender parkuin, and so appears to be com., it is probably not the Akkadogram for šarraziyatar, but a near synonym.
For “height” as a dimension see pargatar, parkuwatar.
Götze, AM (1933) 263.
Cf. šaraz(z)i(ya)- A.
šarazziyaz adv.; 1. on the upper side, 2. upstream; from MS.†
ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-az KBo 23.27 ii 35, iii 11 (MS), [ša-r]a-az-zi-ia-az ibid. iii 28 (MS), KUB 12.58 iii 20 (pre-NH/NS), ša-ra-az-zi-az KBo 10.27 iii 6 (NS).
1. on the upper side: MUNUS.ŠU.GI–ma GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-aš [peran ša-ra]-az-zi-ia-az GIŠhattalkešnaš [KÁ.GAL-aš iyazi] “The Old Woman, however, [makes a gate(?)] of hawthorne on the upper side [before] the tent” KUB 12.58 iii 19-21 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Tunn. 16-19 | rest. KÁ.GAL somewhat doubtful because it is resumed in next clause by -at (neut.); cf. in broken context KBo 10.27 iii 6 (fest., NS); here or adj.?: again in broken context Babyloniaca 4:227 no. 5 obv. 6.
2. upstream (opp. of katteraz “downstream”): (“They do not draw water from the place where the Red River mingles with the Maraššanda”) kattirazi–ya UL handanzi (scribal error for hananzi) … § nu wātar apËdani pËdi dann–a UL hānanzi ANA ¬dMaraššanti-pa!-ta-at (–pat–at) ša-ra-a-az-zi-ia-az [h]āniyanzi “Downstream they do not draw. … § They do not draw water also a second time in that place. They draw it from the same Maraššanta upstream” KBo 23.27 ii 30-31, 33-35 (rit., MS), ed. Ünal, Ortaköy 90, 95 (differently), translit. Trémouille, Eothen 10:209; cf. in broken context ibid. iii 11, 28; cf. Hittite Laws §162 (Hoffner, LH 128f., 212, and Melchert, JCS 31:59-62) for the use of the terms šarā and šer for taking water upstream, etc.
Cf. šarā, šaraz(z)i(ya)- A, šarazziyatar, šarazeške-.
šarazeške- v. imperf.; to prevail (in legal cases); Tudh. IV.†
imperf. pres. pl. 3 ša-ra-ze-eš-kán-zi KBo 4.14 iv 59 (Tudh. IV?).
(“You shall not say”) [… n]u ANA LUGAL.MEŠ DI-za UL ša-ra-ze-eš-kán-zi “… And they do not prevail over kings in judgment” (or: “Do they not prevail …?”) KBo 4.14 iv 59 (instr., Tudh. IV?), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 301f. | negated -ške- forms are rare. From the relatively few attestations it is not clear that they mean “never” as opposed to “not regularly,” “not repeatedly” or “no longer.” In [DUMU.LÚ.U⁄°.LU-UTT]I / [(ANA DINGIR)].MEŠ SISKUR UL peškanzi KUB 33.103 ii 9-10 we must translate “[morta]ls(?) will no longer give sacrifice to the gods,” since until that point sacrifices were in fact being made. Because of this uncertainty we translate more generally here, not seeking to bring out a special force to the -ške- verb. A negative rhetorical question is formally possible also.
Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 402 (“überlegen werden,” stem either šarazeš- or denominal šaraziya-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 250, 253 (stem = šarazziešš-).
Cf. šaraz(z)i(ya)- A.
[šarh-] HW 185 see šarhiya-.
šarhanān n. neut.; (probably a vessel); NS.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-ha-na-a-an IBoT 3.70 rt. col. 4 (NS), KBo 45.4:10 (NS), šar-ha-na-an KUB 27.69 ii (3), 7 (NS).
(“The cook holds […] behind the hearth. Bowl and oil […]”) nu–ššan šar-ha-na[(-a-an) o-o] lāhūwan / nu–kan ma[(hhan)] / NINDA.GUR›.RA ANA LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM / handāizzi n–ašta šar-ha-na-an haššÏ–kan (dupl. either [≥… (verb) nu–kan] haššÏ or omits –kan) / anda lāhuwāi “And a š. is poured/emptied (in/on it). When he prepares thick bread for the cooks, he pours/empties the š. on the hearth” KUB 27.69 ii 3-8 (month fest., NS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.70 rt. col. 3-8 (NS) | for clause internal -kan see Neu, Linguistica 33:137-152; [nu]–ššan šar-ha-na-a-an ≠GAR±-ri “š. lies/is laid on it” KBo 45.4:10 (fest. of month, NS), ed. Neu, Linguistica 33:139 n. 15 (as 420/s:10).
Since a š. can be “placed/laid down” or “emptied/poured out” it is probably a vessel (cf. s.v. lahuwai- 2). The plene writing in the final syllable, common enough w. neut. participles (e.g., arān, handān, irhān, mutān, nahhān, dammišhān, tiyān, etc.) and less common with a-stem nouns, could point to a substantivized part. for š.; cf. (DUG)kattakurant-.
Possibly an ablaut variant of the stem found in šerha- and LÚšerhala- q.v.
Neu, Linguistica 33 (1993) 139 w. n. 15 (“eine Flüssigkeit?”).
Cf. šarhanuwami-, šerha-, LÚšerhala-.
šarhanuwami- Luw. passive part.; (“…-ed,” a quality of wool?); NH.†
sg. nom. com. šar-ha-nu-wa-me<-eš> (or: [-eš]?) KUB 42.56:10 (NH), šar-ha-nu-wa-mi-iš KUB 42.15 left col. 5 (NH).
7 MA.NA SÍG šar-ha-nu-wa-me-<eš> (or: [-eš]?) “7 minas of š.-wool” KUB 42.56:10 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 522 (<-eš>), 524, translit. THeth 10:131; […SÍ]G HAŠARTUM šar-ha-nu-wa-mi-iš […] “(yellow-)green wool (that has been) š.-ed” KUB 42.15 left col. 5 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 420f., translit. THeth. 10:23 | parsing as sg. nom. com. based upon known gender of SÍG = hulana-/ huliya- “wool.”
The word appears to be a Luw. part. in -mi- from a causative verb in -nuwa-, which could have been derived from the possible verbal stem present in šarhanān, q.v.
Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 23 (“kind of wool“); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 616 (“eine Wollqualität”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 189 (“?”).
šarhiya- v.; to press upon(?), maul(?).†
pres. pl. 2 šar-hi-e[t-te-ni?] FHL 2:9 (NS); imp. sg. 3 šar-hi-i-e-ed-du KBo 16.24 i 15 (MH/MS); imperf. pret. sg. 3 šar-hi-iš-ki-it KUB 24.3 ii 45 (Murš. II).
mid. pres. sg. 3 šar-hi-ia-at[-…?] KUB 44.4 rev. 27 (NS), KBo 18.132:5 (or act. pret. sg. 3, MS); imp. sg. 2 šar-hi-ia-ah-hu-ut KUB 60.98 rev. 16 (NS).
a. w. d.-l.: karū–≠ma/ya?± (dupl. nu karū) [(KUR) U]RUKÙ.BABBAR-ti IŠTU dUTU URUArinna arahzenaš (var. arahzena) ≠ANA± (dupl. omits) KUR.KUR.HI.A-TIM (dupl. KUR-e) UR.MAH mān šar-hi-iš-ki-it (var. a[raškit]) “Formerly, however, with the aid of the Sungoddess of Arinna the land of Hatti continually mauled(?) (var. i[nvaded]) the foreign lands like a lion” KUB 24.3 ii 44-45 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.4 + KUB 30.12 rev. 2-3, ed. Gurney, AAA 27:105, Lebrun, Hymnes 162, 170, Trabazo, TextosRel. 300f., tr. Hittite Prayers 53.
b. w. acc. and -za–kan: [GIM-an(?)]–ma–z–kan zahhiy[awanzi Ëpzi nu LÚ.KÚ]R(?)-aš (or: [tuzz]iaš) hantezzian šar-hi-i-e-ed-du “[When it (i.e., the army) begins to join] battle(?), let it maul(?)/press(?) the first (rank) of [the enem]y(?) (or: of [the (opposing) arm]y)” KBo 16.25 i 4 + KBo 16.24 i 15 (instr., MH/MS), ed. Rizzi Mellini, FsMeriggi2 518f. (differently, “alla prima occasione stia all’erta? (lett. salti su)”); nu–za DINGIR-LUM kÏ UZUNÍG.GI[G… U]ZUŠÀ–ŠU lË šar-hi-e[t-te-ni? …] “May(?) the deity […] this liv[er] for him/her self […]. May y[ou (pl.) not press(?) […] his heart” FHL 2:8-9 (rit., NS); nu–wa–za–kan kūš(!) EME.MEŠ ˚šar-hi-ia-ah-hu-ut “Press(?) these (evil?) tongues” KUB 60.98 rev. 16, ed. StBoT 5:154 as Bo 1706 rev. 17; IGI-anda–za–aš–kan šar-hi-ia-at [m]anniš MUNUS-iš MUNUSŠÀ.ZU “She presses(?) them against herself, [the m]anniš woman, the midwife” KUB 44.4 rev. 27 + KBo 13.241 rev. 15 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:178f., translit. StBoT 30:236 | š. is read as šarhiyat, pret. sg. 3, by Oettinger, Stammbildung 288 n. 57 and StBoT 30:236 which is indeed all that the available space allows. Moreover, a pret. is not surprising. The entire passage 1-18 is a combination of some presents of the ritual scenario (e.g., hukzi in 18), many preterites that are part of a narrative and some presents that are part of direct speech within the narrative. It is not impossible that šarhiyat is a last preterite of the narrative part. The Hitt. word “woman” should be written MUNUS-za in the nom. sg. For Luw. manna/i- see StBoT 31:397 n. 1431 and CLL 137. There are many other Luwian words and forms in this text, although most are marked with gloss wedges. The order of clitics -za-aš- is irregular but not unprecedented for later NH; cf. Kühne, FsOtten2 215 n. 46. 
c. unclear: (“Because Your Majesty [wrote] to me: ‘Hurry’”) […] šar-hi-ia-at[(-)…] “… ([…] The exta […])” KBo 18.132:5 (letter, MH/MS), ed. THeth 16:67, cf. Klinger, ZA 85:91 (dating and provenance) | it is unclear whether the verb is mid. pres. or act. pret., nor is it clear where the quotation of the king’s letter ended. An inf. šarhuwanzi of š. in šar-hu[-wa-an-zi? SAG.DU–ŠU?] restored in KUB 24.7 iii 25-26 (Tale of the Cow and the Fisherman, NS) by Friedrich, ZA 49.228f. (“[um] anzug[reifen(?)]”), w. comm. 251, followed by LMI 175 (“la vacca mosse [la sua testa] come un’onda per dar[gli addosso]”) is unlikely, see šarhuwant-.
For a possible Cuneiform Luwian cognate see StBoT 31:393 n. 1416, CLL 189.
Götze, apud Sturtevant, Gl2 (1936) (“treat in the manner of a lion”); Gurney, AAA 27 (1940) 105 (“behave in the manner of a lion”); Friedrich, ZA 49 (1950) 251 (“herfallen (über)”); idem, HW (1952) 185; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 424 (“sich aufstürzen”); StBoT 5 (1968) 154 (no tr., related to šarhula/i?); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 288f. w. n. 57 (“überfallen, losschlagen,” connected with šarra-); Rizzi Mellini, FsMeriggi2 (1979) 542 (= šark- “saltare su”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 196 (based upon KUB 44.4 rev. 27 + KBo 13.241 rev. 15, the unclear birth ritual passage: “press, push (down or out), oppress”); Lehrmann, Indo-Hittite Redux (1998) 127 (not connected with šarra-); Trabazo, TextosRel. 301 w. n. 117 (“caer”); Hoffmann, HS 113 (2000) 180 (following Friedrich, “herfallen (über)” with deverbal noun šarhuli-). 
Cf. šarhuntalli-.
šarhuwant- n. com.; 1. belly (both of humans and animals), 2. foetus, unborn child, 3. innards, afterbirth(?), or udder(?); written ŠA ŠÀ-BI-ŠA; from OS.†
sg. acc. šar-hu-wa-an-da-an KBo 6.34 iii 18 (MH/NS), UZUšar-hu-u-wa-an-ta-an KUB 27.67 ii 56 (MH/NS).
dat.-loc. šar-hu-wa-an-ti KUB 36.55 ii 37 (MS).
abl. šar-hu-wa-an-ta-az KBo 6.3 iv 28 (OH/NS), šar-hu-u-wa-an-da-az KUB 13.4 i 13 (pre-NH/NS), [šar-hu-]wa-an-da-az KBo 13.99 rev.? 9 (NS), šar<-hu>-wa-an-ta-za KBo 6.7:13 (NS).
inst. UZUšar-hu-wa-an-ti-it Bo 6404 iv 17 + KUB 33.84 iv 15 (NS), […]šar-hu-wa-an-ti-t([a-a]t) KBo 17.17 i? 11 (OS).
pl. acc. šar-hu-wa-an-du-uš KBo 6.3 i 40, 43 (OH/NS).
collective pl. nom.-acc. UZUšar-hu-u-wa-an-da KUB 7.53 i 5 (NH), šar-hu-u-wa-an-da KBo 6.5 i 20, 23 (OH/NS), šar-hu-wa-an-da KBo 6.3 iii 78, 80 (OH/NS), ŠA ŠÀ-BI-ŠA KBo 6.2 iv 6, 7 (OS).
unclear case: šar-hu-u-wa-an-da-aš KBo 33.216 i 11, 12 (LNS), šar-hu-u-wa-an-da KUB 32.74 iv 6, šar-[h]u-wa-an-ta-x[…] KUB 16.61:13 (NH), UZUšar-hu-u-w[a-…] KBo 13.146 ii 17 (NS), UZUšar-hu-w[a-…] KUB 7.38 obv. 27, UZUšar-hu-wa-an(-)x[…] 662/u:6 (StBoT 22:43 n. 92), šar-hu-[…] KUB 24.7 iii 25, 56 (NS).
1. belly (both of humans and animals) (apparently exclusively the sg. form): (“If a dog eats (some) lard, and the owner of the lard finds it, kills it”) n–ašta Ì-an šar-hu-wa-an-ta-az–šet (dupl. šar<-hu>-wa-an-ta-za–šet) K[A]R-izzi (var. dāi) “and retrieves the lard from its belly (there is no compensation)” KBo 6.3 iv 28 (Laws §90, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.7:13, ed. LH 90; (“He places in their hands a figure with its interior full of water, and thus he says: ‘Who is this? Did he not swear? He swore before the gods, then he transgressed the oath, and the oath gods seized him’”) n–aš–šan ŠÀ–ŠU šuttati nu–za šar-hu-wa-an-da-an Q¸TI–ŠU peran UGU-a karpan harzi “‘With respect to his interior he is filled (with water). His hand has lifted his belly up in front. (May these oath gods seize whoever transgresses these oaths. May his innards (ŠÀ–ŠU) fill. Inside in his innards (ŠÀ–ŠU) may the child(ren?) of Išhara [dwell] and may they devour him)’” KBo 6.34 iii 12-13, 17-19 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:12f., cf. StBoT 5:159 (“das Gedärm”) | on the “children of Išhara” and Išhara hereself as agents of illness see Prechel, Išhara 129-133, Otten, HTR 100f., Burde, StBoT 19:14f., and RLA 5:177f. s.v. Išhara; on the statuette being described see Börker-Klähn in FsAlp 69-72; (in a sequence of parts of a slaughtered goat that are offered:) ZAG-an [U]Z[UGEŠ]TU?-an … UZUNÍG.GIG … UZUZAG.UDU… UZUKURŠINNU … \ SAG.DU … [U]ZUšar-hu-u-wa-an-ta-an KUB 27.67 ii 48-56 (Tarpatašši’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 396f.; (“[…] from the […-]tiya, from the neck, fr[om] the breast, […], from […])” […-a]z ŠÀ-az NÍG.GIG-az [… šar-hu-]wa-an-da-az genzu[waz(?) … gen]uwaz GÌR-az “from the […], from the heart, from the exta, […] from the [be]lly, [from] the genitals, […], from the [kn]ee, from the foot, ([…] from the […] he chased it)” KBo 13.99 rev.? 8-10 (rit., NH); also beside ŠÀ 662/u:4-6 (StBoT 22:43 n. 92.); (“His, i.e., Hedammu’s, manhood starts springing up. His manhood […]. He repeatedly starts to impregnate […-]s. He […]-ed 130 cities [with …]”) UZUšar-hu-wa-an-ti-it 70 URU.DIDLI.HI.A […] “[He …-ed] 70 cities with (his?) belly” Bo 6404 iv 17 + KUB 33.84 iv 15 (Hedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:60f. (“Bauch”).
2. foetus, unborn child of humans and animals (exclusively using pl. or collective): [(takk)]u MUNUS-aš ELLI šar-hu-wa-an-du-uš–šuš (dupl. šar-hu-u-wa-an-da) kuiški p[(e)]š[(šiya)]zi “If someone causes a free woman to miscarry (lit. causes a free woman’s foetus to drop), (if it is the tenth month, he pays ten shekels, if it is the fifth month, he pays five shekels)…” § takku GÉME-aš šar-hu-wa-an-[du-u]š–šuš (dupl. GÉME-an šar-hu-u-wa-an-da) kuiški pe[(ššiy)]azi “If someone causes a slave woman to miscarry …” KBo 6.3 i 40, 43 (Law §§ 17-18, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 i 20-21, 23, ed. LH 28f., 178f. (= Akk. ša libbÏša “that of her womb”); (“If someone strikes a pregnant cow”) ŠA ŠÀ-BI–ŠA (dupl. nu šar-hu-wa-an-da) peššiezzi “and causes her to miscarry, (he gives two shekels. If someone strikes a pregnant mare)” ŠA ŠÀ-BI–ŠA (dupl. nu šar-hu-wa-an-da) peššiezzi “and causes her to miscarry (he shall pay two shekels of silver)” KBo 6.2 iv 6, 7 (Law § 77a, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 iii 78-79, 80 (OH/NS), ed. LH 83; (“Or if a woman’s infants keep dying”) našma–šši–kan UZUšar-hu-u-wa-an-da–ma mauškizzi “Or (if) she continually miscarries” KUB 7.53 i 4-5 (Tunn. rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 4f. | since the OS copy KBo 6.2 always uses the logogram ŠA ŠÀ-BI–ŠA (Akk. ša libbÏša), while the NH manuscripts KBo 6.3 and 6.5 alternate between the collective šarhuwanta and the regular plural šarhuwanduš, we cannot yet determine which of the two forms was used for mng. 2 in OH. 
3. uncertain: (The Sungod mates with a cow. When the cow comes to term, she complains to the Sungod: “A calf has four legs, why have I borne this two legged one?” The cow opened her mouth like a lion and went to eat the calf) GUD-uš–za šar-hu-[wandan?] huwanhuešar mān halluwanut “The cow lowered (lit. made deep) (her) afte[rbirth(?)] like a flood(?) (and went to the calf [to eat?])” KUB 24.7 iii 25-26 (Tale of the Cow and the Fisherman, NS), ed. Hoffner, FsLacheman 192 (“Like a wave she released her aft[erbirth]”), Beal, OrNS 57:176 (“the cow dropped (her) [udd]er (lit. [bel]ly) like a h.”), HW2 H 88a (“Die Kuh machte den Bau[ch] tief wie eine Woge?”), tr. Hittite Myths2 86 (“the cow made her … as deep as the Deep Blue”) | Friedrich, ZA 49:228 w. comm. 251 restored šar-hu[-wa-an-zi? SAG.DU–ŠU?], taking šarhu[wanzi] as an infinitive of the verb šarh(iya)- (ZA 49:229 “[um] anzug[reifen(?)]”), a tr. followed by LMI 175 (“la vacca mosse [la sua testa] come un’onda per dar[gli addosso]”); however, with HW2 H 88 there is insufficient room for this restoration, and we would have to assume an inf. of an unattested verbal stem; n–ašta É x[ o o ]-≠eš±(-)ša[ o -h]i? dameda[ni] šar-hu-u-wa-an-da-az lË harn[ik(t)]eni “do not des[t]roy […] for another from/by means of a š.” KUB 13.4 i 13 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.6 i 11, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 20f. (“di©er bir canlının embriyonundan (bir ®ey?)”).
Zimmern, OLZ 25 (1922) 298 (“das Innere, Leibesfrucht, Embryo, Fötus”); Friedrich, ZA 35 (1923) 185 (“Inhalt, Leibesfrucht, Embryo, Leibesinneres, Bauch”); von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 116 (= UZUŠÀ); Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 42f. (“belly > swollen belly > what is in the belly, foetus,” not UZUŠÀ but ŠA ŠÀ-BI-ŠA); Beal, OrNS 57 (1988) 176 (“udder” in KUB 24.7).
šarhuwar n.; (mng. unkn.); OH.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-hu-wa-ar KUB 58.90 iii 5 (pre-NS?); d.-l. šar-hu-u-ni KBo 17.99 iv 6 (OH/MS).
§ LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR adann[a …] / šar-hu-u-ni–šan MUN-x[…] KBo 17.99 iv? 5-6 (rit. containing Hattic, OH/MS); § […]x-zi šar-hu-wa-ar–wa–kan […]x idālu tarkiyauwar […] ≠d?±UTU-uš–wa ANA DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU […] § KUB 58.90 iii 5-8 (rit., pre-NS?) | for the hapax tarkiyauwar see HEG T,D 177; perhaps to be read <iš->tar-ki-ia-u-wa-ar.
šarhula- adj.; pillared; MH?/NS.†
abl. šar-hu-la-az KUB 12.65 iii? 11 (MH?/NS).
n–aš–kan šarā hūdak arāiš n–aš–kan taknaš ÍD-ašš–a KASKAL-an GAM-an arha [iyattat] 1-anki(y)–aš šarrattat n–aš–kan ANA dKumarbi šar-hu-la-az taknaza GIŠŠÚ.A-i[–šši] kattan šarā uit “He (i.e., the great Sea) suddenly got up and [he went] the path of the ground and of the river (i.e., the river in the Netherworld). He crossed all at once. He came up from below through the ‘Pillared Earth’ to Kumarbi on his throne” KUB 12.65 iii? 10-12 (Hedammu, MH?/NS), ed. Kum. *31, 32 (“Fluß”), StBoT 14:50f. (“aus š.”) n. 45 (“einem bautechnischen Terminus”), tr. Hittite Myths2 53 (“from/by …”), LMI 141 (“da sotto il šarhula’ dalla terra, presso il [suo] sedile”), cf. Ünal, JCS 40:103 and idem, Belleten LII/205:1480 (“one or more poles supporting the throne or seat of Kumarbi, a construction like a trellis, bower (Turkish çardak), or a hunting stand (German Anstand)”);  cf. KBo 26.80:2 using GIŠDÌM -az (cf. StBoT 14:68f. as 1515/u). Note the expression taknaš hattalwaš “bars/bolts of the earth” as an expression of Allani’s underworld palace KBo 32.13 ii 12-13 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil. rit. of release, MH/MS). A similar expression is found in the Hebrew Bible (Jonah 2:6). The Bible also mentions “pillars” in connection with the underworld: “He shakes the earth from its place and makes its pillars tremble” Job 9:6; and “When the earth and all its people quake, it is I who hold its pillars firm” Psalms 75:3. The ablative form šar-hu-la-az (perlative use) could only be derived from šarhuli, if the latter were a Luwian noun showing i-mutation (šarhula/i-), but the i-forms in the oblique cases of šarhuli- exclude that assumption. And since the word order suggests that š. here is an adjective rather than the noun šarhuli-, and it is impossible to derive an a-stem adj. šarhula- from the noun šarhuli-, it is better to derive the i-stem noun from an a-stem adjective as is common: cf. dannatti- “desolation” from dannatta- “desolate.”
Cf. (GIŠ)šarhuli-, šarhuliya-.
(GIŠ)šarhuli- n. com.; pillar(?); wr. syll. and GIŠDÌM; from OS.
sg. nom. šar-hu-li-iš KUB 55.28 ii 3 (NS), šar-hu-u-li-iš 445/w rev. 6.
acc. šar-hu-l[i-in?] KUB 36.90 rev. 43 (NS).
loc. šar-hu-li KBo 17.13 i! 2 (OS), KUB 7.2 i 13 (NH), KBo 13.185:2 (NS), HT 79 rt.col. 2 (NS), GIŠšar-hu-li VS 28.33 ii 1 (NS), GIŠšar-hu-li-i KBo 11.47 i 5 (NS), šar-hu-u-li KUB 10.83 i 3 (NS), GIŠšar-hu-u-li KBo 24.109 + KBo 15.24 iii 4 (MH/NS), KBo 13.114 ii 22 (MH/NS), GIŠšar-hu-li-ia KBo 30.182 i 14 (NS).
gen. [šar-hu-]u-li-ia-aš 445/w rev. 2 (NS), GIŠšar-hu-li-aš KBo 15.24 ii 30 (MH/NS), šar-hu-li-aš KBo 44.92 rev. 4 (MS), šar-hu-li-ia-aš KBo 17.15 rev. 13 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.40 rev. 7 (OH/MS), KBo 22.261 i 3, GIŠDÌM-aš KUB 58.58 i 8 (NS).
abl. GIŠDÌM-az KBo 26.80:2.
pl. acc. šar!-hu-li-uš KUB 2.2 iii 38 (OH/NS), šar-hu-li-uš Or. 90/422 rev. 2 (HHWT 981).
dat. šar-hu-li-ia-aš KUB 55.28 ii 7, 11, 15 (NS), KUB 33.59 ii 4(?) (OH/MS).
frag. šar-hu-li-[(-)…] KUB 33.59 ii? 4 (OS), šar-hu-u-l[i(-)…] KBo 46.25:5.
logographic (without Hitt. phonetic compl.): GIŠDÌM KUB 41.3 obv. 18, IBoT 4.14 obv. 7, KUB 27.70 iii 18, 20 (NH), GIŠDÌM-TI› KBo 23.56 iv 6.
There is no evidence for a neuter noun *šarhul- (cf. KN 180, Lebrun, Hymnes 365 for KUB 36.90 rev. 43 and Tischler, HHwb 145). The only form possibly pointing at an l-stem is the abl. šarhulaz for which see šarhula-. For the suggestion that šalhuri- q.v. might be a variant of š. see Tischler, HdW 71.
(Hattic) tu-u-hu-ul tuwahši te–kÏp!(copy wrongly -dip) KUB 2.2 ii 35 = (Hitt.) 4-aš šar-hu-li-uš / ≠kuišša–wa–za± kuttan pahšaru “Let everyone protect/guard the four pillars and the wall (of this house)” ibid. iii 38-39 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Schuster, HHB I 73 (differently, “die 4 Brunnen?”); the reading kuišša–wa–za is taken from Or. 90/132 + Or. 90/292 iii 2 and Or. 90/995 + Or. 90/1750 ii 2 (Süel/Soysal, forthcoming).  For the equation tūhul = 4-aš šarhuliuš see Soysal, HWHT 316, 829.
a. pillar — 1' place in front of which cult personnel stand: DAM LÚGUDU⁄¤ andan šiunaš É-ri ša[(r-h)]u-[(l)]i-ia-aš per[an a(rta katti–šši–ma)] LÚhištā arta “The wife of the GUDU⁄¤-priest [s]tands inside in the temple in fro[nt] of the pillar; and the man of hešta-house stands next to her” KBo 17.15 rev.! 13-14 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.40 iv 7-8 (fest., OH/MS), ed. Haas/Wäfler, UF 8:82f., 88f., translit. StBoT 25:73; (“The NIN.DINGIR-priestess [comes fro]m the … structure”) n–aš GIŠšar-hu-li-i peran ti[y]az[zi] “and takes up a position in front of the pillar” KBo 11.47 i 5 (fest., NS).
2' serves as a place in front of (P¸NI) or opposite (menahhanda) which statues of gods and cult furniture can be placed: (They bring (the statue of) Tūnapi) n–an PA_NI šar-hu-li tittanuwanzi “and stand it in front of the pillar (and set out a table and food)” KBo 20.68 i 11 (šahhan-fest., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 20.112 + KBo 14.89 i 7 (MH/MS); 10 hazizi ŠA NINDA iyan 1 GIŠBANŠUR GIŠ ištarna pËdi GIŠšar-hu-u-li–kan menahhanta ANA dÉ.A dāi “Ten hazizi are made of bread. (S)he puts one wooden table for Ea in the middle, opposite the pillar” KBo 24.109 + KBo 15.24 iii 3-4 (foundation rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.114 ii 21-22 (pre-NH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 169, 176 (“contre le poteau”), Neu, Linguistica 33:146f. (“dem Pfeiler gegenüber”); cf. KBo 30.182 i 14 (fest.).
3' receives sacrifices: EN É-T[IM kuedani šar-hu-li] peran ašeššanz[a] šar-hu-li UL hukanzi ZAG-naz–m[a] GÙB-lazzi–ya kuiš šar-hu-li-iš nu–ššan apËdani 3 AŠRA hukan[zi] h[uk]anzi–ma–ššan kuwapitta 1 UDU § … 2 šar-hu-li-ia-aš-ša peran kuwapitta 3-ŠU šipanti “They don’t slaughter (any sheep) before [that pillar] in front of which the owner of the house has been seated. But to the pillars (sg.) which are on the right and left, to those (sg.) they slaughter in three (different) places. Each time/In each place they sl[au]ghter one sheep. § … They also libate three times before each of the two pillars” (In the following they place different body parts of the sacrificed animals before these two pillars and finally libate three times before all three pillars) Bo 7740 ii 1-5 + KUB 55.28 ii 1-5, 7-8 (foundation rit., NS), ed. Ünal, JCS 40:99-101 ii 1-6, 8-9, idem, Belleten, LII/205:1475, 1478; šar-hu-u-li ZAG[-az …] KUB 10.83 i 3 (fest. frag., NS); § šar-hu-li pera[n … dāi/tianzi] “[(S)he places (or they place) …] in front of the pillar” HT 79 rt. col. 2-5 (fest. frag., NS); cf. similarly KBo 30.182 i 14 (NS); 1 UDU ANA dT[elipin]u(?) GIŠDÌM hukanzi “They slaughter one sheep for T[elipin]u(?) at the pillar” KBo 39.154 iii 51 + KUB 27.70 iii 18 (fest. of Karahna, OH/NS), ed. AS 25:74f.; […] aulin GIŠšar-hu-li / [šar]ā(?) karappanzi kuitman–ma / […-a]nzi LÚNAR URUKaneš / [SÌR-RU nu? a]uliš tarupta “They lift the victim(’s neck) […] at the pillar. While they [slaughter (it)], the singer of Kaneš [sings and] the victim(’s slaughtering) finishes” VS 28.33 ii 1-4 (fest., NS), ed. Hoffmann, HS 113:178f., translit. Otten, IM 19/20:90 | for auli- in this context see Kühne, ZA 76:109, 112; cf. frag. KBo 23.56 left col. 6 (NS), IBoT 4.137 ii 3 (all fest.).
4' as a locality of a magic ritual: [(HUL-lu)]nn–a UN-an ALAM IM ienzi DINGIR.MEŠ–ŠU–ya–ši [(ÌR.MEŠ–Š)]U ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ GIŠGIGIR.MEŠ–ŠU ŠA IM–pat ienzi [(n–an–ka)]n ŠÀ É šar-hu-li (par. ANA GIŠDÌM) tapušza tianzi “They form a figure of the evil man out of clay; they also form the figures of his (personal) deities, his subjects, horses and chariots out of clay as well and they place them (sg.) in (his) house next to the pillar” KUB 7.2 i 11-13 (rit. of Pupuwanni, pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 7.51:5-7, Bo 4288, and par. KUB 41.3 obv. 15-18 (NS), w. dupl. IBoT 4.14 obv. 4-7 (NS), ed. Hoffmann, HS 113:176f., translit. Prechel, FsPopko 284f.
5' the place (or location) of the pillar: n–an GIŠšar-hu-li-aš pËdi k[atta ti]anz[i] “And they p[ut] it (i.e., the figure of bull) down in the place of the pillar (i.e., as a foundation deposit)” KBo 15.24 ii 30 (foundation rit., MH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 168, 175 (ii 51), cf. peda- A d 1' o'; [… ped]aš humandaš kattanta walhzi […]x šar-hu-li-aš 3 AŠAR GUNNI 3 AŠAR KÁ-aš [3 AŠAR] “[ … ] he/she hammers down at all [pla]ces [ … ] … (at?) three places of the pillar, three places of the hearth, [three places] of the gate” KBo 44.92 rev. 3-4 (MS).
6' plea for its protection: see bil. sec.
b. epithet of the Stormgod: dU GIŠDÌM-aš “Stormgod of the Pillar” KUB 58.58 i 8 (cult inv., NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 290f.; perhaps also KUB 27.70 iii 18 + KBo 39.154 iii 51 above 3'.
The interchange šar-hu-li KUB 7.2 i 13 w. dupls. with GIŠDÌM KUB 41.3 obv. 18, w. dupl. Bo 3360 obv. 7 suggests the equating of both words (HW 3. Erg. 17; Otten, IM 19/20:85-91). The similar context GIŠDÌM hukanzi in KUB 25.32 + KUB 27.70 iii 51 seems to confirm this equation (Otten, IM 19/20:89 n. 8). There are no semantic challenges, even though another phonetic reading of GIŠDÌM could be (GIŠ)kurakki- (Akk. makūtu) “column” (Otten, IM 19/20:90 w. lit.). Given the equation Akk. makūtu = (GIŠ)kurakki- “column, pillar” in the signalement lyrique Otten supposed that GIŠDÌM covers both Hitt. words. Supporting this, in the snake oracle KUB 49.2 kurakki- is a regular feature and thus the GIŠDÌM in KUB 49.1 i 23 is more likely to stand for kurakki-. Although Hoffmann, HS 113:176-180, is right, that the texts KUB 7.2 (w. dupls.) and KUB 41.3 (w. dupl.) are parallel versions rather than duplicates, the passage in which dat.-loc. šarhuli (KUB 7.2 i 13) and ANA GIŠDÌM (KUB 41.3 obv. 18) occur respectively (see above a 4'), match like normal duplicates including the inversion of ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ and GIŠGIGIR.MEŠ–ŠU (KUB 7.2 i 12 = KUB 41.3 obv. 16). Otten’s equation š. = GIŠDÌM therefore still stands. Hoffmann’s proposed meaning “Becken, Holzbottich” faces the difficulty that š. is determined by GIŠ “wood” only and never by any determinative for metals, and that libations are only done in front of but never in it. Similarly, when animals are slaughtered, this happens in front of or at the š. but there is no indication for the latter as a receptacle for the victim’s blood. The passage VS 28.33 ii 1-2 (see above a 3') where an aulin is “lifted” at or in front of a š., recalls the scene on the ∫nandık vase, third register (cf. Özgüç, ∫nandıktepe fig. 64, pl. 46.1) where in front of a pillar or pedestal with a bull statue on it, a servant pulls back the head of a bovid enabling another servant to slash its throat. The š. could be such a pillar, although the placing of objects on it is not attested (the figure in a 5' is deposited under the š.). A similar construction might be depicted on the Boston fist-shaped cup (cf. Güterbock/Kendall, FsVermeule 52 Fig. 3.7) where a Stormgod is shown standing in front of a rectangular structure: for placing cult statues in front of a š. see above a 2'; for a Stormgod of the š. see b. Both š. and (GIŠ)kurakki- “column, pillar” could be square or rectangular having corners (for š. see KBo 47.303:2 (NS), for (GIŠ)kurakki- cf. KBo 24.45 obv. 10); (GIŠ)kurakki- could also serve as a pedestal (cf. park-, parkiya- 1 a 2’). However, unlike (GIŠ)kurakki- which is mentioned in direct connection with roof beams (KUB 15.42 iii 23f.), there is no evidence for š. as a building support. Since GIŠDÌM appears to cover both kurakki- and šarhuli-, all uncertain GIŠDÌM-s will be treated in the future Sumerographic section.
Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 83 (“šarhula- “Fluß”); Laroche, apud Friedrich, HW (1952) 185 (“Fluß”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 185 (“Örtlichkeit im Hause; Ausguß”); Jakob-Rost, MIO 9 (1963) 201; Friedrich, HW 1. Erg. (l957) 17; Otten, IM 19/20 (1969/70 [1971]) 85-91; Neve, FsOtten (1973) 271f.; Popko, Kultobjekte (1978) 39f. (“(Wand)pfeiler”); Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 142f.; Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 196; Ünal, JCS 40 (1988) 102-104; idem, Belleten, LII/205 (1988) 1479-1481; Hoffmann, HS 113 (2000) 176-180.
Cf. šarhula-, šarhuliya-.
šarhuliya- adj.; “pillared(?), having (a) pillar(s)(?)”; NH.†
sg. acc. com. ša[r-h]u-li-ia-an KUB 27.13 iv 21 (NH).
TÚLkuwannaniyan ša[r-h]u-li-ia-an luliyan … Ëššanzi “(Several groups of people) celebrate the kuwannaniya-spring, that has (a) pillar(s) (and) a pool …” KUB 27.13 iv 21-23 (cult of the Stormgod and Hebat of Aleppo, NH), key word coll. Akdo©an, ed. del Monte, OA 19:224f. (reading šar-[ ]-li-ia-an), previously read “šar-[d]i??-li-ia-an” by Forrer, Glotta 26:184 (“hilfreichen?? (Quell)-teich”…“vielleicht galt er als heilkräftig”), cf. luli-/luliya- 2 a.
Cf. šarhula-, šarhuli-. 
šarhuntalli- adj. or n.; attacking(?), posing a threat(?); NH.†
(Sum.) [Š]U!.ŠÚR! (text [Á]Š.SAG) = (Akk.) alpu = (Hitt.) šar-hu-un-ta-al-liš KBo 13.1 i 43 (vocab., NH), ed. StBoT 7:10, MSL 17:103.
Akk. alpu occurs only in lexical lists. Akk. synonym lists equate alpu and ardadu with saru (= sarru) “false, criminal, a criminal.” AHw relates alpu “rafferisch” to alāpu I (mng. unkn.) rather than alāpu II/elËpu “sprießen” (to sprout, grow). CAD A/1 364 relates alpu to a verb elËpu which combines AHw’s alāpu I and alāpu II/elËpu, and has the meanings “to send forth shoots, lengthen, stretch forth (the arm, hand, etc)” (CAD E 86-88). CAD translates alpu as “threatening(?),” i.e., with hands stretched out to threaten. 
The Hittite word is a hapax. It could be an adj. in -want- (for this formation see Kronasser, EHS 1:267f. § 150.5) + -alli- from the verb šarhiya-/*šarh-. (Neumann, IF 76:262, followed by Oettinger, Stammbildung 289, argue that it is derived from šarhiya- via an adj. *šarhu- + -ant- + -alli- cf. Weitenberg, U-Stämme 133f.). Several of the suggested meanings for šarhiya- have a sense of predation. Otten and von Soden, StBoT 7:13, Neumann, IF 76:262, and Oettinger, Stammbildung 289, primarily based on their understanding of the Akkadian and supported by their understanding of šarh(iya)- translate šarhuntalli- as “räuberisch.” Güterbock, in MSL 17:103, suggests an adjective in -alli- from the noun šarhuwant- “belly, foetus, unborn child” (cf. DUGlelhuntalli- > lelhuwai-, thus presupposing a verb *šarhuwai-), a derivation which Otten and von Soden had said was “indiskutabel.”
Cf. šarhiya-.
šarre- see šarra- D.
šāriya- A n.; file, column; MH.†
sg. nom. ša-a-ri-ia-aš IBoT 1.36 ii 37 (MH/MS), ša-a-r[i-ia-aš] ibid. iv (8); pl. nom. ša-a-ri-i-e-eš ibid. ii 36, 37.
(“When the MEŠEDI-guards go, two guards go in front holding spears. They are lined up (in a rank). To their left goes a palace attendant holding a crook (kalmuš)). He too is lined up (in a rank) with the two g[uards]. The three of them are lined up with each other (in a rank)”) […] LÚ.M[EŠME]ŠEDI DUMU.MEŠ [É.GAL-T]IM 3 ša-a-ri-i-e-eš iyanta ŠA LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI 2! ša-a-ri-i-e-eš ŠA DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL–ya ≠1 ša-a-ri-ia-aš± ANA huluganni–ma–at EGIR-pa 1 IKU ≠iya±nta “Three files of MEŠEDI-guards and palace attendants, go — two files of MEŠEDI-guards and one file of palace attendants. They go one IKU behind the (king’s) carriage” IBoT 1.36 ii 36-38 (instr. for MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:18f., Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:184f.;  [ŠA] LÚ.MEŠ ŠUKUR māhhan Éhilammar arha takšan ša-a-r[i-ia-aš–]pat paizzi “When only half of the file of spearmen has passed the portico” ibid. iv 8. 
This noun is probably related to the verb šariya- B, q.v.
Jakob-Rost, MIO 11 (1966) 213 (a type of military formation or unit, “Haufen, Schlachtordnung, Aufstellung”); Beal, Diss. (1986) 273-274 (“representative?” or “champion?”); Güterbock/van den Hout, AS 24 (1991) 52, 83 (“file”); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 216f.
Cf. šariya- B.
šariya- B v.; 1. to embroider(?), sew on(?), decorate (cloth) w. attached jewels(?), 2. to truss(?)/sew(?) up; from OS.†
pres. sg. 3 ša-ri-ez-zi KBo 25.85:5 (OS); pl. 3 ša-a-ri-ia-an-zi KUB 24.7 i 30 (NS), ša-ri-ia-an-zi Bo 4097:7 (Alp, Tempel 300), ša-ri-an-zi KBo 11.32:27, 50 (NS). 
imp. sg. 3 ša-ri-ia-ad-du KBo 13.101 rev. 10 (NS).
mid. pres./pret. pl. 3 ša-ra-an-t[a(-)…] KUB 43.27 i 7 (OS).
part. sg. nom. com. ša-ri-ia-an-za KUB 12.1 iii 37 (NH), ša-ri-an-za KUB 42.59 rev. 9 (NH); nom.-acc. neut. ša-a-ri-ia-an Bo 3778:5 (Siegelová, Verw. 476); pl. nom. com. ša-ri-ia-an-te-eš KUB 42.69 obv. 11 (NH); nom.-acc. neut. ša-ri-an-da KUB 42.38 obv. 22 (NH).
imperf. pres. pl. 3 ša-ri-iš-kán-zi KUB 24.7 i 20 (NS).
broken KUB 42.78 ii 18.
The form in the Ma®at letter HKM 55:31 read by Alp (HBM 224, 335, 399) as š[a?]-ri-ia-an-zi and translated “werden überheblich(?),” is to be read ≠ta±-ri-ia-an-zi “are tiring themselves” (sarcasm) according to a 1997 photo by H. A. Hoffner.
1. to embroider(?) — a. modifying TÚG or items with a TÚG determinative: (When IŠTAR was favorable) hantaer–ma MUNUS.MEŠÉ.GI›.A-uš nu TÚG-an ša-ri-iš-kán-zi “The brides were harmonious, and so they kept embroidering(?) cloth. (The sons of the house also were harmonious, and so they kept plowing the field by the IKU)” KUB 24.7 i 19-20 (Hymn to IŠTAR, NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:156 (“keep weaving”), Archi, OA 16:305, 308 (“esse tessono”), Wegner, AOAT 36:50 w. n. 193 (“weben”), Wilhelm, Hymnen der alten Welt in Kulturvergleich 71 (“weben”), cf. Götze, AM 262 (“weben(?)”); (When IŠTAR was unfavorable, the brides were at odds: one pulls the other’s head) nu namma hant[anteš(?) TÚG-an] UL ša-a-ri-ia-an-zi “Then they no longer embroider(?) [cloth] in har[mony]. (The brothers became enemies: they no longer plow the field [by the IKU])” KUB 24.7 i 29-30; other examples of šarai-ing cloth with gold and beads below, 1 c. 
b. modifying a headband or cap (Akk. KILˆLU, Hitt. lupanni-): [#] KILˆLU ša-ri-an-da KÙ.GI “[#] headbands embroidered(?) (with) gold” KUB 42.38 obv. 22 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:148 (“plaited”), Siegelová, Verw. 498f. (“š.(-gearbeitet)”); 1 TÚGlupanniš HAŠMANNI huliš ša-ri-an-za “One cap: HAŠMANNI-colored, huliš, and embroidered(?)” KUB 42.59 rev. 9 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 10:133, differently Siegelová, Verw. 340f. (reads our hu-liš ša-ri- an-za as hu-ut!-ta-ri-an-za). 
c. done with silver and/or gold: 12 hantiš KÙ.GI NA› ša-[a?]-ri-ia-an[ …] “12 hantiš decorated(?)/beaded(?) with gold and stones/jewels” KUB 42.78 ii 18 (inv.), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:112f., Siegelová, Verw. 462f. | whether there was room for a sign in the break after the ša- remains uncertain (cf. Siegelová, Verw. 464 n. 1); the mng. of hantiš is unclear (Siegelová, Verw. 463 “Frontteile,” THeth 10:211 “front, frontlet,” HED H 90 “frontlets,” HW™ H 160b “Stirnen”); also it is unclear if a “frontlet” is conceived as made of a textile; (in the following instances the object on which the action is done is lost in a break:) [… IŠTU(?)] KÙ.GI NA› ša-ri-ia-an-te-eš “[…] decorated(?)/beaded(?) with gold and stones/beads” KUB 42.69 obv. 11 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:115f., Siegelová, Verw. 456f.; 2 TÚGE.ÍB SAﬁ KÙ.GI NA›.NUNU[Z …] / kinzalpaš KÙ.GI 2 U[R.]MA[H …] / 1-EN KÙ.GI ša-ri-ia-an-za “Two red E.ÍB-garments, with gold and bea[ds(?), …] a gold kinzalpa-ornament, two li[ons? …], one (lion?) embroidered(?)/decorated(?) with gold” KUB 12.1 iii 35-37 (inv. of Manninni, NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:101, 104 (“woven(?)”), Siegelová, Verw. 444f. (no tr.).
d. obj. broken: [n–]at dGulše<š> DINGIR[.MAH?.MEŠ?…] / [š]a-ra-a-an-zi namm[a …] / parā išhuwanta[ri(?) …] “The fate goddesses (and) [the grandmother]-goddess[es] embroider(?) it/them […] then […] they pour out(?) […] KUB 48.124 obv. 13-15 (dream/vow text, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 310, 449 (“zij weven”) | the broken context makes confident translating impossible, but it is suggestive that the fate goddesses, who in KUB 29.1 and dupl. spin the king’s years, are mentioned in the line immediately before the verb; for § 1-EN ša-ri-ia-[…] KUB 42.36 obv.? 2 (inv., NH), see šariyanni-.
2. to truss(?)/sew(?) up, obj. meat: (“They anoint a goat’s horns with oil and he (the king?) offers it to the Male Deities (and) Maliya”) GUNNI–kan parā KIN-anzi genzu–še!–kan la[-x] / LÚÚ.HÚB arahza«da» udai MUN-zi / ša-ri-an-zi duwan duwanna 3–ŠU tarnai “At the brazier they prepare (the goat’s meat) (or: they fully prepare the brazier). [He detaches(?)] the genzu from it (or: its loins/genitals [are detached(?)]). The deaf man brings (it, i.e., the goat) outside; they salt (it), truss/sew (it) up(?), and he tarna-s (it) three times on this side and that” KBo 11.32 obv. 25-27 (fest. for infernal deities, NS), cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:504 n. 2, who argues that the goat mentioned in obv. 23 is the implied obj. of š., and the word does not mean “weben” but “(sein Fell) aufgezupft(?)”); for braziers of a deaf man outside and associated with a slaughtered goat see KUB 56.45 ii 9-18; SILA› GEﬂ–kan BAL!-ti <GU>NNI-i(text: IZI-i) pa≠rā± [K]IN?-anzi MUN-anzi ša-ri-an-[z]i “He offers a black lamb. They ‘fully [pre]pare(?)’ (the goat meat?) at/on the brazier(!) (text: in/at the fire). They salt (it) and truss/sew (it) up(?)” KBo 11.32 rev. 48-50 | the emendation is based on the similar passage earlier in the same text, see above; uncertain […] GUDÁB.HI.A ša-ra-an-t[a(-)…] “the cows are trussed/sewn up(?) […]” KUB 43.27 i 7 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:199, cited in StBoT 26:158 (< šarai- “zupfen?”); broken and unclear, here or mng. 1?: […]x ša?-ri-ia-ad-du […] KBo 13.101 rev. 10 (rit., NS).
This verb is likely related to the noun šariya- “file, line,” since embroidering involves lines or rows of fabric/yarn/thread, and possibly to NINDAšarāman. Probably it is derived from the same PIE root as Latin serˇ and Greek ™dñí¤Í. š. is an action done to cloth or animals. In the first case it is a domestic task typically performed by females. Since it occurs frequently with gold and precious stones (see 1 a, b, c, above), it is not likely to be “to weave” but rather “to embroider” and/or “sew on.” For Hitt. wep- “to weave”(?) see Neu, HS 111:59 n. 17. In the passages where an animal’s meat is the object, it might be the “trussing, sewing together” after the animal has been butchered, gutted, and salted on the inside. Until better contexts are found for this verb, the suggested meanings can only be considered tentative.  Cf. šarai-, above.
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 70f. (š. is not related to šarra/e-, takes time to do, could mean “zupfen,” but not a total “zerzupfen”); Götze, AM (1933) 262 (“weben(?)”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 184; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 504 w. n. 2 (“zupfen, aufzupfen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 477 (“zupfen”); Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 236 (“weave, twist, twine”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 616 (“in einer Verzierungstechnik bearbeiten”); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 151 n. 549 (“embroider”).
Cf. šaratar, šariya- A.
šarriya/e- see šarra- D/šarre-/šarriya/e-.
NA›šariyani- n.; (a type of stone); NH.†
(“One well of iron weighing 90 minas”) 1 ME NA›ša-ri-[i]a-ni-iš ŠÀ 10 KÙ.GI 20–ma KÙ.BABBAR 20–ma NA› KÁ.D[INGIR].RA 20–ma NA›x[…]x 20–ma NA› KUR Hū[p]išna 1 SAG […] NA› KUR Hūpišna UNU_T(?) x[…] 10 ŠA dAla “One hundred šariyani-stones, among which ten are gold(-plated?), twenty are silver(-plated?), twenty are Babylon stone, twenty are […]-stone, and twenty are Hupišna stone, one head(?) of(?) Hupišna stone, an implement(?) […] (and) ten are of (the deity) ¸la” KUB 38.1 ii 22-26 (cult inv., NH), translit. Rost, MIO 8:180f.
Evidence cited s.v. NA›šariyanuwant- might show that šariyani-stones occur naturally on road beds. If so, their characterization here as gold, silver, Babylon stone and Hupišna stone would refer to some kind of decoration or treatment of the stones (overlaying, etc.?). On the other hand, š. may be a word like paššila- “pebble,” which denotes the shape and size of the stone, rather than its mineralogical composition. This would also explain how twenty šariyani-stones can be Hupišna-stone (alabaster?). But note the other possible interpretation of NA›šariyanuwand[uš KASKAL.HI.A] given s.v. NA›šariyanuwant-.
No relationship can be seen between this word and the Hurrian word šariyanni > Akk. sariam “a coat of scale armor” (see šariyanni-). 
Cf. NA›šāriyanuwant-.
šariyanni- n.; a coat of scale armor; Hurr. lw.† 
This word is clearly attested at Bo©azköy in Hurrian context in KUB 27.1 ii 9 (ša-ri-ia-an-ni), iii 49 (šar-ia-ni), w. dupl. KUB 27.6 i 18 (≠šar±-[ia-]ni), both ed. Popko, Kultobjekte 104f. (“Pan[zerhe]md(?)”) and ChS I/3-1:47,49 (“Panzerhemd”), 70, a list of the war equipment of Šaušga. Its Akk. cognate, sariam, occurs at Bo©azköy in two Akkadian texts, KBo 1.3 obv. 32 (sà-ri-am) and KBo 1.14:25 ([sà-]ri-ia-ma-a-ti), see CAD S s.v. siriam. 
šariyanni may be attested in Hittite context in an inventory which reads § 1-EN ša-ri-ia[-an?-ni? …] § KUB 42.36:2 (NH). While lines 3-4 deal with pins, lines 5-11 deal with hattalla-axes. Since this is the first word of the section, this is unlikely to be a form of the adjective šariyant- “embroidered(?), sewn on(?), decorated w. attached jewels(?) (against Košak, THeth 10:178 and Siegelová, Verw. 616) as in these inventories šariyant- typically follows the object so described (see THeth 20:151 n. 549). Therefore this text might be a reference to a suit of scale armor (šariyanni-) since it lacks the NA› determinative of šariyani-.
Von Brandenstein, ZA 46 (1940) 104f.; Laroche, GLH (1976-77) 215f.; Popko, Kultobjekte (1978) 104f.; Wegner, AOAT 36 (1981) 97; Beal, Diss. (1986) 632-640; idem, THeth 20 (1992) 150-153.
NA›šāriyanuwant- adj.; having šariyani-stones; NS.†
pl. acc.(?) NA›ša-a-ri-ia-nu-wa-an-d[u-uš] KBo 34.89 i 6 (NS). 
nu–ššan namma […] hahallauwandaš K[ASKAL.HI.A …] NA›ša-a-ri-ia-nu-wa-an-d[u-uš KASKAL.HI.A-uš …] [hūm]anteš NA›paššilË[š …] … [nu–šša]n TÚGkušišiyaš KASKAL-ši KBo 34.89 i 4-8 (Kizzuwatna rit., NS). 
Although, given the broken condition of this passage, it is difficult to give a connected translation, the two terms hahallauwandaš “(roads) covered/strewn with brushwood (hahhal)” and NA›šariyanuwand[uš] “(roads) covered/strewn with šariyani-stones” may well be parallel. Furthermore the mention of “pebbles” (NA›paššilË[š]) also fits the context of the description of a roadway. This could be evidence that šariyani-stones occur naturally on roadways and are not products of human manufacture. But cf. TÚGkušišiyaš KASKAL-ši “on a road/pathway (consisting) of kušiši-garment(s)” in line 8, which might suggest that the šariyani-stones did not occur naturally on roads, but pathways for the gods were made by scattering these. 
For the elision of the theme vowel (i) before the suffix -want- compare nata/i- “reed” and naduwant- “reedy.” For other derived adjs. in -want- describing roads see arpuwant-, innarawant-, ha(h)hallawant-.
Cf. NA›šariyani-. 
šarikant- part.(?); (mng. unkn.); OH.†
ša-ri-kán-za–ma GAL [(x) …] in broken military context KUB 40.5 ii? 9 (Syrian wars, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.4 ii? 4.
Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 338 (mng. unkn., base of ÉRIN.MEŠ šarikuwaš).
Cf. *šarikuwar.
*šarikuwar, (LÚ.MEŠ/ÉRIN.MEŠ)šari(ku)wa-  n.; (a kind of troops); from OH.†
sg. nom. ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš KUB 21.41 iv 6 (Šupp. I/NS), KUB 26.57 i 3 (Šupp. I/NS), KUB 26.24 iv (3) (MH/NS), LÚ.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš KUB 13.9 i 11 (Tudh. II, NS), ÉRIN.MEŠša-a-ri-ku-wa-aš KUB 14.16 iii 21 (Murš. II), ÉRIN.MEŠ.LÚ.MEŠša-ri-k[u-wa-aš] KUB 31.44 i 26 (MH/NS).
acc. ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-an KUB 34.127 rev. 1 (OH/NS), ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-wa-an KUB 38.12 i 7 (NH), KUB 13.34 iv 10 (NH), ša-ri-ku-wa-an VAS 28.30 iii 16 (NS), KUB 60.83 rev. 5.
abl. LÚ.MEŠša-ri-wa-za(-kán) KUB 13.8:4 (Arn. I/NS).
Akkadographic: (contextually dat.-loc.) (ŠÀ) ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa KBo 18.54 obv. 4 (Šupp. I/ENS), KBo 18.53:4 (NH), KUB 5.3 i 54 (NH), KUB 5.4 ii 44 (NH), KBo 16.98 i 1 (NH).
unclear (gen.?) ša-re-e-ku-aš KUB 39.9 obv. 10 (NS); broken ša-ri-ku-wa(-)x[…] KUB 51.57 obv. 8 (pre-NH?/NS).
All writings indicate that the word was formally a sg. with collective meaning. The predicates danteš and piyanteš are ad sensum.
a. in context w. (other) military personnel — 1' sharing in the plunder: [… U]RUKÙ.BABBAR-šaš hūmanza [L]Ú.MEŠša-ri-ku-w[a-aš tu]zzišš–a hūmanza kuin unn[er] “The […] which all of Hattuša, the š., and the entire army brought back, (and the … cattle and sheep which I took, are not specified)” KUB 23.63:4-6 (ann. frag., NS), translit. Carruba, SMEA 18:164, tr. THeth 20:45; (King Muršili II wrote: “I personally brought back 15,500 NAM.RA-persons”) URUHattušaš–ma–za [(ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.ME)]Š ÉRIN.MEŠša-a-ri-ku-wa-aš-š–a NAM.RA kuin uwatet nu–š[(šan kappūwa)]uwar NU.GÁL Ëšta “Whereas the NAM.RA whom the Hittite infantry, horse troops and šarikuwa-troops brought back were countless” KUB 14.16 iii 21-22, w. dupl. KUB 14.15 iii 51-52, ed. AM 56f.
2' concern for their health: MAHAR dUTU-ŠI MUNUS.LUGAL aššul kuit mahhan ŠÀ 
ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa–ya–kan U ŠÀ ÉRIN.MEŠUKU.UŠ hattulannaza kuit mahhan nu–mu EN–YA EGIR-pa ŠUPUR “May my lord write back to me concerning the welfare of Your Majesty (and) the Queen and how it is healthwise among the š.-troops and UKU.UŠ-troops” KBo 18.54 obv. 3-6 (letter, Šupp. I/ENS), ed. mahhan 1 b 1' b', THeth 16:57f.; [… kui]t EN–YA [kiššan TAŠP]UR kāša–wa [ŠÀ ÉRIN.MEŠš]a-ri-ku-wa U ŠÀ ÉRIN.MEŠUKU.UŠ [hūm]an SIGﬁ-in “Concerning that [you] my lord [wro]te [thus]: ‘Now [al]l is well [among] the š.-[troops] and the UKU.UŠ-troops,’ (I am very happy at the word of my lord that all is well in the presence of my lord)” KBo 18.53 obv. 2-5 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:55f., partially ed. Rosi, SMEA 24:116, tr. THeth 20:37f.; (wintering with the king:) (“This year His Majesty will winter in Hattuša. If while His Majesty is up in Hattuša, if a general plague will not break out (lit. happen) among the [š.]-troops nor among the UKU.UŠ-troops … let the oracle be favorable. Result: unfavorable. § … §”) kÏ–kan kuit URUKÙ.BABBAR-ši šer ŠÀ ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa U ŠÀ ÉRIN.MEŠUKU.UŠ ÚŠ-an SI≈SÁ-at “Concerning that a plague among the š.-troops and among the UKU.UŠ-troops up in Hatti was ascertained” KUB 5.3 i 54-55 (oracle on the king’s winter activities, NH), tr. Beal, CoS 1:210; cf. in similar context KUB 5.4 ii 44, KBo 16.98 i 1 (both NH); and cf. […ÉRIN.MEŠš]a-ri-ku-wa-aš 
ÉRIN.MEŠUK[U.UŠ …] VBoT 115 rev. 4.
3' other: kāša KUR URUHatti h[ūma]nza 
B´LU_ME[Š ÉRIN.MEŠ GIŠGIGIR] ÉRIN.MEŠ GÌR-PÍ ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-k[u-wa-a]š hūmanza […] “Just now all of Hatti, the lords, [the chariot troops?], the foot soldiers and all the šarik[uw]a-troops” KUB 26.24 iv 2-3 (instr. for DUGUDs, MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, OrNS 25:228, 231, THeth 20:46 w. n. 181, cf. AM 230f.; šumeš–a x[…] ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA[.MEŠ/HI.A … ] “But you […] š.-troops, infantry, and horse troops […]” KUB 21.41 iv 5-6 (instr., Šupp. I/NS), ed. THeth 20:45f. w. n. 179; [ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.M]EŠ ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš [… tuz]ziš hūmanza “[The infantry, horse troop]s, the šarikuwa-troops […] the entire [ar]my” KUB 26.57 i 3-4 (instr., Šupp. I/NS), ed. Laroche, RHA XV/61:125; kāša KUR URUHatt[i … ÉRIN.M]EŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ ÉRIN.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠša-ri-k[u-wa-aš hūmanza …] “Now, the land of Hatti, [… the infant]ry, horse troops and š.-troops, [each of them …]” KUB 31.44 i 25-26 (instr. for DUGUDs, Arn. I/NS), ed. von Schuler, OrNS 25:225, 229; cf. […]HI.A upātiHI.A U LÚ.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš KUB 13.9 i 11 (instr., Tudh. II/NS); […] ša-ri-wa-an hūma[n(-)…] KBo 22.36:6 (NS). 
b. participating in festivals: nu–kan EN.ÉRIN.MEŠ ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-an anda uwatez[zi] “A ‘lord of troops’ leads the š.-troops in. (The one who runs in front bows to the king)” KUB 34.127 rev. 1 (fest. of the month, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 37:410f.; (“The chief of the bodyguards gives the ‘lord of the troops’ a sign with his eyes …”) n–ašta EN.ÉRIN.MEŠ ša-ri-ku-wa-an 1-an 1-an anda tarniškizzi “And the ‘lord of the troops’ lets the š. in one by one” VAS 28.30 iii 16-17 (fest. of the month, NS), ed. StBoT 37:366f. as VAT 7481 (differently) | for the discrepancies between handcopy and ed. see van den Hout, BiOr 56:147, and Groddek, OLZ 94:197; […] LÚ.MEŠDUGUD-TIM ÉRIN.MEŠša-r[i-ku-wa(-)…] KBo 20.61 ii 14 (storm fest., OH/ pre-NS); [… L]Ú.MEŠDUGUD ša-re-e-ku-aš KUB 39.9 obv. 10, ed. HTR 54f., Kassian et al., Funerary 304, w. commentary 312f.; perhaps also KUB 51.57 obv. 7-8 (fest. of procreation, NS), w. dupls 556/u:5-6 (NS) and IBoT 1.29 obv. 6-7 (MH?/MS?), translit. Otten/Ruster, ZA 72:161.
c. given to sanctuaries: (“That which we made into (the property of) a great mausoleum (lit. stone-house), that is, the towns/villages which were given to the mausoleum, the craftsmen (BE_L QA_TI) who were given, the farmers, the oxherds, (and) shepherds who were given)” LÚ.MEŠša-ri-wa-za–kan kuiËš danteš n–at QADU É.MEŠ–ŠUNU URU.HI.A–ŠUNU ANA É.NA› piyanteš “Those taken from among the šarikuwa-men and given with their houses, and towns/villages to the mausoleum (… let them be free from šahhan and luzzi-taxes and duties)” KUB 13.8:1-5 (edict of Ašm. for the mausoleum, MH/NS), ed. HTR 106f.; 8 É-TUM–ma ≈ ÉRIN.MEŠša-ri-wa-an kinun IŠTU É.GAL-LIM EGIR-anda SUM-er “But now eight houses (and?) š.-troops were subsequently given by the palace” KUB 38.12 i 7-8 (cult inventory of dLAMMA of URUKarahna, NH), translit. Mestieri 210f., tr. Rosi, SMEA 24:128, THeth 20:48 | the ≈ sign indicates that the scribe was unable to read the sign(s) in the text from which KUB 38.12 was copied.
d. in an instr. for the induction of children into palace service(?): [… LÚ/ÉRIN.M]EŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš LÚ.MEŠBE_L QA_T[(I LÚ.MEŠ)…] “šarikuwa-[men/troops], craftsmen, […]-men […] (Always wash your children. Let each one always exemplify(?) […]. Then install them in the palace)” KUB 13.10 obv. 4-7 (instr., MS), w. dupl. 919/v:5-7 (NS), translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:151, cf. Beal, THeth 20:49.
e. in unclear context: [… mān–aš DAM BE_Lˆ DUMU] BE_Lˆ mān–aš É[RIN.MEŠ UKU.UŠ mān–aš ÉRIN.MEŠ/LÚ.MEŠša-r]i-ku-wa-aš mān–aš [… mā]n–aš LÚELLUM [mān–aš … ] / [… mā]n–aš ÉRIN.MEŠ x[…] “[Whether it is the wife or son] of a lord, or [an UKU.UŠ-soldier or a šar]ikuwa-soldier, or a [slave], or a free man, or […], or a […]-soldier KBo 22.37:10-13 (rit. against slander, NS), ed. THeth 20:49f. w. n. 192, rest. from […mā]n–aš DAM BE_Lˆ DUMU BE_Lˆ m[ān–aš / … mān–aš ÉRIN/LÚ.]MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš / [mān–aš tamaiš ant]uwahhaš mān–a[š … / …] KBo 19.60:4-6 (NS), translit. THeth 20:50 w. n. 192; [… 
ÉRIN/LÚ].MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-aš kuiš kuiš imma […] followed by a list of palace(?) professions including waiters, bread makers, walhi-beverage makers, thick-bread makers, and torchbearers 558/u + 1968/u:4-8 (MS), translit. StBoT 15:44; cf. also, in broken context, KBo 27.29:6, KBo 26.191:3, KUB 13.34 iv 10, KBo 18.12 obv.? 3, KBo 22.35:6 (NS), KUB 60.83 rev. 5.
References above in the first section show that šarikuwa-troops went on campaigns with the king and could receive a share of the booty. Like the UKU.UŠ-troops with whom they are frequently associated in texts, the šarikuwa- spent the winter in garrison. This shows that they were both likely to have been standing army troops. The concern for the health of just these two types of troops expressed in letter greeting formulae and in the oracle questions shows (contrary to some previous studies, see below) that these were an important part of the Hittite army. It thus appears (contra Götze) that little weight should be put on the order of the list of potential slanderers (see the adj. LÚ.MEŠšari(ku)wai-). The šarikuwa- appear in texts side by side with “infantry and horse troops” and “foot soldiers” and “chariot soldiers,” but it is unclear what category they were. There is no evidence regarding the armament of the šarikuwa-. The king could give šarikuwa-troops to temples and mausoleums (sec. c). This does not make them a social class (contra Götze) since people of many different occupations are listed in parallel with šarikuwa-. Unlike the rest of these who were simply “given,” in one text individuals were taken from among the šarikuwa- and then “given.” Perhaps this indicates some sort of status change — “taken” from their units as šarikuwa-soldiers on active duty and “given” to the temple or mausoleum as guards or in honorable retirement as temple or mausoleum personnel. It is not clear whether or not they continued to be called š. after they were given to the temple or mausoleum.
Perhaps the word began as a gen. of a verbal substantive: “the troops/people of šarik-ing” (*šarikuwar > šarikuwaš) and later developed into an -a- stem noun; cf. tayazila-. Assuming šarikuwaš originally is the gen. of a verbal noun (cf. šari~
kant-), the acc. forms šari(ku)wan and the abl. šariwaza (see c, above) are a form of hypostasis (cf. Neu, GsKronasser 121 who does not discuss šarikuwa-), and one might compare forms like šarninkuweš (cf. ibid. Neu, 124f.). In the two acc. quoted (KUB 34.127 and KUB 28.12) the ÉRIN.MEŠ has become a determinative (contra Kassian, et. al., Funerary 313, who prefer a partitive apposition). That the only three cases without determinative of š. are the acc. sg. šarikuwan and the abl. šariwaza is in accordance with this.
Götze, AM (1933) 230-232 (“keine sehr hochstehende <soziale Klasse>,” = LÚ GIŠTUKUL); Friedrich, HW (1952) 185 (“niedere Bevölkerungs- und Soldatenklasse”); Laroche, RHA XV/61 (1957) 125 (“les forces de police(?)”); Otten, HTR (1958) 54f.:10 (“Geringen(?)”), 149 (“niedere soziale Klasse”); Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 42 (“Sappeure”); Christmann-Franck, RHA XXIX (1971) (“génitif de l'infinitif du verbe šarik-”) Cornil/Lebrun, Hethitica 1 (1972) 1, 5 (“fantassins ordinaires”), 9; Archi, RAI 25 (1978) = BBVO 1 (1982) 285f.:43f. (“Leichtbewaffneten”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 462-464; Rosi, SMEA 24 (1984) 109-129 (a numerous group of laborers employed by a palace or cultural foundation); Beal, Diss. (1986) 117-119, 124-132 (a type of soldier in the standing army); Beckman, Or NS 59 (1990) 53 (“group of relatively low-ranking persons performing either military tasks or civilian work … squad”); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 37-41, 44-52, Kassian et al., Funerary (2002) 312f.; Pecchioli Daddi, Or NS 73 (2004) 452f.
Cf. šarikant-, LÚ.MEŠšari(ku)wai-.
(LÚ.MEŠ)šari(ku)wai- adj.; of šarikuwa-troops; NH.†
LÚ.MEŠša-ri-ku-wa-in KUB 7.42:3, KUB 9.4 iv 15 (NH), [ša-ri-w]a-i-in KUB 9.34 iv 17 (NH), LÚ.MEŠša-a-ri-wa-in HT 6 obv. 20 (NH). 
(Occurring at the end of a long list of potential slanderers whose slander is being warded off in a ritual:) [(LÚ.MEŠša-ri-ku-w)]a-i-in EME-an mudaiddu (var. KI.MIN) “Uproot (var. ‘ditto’) the slander of the šarikuwa-” KUB 9.34 iv 17 (Tunnawiya’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hutter, Behexung 42f. (“das Gerede [der Sarik]uwa-Leute”), Rosi, SMEA 24:127f. w. n. 79, w. dupls. and par. KUB 7.42:3, KUB 9.4 iv 15 and HT 6 obv. 20, ed. Beckman, OrNS 59:40, 42, 48 (“of the š.-squads”), photo collation shows that in KUB 9.34 iv 17 there is room only for [ša-ri-w]a-.
Given the three instances of this word and the one plene-spelled ending -i-in, this word is not to be emended away as a scribal error. With šariwa- as the Luwian counterpart of šarikuwa-, the plene spelled acc. sg. com. -Ïn points to a *-iyo- adj. as described by Carruba, FsNeumann 35-51, and Melchert, HS 103:198-207 (esp. 200-202). If so, the Hittite form šarikuwain (instead of *šarikuwayan) must be due to Luwian influence. 
Beckman, OrNS 59 (1990) 53 (“erroneous”); Kassian et al., Funerary (2002) 313 n. 8 (“quite obscure”).
Cf. ÉRIN.MEŠšari(ku)wa-.
(d)šarrena n. pl. Hurr.; the kings; from MH.†
Hurr. pl. dat. dšar-re-na-ša KUB 27.16 iv 10.
Hurr. pl. absolutive used as Hitt. d.-l.: šar-re-e-na KUB 29.8 i 56 (MH/MS).
Hurr. pl. directive used as Hitt. d.-l. dšar-re-na-aš-ta KUB 10.27 iv 9.
a. without divine determinative: (I make figurines out of wool) n–uš–za šar-re-e-n[a] halziššanzi “They call them ‘the kings’” KUB 27.38 i 23 (rit., MH/MS), ed. ChS 1/5:386, Tunn. 74f., tr. Güterbock, ZA 44:82; cf. in the same text dŠarrināše DN ibid. i 1-7 and cf. šarrËna without det. in Hurr. context ibid. iii 14; (“The hearth which is on the left”) n–an dIŠTAR-gapina šar-re-e-na šuntinna IŠTU MUŠEN.GAL šipanti “He libates it with a ‘big-bird’ to the kings and šunti-s (or to the šunti- kings) of Šaušga” KUB 29.8 i 56-57 (mouth-washing rit., MH/MS), ed. ChS 1/1:89, Wegner, AOAT 36:89; cf. similarly in Hurr. context KBo 24.43 i 6, translit. ChS 1/2:410.
b. with divine determinative: EGIR-pa–ma 1 NINDA.SIG dŠar-re-na-aš-ta paršiya “Thereafter he crumbles a thin-bread to ‘the Kings’” KUB 10.27 iv 8-10 (the form is Hurr. pl. directive šarri–na–aš–ta); cf. EGIR-ŠU–ma 1 NINDA.SIG ANA dŠar-re-na-ša paršiya KUB 27.16 iv 10 (the form is Hurr. pl. dat. šarri–na–aš–(v)a; for a complete listing of examples with divine determinative see OHP 1:373f.
At Nuzi offerings are given for the šarri–n(a)–aš–fa (pl. dat.) HSS 14.78:8.
Güterbock, ZA 44 (1938) 81-83 (deified kings); von Brandenstein, AfO 13 (1939-41) 59 w. n. 9 (> Hurr. šarri = Akk. šarru); Kilmer, JBL 76 (1957) 216-224; Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 34f. (“Könige” = deified former kings), 239 (= either Hitt. šargaweš or LUGAL.MEŠ); Menzel, Assyrische Tempel = StPohl 10 (1981) 55*f. n. 685 (= Assyrian d/GIŠsarrānu); Wegner, AOAT 36 (1981) 88-89 (“(ein Art Kultfiguren)”).
šarip- v. see šarap-.
EZEN›šariša n.; (a festival associated with the city/mountain of Šarišša?); NH.†
GIM-an–ma–kan EZEN›ša-ri-ša / [o-o-o-o] DÙ-zi “But when (s)he/they perform(s) the š.-festival […]” KUB 46.37 rev. 28-29 (oracle question, NH). The name of the festival could be derived from the GN URUŠarišša and/or HUR.SAGŠarišša (cf. RGTC 6:351f.), but the single š in the festival name and the double š in the GN cause some uncertainty. For the festival celebrated in Šarešša see CTH 636 (“Fête à Saressa(?)”), and Wilhelm, KuSa 1/1:9-15 and VS 28.113 rev. 10f.
šarrišnili- adj. see šarnišnili-.
ÉRIN.MEŠ/LÚ.MEŠšariwa- see *šarikuwar. 
LÚ.MEŠšariwai- see (LÚ.MEŠ)šari(ku)wai-. 
TÚGšarriwašpa- n. (upper or outer garment); NH.†
nom. TÚGšar-ri-wa-aš-pa-aš IBoT 1.31 obv. 7 (NH).
In an inventory of garments contained in a chest (GIGÁ): 3 TÚGšar-ri-wa-aš-pa-aš IBoT 1.31 obv. 7 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 80f. (“Jacke”), Košak, THeth 10:4, 6 (“cloak”), translit. Goetze, JCS 10:32; here? 2? TÚGšar[-…] KBo 40.114:11 (NS).
Goetze, JCS 10 (1956) 36 n. 42 (mng. unkn.; šarri- + wašpa- “garment”); Laroche, RA 52 (1958) 188 (< Hitt. šarra- “taille”; = TÚGE.ÍB?); Hoffner apud Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 28 (“Jacke (Ober(körper)-Kleid),” < Luw. šarri- “oben”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1963) 125 (originally “Königs-Kleid” < Hurr. šarri- “König”), 184 (“leichte Tunika”?); Hoffner, OrNS 35 (1966) 385 (“above-garment,” “light tunic”); Carruba, apud Hoffner, OrNS 35 (1966) 385 n. 2 (“Oberhemd, Oberkleid”); Košak, THeth 10:8 (“cloak”).
šark- A v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.†
act. pres. sg. 3 šar-ki-iz-zi KBo 26.20 ii 32. 
(Sum.) zú.g[á]l.ta.a = (Akk.) ši-≠it±-lu-u = (Hitt.) ≠šar±-ki-iz-zi kuiš “(S)he who š.-s” KBo 13.1 ii 22 + (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. MSL 17:108.
The šar sign is not entirely clear. Hoffner, apud MSL 17:108 n. suggested reading ≠hur-za±-ki-iz-zi kuiš “One who continually curses.” CAD lists the Akkadian under šitlû, a hapax of unknown meaning. 
šark- B v. see šarkiške-.
šarkaliya- v. see šargan(n)iya-.
šarqanae- v. see šargan(n)iya-.
šarqanaza; (mng. unkn.); NH.†
uncertain: šar-qa-na-za KUB 18.17 i 4 (NH).
[…]x NA›(?) šar-qa-na-za UL D[Ù?-r]i? KUB 18.17 i 4 (oracle question, NH). The NA› sign in the copy resembles ÌR.
Cf. šargan(n)iya-, šarganuwant-.
šargan(n)iya-, šarqanae-, šarkaliya- v.; (sometimes w. arha) to tear apart(?), destroy(?); NS.†
act. pres. sg. 2 [ša]r?-≠ga-ni±-ia-ši KBo 12.70 ii! 18 + KUB 4.3 ii 4 (NS).
pret. sg. 3 šar-ga-an-ni-it KBo 26.65 i 16 (NS).
mid. pres. sg. 3 [šar?-]ga-li-ia-at-ta-ri KUB 43.37 iii 17 (NS); pl. 2 šar-ka-li-ia-tu-ma-ri KUB 1.16 ii 49 (OH/NS).
pret. sg. 3 šar-ga-ni-ia-at-ta-at KUB 33.114 i 17 (NS).
imperf. act. pres. pl. 2 šar-qa-na-eš-kat-te-e-ni 957/v:5 (StBoT 5:155, no context given).
a. (tr. as act. and pass.): (“He made heaven shudder. He [stru]ck [heaven]”) nepiš x-x[… d]annaran TÚG-an mā[n a]rha šar-ga-an-ni-it “He tore(?) heaven apart […] like an empty garment. (The Basalt rose up […]. Its height was nineteen hundred DANNA)” KBo 26.65 i 15-16 (Ullik. III A, NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:18f., tr. Hittite Myths 57 (“shook out”); restored from par. nu nepiš GUL-hta nu n[epiš dannaraš TÚG-aš mān arha] šar-ga-ni-ia-at-ta-at “He struck heaven, and h[eaven] was torn(?) (or: h[eaven] tore(?)) [like an empty garment]” KUB 33.114 i 16-17 (Kingship of dLAMMA, NS), translit. Myth. 146, tr. Hittite Myths 43 (restored nu d[annaran TÚG-an mān arha] šar-ga-ni-ia-at-ta-at, taking the mid. as transitive); for the literary topos of rending/tearing the sky, see the Hebrew expression in Isaiah 64:1 lû qāraªtā šāmayim “(Addressing God:) O that you would tear the heavens (and come down, that the mountains would tremble before you)”; Hebr. qāraª is used for tearing garments, like Hitt. iškallai-; [a]zzikiši[–m]a–za kuwapi nu UN-an lË [ša]r?-≠ga-ni±-ia-ši UL šekkanti–tta URU-ri wagāiš arnuzi “While you are [e]ating(?), do not [t]ear(?) a person [apart]. A wagai- will transport you to an unknown city” KBo 12.70 ii! 17-18 + KUB 4.3 ii 3-5 (bil. proverbs, NS), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:780f. (no tr.), Keydana, UF 23:70 (“erhebe nicht einen Menschen”), the Akk. (ibid. i 3-5, and dupl. RS 22.439 iii 3-4, ed. Dietrich, UF 23:50f.) does not preserve the central line.
b. (tr. as mid.): ( “Let your clan be unified like a wolf pack. § … You are matched, having the same entrails, the same lungs, the same […]”) [lË–ma] šar-ka-li-ia-tu-ma-ri “Do [not] tear(?) each other apart. (or: tear apart from each other). (Let no one be hostile. Let no one transgress my command)” KUB 1.16 ii 49 (edict, Hatt. I), ed. HAB 8f. (“sich überheben”), tr. Bryce, MHT 102 (“be presumptuous”), Beckman, CoS 2:80 (“[Don’t] vie with one another for preeminence”); broken and uncertain: [… k]er–tet karāpi / [… šar-]ga-li-ia-at-ta-ri “[…] will devour your [h]eart, […] will be [t]orn apart(?)” KUB 43.37 iii 16-17 (rit. frag., NS), alternatively read […tag]galiyattari; possibly also KUB 33.114 i 16-17, cited under a, above.
KBo 12.70 ii! 18 + KUB 4.3 ii 4, if correctly restored, together with KBo 26.65 i 15-16, shows that š. at least in the active is a transitive verb. The simile in the Ullikummi passage (KBo 26.65 i 15-16) shows that it is an action that can be done to an empty (or perhaps unornamented) garment. The other occurrences, if they are not too broken to determine, show that the action is directed against a person and is hostile, perhaps also destructive. So far as their contexts go, these latter passages do not exclude that the action is verbal (like slander or accusations). If the concrete action performed on a fabric were something like “tear apart,” it is easy to see how tearing another person up verbally would be a kind of slander or accusation. If wagai- (< wak-) could indicate something like a grain weevil (lit. “biter,” cf. Hoffner, BiOr 34:75), it might even make sense that in the proverb (KBo 12.70 ii! 17-18 + KUB 4.3 ii 3-5) the thought would be “Don’t use your mouth for eating and chewing another person out at the same time!” The punishment is that the “biter” will carry you off to an unknown city. However, the relation of Hitt. wagaiš to the LÚ? ZÍD.DA in the Akk. version remains obscure (cf. Keydana, UF 23:70 n. 7). The unity among the royal clan that is the goal of Hattušili I’s edict would be destroyed by backbiting (KUB 1.16 ii 48-50). 
Since all other evidence points to a stem in -iya-, the unique imperfective for šarqanaeškattËni may represent a false back-formation from a stem *šarkaneške-.
The n/l alternation in šarkaniya- and šarkaliya- is paralleled by irmaliya- and irmaniya-, and supposes an n-stem base noun *šarkan-, for which cf. perhaps šarqanaza and šarganuwant.
Sommer HAB (1938) 8f. (“sich überheben”), 86f.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (“sich erheben(??)”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 154f. (“sich erheben(?), sich überheben(?)” = šarkaliya-/šarganiya-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 245, 529; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134-136. 
šargawatar n.; eminence, high standing; from MH?/MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-ga-wa-tar Bo 6405 rev. 4 (Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:292), [š]ar-ga-u-wa-tar KBo 13.116 obv. 3 (NS), šar-g[a-u-wa-tar] KUB 34.53 rev. 17(?) (MS); sg. dat.-loc. šar-ga-wa-an-ni KBo 3.21 ii 12 (MH?/MS).
dAnuš–ma–tta dEnlilašš–a šar-ga-wa-an-ni handa ANA LÚ.MEŠ KÚR–ŠUNU wemiyauwanzi tuk wātarnahher “Anu and Enlil commissioned you, on account of your eminence to find their enemies” KBo 3.21 ii 12-13 (MH?/MS), ed. Archi, OrNS 52:23, 25 (“Erhabenheit”); […] innarauwatar MU.HI.A GÍD.DA šar-g[a-u-wa-tar …] x-x-x-naš āššiyawar “[… Give him …], vigor, long years, emi[nence, …] the love of […]” KUB 34.53 rev. 17-18 (myth frag., MS) | one expects the traces preceding āššiyawar to be šiunaš/DINGIR.MEŠ-naš (thus HW™ A 403b) but the hand copy does not favor such a reading; in frag. context: šar-ga-wa-tar–šet […] Bo 6405 rev. 4 (Allaiturahi), translit. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:292, ChS 1/5:172.
Sommer, AU (1932) 91 n. 3 (d.-l. of verbal abstract related to šarku- adj.?); Götze, AM (1933) 222 (“Machtstellung”); Ose, Sup. (1944) 39 (“Machtstellung”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (“Hoheit, Erhabenheit”); Laroche, RHA XXVIII (1970) 37 (“vaillance”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134 w. n. 275.
Cf. šarku- A.
šarkanti- n.; petitioner, litigant, person seeking redress; MH/MS.†
sg. nom. šar-kán-ti-iš IBoT 1.36 iii 31; acc. šar-kán-ti-in ibid. i 61, ii (68), iii 13, 17, 20, 21, 32, 52; d.-l. šar-kán-ti ibid. iii 18, šar-kán-ti-i ibid. iii 22.
pl. nom. šar-kán-te-eš ibid. iii 51; acc. šar-kán-ti-i-uš ibid. 9, šar-kán-ti-uš ibid. iii 53, šar-kán-du-uš ibid. iii 1 (all MH/MS). For the deviating pl. acc. šarkanduš see Rieken, HS 107:50.
[mā]n [šar]-≠kán-ti-in±–ma uwadanzi […] … […] § [LÚMEŠ]EDI kuiš šar-kán-du-uš [widaizzi] n–aš ANA LÚ.ŠUKUR.KÙ.GI EGIR-an [tiezzi mahhan–ma] LUGAL-uš DˆNAM wËkzi “But [whe]n they bring in a petitioner, […]…[…] § “[The bo]dyguard who brings in the petitioners [steps] behind the man of the golden spear. [When] the king asks for a legal suit (the guard [picks] it [out] and places it in the hands of the king. He tells the chief of the guards [what] the case is and the chief of the guards [tells the king])” § …. nu šar-kán-ti-i-uš kuiš LÚMEŠEDI widāizz[i] n–aš EGIR-pa–pat piddāi “The bodyguard who brings in the petitioners runs back again (and goes and stands with the man of the golden spear. Then they pick out the next legal case)” § … māhhan–ma šar-kan-ti-in arha tarnanzi “But when they release a petitioner, (the chief of the guards keeps his place, but the two lords ¡ whether lords or guards ¡ who stand behind him go back and join the guards again)” … arahz–iya–z kuiš LÚMEŠEDI harzi māhhan–ma šar-kán-ti-in tamain uwatezzi § nu ANA GAL MEŠEDI kuiËš 2 BE_LU_TI EGIR-an aranta n–at šar-kán-ti andurza tapuša iyanta arahza–ma–z kuiš LÚMEŠEDI harzi n–ašta māhhan šar-kán-ti-in ANA LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDU_TIM handānzi apaš–a–kan šar-kán-ti-in EGIR-an arha paizzi n–aš šar-kán-ti-i arahza ZAG-az iyannai “When the guard who holds the outside brings in another petitioner, § the two lords who stand behind the chief (of the) guard(s) go on the inside beside the petitioner. But the guard who holds the outside passes behind the petitioner (at the moment when) they bring the petitioner in line with the guards, but he then walks on the outside of the petitioner, (that is,) on (his) right” … § m[ā]n šar-kán-ti-iš–ma arta ANA LÚMEŠEDI–ma našma ANA DUMU.É.GAL [Dˆ]NU n–aš–kan šar-kán-ti-in peran arha UL paizzi EGIR-an(-)arha–aš–kan paizzi nu–za arahza kuiš harzi n–aš paizzi apËdani kattan tiyazzi “If a petitioner is standing there, but the case is against a guard or palace servant, he does not pass in front of the petitioner. (Rather) he passes behind (him) and goes (and) takes his stand next to that (guard) who holds the outside” § … § mān šar-kán-te-eš–ma zinnantari nu appezzian kui[n] šar-kan-ti-in pehutanzi n–aš māhhan peran arha paizzi nu LÚMEŠEDI kuiš šar-kán-ti-uš widāizzi “When the petitioners are finished and when the last petitioner, whom they lead out, passes in front, the guard who leads in petitioners (says to the chief of the guards …: ‘it is wrapped up’)” IBoT 1.36 ii 68, iii 1-3, 9-10, 13-14, 16-22, 31-34, 51-53 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:188-197, AS 24:22-29 (“defendant”), cf. Melchert, JNES 55:135 (“petitioner”); (“The guards and the palace servants shall not go down by way of the main gate; they shall go down by way of the postern”) nu 1 LÚMEŠEDI kuiš šar-kan-ti-in widāizzi “The one guard who brings a petitioner, (or someone whom the overseer of messengers dispatches, he goes down by way of the great <gate>)” ibid. i 61-62; šar-ga-[…] KUB 36.67 ii 6, contra Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:209, is probably to be restored šargaueš as in ii 14.
This word belongs to the same semantic field as hanni(t)talwana- and hannešhaš išha- (B´L DˆNI), all of which refer to persons seeking justice or redress in the courts.
Jakob-Rost, MIO 11 (1966) 209 (“Kläger?, Zeuge?, Gesandte?”); Houwink ten Cate, Schrijvend Verleden (1983) 164-166 (“gezant”) 169 n. g; Güterbock/van den Hout, AS 24 (1991) 48, 83; (“defendant”); Melchert, JNES 55 (1996) 135 (“petitioner, people seeking redress,” related to šarnink- “to make restitution”).
Cf. ¬šarqatt-, šargašam(m)i-, šarkiwali-, šarnink-.
šarganuwant- (mng. uncertain); NH.†
sg. nom. com. šar-ga-nu-wa-an-za KUB 52.73 obv. 7 (NH).
In a small fragment with almost no usable context: § [… k]u?-it šar-ga-nu-wa-an-za SI≈S[Á-at …] / […]x LUGAL šarrui EGIR-a[n …] / […]–ma–kan šuri[š …] § “Because [… was] determined to be š., …” KUB 52.73 obv. 7-9 (oracle question, NH).
This is perhaps a part. sg. nom. com. of a verb *šarganu-. Further evidence for the existence of this causative verb might perhaps be seen in šar<ga>nu-, for which see šarnu-. Alternatively šarganuwant- could be an -uwant- formation on a nominal stem *šarkan(a)-; cf. šarqanaza.
˚/¬šargašam(m)i- adj.; vengeful(?), seeking redress(?); NH.† 
sg. nom. com. ˚ša-ar-ga!(copy ša)-ša-mi-iš KUB 5.24 ii 43 (Tudh. IV?), ˚ša-ar-ga(over eras.)-ša-mi-iš ibid. 44, ˚šar-ga-ša-am-mi-iš KUB 16.31 iv 6 (Tudh. IV?), ¬šar-ga?-x-[…] KUB 6.6 iv 3.
The form is a Luw. adj. in -ammi- to an š-stem noun 
*šargaš-. 
dUTU URUTÚL-na–mu–kan kuit kËdani MU-ti ˚ša-ar-ga!-ša-mi-iš Ëšta n–aš–mu–k[a]n mān kËz IŠTU INIM µKur. ˚ša-ar-ga-ša-mi-iš Ëšta nu MUŠEN.HI.A SI≈SÁ-a[nd]u “Concerning the fact that the Sungoddess of Arinna was vengeful(?) toward me this year — if she was vengeful(?) toward me because of that matter of µKur., let the birds confirm (it)” KUB 5.24 ii 42-45 (oracle question, Tudh. IV?), ed. StBoT 38:258f. (no tr.); (“I will remove µKur. from that place”) mā[n]–mu–za–kan DINGIR-LUM kuit ¬šar-ga-ša-am-mi-iš IN[IM?-ni?]–mu–kan DINGIR-LUM kinun andan aššuli n[eya]ttati “If you O deity are somehow vengeful(?) toward me and you will now turn in favor to me [in the mat]ter(?), (let the first exta be favorable and the second unfavorable)” ibid. iv 8-10 + KUB 16.31 iv 6-8, ed. StBoT 38:264f. iv 15-17 (no tr.).
Friedrich, HW (1952) 333 (no tr.); Laroche, BSL 53 (1957-58) 195 (part. of šargaša-; cf. Hitt. šarkišk-, mng. unkn.); idem, DLL (1959) 86 (no tr.); Weitenberg, U-Stämme 136 (related to šarku- family); Melchert, CLL (1993) 190 (“?”).
Cf. šarkanti-, (¬)šarqatt-, šarkiwali-, šarnink-.
(¬)šarqatt- n. com.; retribution(?), redress(?); NH.†
sg. nom. ¬šar-qa-za KUB 52.34 obv. 9 (NH), šar-qa-za ibid. obv. 5.
(“[Concerning that] … was unfavorable”) DINGIR.ME-aš (or .MEŠ!) šar-qa-za NU.ŠE-du “(If it is) the retribution(?) of the gods (or: (If it is) due to the retribution(?) of the gods), let the oracle be unfavorable” KUB 52.34 obv. 5 (oracle question, NH); the same request, but written ¬šar-qa-za is repeated in ibid. 9.
Considering the fact that a previous unfavorable answer caused them to ask about “š. of the gods” and that an unfavorable outcome is asked for, it seems that “š. of the gods” is a bad thing.
Assuming that šarqaza is the nom. of šarkatt- (cf. kardimiyatt-) and means something like “retribution, redress” (nomen actionis from verb *šark(a)-), we may connect it to šargašammi- “vengeful(?), seeking redress(?).” Whether šar-x-an in […]x-ši šar-x-an NU.ŠE-du KUB 52.34 obv. 3 is from this verb is unclear.
Cf. šarkanti-, šargašam(m)i-, šarkiwali-, šarnink-.
šargawatar n.; eminence, high standing; from MH?/MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-ga-wa-tar Bo 6405 rev. 4 (Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:292), [š]ar-ga-u-wa-tar KBo 13.116 obv. 3 (NS), šar-g[a-u-wa-tar] KUB 34.53 rev. 17(?) (MS); dat.-loc. šar-ga-wa-an-ni KBo 3.21 ii 12 (MH?/MS).
dAnuš–ma–tta dEnlilašš–a šar-ga-wa-an-ni handa ANA LÚ.MEŠ KÚR–ŠUNU wemiyauwanzi tuk wātarnahher “Anu and Enlil commissioned you, on account of your eminence, to find their enemies” KBo 3.21 ii 12-13 (MH?/MS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:23, 25 (“Erhabenheit”); […] innarauwatar MU.HI.A GÍD.DA šar-g[a-u-wa-tar …] x-x-x-naš āššiyawar “[… Give him …], vigor, long years, emi[nence, …], the love of […]” KUB 34.53 rev. 17-18 (myth frag., MS) | one expects the traces preceding āššiyawar to be DINGIR.MEŠ-naš/šiunaš (thus HW™ A 403b) but the hand copy does not favor such a reading; in frag. context: šar-ga-wa-tar–šet […] Bo 6405 rev. 4 (Allaiturahi), translit. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:292, ChS 1/5:172.
Sommer, AU (1932) 91 n. 3 (d.-l. of verbal abstract related to šarku- adj.?); Götze, AM (1933) 222 (“Machtstellung”); Ose, Sup. (1944) 39 (“Machtstellung”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (“Hoheit, Erhabenheit”), Laroche, RHA XXVIII (1970) 37 (“vaillance”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134 w. n. 275.
Cf. šarku- A.
šarkiyawar n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.†
[… ša]r?-ki-ia-u-wa-ar / DINGIR.M[EŠ…] KUB 41.21 i 4-5 (Allaiturahi’s rit., NH), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:276f. (no tr.), translit. ChS I/5:161. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:286, suggest this paragraph concerns “ein Unheilsbegriff.” They relate the word to šarkiwali, q.v. Since this is a hapax and since there are other possibilities ([IGI.HI.A-aš u]š-ki-ia-u-wa-ar, G. Wilhelm pers. comm.) for reading the broken first sign, it is not entirely clear that a noun šarkiyawar exists.
Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1976) 286; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 135f. (to *šarkiya- v. imperf. šarkiške-, related to šarku- adj.). 
Cf. šarku- A adj., šarkiške-, šarkiwali-, šarnink-.
šarkiške- v. to ascend(?).†
[…]x–ma MUŠEN HURRIHI.A araiškanzi / […]x šar-kiš-kán-zi n–at nepiši […] “The shelducks, however, fly up(?), […] ascend(?) and they […] into(?) the sky” KUB 24.7 iv 25-26 (Tale of the Fisherman, NS), tr. Hittite Myths 66.
The meaning is based on the context and on the supposed link to šarku- “high, eminent” q.v.
Sommer, HAB (1938) 86 (“immer höher steigen” < *šark-); Friedrich, HW (1952) 185 (“steigen(?), sich erheben(?)”); Laroche, BSL 53 (1958) 195 (“sens inconnu”); idem, RHA XVI/63 (1958) 90 (“monter”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 245 (> *šarkešš- “hoch, erhaben werden”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134f. (“sich erheben”).
Cf. šarku- A.
šarkiwali- adj.; vengeful(?), seeking retribution(?); from OH/MS.†
sg. nom. com. šar-ki-wa-li-iš KUB 20.96 iv 10 (OH/NS).
pl. nom. com. šar-ki-wa-li-ia-aš KUB 35.145 obv. 4 (NS); acc. šar-ki-wa-li-e-eš KBo 17.54 i 13 (MH/MS), šar-ki-wa-li-i-e-eš IBoT 3.102:2 (MH/NS), šar-ki-u-wa-li-i-e-eš KUB 9.4 iii 41 (MH/NS), dšar-ki-wa-li-iš KUB 35.145 obv. 16 (NS), šar-ki-≠u-wa-li±-ia-aš KUB 9.34 iv 1 (NS), šar-ki-wa-li-aš KUB 17.15 iii 4, šar-ki-w[a-…] HT 6 obv. (6) (NH), šar-ki[-…] KUB 9.34 i 25 (MH/NS).
pl. nom.-acc. neut. [šar?]-ki-wa-la KBo 29.194:3.
a. said of the stormgod: mān–wa–za dU URUZipa~
landa kuitki šar-ki-wa-li-iš šiunaš hanza–tit šarā x[…] “If you, O Stormgod of Zipalanda, are somehow vengeful(?), (and) your forehead, O god, is […] up(wards), (just now we have burned your anger and […] off your divine forehead, O Stormgod of Zippalanda)” KUB 20.96 iv 9-11 (fest. of Zippalanda, OH/NS), ed. Weitenberg, Le Muséon 90:474 (“quand, dieu de l’orage de Zippalanda, le šarkiwali [a] ra[nimé] de quelque manière ta colère divine”), THeth 21:194f. (“Wenn (du), Wettergott von Zipalanda, aus irgendeinem Grund erzürnt(?) bist (und) deine göttliche Stirn nach oben g[erunzelt(?) ist]”), cf. nakkiu-.
b. w. nakkiu-: markištauwaš hinkan šar-ki-u-wa-li-i-e-eš nakkiuËš KI.MIN išharnuwanda<n> dU.GUR KI.MIN UZUmeiliyaš pahhur šātar mu!dāizzi “Ditto (i.e., let the pig remove) sudden death, (and) vengeful(?) nakkiu-demons; ditto (i.e., let it remove) bloodied U.GUR; it will carry away the fever (and) irritation(?) of the flesh(?)” KUB 9.4 iii 41-44 (Old Woman rit., MH/NS), ed. Beckman, OrNS 59:39, 47 (no tr.), cf. also mÏluli, par. KUB 9.34 i 25-26, iv 1, ed. Hutter, Behexung 26f., 40f. (“die schweren Krankheitsdämonen”); (“The bloodied U.GUR will (pl.!) burn”) [n–ašta anda] šar-ki-wa-li-ia-aš nakki<u?>yaš ura[nta] “The vengeful(?) nakkiu-demons will burn” KUB 35.145 obv. 3-4 (incant., NS), translit. StBoT 30:230; (“I extinguished the bloodied [U.GUR] §”) [n–ašta a]nda šar-ki-wa-li-aš [nakkiuy]aš kištanunu[n] “I extinguished the vengeful(?) nakkiu-demons.” KUB 17.15 iii 4-5 (conj., NS), translit. StBoT 30:233; cf. similarly KUB 17.15 ii 11-12, w. dupl. KUB 35.145 ii 16; (“Let it ditto (i.e., release) [sudde]n death”) šar-ki-wa-li-e-eš [nakkiueš] lāu “Let it loosen the vengeful(?) nakkiu-demons. (Let it ditto (i.e., loosen) the bloodied U.GUR)” KBo 17.54 i 13-14 (incant., MH/MS), ed. Haas, OrNS 40:419 (no tr.).
The anger of the god or demon described by š. is not just a trivially motivated pique, but is rather the determination to avenge crimes. It is that quality possessed by the Roman Furies. The adj. šarkiwali-, unequivocally attested in KUB 20.96 iv 10 (above, a) is derived from the verb *šark(a)-, on which are also built šarkanti-, šarnink- (and its derivatives), and šarkatt- and šargašammi-, q.v. The one instance (KUB 9.34 iv 1) where š. seems to be determined by a d might point to a further substantivized use and to the combination š. nakkiu- as two closely related groups of deities.
Van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1972) 117 (adj., epithet together w. nakki- of “god,” cf. šarku- group); Laroche, RHA XXIII/76 (1965) 42 (“éminent,” Luw. equivalent to šarku-); Weitenberg, Le Muséon 90 (1977) 474f. (š. and nakkiu- two nouns in asyndeton); Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 286 (“eine Krankheit”); Eichner, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 61 (š. “beleidigt, gekränkt” < šarku- etc.), Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 251 n. 26 (adj. “aufgebracht” < *šark-(?) “sich erheben”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 135f. (š. a noun); Hutter, Behexung (1988) 70-72 (“schadenbringende Dämonen” w. š. a noun).
Cf. šarkanti-, šarkatt-, šargašammi-, šarnink-. 
šarku- A adj. and n.; 1. adj. high in rank or stature, eminent, outstanding, illustrious, powerful, 2. (substantivized) an eminent, outstanding or powerful person; from OH.
sg. nom. com. šar-ku-uš KBo 3.34 ii 11 (OH/NS), KUB 26.74 i 7 (OH/NS?), KUB 23.21 rev. 3 (MH/NS), KUB 14.3 i 74 (NH), KUB 31.141:5 (NS), KUB 58.85 iii 8 (NS); acc. šar-ku-un KBo 22.169:5 (NS); voc. šar-ku KUB 31.127 i 18, 58 (OH/NS), šar-ku-i KUB 31.127 i 15 (OH/NS); dat.-loc. šar-ga-u-i KBo 53.63:2 (NS).
pl. nom. com. šar-ga-u-e-eš KUB 45.20 ii 9 (MH/NS), VBoT 120 i 4, ii 14 (MH/NS), KUB 24.7 i 9 (NS), KUB 17.9 i 18 (NS), KUB 36.67 ii 14 (NS), šar-ga-a-u-e-eš KUB 8.20 i 8 (pre-NS?); acc. šar-ga-mu-uš KUB 57.66 iii 17 (NS); dat.-loc. šar-ga-u-wa-aš VBoT 120 ii 18 (MH/NS).
unclear šar-ku KBo 3.17 ii 8 (pre-NH/NS).
(Sum.) GÚ.TUKU = (Akk.) ašarËdu = (Hitt.) šar-ku-uš KBo 1.42 ii 20 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 13:135:95.
(NB Akk.) attÏ–ma nannarat AN-e u KI-tim mārat dSîn qa-rit-ti “Indeed you are the luminary of heaven and earth, heroic daughter of Sîn” = (Bogh. Akk.) attÏ–ma nannarat AN-e DUMU.MUNUS dSîn te-li-tum dGAŠAN “Indeed you, exalted Lady, are the luminary of heaven, daughter of Sîn” = (Hitt.) [ziq]qa–za dSÎN-aš nepišaš DUMU.MUNUS-aš šar-ku-uš dIŠTAR-iš “You, eminent IŠTAR, are the celestial daughter of the Moongod” NB = STC 2 pl. 75:5, Bogh. Akk. = KUB 37.36 rt. col. 8-9 (similarly ŠÀ.ZI.GA 28:25), Hitt. = KUB 31.141:5 (NS), ed. Reiner/Güterbock, JCS 21:258 (“mighty”).
(Akk.) L[UGA(L)] ŠÚ! (= šar kiššati) ŠÈ KUR (= ina māti) TUKU-ši (= ibbašši) § … [LUGAL (Š)]Ú ŠÈ KUR TUKU-ši–ma KUR u!-ZÁH “There will come into being a king of the world in the land § … There will come into being a king of the world in the land, and he will destroy the land” KUB 4.63 i 25, 27, w. dupl. KUB 37.154:8, 10, ed. DBH 12:48, 51f. = (Hitt.) [KUR-e anda šar-k]u-uš LUGAL-uš k[iš(ari)] § … [KUR-]e andan šar[-ku-uš LUGAL-(uš) kišari?] KUR-e–kan! harni[kzi] “[There will] come [into existence a migh]ty king [in the land.] § … In [the lan]d [there will come into existence] a mi[ghty king.] He will destroy the land” KUB 8.23:(4)-5, 7-8, w. dupl. KUB 8.20 i 1, 4, ed. DBH 12:91 (“einen starken König”); LUGAL.ME.EŠ gāmiru itebb[(am)]a [LUG]AL KUR LÚ u-ZÁH “Effective kings will arise (and) a [ki]ng will destroy a man’s land” KUB 4.63 i 29-30, w. dupl. KUB 37.151:8-9, ed. DBH 12:48, 52, CAD G 34a (“effective”) = (Hitt.) [ša]r-ga-a-u-e-eš / [LUGAL.MEŠ … (-a]nda x x)…]x-aššaš […] KUB 8.20 i 8-9 (pre-NS?), w. dupl. KUB 8.23:11 (pre-NS?), ed. DBH 12:91; similarly šar-ga-u-e-e[š LUGAL.MEŠ KUR-e] tianzi n–ašta L[UGAL …]x KUR-e harnikz[i] KUB 8.15 obv. 5-7, ed. DBH 12:84; cf. Laroche, RA 59:85 and DBH 12:258f..; on the possible OB date of the Akk. original KUB 4.63 see Koch-Westenholz in Galter, Die Rolle der Astronomie 235 w. n. 18.
1. adj. — a. referring to deities: karuiliyašš–a–kan DINGIR.MEŠ-naš ištarna dUTU-uš šar-ku-uš “And you, O Sungod, are the most eminent among the ancient gods” KUB 31.127 + ABoT 44 + KUB 36.79 i 25-26 (solar hymn, OH/NS); cf. ibid. i 15, 18; dTelipinuš šar-ku-uš nakkiš DINGIR-uš zik “You, Telipinu, are an eminent/powerful, important god” KUB 24.2 i 3 (prayer to Telipinu, Murš. II), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:16f. (“mighty and honored”), Lebrun, Hymnes 181, 184 (“tout puissant”), tr. ANET 396 (“mighty (and) noble”), Hittite Prayers 54 (“mighty and honored”); [… d]U-aš šar-ku-uš KBo 3.21 iii 8 (hymn to Adad, OH?/NS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:20-30; dU URUKÙ.BABBAR-TI šar-ku-uš AMAR-uš “Stormgod of Hatti, eminent/powerful calf” KUB 6.45 i 50 (prayer to the Stormgod Pihaššaššiš, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 11, 33 (“prominent”), tr. ANET 398, Hittite Prayers 88; cf. KBo 22.169:5; handan–wa aši DINGIR-LIM šar-ku-uš UR.SAG-iš parā handa[(nza DINGIR)-L]UM “Truly, that god is an outstanding hero, a rightly guided deity” KUB 6.45 iii 57-58, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 23, 41 (“a mighty hero, a rightly guiding god”), tr. ANET 398 (“a strong, valiant and glorious god”), Hittite Prayers 92; [mān–ma] ≠URU±Kummiya≠š± šar-ku-u[š LUGAL-uš(?) memiyauwanzi] zinnit “[When] the eminent/powerful [king(?)] of Kummiya (i.e., the god Kumarbi) finished [speaking]” KBo 19.121:5-7 (myth, NS).
b. referring to kings — 1' said of Hittite Great Kings: (“[After Hattušil]i the king, Muršili, his son, became king”) [apašš–a] šar-ku-uš LUGAL-uš Ëšta “[He too] was an eminent/powerful king. (He continually [defeat]ed the enemy lands. He carried […] off all the lands to Hattuša. He filled Hattuša up)” KBo 3.57 ii 5 (OH/NS), tr. Kempinski, ÄAT 5:50f. (“heldenhafter König”); cf. KUB 26.74 i 7-8 (OH/NS) and KUB 31.14:6-7 (hist.?, NH), ed. Haas, KN 8 n. 5; (“When my brother, Muwatalli, [became king]”) n–aš šar-ku-uš L[UGAL-uš] Ëšta “He was an eminent/powerful king. ([Due to] IŠTAR, he always vanquished [all of his enemies])” KBo 22.11 i 3 (hist., Hatt. III); cf. also KUB 21.24:9 (hist., NH).
2' said of kings under the Hittite emperor: (“Previously Kuruntiya was here and he drove to meet you, O Great King”) UL–aš šarkuš LUGAL-uš Ëšta “Was he not an eminent/powerful king?” KUB 14.3 i 74 (Taw., NH), ed. AU 6f. (“großmächtiger”), Singer, AnSt 33:212 (“powerful”), Heinhold-Krahmer, OrNS 55:54f. (“mächtiger”), cf. Güterbock, Or NS 59:160 (“powerful”).
3' other kings: only in foreign literature translated into Hittite; cf. above in bil. sec. and see also for LUGAL ŠÚ in a Hittite tr. of an Akk. omen apodosis KUB 8.24 rev. 10, ed. DBH 12:145, 147 iii 18.
c. said of soldiers: ammel–ma ÉRIN.MEŠ.HI.A–YA šar-ga-u-e-eš ašandu “May my soldiers be outstanding/powerful” KUB 45.20 ii 9 (Ummaya’s rit., MH/NS); šar-ku-uš ÉRIN.MEŠ-az (in broken context) KUB 58.85 iii 8 (rit. frag., NS).
d. said of ≠heroes?]:(“On what side are […-s], and they sit […] by the pillar”) šar-ga-u-e-eš–ma kuezza [UR.SAG?].MEŠ “But on what other side are eminent/powerful [hero]es(?), (they always win in battle)” KUB 24.7 i 9-10 (hymn to IŠTAR, NS), ed. Archi, OA 16:305, 307 (“gli eccelsi”), Güterbock, JAOS 103:156 (“mighty [heroes]”), THeth 12:82 “die erhabene […].” 
e. said of other mortals: (“Aškaliya was lord in Hurma and he was a man in every respect. They defamed(?) him to my father. So he transferred him … and made him an administrator [LÚAGRIG] in Ankuwa”) šar-ku-uš LÚ-eš⁄‡ Ëšta “He was an eminent/powerful man, (but he died in diminished circumstances)” KBo 3.34 ii 11 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 46f. (“potente”), Soysal, Diss. 13, 84 (“hervorragend”), cf. paknu-.
2. (substantivized): [… ŠU]ŠI LUGAL.MEŠ 70 šar-ga-u-e-eš andan pa[er] “Sixty kings (and) seventy eminent people came in” KUB 36.67 ii 14 (Gurparanzah legend, NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:84f. (“Helden”); cf. 60 [LUGA]L.MEŠ 70 LÚ.GURUŠ šišiyauwanzi tarhta “He defeated sixty kings (and) seventy eminent men shooting” ibid. 23; (“The kings arrived”) nu šar-ga-u-e-eš pittuliËr “The eminent ones worried”… šar-ga-u-wa-aš–ma–za peran išhaššarwanza ≠Ëšdu± “‘Let him be well-behaved(?) in the presence of eminent ones’” VBoT 120 ii 14, 18 (Allaiturahi, MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:140f. (“Held”) | the many grammatical errors in this passage (esp. in lines 17-18) inspire little confidence in translating or understanding it; nu–za µGurparanzahuš alalamniškizzi šar-ga-u-e-eš–ši kattan ar≠ku±iškanzi “Gurparanzahu begins to lament. The eminent ones accompanied him” (The Tigris said to Gurparanzahu: ‘Why do you cry out (wËškiši)?’)” KUB 17.9 i 17-19 (Gurparanzah legend, late NS).
The term is a positive attribute of gods, great kings, subordinate kings, governors, and soldiers. It appears, however, that the attribute is not inherent in these positions, but is an additional quality. Since subordinate kings can be š., the word cannot mean “paramount.” A translation such as “brave” can be ruled out since importance, not bravery, is the issue in the Tawagalawa letter and the Aškaliya anecdote. In most contexts the translations “powerful,” “outstanding” or “eminent” are appropriate. Often it appears that it is the fame and importance of the individual which is highlighted by this word. If the suggested translation for šarkiške- “to rise, move upward” is correct, and if that word is related, then presumably š. means “high (in esteem, power), eminent, illustrious, powerful.” Since as an adj. š. once modifies the noun UR.SAG (KUB 6.45 iii 58), it is not itself the Hittite reading of that logogram, which is so often translated “hero.”
Sommer, AU (1932) 91f. (an “Epitheton ornans” such as “mächtig, hervorragend, erlaucht”); Laroche, RA 59 (1965) 85; Riemschneider, Omentexte 461f.; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134-136; Riemschneider, DBH 12 (2004) 258f.
Cf. šargawatar, šarkiške-, NINDAšarku-, šarkuešš-.
*šarku- B n.; shoe; wr. KUŠE.SIR.
A word šarku- meaning shoe was postulated by Eichner, Die Sprache 19 Idg. Chron. 19b no. 99 and Hoffner, AlHeth 181, following Goetze, Cor.Ling. 61, who suggested that the word for shoe was likely to be found in the word šarkuwa(i)- (šarkui-) “to put on shoes.” Eichner pointed to KUŠE.SIR-u–ma–at–ši Ëšdu “May it be a shoe for her” (KBo 12.126 i 19) as evidence for a neuter u-stem word underlying the word for “shoe.” But since all other cases in which the gender of “shoe” is ascertainable, it is common gender, Weitenberg, U-Stämme 135 § 307, thinks rather that the scribe in KBo 12.126 wrote E.ŒIR (= E.MUŠ) rather than E.SIR. This is perhaps a hearing error or perhaps an ordinary mistake since the signs only differ by one winkelhaken. For discussion, see Weitenberg, U-Stämme 135 § 307. Hoffner pointed to NINDAšarkuš, which he thought might be bread in the form of a shoe (see šarku- C). Neumann apud Oettinger, Stammbildung 335 w. n. 159 accepted šarku- as the reading of “shoe” and suggested that the word was related to the adj. šarku- and means “hoher Schuh.” On the other hand, it has been claimed that the Hitt. word behind KUŠE.SIR is an a-stem on the basis of [ZAG-an KUŠE.SIR-a]n in KUB 33.17 obv. 2 (so Otten, Tel. 50, Weitenberg, U-Stämme 135, 427 n. 282, ed. Glocker, Eothen 6:26f.:12), but the order can also be [KUŠE.SIR ZAG-a]n as in [KUŠE.SIR] ZAG-an GÙB-li šarkui in KBo 32.7 obv. 13-14, ed. Rüster, FsAlp 476, 478. The acc. pl. KUŠE.SIR.HI.A-uš (e.g., KUB 33.102 ii 34) is, contra Otten, Tel. 50 n. 5, inconclusive in this respect since an acc. pl. in -uš is possible for all common gender nouns. Of course more than one word could underlie the Sumerogram. 
Cf. šarku- A, NINDAšarku- C, šarkuwe-. 
NINDAšarku- C n.; (a type of bread/pastry).†
sg.? nom. com.? NINDAšar-ku-uš KUB 35.142 iv 9.
3-ŠU 9 NINDAšar-ku-uš “Three times nine š.-breads” KUB 35.142 iv 9 (Ištanuwian fest., NS), translit. StBoT 30:323.
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 181, suggested that this was a pastry in the form of a shoe. See discussion šarku- B. A connection with šarku- A adj. cannot be excluded.
Although this form could be a NH pl. nom. in -uš, and would not have to be a u-stem, the other Hitt. or Luw. items in the same paragraph point to  sg. nom.: 9 NINDAwantÏliš, 3 pūtiš, 9 SÍGkišriš (iv 10, 14, 15).
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 181; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 135.
Cf. šarku- A, *šarku- B.
šarkuwe-, šarkuya- v.; to put on footwear; from OH/MS. 
pres. sg. 3 šar-ku-i-ia-zi KBo 10.51:4 (OH/NS), [šar-k]u-e-ia-zi KUB 58.33 iii 31 (NS), šar-ku-e-ez-zi KUB 20.4 i 8 (OH/NS), KBo 23.59 iv (4) (MS), šar-ku-ez-zi KUB 34.118 rt. col. 7 (MS), KUB 57.76 i 8 (NS), šar-ku-uz-zi KBo 11.43 i 16 (NS), šar-ku-zi IBoT 2.134 rev. 12 (NS), KUB 56.35 i 2 (NS), for possible šar-ku-e-ez-za KBo 25.196:4 (OS) see šarkuezza; pl. 3 šar-ku-u-wa-an-zi Bo 10291 rev. 8 (Oettinger, Stammbildung 335). 
pret. sg. 3 šar-ku-it KBo 9.110:4 (OH/NS?), KUB 33.106 ii 4 (NH), šar-ku-ut-ta KUB 33.67 i 28 (OH/NS).
imp. sg. 2 šar-ku-i KUB 33.102 ii 34 (NH), šar-ku KUB 24.7 iii 66; sg. 3 šar-ku-ud-du KBo 12.126 i 19 (MH/NS), šar-ku-ia-ad-du KUB 24.11 iii 7 (MH/NS).
part. sg. nom. com. šar-k[(u-w)]a-an-za KUB 24.8 i 26 (pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.107:1; nom.-acc. neut. šar-ku-wa-an KUB 45.22 iii 7, 11 (NS), KUB 45.23 i 7  (NS), KBo 24.96:6 (NS). 
For the -ške-verbs ša-ra-ak-ku-uš-kán-du and ša-ra-ak-ku-iš-kán-du, considered by Oettinger, Stammbildung 336, to belong to this verb, see šarak(k)u(i)-. 
a. w. -za “to put on one’s own shoes/footwear”: (“The king goes into the inner chamber and puts on his robes. § He puts on a white garment of the Subarian(?) type and a rough garment § which they call a šepahi-garment or šepahiya §”) ≠HUB.BI KÙ.GI–a–z± [(dāi)] ≠KUŠE±[.SI]R GEﬂ-TIM šar-ku-i-ia-zi “And he takes his gold earrings (and) puts on his black shoes” KBo 10.51:2-4 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.23 i 15-17, ed. van den Hout, BiOr. 52:551f. w. n. 26, translit. StBoT 28:9 | the force of -za at the beginning of l. 2 carries over into the next clause; KUŠE.SIR BABBAR lānzi [… –za] / KUŠE.SIR GEﬂ šar-ku-ez-z[i] “They (two palace servants and one …-man) take off white shoes. […] He (the king?) puts on black shoes” KUB 34.118 rt. col. 6-7 (fest., MS); (The goddess was upset) GÙB-lan–za KUŠE.SIR ZAG-naz [šarkutta ZAG-nan–ma–za KUŠE.SIR] GÙB-laz šar-ku-ut-ta “[The goddess put] her left shoe on the right, and she put her [right shoe] on the left” KUB 33.67 i 27-28 (missing deity myth, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 29:72f.; cf. [ZAG-an–ma–za] KUŠE.SIR GÙB-laz [šarkutta] KUB 33.15:9 (MH/NS) and [KUŠE.SIR ZAG-a]n GÙB-li šar-ku-[ut-ta] KUB 33.17 obv. 2 (missing Stormgod of Kuliwišna, OH/NS), ed. Glocker, Kuliwišna 26f. | for the restoration in the break see *šarku- B; (“Kumarbi quickly arose”) GAM-an KUŠE.SIR.HI.A-uš šar-ku-it “Below, he put on his shoes (and departed from the city of Urkiš)” KUB 33.98 i 11 (Ullik. IB, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146f. w. n. 22 | the lack of the particle -za here is probably due to the extensive erasures and corrections in this part of the tablet; (Kumarbi said to Impaluri “Take a staff in your hand”) I[N]A [GÌR.MEŠ–K]A!–ma–za KUŠE.SIR.HI.A-uš liliwanduš IM.MEŠ-uš šar-ku[-i] “Put swift winds on [yo]ur [feet] as shoes” KUB 36.7a iii 40-41 + KUB 17.7 iii 11-12 (Ullik. IA, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:154f.; cf. KUB 33.106 + KBo 26.65 i 31-32, ii 3-4 (Ullik. IIIA, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f., cf. pata- 1 a; cf. also KUB 24.7 iii 65-66 (Tale of the Cow and the Fisherman, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:230f., tr. Hittite Myths 86; (“But if it is a woman who has performed (sorcery) on him, mark her, O Sungod. And let it (i.e., the sorcery) be (her) scarf. Let her keep it worn on her head”) KUŠE.SIR!–ma–at–ši Ëšdu n–at–za šar-ku-ud-du “Let it be shoe(s) for her. May she put it on herself” KBo 12.126 i 19 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:22f. | for the reading SIR! see *šarku- B. Since there is no evidence for the Hitt. word(s) behind KUŠE.SIR being neuter, the -at refers both times to the sorcery (to be corrected in šāi- B 2 and šak(k)- 3 a).
b. without -za “to put shoes/footwear on another person”: (said of a statue of the king) [ … KUŠ]E.SIR hattil[(i šar-ku-wa-an harz)i] “He has put shoes on (it) of the Hattian type” KBo 15.15 iii? 7 (rit., MS), w. dupl. KBo 24.96:6 (NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 46f.; (“Two statues (šËneš) of wax are made. One is male”) TÚG.GÚ.È.A waššan harzi TÚG.ÍB.LÁ putalli!ya<(n)> harzi nu–ššan TAHAPŠI išhuzziyan harzi KUŠE.SIR.HI.A–ya TÚGGAD.DAM šar-ku-wa-an harzi MUNUS–ma 2? (var. 1) TÚG waššan harzi TÚGkariulliya(n)–ššan šÏyan harzi namma–ššan IŠTU TAHAPŠI išhuzziyanza KUŠE.SIR.HI.A TÚGGAD.DAM šar-ku-wa-an harzi “(S)he has dressed (it) in a tunic. (S)he has tied on a sash (TÚG.ÍB.LÁ), put on a belt and has put on shoes (and) leggings(?) (TÚGGAD.DAM). (The other) one is a woman. (S)he has dressed (it) in a garment. (S)he has put on a head-covering, (s)he then girt (it) with a belt (and) has put on shoes (and) leggings(?)” KUB 45.22 iii 4-11 (rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 45.23 + IBoT 4:38 obv. 6-10 (NS), ed. Goetze, Cor.Ling. 48f. nn. 10, 26; (“She seats the person before the Sungod. The Old Woman holds out the wax statues to him and says: ‘Whoever has been making (this) sorcery, now they have treated these. They stand right before you.’ The mortal says: ‘We invoked(?) (them).’ Then the statues say: ‘Bring (it). We will carry (it) away.’ Let the man dress (them?)”) n–at–šamaš–apa šar-ku-ia-ad-du “and let him put it (i.e., the sorcery?) on their feet. (Let him keep it. Let him carry it away)” KUB 24.11 + 987/v iii 7 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:44f. (based on dupl. KUB 24.9, “es soll Euch(?) dann eine Fußbekleidung angezogen [sein]”), for 987/v see Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:89. 
c. part. (“(Appu) went home”) p[ai]t–a–ššan [GIŠ]NÁ-aš šar-ku-w[(a-a)]n-za šeškit “and thereupon he lay down on his bed with his shoes on” KUB 24.8 i 25-26 (Appu, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.107:1, ed. StBoT 14:4f. (reading š[ašt]aššan for p[ai]t–a–ššan), tr. Hittite Myths 83, cf. -šan B 1 b 20'.
Antonym is la-/lai- 3 q.v.
Ehelolf apud Sommer, HAB (1938) 86 (“die Fußbekleidung anziehen < am Fuß (Bein) hochziehen,” i.e., < adj. šarku-); Otten, Tel. (1942) 50 w. n. 5; Goetze, Cor.Ling. (1955) 61 (denominative from the word for shoe); Watkins, Eriu 27 (1967) 117 (agreeing w. Ehelolf and Sommer); Eichner, Die Sprache 19 (1973) IC 19b no. 99 (< šarku- “shoe”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 181; Josephson, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 95 (opp. of arha lā-, therefore actually means “to join, bind”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 335-337; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 134-135 (šarku- “shoe” may not exist, possibly to šarku- “high”).
Cf. šarku- A, šarku- B, šarkuiwant-.
šarkuiwant- adj.; having shoes on(?); from pre-NH.†
sg. nom. com. šar-ku-i-wa-an-za KBo 10.11 i 6 (pre-NS).
š. is a deverbal adj. in -want- (cf. nahšariyawant, paršnawant-) to the innovative stem šarkuya- q.v.
Cf. šarkuwe-/šarkuya-.
šarkuešš- v.; to become mighty, illustrious(?); MS.†
pres. sg. 3 šar-ku-e-e[š-zi] KBo 13.31 ii 3 (MS).
LUGAL-uš šar-ku-e-e[š-zi KUR–ŠU] SIGﬁ-atta “A king will become emin[ent]/power[ful. His land] will prosper” KBo 13.31 ii 3-4 (omen apodosis, MS), ed. StBoT 9:74f. (“wird erstarken”). 
For the formation of the verb see parkuešš- B.
Riemschneider, StBoT 9 (1970) 81 (“erstarken”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 246 (“mächtig werden,” stem possibly based on a back formation from the voc. of šarku- adj.).
Cf. šarku- A.
šarkuezza; (mng. unkn.); OS.†
[…] šar-ku-e-ez-za x[…] KBo 25.196:4 (OS). This might be an act. pres. 3 sg. from šarkuwe-/šarkuya- with ending -za for expected -zi, for which see Melchert, AHP 183. The preterites in the immediate context (lines 2, 3) call for caution, however.
Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 427 n. 284 (“unklar”).
šarkumaššan; (mng. unkn.); OS.†
pl. gen. or sg. acc. šar-ku-ma-aš-ša-an KBo 17.23 obv.? 3 (OS).
§ [URUA]ngulla–ma šar-ku-ma-aš-ša-an DUMU-aš INA […] / [URU?]x-eni GUD-uš ušiËtta DUMU-š–[a …] KBo 17.23 obv.? 3-4 (OS), partially ed. StBoT 5.201.
Since the occurrence of the particle -šan in this position is unlikely, we are dealing with either a noun šarkumašša- or a noun šarkuma- and the suffixed poss. pron. -šan “his, her, its,” i.e., *šarkuman–šan. š. could be an acc. sg. “The child […-s] the š.” or a gen. pl. “the child of the š.-s […]” Theoretically, a noun šarkuma- could be an old -ma derivation (cf. Oettinger, StBoT 45:469f.) of either šarku- A or B. The fragmentary context does not allow an interpretation.
[šarkuzza] KBo 22.222 iii 15, Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 427 n. 284, read ne-ku-uz-za me-h[u-ni].
¬šar-l[a-…] (mng. unkn.); NH.†
KUB 31.26:5 (dep.? mentioning Armatarhunta, NH), ed. van den Hout, Purity 63f. | for Luwian *šarli-/šarlai- and derivatives see CLL 191. Since š. is likely to start a new sentence it probably belongs to one of the nouns or adjectives starting with šarl-.
šarlai- v. act.; 1. to exalt, praise, 2. let prevail, 3. lift off, remove; from OH. 
pres. sg. 1 šar-la-a-mi KBo 32.19 ii 15, iii 40 (MH/MS), KUB 6.45 iii 61 (NH); sg. 3 šar-la-a-iz-zi KBo 24.48 iii 5 (NS), KBo 24.49 ii 7 = KBo 34.72 obv. 9 (MS?), KUB 29.7 rev. 62 (MH/MS), šar-la-iz-zi KBo 29.104 rev. 10 (NS); pl. 3 šar-la-an-zi KUB 6.45 iii 47 (NH).
pret. sg. 3 šar-la-a-it KBo 16.25 iv 13, 14 (MH/MS), KUB 14.11 ii 23 (Murš. II), šar-la-it VS 28.132:5 (NS); pl. 2 šar-la-u-e-en IBoT 3.148 iv 41 (NS), w. dupl. š[ar-l]a-a-u-e[n] KUB 58.73 iii 9 (NS).
imp. sg. 2 šar-la-a-i KUB 33.70 ii? 8 (OH/ENS).
verbal subst. gen. šar-lu-ma-aš KUB 30.16 + KUB 39.1 i 7 (NS), šar-lu-u-ma-aš KBo 20.92 iv! 21 + KBo 34.170:3 (MH/NS).
part. sg. nom. com. šar-la-a-an-za KBo 39.8 iii 53 (MH/MS), KUB 41.12 iii 4 + IBoT 4.12 iii 7 (MH/NS), KUB 58.73 iii 11 (NS), šar-la-an-za KUB 39.90:7 (NS), IBoT 3.148 iv 44 (MH?/NS); sg. dat.-loc. šar-la-an-ti KBo 20.72 iii! 14, 16 (MS?).
imperf. pres. sg. 1 šar-li-iš-ki-mi KUB 6.45 iii 44 (NH); sg. 2 šar-[l]i-iš-ki-ši KUB 31.127 i 10 (OH/NS), [ša]r-le-eš-ki-ši KUB 24.3 i 42 (Murš. II); sg. 3 [šar-l]i-iš-ki-iz-zi KUB 24.8 i 3 (pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. šar-[…] KBo 7.18:1.
1. to exalt, praise — a. in general: nu dU [(pihaša)]ššin EN–YA šar-la-a-mi “I will exalt the Stormgod pihašašši-, my lord” KUB 6.45 iii 61 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 iv 30, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 23, 41, tr. Bernabé, TLH 292 (“alabo”); [(šar-l)]a-a-an-za-wa dUTU-i (var. dUTU-uš) “O exalted Sungoddess” KBo 2.3 iii 9 (1Mašt., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.12 iii 4 + IBoT 4.12 iii 7 (MH/NS), w. par. KBo 39.8 iii 53 (2Mašt., MH/MS), ed. THeth 46:95-97, Rost, MIO 1:362f. (“Gepriesener Sonnengott”) | the function of the part. šarlant- here equals the Luw. part. šarlaim(m)i-, q.v.; nu–za–kan MUNUS.LUGAL šar-la-an-ti dZA.BA›.BA› warapzi nu namma INA GIŠTIR paizzi n–ašta 1 UDU U 1 MÁŠ.GAL šar-la-an-ti ANA dZA.BA›.BA› šipanti “The queen bathes for the exalted Zababa. Then she goes to the grove and (there) she offers a sheep and a goat to the exalted Zababa” KBo 20.72 iii! 14-17 (cult of Huwaššana, MS?), ed. Lombardi, SMEA 41:237:16-19, 240 (“il sublime Zababa”); (“As they are performing the šarlatta-sacrifice in which oxen and sheep are sacrificed, they say …”) nu–wa–tta kāša LUGAL-uš hūdak [ša]r-la-a-it … nu–tta apËdani memini šer [(šar-l)]a-a-u-en (var. šar-la-u-e-en) mānn–a–wa LUGAL-i LÚ.KÚR ˚kattawatnališ kuiški Ëšzi nu–wa–za kāša IŠTU ŠA LÚ.KÚR (var. LUGAL) hūdak šar-la-a-an-za (var. [ša]r-la-an-za) ANA LÚ.KÚR–[(ma–wa)] GEŠTU-an lË parā epti “Right now the king has promptly praised you. (Do not listen to that (other) man’s (words). Do not harm the king and (his) people. If you have handed over a vengeful enemy to the king at some point), on account of that matter we have praised/exalted you, and if the king has any vengeful enemy, and just now you are being promptly praised by (the words) of the enemy, do not listen to (that) enemy” KUB 58.73 iii 6, 9-12 (evocation rit., NS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.148 iv 36(-37), 41-45 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 65:300f. (differently: “haben wir dich angerufen”).
b. (verbal subst. gen.) “fit for praising”: (If a king or queen becomes a god at Hattuša) 1 GUD.APIN.LÁL šar-lu-ma-aš–kan apel ZI-ni šipandanzi “They sacrifice a plow ox fit for praising to his/her soul” KUB 30.16 + KUB 39.1 obv. i 7-8 (funeral rit., NS), ed. HTR 18f., 122 (“Weihe-Rind(?)”), Kassian et al., Funerary 46f. (“for extolling”); cf. frag. 1 UDU.NITA 1 GUD šar-lu-u-ma-aš KBo 20.92 iv! 21 + KBo 34.170:3 (MH/NS).
2. to let prevail: [h]a[ndan]duš LÚ.MEŠ-uš kuiš [(šar)-l]i-iš-ki-iz-zi “(You are the one) who always lets ju[st] men prevail (who cuts down evil men like a tree)” KUB 24.8 i 1 (tale of Appu, NS), w. dupl. KBo 7.18:2-3, ed. StBoT 14:4f. (“erhöht”), tr. Bernabé, TLH 221 (“que levanta a los hombres rectos”), Hoffner, CoS 1:153, Hittite Myths™ 83 (“exonerates”); (“O Sungod … step onto the upper (šarazzi) road”) [(nu LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL)] DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL šar-la-a-i “(Sungod), let the king, queen, (and) princes prevail” KUB 33.70 ii 8 (missing deity myth, OH/ENS), w. dupl. KUB 46.52 obv. 6-7, translit. Myth 101; handanza–kan a[nt]uhšaš tuk–pat āššuš n–an zik–pat šar-[l]i-iš-ki-ši dUTU-uš šuwaru mayanza DUMU dN[I]N.GAL “The just person is dear only to you, and you alone let him prevail, O Sungod, fully grown-up son of Ningal” KUB 31.127 i 8-11 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:239 (“and thou art letting him win”), idem, AnSt 30:44 (“and you let him prevail”), Lebrun, Hymnes 94, 101 (“et toi seul l'exh[a]ltes” (sic)), Hittite Prayers 36 (“you are exalting him”); nu apiya–ya dIM URUHatti BE_LI–YA ABA–Y[A] (var. attaš–min) hannešnit (var. hannišnit) šar-la-a-[(it)] “Even then, the Stormgod of Hatti, my lord, let my father prevail through a lawsuit (i.e., trial by battle) (so that the Hittites were victorious over the Egyptians)” KUB 14.8 obv. 25 (PP2, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 14.11 ii 21-23, ed. Götze, KlF 1:210f. | š. is here synonymous with (hannešnaz) šarazziyahh-, q.v.; cf. also šarazzi(ya)- A 2; for š. as a Luwianism for the latter terms see Melchert apud Singer, Muw.Pr. 66; parā handanzaš–a–kan antuhwahhaš tuk–pat ANA dUTU [UR]UArinna aššiyanza n–an zik–pat dUTU URUArinna [ša]r-le-eš-ki-ši “The just man is dear to you alone, O Sungoddess of Arinna; only you [allow] him to prevail, O Sungoddess of Arinna” KUB 24.3 i 40-42 (prayer of Murš. II), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:24f. (“The uplifted man is dear to thee, Sungoddess of Arinna, and thou, Sungoddess of Arinna, [exal]test him”), Le-brun, Hymnes 158, 168, tr. Hittite Prayers 51 (“exalt”). 
3. lift off(?), remove(?) — a. without -za: […] 1 dupšahi[n nakku]waš linkiyaš EME-i ANA UN¨T [MUNUS.LUGAL(?) IŠTU NINDA.GUR›.RA GA.KIN.]AG TUR–ya ša[r-la-a-iz-z]i 1 dupšahin–ma nakkuwaš l[inkiyaš EME-i ANA UN¨T MUNUS.LUGAL(?) IŠTU NINDA.GUR›.RA G]A.KI[N.AG TUR–y]a šar-la-a-iz-zi “For the tongue of the oath of [the nakku-] (and) for the [queen’s(?)] regalia (s)he l[ift]s one dupšahi- [with(?) thick bread] and small [che]ese, one (other) dupšahi- (s)he lifts(?) [for the tongue of the] o[ath] of the nakku- [(and) for the queen’s(?) regalia with(?) thick bread an]d [small ch]ee[se], (yet one other dupšahi- (s)he […])” KBo 34.72 obv. 7-9 (rit. of Šamuha(?), MS?); cf. similarly KBo 24.48 iii (NS) and w. -za below b; nu–mu–kan kuiš idaluš memiaš ZI-ni anda n–an–mu DINGIR.MEŠ EGIR-pa SIGﬁ-ahhanzi šar-la-an-zi “Whatever unpleasant matter is in my mind the gods will make it right again for me (and) they will lift it from me” KUB 6.45 iii 46-47 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 22, 41 (“and lift it from me”).
b. w. -za : (“Whatever evil word, oath, curse and contamination were made before the deity, let these substitutes carry away from before the deity. Let the deity and the offerant be free from these words”) EGIR–ŠU–ma–za EN.SÍSKUR IŠTU NINDA.GUR›.RA TUR GA.KIN.AG TUR–ya šar-la-a-iz-zi § “Then the sacrificer lifts (the evils) off himself (-za) with a small thick bread and a small cheese §” KUB 29.7 rev. 62 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 125, 132 (“rend hommage”), Trabazo, TextosRel. 568f. (“ensalza a la divinidad”), tr. ANET 346 (differently: “to recite a hymn”); cf. KBo 24.48 iii 5; for this mng. see also the suggestion of Haas, AoF 23:91 n. 54. 
This verb, a loanword from Luwian, is derived from the adjective *šarla/i- “high superior” (attested in the Hittite adj. šarli-, q.v.). It shows both the concrete sense “to lift, remove” and figurative sense “to exalt, praise,” both from “to raise, make high.”
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 226f. (“heben” > “beheben, beseitigen” and > “erheben, erhöhen, verherrlichen”); Laroche, RA 48 (1954) 47 (“sacrifier, consacrer”); idem, FsFriedrich (1959) 291f. (“exalter”), 296; idem, DLL (1959) 86 (“exalter”); Güterbock, AnSt 30 (1980) 44 (mng. 2: “let prevail”); Kellerman, Numen 30 (1983) 275 (“ennobliront”); de Martino, Eothen 4 (1991) 10 n. 39 (“sollevare” > “rimuovere, eliminare”); Singer, Muw.Pr. (1996) 66 (mng. 3); Haas, Or NS 67 (1998) 138f.; Lombardi, SMEA 41 (1999) 224 n. 21.
Cf. šarā, šarlaim(m)i-, šarlamiš-, šarlannai-, šarlatt-, šarlattant-, šarlattašši-, šer.
šarlaim(m)i- adj. (used as epithet of deities); exalted; from MH/MS.
sg. nom. com. (only attested as a toponym/divine name:) HUR.SAGšar-la-i-mi-iš KUB 6.45 ii 16 (Muw. II), HUR.SAGšar-la-im-mi-iš KUB 6.46 ii 57 (Muw. II), KBo 4.10 obv. 28 (NH), Bo 86/299 i 48 (Tudh. IV).
acc. com. šar-la-im-mi-in KUB 1.1 iv 74 (Hatt. III), KUB 27.65 i 5 (NS), KBo 29.82 iii 8, iv 8 (NS), šar-la-i-mi-in KBo 29.99 i 12 (MS), KUB 48.122 iv 8 (NH), šar-la-i-me-en KUB 27.66 ii 22 (NS), šar-la-a-i-mi-in KBo 29.132 rev. 2.
gen. šar-la-i-mi-ia-aš KUB 27.49 iii 11 (NS), šar-la-i-mi-aš KBo 29.65 iv 19 (MS or ENS?), KBo 24.35:5, 11, KBo 20.68 i 7, w. dupl. KBo 14.89 i 2, šar-la-im-mi-ia-aš KBo 29.172:7, šar-la-i<-mi>-aš KUB 54.33 iii 4, cf. HUR.SAGšar-la-a-i-ma-aš KBo 24.36:9.
broken: dšar-la-a-i-m[i(-)…] KBo 17.57 obv. 3.
As epithet of IŠTAR and Zababa: nu–šmaš–(š)an dIŠTAR šar-la-im-mi-in [š]ipanzakanzi “They shall start libating for themselves the exalted IŠTAR” KUB 1.1 iv 74-75 (apol. of Hattušili III), ed. StBoT 24:28f.; EGIR-pa–ma dLAMMA šar-la-i-me-en (var. … -m]i-in) dZA.BA›.BA› TUŠ-aš ekuzi “Afterwards he drinks seated the exalted LAMMA (and) Zababa” KUB 27.66 ii 22 (NS), w. dupl. KBo 29.69:22 (witaššiyaš-fest., MS or ENS?) | it is uncertain whether or not š. also extends to Zababa, who is otherwise never accompanied by š.; nu ANA LÚ.MEŠ BE_L DINGIR.MEŠ–ya LÚ.MEŠ É DINGIR-LIM LÚ.MEŠhūwaššanalaš LÚ.MEŠ É dLAMMA šar-la-i-mi-ia-aš LÚ.MEŠNAR LÚ.MEŠSAGI.A INA GAL dKupilla kuedaniya NAG-na 1-ŠU pianzi “They also give each of the lords of the gods, temple servants, hūwaššanalla-men, priests of the temple of the exalted LAMMA, singers, cup-bearers once in a cup of the god Kupilla to drink” KUB 27.49 iii 10-12 (witaššiyaš-fest., NS); 1 GIŠBANSUR ANA «É» LÚ.MEŠ É dL[AM]MA šar-la-i-mi-aš tianzi “They place one table for the priests of the temple of the exalted LAMMA” KBo 29.65 iv 19 (cult of Huwaššanna, MS or ENS?).
š. is originally the Luw. part. of the v. šarlai-, and matches the Hitt. part. šarlant- as a divine epithet. Except for the gen. sg. of the mountain name, it is attested only as an i-stem in Hitt. contexts. Mount Š. is traditionally identified with the Bolkar Da© southeast of Ere©li. However, Dinçol/Yakar/Taffet, Anatolica 26:13, propose to equate it with the Karaca Da©, west of Ere©li.
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 227; Laroche, FsFriedrich (1959) 293, 296; idem, DLL (1959) 86; del Monte/Tischler, RGTC 6/1 (1978) s.v.; Melchert, CLL (1993) 191; Lombardi, Eothen 9 (1998) 65-84 (dLAMMA š. = HUR.SAGš.); Dinçol/Yakar/Taffet, Anatolica 26 (2000) 13.
Cf. šarlai-.
šarlamiš- n. neut.; glory; from MH/MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-la-mi-iš-ša KUB 15.34 ii 22 (MH/MS), šar-la-mi-iš[(-)…] KUB 32.5 + KUB 32.8 iv 31 (MH?/NS).
ištarna–kan āššiyauwar [ta]kšuwar DINGIR.MEŠ-aš āššiya[uwa]r DINGIR.MEŠ-aš mÏumar DINGIR.MEŠ-aš šar-la-mi-iš-ša antuhšaš šar-l[a-mi-i]š-ša tarhuilātar parā neyantan GIŠTUKUL KUR-yaš miyā[tar] šišduwar DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU-aš GUD.HI.A-aš UDU.HI.A-aš halkiyaš GEŠTIN-aš miyatar piškitten “In the midst (of the land) keep giving love, harmony, divine lov[e], divine kindliness, the glory of the gods (and) the glory of men, power, battle-ready weapon(s), growth (and) prosperity in the country, growth of humans, cattle, sheep, crops, (and) vines” KUB 15.34 ii 20-24 (evocation rit., MH/MS?), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f. (“Erhebung vor den Göttern und Erhebung vor den Menschen”), Trabazo, TextosRel. 590-593 (“altura de ánimo”), tr. ANET 353 (“high spirits in god (and) high spirits in man”) | for [ta]kšuwar see Neu, StBoT 18.17; in broken context […]≠šar±-la-mi-iš[(-)…] KUB 32.5:13 (rit., MH/NS), translit. StBoT 30:120.
In light of the many surrounding neuter abstracts in -ar in KUB 15.34 ii 20-24, Neu, FsNeumann 210 w. n. 23, hesitated to interpret š. as a noun in -eššar with the final -r dropped, and suggested an s-stem noun instead. In this he was followed by Starke, StBoT 31:119, and Melchert, CLL 191. The final -a can either be -a/-ia or due to the Luwian nom.-acc. sg. neut. ending -ša.
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 227; Sturtevant, Gl1 (1931) (“honor??”); Zuntz, Scongiuri (1937) 539; Laroche, FsFriedrich (1959) 292 (“exaltation”); idem, DLL (1959) 86 (šarlami- + -eššar “exaltation”); Neu, FsNeumann (1982) 210 (“Erhabenheit”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 119; Melchert, CLL (1993) 191 (“exaltation”).
Cf. šarlai-.
(SISKUR/SÍSKUR)šarlatta-(SISKUR) n. neut.; 1. exaltation(?), 2. praise offering; from MH/MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. šar-la-at-ta-anSISKUR KUB 17.16 iv 8 (NH).
d.-l. šar-la-at-ti KUB 29.4 ii 26 (MH/NS), SÍSKURšar-la-at-ti KUB 29.4 ii 10 (MH/NS), KBo 8.90 ii (14), 22 (MH/NS), SISKURšar-la-at-ti KUB 29.4 ii 35 (MH/NS), KBo 8.90 ii (14) (MH/NS). 
gen. šar-la-at-ta-aš KUB 39.90:4 (NS), FHG 3 ii 20 (NS), KUB 2.1 iii 12 (Tudh. IV), KBo 29.3 i 6 (NS), šar-la-at!-ta-aš KUB 32.3 rev. 1 (NS), šar-la-a-at-ta-aš KUB 35.18 i 11 (MH/MS). 
pl. nom.-acc. šar-la-at-ta ABoT 25 rev. 11 (MH/MS), IBoT 3.148 iv 48 (NS), SÍSKURšar-la-at-ta KUB 29.4 ii 35 (MH/NS), SISKURšar-la-at-ta KUB 58.73 iii 15 (NS), IBoT 3.148 iv 26, 29 (NS).
Luw. sg. nom.-acc. šar-la-at-ta-an-za KUB 29.4 iii 57 (MH/NS), SISKURšar-la-at-ta-an-za ibid. iv 7. 
broken: šar-la-a-at-[…] KBo 29.6 obv. 5 (ENS), šar-la-at-ta(-)[…] KUB 17.8 iii 2 (pre-NH/NS), šar-la-at-t[a-…] KUB 35.92 rev. 26 (NH), KUB 32.5:11 (MH/NS).
1. exaltation(?): ŠA La≠barna± šar-la-≠at-ta-aš± dLAMMA-≠i± “(offering) to the tutelary deity of exaltation(?) of the Labarna” KUB 2.1 iii 11-12 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, Tudh. IV), ed. McMahon, AS 25:106f., translit. Archi, SMEA 16:110.
2. praise offering — a. general: namma mān peran parā SISKURšar-la-at-ta iyauwanzi hantaittari nu kuitman nāwi ≠kuit±ki DÙ-anzi nu hūdak SISKUR[š]ar-la-≠at-ta kiš±an DÙ-anzi 1 GUD 1 UDU–ya ANA dU ≠DINGIR.MEŠ± LÚ.MEŠ–ya 1 UDU dU hamri 1 UDU ANA [d…] dI!šu “Furthermore, if it is ascertained to perform the praise offerings in advance, then before they do anything (else), they promptly perform the praise offerings in the following way: one ox and one sheep for the Stormgod and the male deities, one sheep for the Stormgod of the hamri-(sanctuary), one sheep for […] (and) for the deity Išu” IBoT 3.148 iv 26-31 (rit. of tracing the paths, NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:230f., ChS I/9:124f.; (“For the king, however, you must take an ox, a sheep, thick bread …”) ≠m±ānn–a–za ANA DINGIR-LIM kuiš (var. kuš!) SISKUR(var. Õ)šar-la-at-ta peran parā iyazi n–at ANA DINGIR-LIM anda UL ueriyantari “And if someone performs praise offerings for the deity beforehand, they (i.e., the things to be offered) will not be called in for the deity” KUB 58.73 iii 14-16 (rit. of tracing the paths, NS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.148 iv 48-50 (NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:230f., ChS I/9:126f., cf. Otten, ZA 65:301 | Beckman, StBoT 29:169, 295 interprets the form šarlatta as an uninflected pl. acc. com., and cites ku-uš šar-la-at-ta in IBoT 3.148 iv 48 in support. However, as ku-iš in the dupl. KUB 58.73 iii 15 shows, ku-uš is just a scribal or copyist’s error; nu kuiš DINGIR-LUM ÚŠ-ni šer SI≈SÁ-ri nu–šši LUGAL-uš KARAŠ.HI.A–ya šar-la-at-ta-anSISKUR pianzi kuit LUGAL-i ANA B´L¨HI.A KARAŠ UGULA LÚ.MEŠ Lˆ[M] ZI-za nu apāt pianzi “The king and the troops give a praise offering to whatever deity is ascertained in connection with the plague. Whatever the king, the commanders of the army and the chiefs of a thousand wish (to give), that they give” KUB 17.16 iv 6-10 (incant., NH), cf. Beal, in Ancient Magic and Ritual Power 73; [mahhan(?)–m]a–šši [apË]l ŠA DINGIR-LIM šar-la-at-ta keldiya[–y]a peran ≠nu–za–kan± [h]ūman [iyaz]i “[B]ut [when(?)] the praise [a]nd well-being( offerings) of [tha]t deity are before her, then [a]ll (this) she [doe]s” (If for her certain offerings of the šinapši-house are established, then these things she performs as well) KBo 17.65 rev. 14-15 + ABoT 25 rev. 11 (rit. “when a woman conceives,” MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:140f.; 1 huštit wahnuwanzi EGIR!-ŠU–ma šehelliy[aš] uidār papparšanzi namma šar-la-at-ta(-)[…] “First(?) they shake (it) with h.(-mineral). Next they sprinkle waters [of] purification. Then [they perform(?)] the praise (offerings)” KUB 17.8 iii 1-2 (incantation rit., pre-NH/NS), cf. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:42, Haas, AoF 23:92, both restoring šar-la-at-ta-[an i-¥a-an-zi]; SISKURzūrkiya<š?> SISKURšar-la-at-ta-an-za–ya NU.GÁL nu–za ≠EN.SISKUR± arha paizzi “There is no blood offering and praise offering, and the sacrificer leaves” KUB 29.4 iv 6-7 (dividing the Goddess of the Night, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 46:294 (“praise-ritual”), Schw.Gotth. 28f., tr. Collins, CoS 1:176.
b. š.-offering mentioned with its specific sacrificial items: 5 NINDA.SIG.MEŠ 3 NINDAmūlatiš ŠA \ UPNI 1 NAMMANTUM GEŠTIN 1 UDU ANA SÍSKURšar-la-at-ti danzi “Five thin breads, three mūlati-breads of half an UPNU-measure, one NAMMANTUM-measure of wine, one sheep they take for the praise offering” KUB 29.4 ii 9-10 (dividing the Goddess of the Night, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 46:280, Schw.Gotth. 14f, tr. Collins, CoS 1:174; (They take one mūlati-bread for the dupšahi-offering) āšzi–ma–kan kuiš 1 NINDAmūlatiš n–an EGIR SISKURdupšahitÏ (var. dupšāhi) šar-la-at-ti danzi “but they take back again for the dupšahi- (and) praise offering the one mūlati-bread which remains” KUB 29.4 ii 25-26, w. dupl. KBo 8.90 ii 13-14 (MH/NS), ed. StBoT 46:281f., Schw.Gotth. 16f., tr. Collins, CoS 1:175; n–aš EGIR SÍSKURšar-la-at-ti tiyaz[i] nu SISKURšar-la-at-ta IŠTU UDU šipandanzi “He (i.e., the sacrificer) tends to the praise offering, and they make the praise offerings with a sheep” KUB 29.4 ii 35-36, w. dupl. KBo 8.90 ii 22-23, ed. StBoT 46:283, Schw.Gotth. 16-19, tr. Collins, CoS 1:175; nu SISKURzurkiyaš IŠTU MÁŠ.TUR šipandanzi EGIR–ŠU–ma šar-la-at-ta-an-za IŠTU SILA› šipandanzi “They make the blood offering with a kid, but afterwards they make the praise offering with a lamb” KUB 29.4 iii 56-57, ed. StBoT 46:293, Schw.Gotth. 26f., tr. Collins, CoS 1:176 | due to the context šarlattanza is not a Hittite sg. nom., but a Luwian nom.-acc. neut. in -ša/-za; cf. Melchert, Luwians 186, 183. 
c. offerings specified as intended for š.-offerings — 1' “sheep” mentioned among the sacrificial animals: [… UDU.HI.A U 1 MÁŠ.GAL ŠÀ-B]A 2 UDU.HI.A aniuraš BABBAR GEﬂ–ya / [2 UDU.HI.A ikkunattaš 1] UDU šar-la-at-ta-aš (par. šar-la-a-at-ta-aš) 1 UDU.SÍG+MUNUS tÏtanta[š] “[… sheep and one billy goat. Amon]g (them) two sheep of the ritual (that are) white and black, [two sheep of i., one] sheep of the praise offering, one ewe of the suckli[ng( offering)]” KBo 29.3 i 5-6 (šalli aniur rit., NS), w. par. KUB 35.18 i 9-11 (MH/MS), translit. StBoT 30:99, 91 | for the meaning of titant- here see Tischler, HEG 3:384: “säugend,” restoring ti-i-ta-an-ta[-an]; cf. also KUB 32.5:11 (rit., MH/NS), translit. StBoT 30:120. 
2' “bread-loaf” offered to the god: […]x NINDA.GUR›.RA šar-la-at-ta-aš (var. ŠA x[…]) dāi / […]x-kan ANA DINGIR-LIM menahhanda (var. menahhanta) Ëpz[i] / […] arha paršiyazzi “He (i.e., the priest) takes […] bread-loaf of the praise offering, [and] hold[s] it toward the deity. [And] breaks off [the bread-loaf(?)]” KUB 39.90:4-6 (rit. for IŠTAR-Pirinkir, NS), w. dupl. KBo 7.29 ii? 2-3 (NS).
The assumption of a -t-stem (šarlatt-) or -nt-stem (šarlattant-) in the earlier days of Hittitology is no longer called for. All Hittite and Luwian attestations point to an originally Luwian neut. action noun in -tta- (cf. Starke, StBoT 31:119, 537, Melchert, CLL 191).
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 227 (*šarlat- adj. “Lob-, Dank-,” subst. “Lob, Dank”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (šarlatt- “Lob, Lobes-erhebung(?); Dank(?)”; SISKUR.SISKUR šarlattant- “Lobes-, Dankopfer(?)”); Laroche, FsFriedrich (1959) 293f., 296; idem, DLL (1959) 86; Kronasser, Schw.Gotth. (1963) 47f.; Haas/Wilhelm AOATS 3 (1974) 42, 125; Otten, ZA 65 (1975) 301 (“Anrufungs-Opfer”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 169, 295 (“encomium(-offering)”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 119, 537, 539 (“Erhebung, Lobpreis”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 191 (“exaltation, worship”); Haas, AoF 23 (1996) 91 n. 54 (“Lösungs-ritual”); Rieken, StBoT 44 (1999) 125f. w. n. 576 (“Erhebung, Lobpreis”). 
Cf. šarlai-.
[šarlattant-] n. com.; praise offering KUB 29.4 iii 57, iv 7 (HW 186) does not exist. šarlattanza is the Luw. nom.-acc. sg. neut. of šarlatta- q.v. 
šarlat(t)ašši- Luw. genitival adj.; related to, of praise/exaltation; from MH/MS.† 
sg. nom. com. šar-la-da-aš-ši-iš KBo 12.60:6 (NS), šar-la-ad-da-aš-ši-iš KUB 17.12 iii 23 (NH), šar-≠la±-at-ta-aš-š[i-iš] KUB 2.1 iv 2 (Tudh. IV), [šar-la-at-ta]-aš-ši-iš KUB 44.16 iv? 6 (Tudh. IV).
acc. com. [šar-la-a]t-ta-aš-ši-in KUB 32.8 iv 3 (MH/NS), ≠šar±-la-at-ta-aš-≠ši-in± KBo 9.143 obv. 5 (MH/MS), [šar-l]a-a-at-t[a-aš-ši-in] KUB 35.14 i 18.
a. describing a deity: d¸laš walliy[a(nnaš)] d¸laš šar-≠la±-at-ta-aš-š[(i-iš)] / d¸laš ŠA GIŠBAN d¸l≠a±[(š)] ŠA KUŠMÁ.URU.URUﬁ “The deity ¸la of glo[r]y, ¸la of praise, ¸la of the bow, ¸la of the quiver, (etc.)” KUB 2.1 iv 1-4 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 44.16 iv? 5-7, ed. McMahon, AS 25:110f., translit. Archi, SMEA 16:111; 1 NINDAtuhurai 1 UZUdanh[ašti ŠA Labarna] / šar-la-da-aš-ši-iš dLAM[MA-i] “One tuhurai-bread, one double [bone(?) to] the Tutel[ary] Deity of praise [of the Labarna]” KBo 12.60:5-6 (fest., NS), ed. McMahon, AS 25:124f. | note the failure of concord: one expects *šar-la-da-aš-ši (or: -aš-ša-an) dLAM[MA-i].
b. describing offerings: (“[After]wards, he breaks three thick breads for the deity”:) [1 NINDA.G]UR›.RA šar-la-ad-da-aš-ši-iš / [1 NINDA.GU]R›.RA pihaddaššiš / [1 NINDA.GUR›.R]A kuwanzuwa!naššiš “[One t]hick [bread] of exaltation, [one th]ick [bread] of splendor(?), (and) [one thic]k [bread] of heaviness(?)” KUB 17.12 iii 23-25 (rit., NS), ed. AlHeth 169. 
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 227 (“zum Dank gehörig”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (“zum Lobe (Danke) gehörig”); Laroche, FsFriedrich (1959) 293, 296; idem, DLL (1959) 86; Melchert, CLL (1993) 191. 
Cf. šarlai-, šarlatta-.
NA›šarlawiti- n. com.; (a type of stone or object made of stone); from MS.†
sg. acc. NA›šar-la-a-ú-i-ti-in KBo 21.21 ii (12), 15; unclear [N]A›šar-la-ú-i-t[i(-)…] ibid. 7.
Only in broken context: [… NA›]šar-la-a-ú-i-ti-i[n …] / [… NINDA.Ì].E.DÉ.A tepu mem[al …] / […-]i § […] NA›šar-la-a-ú-i-ti-i[n … ] / [… p]aršiya n–an–ša[n …] / [… -]ir NINDA.Ì.E.DÉ.A mem[al …] KBo 21.21 ii 12-17 (rit., MS), cf. StBoT 19:37; mahhan NA›ša[r-lawiti-…] KBo 7.52 obv.? 4 (rit., NS).
šarli- adj.; upper(most), superior; from MH/NS.†
sg. acc. com. NINDAšar-li-in-n(a) VBoT 24 iii 24 (MH/NS), šar!-li-in HT 35 rev. 5 (NS).
pl. nom.-acc. neut. šar-li-ia VBoT 24 iii 8 (MH/NS).
[nu] EN.SISKUR NA›.ARAﬁ šar(over erasure)-li-in EGIR-pa parza [mallizzi/mallai] “The worshiper [mills?] the upper millstone backwards” HT 35 rev. 5 (rit., NS), ed. Tunn. 93 (reading li-li-in and relating this to liliwahh- etc. and so translating “moving”) | for the restoration cf. [EGI]R-pa parza malla!nun in line 7; cf. malla/i- d and malk- 2, and eliminate the possibility of reading here āppa parza malk- suggested s.v. paršza a 2'; (“One soldier-bread, one wageššar-bread, seven small thin breads(?)”) DUGišnuraš–a–kan šūniyanzi n–ašta šar-li-ia šer arha dahhi n–an NINDA-an iyami “they put (the dough for them) in the kneading troughs. I take away from on top the upper (pieces) and make it into a (šarli-)bread” VBoT 24 iii 7-9 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112f. (“spoon”); (“I put a table in the inner chamber. I hang a kureššar-cloth down from (it)”) šer–ma–ššan NINDA.ÉRIN.MEŠ NINDAwageššar NINDA šar-li-in-na tehhi “I put soldier-bread, wageššar-bread, and “top(?)”-bread (bread made from the pieces taken from on top of the kneading trough) on top (of it)” VBoT 24 iii 21-24 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS)  | for a cloth hanging down from a table compare the two altars depicted on the Fraktin relief. 
Sturtevant/Bechtel, Chrest. (1935) 123 (“spoon, ‘spoon(?) loaf’ > šarla(e)-/šarliya”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 186 (“‘Teigfetzen(??)’ (und daraus gemachtes Brot)”); Laroche, FsFriedrich (1959) 295f. (“supérieur” (qualité), related to šarlai- and Hierogl. SUPER+ra/i-li (*sar(a)li-) = Phoenician ºdr “éminent, majestueux”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 479 (rejects Laroche’s postulating of an adj. šarla/i-); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 181f. (rejects Friedrich’s tr., skeptical of Sturtevant’s); Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 16 (“hervorragend” = Luw. adj.); Hawkins, AnSt 25 (1975) 127, 149; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 366 n. 1311, 398 n. 1434; Hawkins, CHLI I/1 (2000) 65.
Cf. šarlai-.
šarmiya- A n. com.; (a wild animal); MH.†
sg. nom. šar-mi-ia-aš HKM 48 obv. 12 (MH/MS); acc.? šar-me-an KUB 8.10 rev. 6; pl. acc.? […]ša[r?]-mi-u[š ] HKM 83 rev. 2.
(“They willingly gathered birds for us. §”) nu–nnaš–kan UR.MAH paršanaš šar-mi-ia-aš kūralašš–a anda UL appanteš “but lion, leopard, š. and kūrala- were not caught for us” HKM 48:11-13 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 208f. (differently), Hoffner, FsPuhvel 6; here? […] / anda šar-me-an […] KUB 8.10 rev. 6 (apodosis of lunar eclipse omen, NS), ed. HBM 326, translit. DPS 12:78
Alp, HBM (1991) 326-332 (“dog”); Hoffner, FsPuhvel (1997) 11f. (“a wild animal in the same general category as the lion and the leopard”); Pecchioli Daddi, AoF 27 (2000) 349f. (“cane selvatico, non addomesticato,” but possibly also denoting a wild boar vel sim.).
Cf. LÚšarmi/e-. 
LÚšarmeya- B n. com.; (a professional designation); from MH?/NS.†
sg. nom. LÚšar-me-ia-aš VBoT 108 iv 8 (NH), LÚšar-mi-ia-aš KUB 13.34 iv 21 (NH). 
pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠšar-me-e-eš KUB 51.57 obv. 27 (MH?/NS), LÚ.MEŠšar-mi-e!-eš IBoT 1.29 obv. 23 (MH?/MS?), LÚ.MEŠšar-mi-i-≠e±-[eš] KBo 30.129 ii? 8 (NS); acc. LÚšar-me-u-uš Bo 5027:7 (HBM 328); gen. LÚ.MEŠšar-mi-ia-aš VS 28.7 i 11 (NH).
pl. unclear LÚ.MEŠšar(coll.)-me-ia-aš KUB 38.29 obv. 2 (NH).
uncertain [… ša]r(?)-mi-ia-aš KUB 10.93 i 9 (NS), LÚšar-m[e-…] Bo 5027:6 (HBM 328).
nu–kan LÚ.MEŠ URUHatti hūma[nteš] LÚ.MEŠUGULA LˆMTIM GAL LÚ.MEŠASIR¨TIM […?] GAL LÚ.MEŠšar-mi-ia-aš GAL LÚ.MEŠ KÁ.GAL UR.GI‡ […?] IŠTU IGI.DU°.A.HI.A-TIM hinkanzi “All the men of Hatti, the overseers of a thousand, the chief of the captives(?), the chief of the š.-men, the chief of the men of the dog gate(?) bow with presents. (They seat them and give them šarāma-bread and (something) to drink)” VS 28.7 i 9-12 (fest., NH/ENS), ed. StBoT 18:115f., Pecchioli Daddi, AoF 27:345, 347, Groddek, Hethitica 15:87f., 82, translit. Güterbock, RAI 18:96 n. 15; (“When the prince comes to the kitchen to eat, twelve priests sit before him: the priest of … (etc.), one scepter-bearer, one spearman, one […, two?] courtyard-sweepers”) 2 LÚ.MEŠšar-mi-e!-eš (dupls. LÚ.MEŠšar-me-e-eš) “two š.-men (one cupbearer, one waiter, one baker, one crier(?), one smith of the deity, three men of the temple, (and) one farmer. These sit before the prince to eat)” IBoT 1.29 obv. 23 (procreation fest., MH?/MS?), w. dupls. KUB 51.57 obv. 27 (NS), Bo 3228:12, ed. HBM 329f.; nu ANA LÚSANGA dLAMMA LÚ.MEŠtahiya[liyaš] / [ANA(?) LÚ.MEŠša]r?-mi-ia-aš LÚ.MEŠKISAL.LUH EN.É.GAL / [o-o] ANA MUNUS URUHatti MUNUSENSI kalliššū[wanzi] / [u]ieanzi “When they […] calling to the priest of LAMMA, to the barbers(?), to the š.-men, to the courtyard-sweepers (of?) the ‘master-of-the-house’ [and?] to the Hittite-woman, the seeress. (They come and sit down to eat)” KUB 10.93 i 8-11 (fest., NS), ed. AS 25:224f.; cf. KBo 30.129 ii? 8 (NS), ed. HBM 330f., translit. DBH 2:186; […DU]GKA.DÙ LÚ.MEŠšar-me-ia-aš […] KUB 38.29 obv. 2 (cult inv., NH), ed. HBM 327, cf. Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:189; § 1 šittar KÙ.BABBAR[ …] / LÚšar-me-ia-aš […] § “One silver šittar […] š.-man […]” VBoT 108 iv 7-8 (inv. of cult objects, NH), ed. HBM 328; [µPN] LÚšar-mi-ia-aš KUB 13.34 iv 21 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:40f. (no tr.).
Given šarmiya- A as a wild animal, Alp, HBM 326-332, tentatively equated LÚš. with LÚ UR.GI‡ and was followed by Pecchioli Daddi, AoF 27:349f., who compares Italian “mastino,” indicating both the dog and a person acting as a watchdog. However, Hoffner, FsPuhvel 11f., shows that Alp’s proposal is not compelling and perhaps even unlikely in view of VS 28.7 i 11, where the š.-men occur right next to the “chief of the men of the dog gate.” The relation of the LÚš. to šarmiya- A therefore remains obscure.
Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 146f.; Alp, HBM (1991) 326-332 (LÚš. = LÚ UR.GI‡); Hoffner, FsPuhvel (1997) 11f.; Pecchioli Daddi, AoF 27 (2000) 349f.; Groddek, Hethitica 15 (2002) 83 (probably not “dog(man)”).
Cf. šarmiya- A.
UZUšarnanta n., collec.; afterbirth(?), wr. syll. and UZUŠALˆTU; NH.† 
collec. UZUšar-na-an-ta KUB 5.5 i 21, iv 13 (NH).
a. wr. syll.: SILA›.HI.A kuit UZUšar-na-an-ta GAtaraškann–a karšer n–at šakuwaššar SUM-anzi GAM-ann–a zankilatar NINDA KAŠ SUM-anzi “Because they omitted (karš-) the (giving of) lambs, afterbirth(?) and taraškan-milk, they will give them in full. Alongside they will give bread and beer as a penalty” KUB 5.5 i 21-23 (oracle question, NH); cf. [SIL]A› UZUšar-na-an-ta GAtarašgann–a kuit [MU?.I]M!.MA(coll. W) karšer n–aš šakuwaššarit SUM-anzi [GAM-a]nn–a 1 SILA› zankilanni SUM-anzi “Because [the preced]ing(?) [year] they omitted the (giving of) [lam]b(s)(?), afterbirth(?) and taraškan-milk, shall they give them in full, and [alo]ng with them give one lamb as a penalty?” ibid. iv 13-15.
b. wr. Akkadographically: LÚA.ÍL–wa NU.GÁL nu–w[a G]IDIM.MEŠ INA É DU⁄‚.Ú[S.S]A UL pË harkanzi UZUHAKKURR¸TU–wa UZUŠA-LI-TÙ GA NINDA GIBIL.MEŠ–ya kāš MU.3.KAM kuit–at karšanteš EZEN› GA RA-naš EZEN šeliašš–a kāš MU.3.KAM kuit–at karšanteš GIDIM.MEŠ–za kËdaš waškuwaš šer TUKU-wanteš “There is no water carrier. They do not make presentations to the ghosts in the bath house. (As for) the HAKKURR¸TU and afterbirth, milk, and new breads — this is year three that they have been omitted — the festival of churning milk and the festival of sheaves. This is year three that they have been omitted. Are you ghosts angry on account of these misdeeds?” KUB 18.16 ii 1-6 (oracle question, NH); nu mān hašannaš mËhūni DINGIR-LIM-ni kuedanikki šaklāiš nu–šši naššu AMAR SILA› MÁŠ.TUR našma UZUŠA-LI-TEMEŠ HAK[KUR]R¸TEMEŠ pË harteni n–at lË ištantanuškatteni mËhūnaš–at mehuni pË harten “And when at the time of (domestic animals’) giving birth, some deity has a prerogative (i.e., is owed some offering), and you present to him/her either a calf, lamb or goat kid, or afterbirth (and) HAKKUR¸TU, do not delay them, present them on time” KUB 13.4 iv 35-38, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 80f. (no tr.), tr. McMahon, CoS 1:221 (no tr.); nu EN K[UR?]-TI x[-x SIL]A› 1(?) MAŠ.TUR UZUŠA-LI-T[Ù UZUHAKKURR¸TU udai(?)] nu ANA dU URUAtalhaziya EZEN› nu[-… iyazi(?)] SILA› MÁŠ.TUR–kan ANA dU URUAtalhaz[iya … šipanti] n–aš palzahanzi n–aš P¸NI DINGIR-LIM ŠALM[¨TIM …] tianzi GAM-an–ma UZUŠA-LI-TÙ UZUHA[KKURR¸TU \ BÁN ZÍD.DA 1 DUGhūpparaš KAŠ ZAG.GAR.RA-ni (coll. photo) [pianzi(?)] “And the lord of the district [brings(?) one(?) lam]b(?), one(?) goat kid, afterbirt[h, HAKKURR¸TU …], [performs] the festival of nu[-…] for the Stormgod of Atalhaziya, and [dedicates] a lamb (and ) goat kid to the Stormgod of Atalhaz[iya …], they stretch them (i.e., the young animals) out (on a flat surface) and place them in front of the deity […] whol[e]. Along with (them) [they give(?)] afterbirth and HAKKURR¸TU, one half BÁN of flour, (and) one huppar-vessel of beer on the offering table” KBo 22.222 iii 1-6.
Von Brandenstein, OrNS 8 (1939) 72 n. 2 (ŠALˆTU = SILˆTU/ŠILˆTU); Hoffner, FsLebrun (2004) 337-358 (šarnanta = ŠALˆTU).
šarnik- see šarni(n)k-.
šarnikzil- n. com. and neut.; compensation, compensatory damages, replacement; from OH/OS.
sg. nom. com. šar-ni-ik-zi-il KBo 6.2 i 47, ii 11, 53 (OS), KBo 6.3 i 55, ii 33 (OH/NS), KBo 6.26 i 27 (OH/NS), šar-ni-ik-<zi->il KUB 22.70 obv. 77 (NH), šar-ni-ik-ze-el KUB 14.8 rev. 30 (Murš. II), KUB 46.42 iv 4 (NS), šar-ni-ik-zi-i-il KBo 6.3 iii 50 (OH/NS).
nom.-acc. neut. šar-ni-ik-zi-il KUB 36.127 rev. 12 (MH/MS), KUB 13.9 ii 3 (MH/NS), šar-ni-ik-ze-el KUB 13.9 ii 9, 17 (MH/NS), KUB 14.8 rev. 35 (Murš. II), KUB 22.70 obv. (45), rev. 7, 8, 20, 29 (NH), KBo 2.6 i 34, iii 45 (NH), KUB 16.77 iii 19 (NH). 
gen. šar-ni-ik-zi-la-aš KUB 13.35 ii 7 (NH), KUB 22.70 rev. 13 (NH), KUB 46.42 iv 7 (NS). 
dat.-loc. šar?-ni!-ik-zi-li KBo 44.223 rev.? 6 (NH).
abl. šar-ni-ik-zi-la-az KUB 14.14 rev. 13 (Murš. II). 
pl. acc. com. [ša]r-ni-ik-zi-lu-uš KUB 46.42 iv 6 (NS), KUB 46.38 i 7, 10 (NH); nom.-acc. neut. [šar-]ni-ik-ze!-elMEŠ KUB 50.6 iii 50 (NH), [šar-ni-]ik-ze-elHI.A 10/v:4 (NH) (van den Hout, Purity 198).
Following Melchert in Carruba/Meid, Anatolisch 263-274, š. was originally com. gender and synchronically reinterpreted as neut. The earliest datable example for the latter is KUB 36.127 rev. 12 (MH/MS). In view of mān šarnikzel kuiš KUB 14.8 rev. 30 and šarnikzel kuitki ibid. 35 both genders could be used in the same text.
a. in legal texts: mān Ëšhanašš–a kuiški šar-ni-ik-zi-il piyan harzi nu–z–(š)ta SAG.DU–SU wašta naššu A.ŠÀ-LAM našma LÚ.U⁄·.LU n–ašta parā UL kuiški tarnai mān–aš–za QADU DAM.MEŠ–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU dān harzi n–an–ši–šta parā tarnai mān taizzilašš–a kuiški šar-ni-ik-ze-el piyan harzi nu mān A.ŠÀ n–ašta parā UL tarnanzi mān ÌR–ma dayat n–an taiazzilanni harzi n–aš mān tašuwahhanza n–an–ši–šta parā UL tarnanzi mān–aš UL tašuwahhanza n–an–ši–šta parā tarnanzi takku ELLUM–ma kuiški daiyazi nu daiyazilaš šar-ni-ik-ze-el […] “And if somebody has given compensation for murder, either a field or person(s) — and (thereby) has redeemed his own person — nobody shall hand him over. If he (i.e., the injured party) has taken them (i.e., the field or person(s)) together with his (i.e., the offender’s) wives (and) children, he (i.e., the injured party) shall hand them (i.e., the wives and children) to him (i.e., the offender). And if somebody has given compensation for theft and if it is a field, they shall not hand (him, i.e., the offender) over. But if an unfree person has stolen and he (i.e., the injured party) holds him for theft, if he has been blinded, they shall not hand him over to him. If he has not been blinded, they shall hand him over to him. § If some free person steals, and [has given …] compensation for the theft […]” KUB 13.9 ii 3-17 (protocol, MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 447, 449f., Freydank, ArOr 38:258f., Westbrook/Woodard, JAOS 110:643, Catsanicos, Vocab.Faute 14f. (all differently), tr. Haase, THR 56f. (differently), de Martino/Imparati, ICH 3:395-400 | the particle sequence –z–šta with the verb waš- “to buy, redeem” is exceptional; for the use of either -kan or -za with this verb cf. Neu, WO 11:78; takku ÌR LÚ URULūiumnaš IŠTU KUR URULūiyaz kuiški tāiezzi n–an ANA KUR URUHatti uwatezzi išhaš–šiš–an ganešzi nu–zza ÌR–SU–pat dāi šar-ni-ik-zi-≠il± NU.GÁL “If anyone steals the slave of a Luwian from the land of Luwiya and brings him to Hatti, and (if afterwards) his owner recognizes him, he shall take only his slave; there shall be no compensation” KBo 6.2 i 45-47 (Laws § 21, OS), ed. LH 31; takku MUNUS-an kuiški pittinuzzi n[u–kan šard]Ïeš āppanda pā[n]z[i] takku 3 LÚ.MEŠ na[šma] 2 LÚ.MEŠ ak[(kanzi)] šar-ni-ik-zi-il NU.GÁL “If someone elopes with a woman and a group of ‘helpers’ goes after them — if three or two men are killed (in the ensuing struggle), there shall be no compensation” KBo 6.2 ii 10-12 (Laws § 37, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 29-30 (OH/NS), ed. LH 44; [takk]u LÚ[h]ipparaš tāiezzi šar-ni-ik-zi-il NU.GÁL “[I]f a [h]ippara-man steals, there shall be no compensation” KBo 6.2 ii 53 (Laws § 49, OS), ed. LH 59f.; takku MÁŠ.GAL enandan takku DÀRA.MAŠ annanuhhan takku UDU.KUR.RA enandan kuiški dāiezzi mahhan ŠA MÁŠ.GAL šar-ni-ik-zi-i-il (var. šar-ni-ik-ze-el) apËll–a QA_TAMMA–pat “If anyone steals a trained billy goat or a tamed(?)/trained(?) mountain goat or a trained wild sheep, (their) compensation shall be the same as the one of a billy goat” KBo 6.3 iii 49-50 (Laws § 65, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.2 iii 44-46 (OS), KBo 6.8:3-5 (NS), ed. LH 75f. | for enant- and annanuhhant- see LH 193; takku UR.GI‡-aš Ì ŠAH karāpi B[E_]L Ì uimiya<zi> n–an–kan kuenzi n–ašta Ì-an šarhuwantaz–šet K[A]R-izzi šar-ni-ik-zi-il (var. [šar-ni-i]k-zi-el) NU.GÁL “If a dog devours pig’s lard, and the owner of the lard finds (it) and kills it and re[triev]es the lard from its stomach, there is no compensation (for the dog)” KBo 6.3 iv 27-28 (Laws § 90, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.7:11-14 (NS), ed. LH 90; takku šuppala–ššet kuËlqa šieuniahta t–at parkunuzi n–at arha pennāi išuwanalli–ma–kan išuwan dāi ari–šši–ma–at UL tezzi LÚarašš–a UL šakki šuppala–ššet pennāi n–at aki šar-ni-ik-zi-il (var. [šar-ni-ik]-ze-el) “If someone’s animals are smitten (with disease) by a god and he (ritually) purifies them and drives them back home, and he puts the refuse(?) (from the ritual) on a refuse dump, but he does not tell his colleague about it, (so that) the colleague doesn’t know and drives his animals (near that dump), and they die, there shall be compensation” KBo 6.26 i 22-27 (Laws § 163, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 31.66 iv 6 (NS), ed. LH 130f., cf. Güterbock, JCS 15:70f.; (The defendant says: I am supposed to distribute mules from the palace among various people. I keep those of the palace for myself and replace them with mules of my own or of someone else) tamËdani–ma–wa kuedani ANŠE.GÌR.NUN.NA šar-ni-ik-ze-la-aš EGIR-pa pehhi nu–wa–šmaš SIGﬁ-anduš UL–pat pehhi “But to whatever other person I give a mule as (lit. of) compensation, I never give good ones to them” KUB 13.35 ii 5-8 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:6f. (“Ersatz-Maulesel”).
b. in prayers: našma–kan mān [amm]uk–ma kuitki šar-ni-ik-ze-el hanti išhiyattËni [n–a]t–mu tešhaz memiešten nu–šmaš–at pehhi “Or if you want to impose some separate (i.e., special) compensation upon [m]e, tell me about it by means of a dream, and I will give it to you” KUB 14.8 rev. 34-36 (PP2), ed. Götze, KlF 1:216f. (“besonders eine Entschädigung”), Lebrun, Hymnes 209, 214 (“réparation”), tr. Hittite Prayers 60 (“some additional restitution”); ammu[k–m]a šumāš ANA DINGIR.MEŠ EN.MEŠ–Y[A] šar-ni-ik-ze-el maškann–a KUR-e Ú[Š?-n]i šer šarninkiškimi “But I will compensate you, O gods, my lords, with compensation and a propitiatory gift for the land concerning the p[lag]ue(?)” KUB 14.14 rev. 7-8 (PP1), ed. Götze, KlF 1:172f., Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 201, tr. Hittite Prayers 63; n–at ammuqq–a IŠTU É-TI–YA šar-ni-ik-zi-la-az maškanna[z–iya] šarnenkiškimi “I too will begin to make compensation for it (i.e., the bloodguilt for Tudhaliya) with compensation and a propitiatory gift from my own household” KUB 14.14 rev. 13-14 (PP1), ed. Götze, KlF 1:172f., Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 201, CHD s. v. maškan (“together with my household”), tr. Hittite Prayers 63. 
c. in divination texts: nu–war–an ANA DINGIR-LIM kuwapi pianzi nu–wa–šši–šan šar-ni-ik-ze-el 2 MUNUS.MEŠ anda tiyandu “When they give her (i.e., Pattiya) to the deity, let two women enter (i.e., be included) with her as compensation” KUB 22.70 obv. 45 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth. 6:68f.; ƒPattiyaš kuit ANA KIN É.GAL-LIM parā šali[kta] nu apadda šer šar-ni-ik-<zi->il SI≈SÁ-at “Since Pattiya intrud[ed] into the business of the palace, therefore compensation has been determined by oracle” KUB 22.70 obv. 76-77, ed. THeth. 6:78f., cf. šalik(i)- 4 c; cf. ibid. rev. 8, 13, 29; nu mān DINGIR-LIM apadda šer šar-ni-ik-ze-el UL kuitki šanhta “and if you, O god, have sought no compensation on that account” KUB 22.70 rev. 7, ed. Ünal, 82f.; dUTU-ŠI–ya–z parkunuzzi šar-ni-ik-ze-el-la (var. [šar-ni]-ik-ze-elHI.A) ŠA É-TI ME-anzi nu kuit dammeli pedi tianzi kuit–ma ANA GIDIM SUM-anzi “His Majesty will purify himself and they will take the compensation for (his) house. They will place some of it in an uncultivated place, and they will give some of it to the deceased” KBo 2.6 i 34-36 (oracle question, NH), w. summary 10/v:4-5, ed. van den Hout, Purity 198f.; cf. ibid. iii 42-46; šar-ni-ik-ze-el ANA GIDIM SUM-anzi ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URUHalpa–ya šar-ni-ik-ze-el šaknuwandaza parkuwayaza SUM-anzi “And they will give compensation to the deceased, and they will give compensation from the unclean (and) the clean to the deities of Aleppo” KUB 22.35 iii 12-15 (oracle question, NH), and par. KUB 52.92 iv 4-5, ed. van den Hout, AoF 25:70f. and Purity 192f., cf. also parkui- A 2 e. 
d. in rituals: (Someone makes wooden images of a man and a woman and a city of earthenware with silver and gold) 1 GUD 1 UDU šar-ni-ik-ze-el EG[IR-pa m]aniyahhūwaš § [ …U]RU-LUM IŒŒI GAM-an handanzi nu–kan [GA]L? GIR›?.HI.A KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI […–]kan ANA URU-LIM IŒŒI anda dāi [ša]r-ni-ik-zi-lu-uš-š–a–kan [… d]āi GUD–ya–šmaš UDU šar-ni-ik-zi-≠la±-aš EGIR-pa maniyahzi “One ox (and) one sheep for delivery as compensation. § They prepare together with [… a c]ity of wood and baked clay(?) cu]ps (with?) silver (and) gold […] On the city of wood he places […] and as [c]ompensations he [p]laces on the [… for the …-s] and to them he delivers the ox (and) sheep of compensation” KUB 46.42 iv 4-7 (rit., NH).
Goetze, KlF 1 (1930) 190f.; Haase, Beobachtungen (1995) 24f.
Cf. šarnikzileške-, šarni(n)k-.
šarnikzileške- v.; to pay/make compensation, make amends(?); NH.†
imperf. pres. sg. 1 šar-ni-ik-zi-!le-e-eš-ki-m[i] KUB 14.14 rev. 20 (Murš. II).
nu–za kāša ANA KUR-TI hingani šer šu[m]Ëš ANA DINGIR.MEŠ [EN.H]I.A–YA maškan peškimi šar-ni-ik-zi-!le-e-eš-ki-m[i n]u–šmaš maškan [šarni]kzell–a šarnin[k]eškimi “I am just now giving to you, the gods, my [lord]s, a gift for the country on account of the plague. I will start paying compensation and I will start making to you a propitiatory gift and [compe]nsation” KUB 14.14 rev. 19-21 (PP1, Murš. II), ed. Goetze, KlF 1:174f.
Goetze, KlF 1 (1930) 198. 
Cf. šarni(n)k-, šarnikzel-.
šarni(n)k- v.; to compensate, make/pay compensation for, replace, make restitution for, make up for, make good (claims); from OH/OS.
pres. sg. 1 šar-ni-ik-mi KBo 6.2 iv 48 (OS), KBo 6.3 iv 46 (OH/NS), KUB 14.4 iii 27 (Murš. II), IBoT 3.122:8 (Murš. III), KUB 31.58 rev. 10 (Hatt. III), KBo 12.58 rev. 7 (Tudh. IV), KUB 26.69 viii 6 (NS); sg. 3 šar-ni-ik-zi KBo 6.2 i 5 (OS), KUB 36.127 rev. 14 (MH/MS), KUB 8.81 iii 5, 6 (MH/MS), KUB 13.7 i 13 (MH/NS), KBo 27.16 obv. 7 (MH/NS), KUB 13.35 ii 44 (Hatt. III), KBo 14.21 i 37 (NH), KUB 39.54 rev.? 5 (NS).
pl. 1 šar-ni-in-ku-e-ni KUB 22.57 obv. 4 (NH), šar-ni-in-ku-u-e-[ni] KBo 24.123 obv.? 2 (NS); pl. 2 šar-ni-ik-te-ni KUB 26.19 ii 26 (MH/MS), KUB 26.40:(108) (MH/MS), KUB 13.4 iv 31 (pre-NH/NS); pl. 3 šar-ni-in-kán-zi KBo 11.32 obv. 14 (OH/NS), KUB 13.9 iii 10 (MH/NS), KUB 16.39 ii 15, 16 (NH), šar-né-en-kán-zi KBo 6.5 ii 13 (OH/NS), šar-ni-kán-zi KBo 11.32 obv. 8, 47 (OH/NS), KUB 50.44 i 8 (NH), KBo 13.72 rev. 6 (NH/LNS), KuSa 1.9 rev. 6 (LNS).
pret. sg. 1 šar-ni-in-ku-un KUB 13.35 i 34, ii 40 (NH); sg. 3 šar-ni-ik-ta KUB 14.8 rev. 32 (Murš. II), KUB 14.14 rev. 12 (Murš. II), KUB 31.73:7 (Hatt. III); pl. 1 [š]ar-ni-in-ku-en FHL 2:11; pl. 3 šar-ni-ke-er KuSa 1.3 obv. 16 (MH?), šar-ni-in-ker KBo 16.61 rev.? 5 (NH), KUB 14.14 rev. (10 ) (NH).
imp. sg. 3 šar-ni-ik-du KBo 3.1 ii 52, 55, 59 (OH/NS), KUB 11.1 iv 21 (OH/NS), šar-ni-ik-tu KBo 16.45 obv. 14 (MS), KBo 22.52 ii 4, 5 (LNS); pl. 3 [ša]r-ni-in-kán-du KBo 16.61 obv.? 12 (MS).
inf. šar-ni-in-ku-u-wa-an-zi KUB 16.77 iii 6 (NH), šar-ni-in-ku-wa-an-zi KUB 16.77 iii 8 (NH).
verbal subst. gen. šar-ni-in-ku-wa-aš KBo 2.2 iii 33, 35 (NH), šar-ni-in-ku-u-wa-aš ibid. 40 (all coll. W, apud Kammenhuber, MIO 3:346 n. 6, NH); pl. nom. šar-ni-in-ku-e-eš KBo 2.2 iv 8 (NH).
part. sg. nom. com. šar-ni-in-kán-za KUB 14.29 i 6 (Murš. II), KBo 16.6 ii 4 (Murš. II), KUB 16.66 obv. 16 (NH); sg. nom.-acc. neut. šar-ni-in-kán KUB 21.27 iv 36 (Puduhepa).
imperf. pres. sg. 1 šar-ni-in-[k]e-eš-ki-mi KUB 14.14 rev. 21 (Murš. II), šar-ni-ke-eš-ki-mi KBo 6.28 rev. 17 (Hatt. III), šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki-mi KUB 14.14 rev. 8, 21 (Murš. II), Bronze Tablet ii 75 (Tudh. IV), šar-ni-en-ki-iš-ki-mi KUB 14.14 rev. 14 (Murš. II); sg. 2 šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki-ši KBo 34.22 obv.? 7 + KUB 31.135:6 (OH/MS), ABoT 44 i 38 (OH/NS), KUB 31.133:17 (OH/NS).
pl. 1 šar-ni-in-ke-eš-ki-u-e-ni KUB 23.72 obv. 28 (MH/MS).
imp. sg. 2 šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki KBo 3.1 iii 75 (OH/NS); sg. 3 šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki-id-du KBo 6.28 rev. 21 (Hatt. III), Bronze Tablet ii 77 (Tudh. IV).
For the alleged part. [šar-ni-i]n-kán-za followed by the sentence particle -an in KBo 6.2 ii 54, see LH 59 n. 194.
a. in the legal and juridical texts — 1' in the laws: (If someone kills a merchant in Luwiya or Pala) 1 ME MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR pāi āššu–ššett–a šar-ni-ik-zi “He shall pay 100 minas of silver and replace his wares” KBo 6.2 i 4-5 (Laws §5, OS), w. par. āššu–ya 3-ŠU šar-ni-ik-zi KBo 6.4 i 5 (NH), ed. LH 19f.; (“If a girl has been promised to a man but another man runs off with her …”) nu hantezziyaš LÚ-aš kuit kuit p[ešta] ta–šše šar-ni-ik-zi (var. šar-né-en-kán-[z]i) attašš–a annaš UL šar-ni-in-kán[-zi] (var. šar-ni-ik-zi) “He shall compensate the first man for whatever he [has] g[iven] and (her) father and mother shall not make compensation” KBo 6.3 ii 6-7 (Laws §28, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 ii 12-14 (OH/NS), ed. LH 37f.; (“If a girl has been betrothed to a man, and he brings a brideprice for her, but subsequently the father and mother contest the betrothal, they may separate her from the man”) kūšata–ma 2-ŠU šar-ni-in-kán-zi (var. šar-ni-ik-zi) “but they shall compensate for the brideprice double” KBo 6.3 ii 13 (Laws §29, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iii 10 (NS), ed. LH 39, KBo 6.2 (OS) omits this §; (“If a hipparaš-man steals, there is no compensation …”) nu tuekkanza–šiš–pat šar-ni-ik-zi “Only his body shall give compensation” KBo 6.2 ii 54 (Laws §49, OS), ed. LH 59f.; (“If a slave burglarizes a house and his owner says”:) šËr–šit–wa šar-ni-ik-mi nu šar-ni-ik-≠zi± “‘I will make compensation for him,’ he shall make compensation” KBo 6.2 iv 47 (Laws §95, OS), ed. LH 93f.; (“If a free man sets fire to a house, he shall rebuild the house. Whatever perishes in the house—whether it is a human being, cattle or sheep”) nakkuš UL šar-ni-ik-zi (var. n–at [šar-ni-ik]-za) “it (is) damage(?), he shall not replace it (var. he shall replace it)” KBo 6.3 iv 54 (Laws §98, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 54-55 (OS), ed. LH 95f., cf. nakkuš w. discussion and LH 197; [(takk)]u ÌR-aš É-er lukkezzi išhāš–šiš–[(a šer)–ši]t šar-ni-ik-zi ÌR-n–a? KIR⁄›–ŠU UZN¸–ŠU kukkur[(aškanzi n–an EG)]IR-≠pa± išhi–šši [(pi)an]zi takku natta–ma šar-ni-ik[(-zi nu apūn–pat šūi)]zzi “If a slave sets fire to a house, and his master makes compensation for him, they shall cut off the slave’s nose (and) ears and shall give him back to his master. If he (i.e., the master) does not make compensation for him, he will forfeit that same (slave)” KBo 6.2 iv 56-58 (Laws §99, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 iv 55-58 (OH/NS), KBo 19.5:1-3 (OH/NS), ed. LH 96f.; (“If someone steals a door out of maliciousness”) kuit kuit (var. [kui]t kuit É-ri andan) harkzi t–at šar-ni-ik-zi “Whatever is lost (var. adds: in the house), he shall replace” KBo 6.10 ii 18 (Laws §127, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.28:8 (OS), ed. LH 116 | on šullannaz “maliciousness” see Melchert (forthcoming); (If somebody finds utensils and animals, he shall return them to the owner. If he cannot find the owner, he shall secure witnesses. But if he does not secure witnesses, and the owner finds them afterward) n–aš LÚNÍ.ZU kišari 3-ŠU šar-ni-ik-zi “he becomes a thief; he shall make threefold compensation” KBo 6.4 iv 11 (Laws §XXXV, NH), ed. LH 54.
2' in other legal texts: (“If someone commits murder, only that which the ‘lord of the blood’ says, will happen”:) takku tezzi aku–war–aš n–aš aku takku tezzi–ma šar-ni-ik-du–wa nu šar-ni-ik-du “If he says: ‘Let him die,’ he shall die. If, however, he says ‘Let him make compensation,’ he shall make compensation” KUB 11.1 iv 20-21 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:52f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:198; (“Whoever does evil among his brothers and sisters and looks [in a hostile way?] at the person (lit. head) of the king, convoke the assembly!”) mān–apa uttar–š[e]t paizzi nu SAG.DU-naz šar-ni-ik-du “If h[i]s case goes (against him), he shall make compensation with his person (lit. head)” KBo 3.1 ii 51-52 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:34f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:197; cf. ibid. ii 55, 59; n–apa GIŠTUKUL.HI.A šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki “Start replacing the weapons” KBo 3.1 iii 75 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:48f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:198f. | normally the simplex šarnink- does not have any sentence particle and the presence of -apa here is unique; (“Five donkeys died”) nu–war–aš parnaza šar-ni-in-ku-un “‘I have replaced them from (my own) house/estate (cf. per 4 h 3')’” … nu–war–aš nawi šar-ni-ik-zi “He has not yet replaced them (i.e., the lost animals)” KUB 13.35 ii 40, 44 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:8f.; cf. ibid. i 33-34; (If somebody breaks open a royal silo on his own authority, you men of the town must apprehend him and deliver him to the king’s gate. If you do not bring him) nu [ÉS]AG-an LÚ.MEŠ URU-LIM šar-ni-in-kán-zi (dupl. šar!-ni-in!-kán-zi) “The men of the town shall replace the [si]lo (i.e., its contents)” KUB 13.9 iii 10 (protocol, MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 27.16 rev. 1, ed. Westbrook/Woodard, JAOS 110:643, translit. Otten, FsLaroche 274; (If one of various palace or military officials commits a certain offence against the king) n–an arha parhanzi DI!-NAM IŠTU É–ŠU šar-ni-ik-zi “They shall expel him, and he shall pay from his estate the judgement of the court as compensation” KUB 13.7 i 12-13 (legal text of Tudh., MH/NS), cf. per 4 h 3'; (Marašša spoke as follows: … I seized … for His Majesty) nu–za dUTU-ŠI mimma[š pāndu–wa] / [ša]r-ni-in-kán-du “But His Majesty refus[ed] (and said:) ‘[From now on] let them replace (it)’” KBo 16.61 obv.? 11-12 (dep., MH) | for the tr. of pandu as “henceforth, from now on” see Hoffner, JNES 27:202 w. n. 42; UMMA µŠamūha-LÚ ŠA KUŠ.HI.A šāšaš x[…] / kuin šar-ni-in-ker n–ašta µMaraššāš […] / karšta KBo 16.61 rev.? 4-6 (dep., MH), ed. StBoT 4:60f.; [nu] mān ÌR LÚpitteyantan munnaizzi [nu]–šše–ššan mān B´L–ŠU šer UL [š]ar-ni-ik-zi nu 12 SAG.DU.HI.A UL pāi “If a slave conceals a fugitive, and his owner does not give [c]ompensation on his behalf, and he does not give twelve persons (lit. heads)” (he will lose his slave) KUB 8.81 iii 3-5 (Šunaššura treaty, MH/MS), ed. Petschow, ZA 55:243, del Monte, OA 20:217f, tr. DiplTexts™ 25f.; cf. ibid. iii 6-7; KUB 36.127 rev. 14 (Šunaššura treaty, MH/MS); (“Since you are friends, cattle (and) sheep of Hatti and Gašga are mixed and cowherds and shepherds work together. But if an enemy attacks we will hold you alone responsible”) mān–ašta kunanzi–ya kuinki naššu 1 LÚ našma 1 [GUD 1 UDU] nu apūšš–a šar-ni-ik-te-ni ŠA KUR URUHatti–ya GUD[.HI.A UDU.HI.A šar-ni-ik-te-ni] ANA 1 LÚ EGIR-an 3 LÚ.MEŠ piškatteni ANA 1 GUD–ya [3 GUD piškatteni] IŠTU 1 UDU 3 UDU–pat pišteni “and if they kill someone, either one man, or one [ox (or) one sheep], you shall replace them too, and [you shall replace] the cattle [and sheep] of the Hittites. You shall give three men for one man and [you shall also give three oxen] for one ox (and) three sheep for one sheep” KUB 26.19 ii 25-28 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 131f., for the dating see Neu, FsBittel 398.
b. in oracle texts: [mān Š]A µPiyaššili U µHaittili [Ëšhar] šar-ni-in-ku-u-wa-an-zi šanheškiši [nu KIN(?) N]U.SIGﬁ-du NU.SIGﬁ § [nu DINGIR-LU]M ešhar–pat šar-ni-in-ku-wa-an-zi šanheškiši “[If] you, (O deity), keep seeking to get compensation for [the murder] of Piyaššili and Haittili, let [the KIN(?) oracle] be unfavorable. Unfavorable. § [(If), O go]d you keep seeking to get compensation for the murder only” KUB 16.77 iii 5-8 (oracle question, NH), ed. van den Hout, Purity 248f.; (“They are taking the beef and mutton from your mouth, O deity. They shall purify themselves”) nu GUD IŠT[U GUD] šar-ni-in-kán-zi [UDU–ma IŠTU UD]U šar-ni-in-kán-zi “They shall replace ox wit[h ox]. They shall replace [sheep with shee]p” KUB 16.39 ii 15-16 (oracle question, NH), ed. del Monte, AION 35:331, 333; cf. ibid. ii 37-38, 42-43; (They will ask His Majesty) kuiš IKRIBU šar-ni-in-ku-wa-aš(coll.) n–an šar-ni-in-kán-zi UL–ma kuiš šar-ni-in-ku-wa-aš(?, coll.) nu–šši zankila[tar SUM-anzi] “what vow is subject to compensation, and they will pay compensation for it. And what vow is not subject to compensation, [they shall pay] a penalty to her” KBo 2.2 iii 33-36 (oracle question, NH), ed. van den Hout, Purity 134f., coll. Walther, apud Hatt. 140 and Kammenhuber, MIO 3:346 n. 61; nu IKRIBIHI.A–ma kuiËš šarninkuËš n–aš šar-ni-in-kán-zi kattann–a zankilatar SUM-anzi maškann–a–kan BAL-anzi “Or, they shall give compensation for the vows that are subject to compensation. Additionally they shall pay a penalty and they will offer a gift” ibid. iv 7-10 (oracle question, NH); cf. ibid. iii 39-42; [… š]akuwaššarr–a–(a)t šar-ni-in-kán-zi “And they shall make full compensation for it” KUB 52.101 ii 6 (oracle question, NH); cf. ibid. ii 3, iii 3, 6; cf. Ehelolf, ZA 43:191 n. 3, 192 n. 1; n–at ŠA MU.1.KAM šakuwaššar šar-ni-kán-zi “They shall compensate for it fully for the first (or ‘for one’) year” KUB 50.44 i 8 (oracle question, NH), ed. šakuwaššar(ra)- 2 e.
c. in prayers: kurim[m]aš damm[(i)]šhandaš antuhšaš kattawātar zik–[(p)]at dUTU-uš šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki-[(š)]i “Only you, Sungod, make compensation for the grievances of the orphaned (and) oppressed person” ABoT 44 + KUB 36.79 i 36-38 (prayer, OH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 31.133:16-17 and KUB 31.134:11-12, ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:240, tr. Hittite Prayers 37 (“restore the claims”); cf. similar KBo 34.22 obv.? 6-7 + KUB 31.135:5-6; (“Since you, O deities, my lords, seek vengeance for the murder of Tudhaliya, the persons who have killed Tudhaliya”) nu Ëšhar apūš šar-ni-i[n-ke-er] nu KUR URUHatti–ya apāš išhananza arha namma zinni[šta] n–at KUR URUHatti–ya karū šar-ni-ik-ta kinuna–ya–at–kan [k]uit [a]mmu[k] araš n–at ammuqqa IŠTU É-TI–YA šarnikzilaz maškanna[z] šar-né-en-ki-iš-ki-mi “[They have give]n compensation for the bloodshed. That bloodshed further finished off the Land of Hatti as well so that the Land of Hatti too made compensation for it. But now that it has also come upon (lit. reached) me, I too will make compensation for it from my own household, with compensation and propitiatory gift” KUB 14.14 rev. 10-14 (PP1), ed. Götze, KlF 1:172f., Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 201, tr. Beckman, CoS 1:157, Hittite Prayers 63; kui[t] URUHattušaš h[i]nganaz šar-ni-ik-ta n–at 20-anki [UL k]arū (or: [n–at k]arū) apËniššan kišari “What Hattuša gave as compensation by means of the plague, is[n't] it thus happening twentyfold(?) already?” (or: “[And it] is happening twentyfold(?) already”) KUB 14.8 rev. 32-33 (PP 2), ed. Götze, KlF 1:216f., Lebrun, Hymnes 209, 214, Singer, Prayers 60 (all differently).
d. in other texts: […] / P¨H–ŠU šar-ni-ik-d[u … ] / šar-ni-ik-du “Let his/her substitute give compensation(?) [for …], let […] give […] compensation” KBo 22.52 ii? 5-6 (NS); [UZUNÍG.GI]G–wa UZUNÍG.GIG-az šar-ni-ik-ta “He replaced [visce]ra with viscera” KBo 24.1 i 33 + KUB 32.113 left col. 11 (3Mašt., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 46:128f.
e. with preverbs — 1' w. anda and -kan: šakuwan~
tariyanuškanteš–ma–at–kan kuit n–aš–kan anda šar-ni-in-kán-zi “But because they (i.e., festivals) have remained neglected, should they make up for them?” KUB 22.35 ii 5-6 (oracle question, NH), ed. van den Hout, Purity 186f.; uqq–a mahhan µ.dLAMMA-an pahhašhi nu–šši–kan mān wakšiyazi kuitki n–an–kan anda šar-né-en-ki-iš-ki-mi mānn–a ANA NUMUN µ.dLAMMA nakkišzi kuitki n–an–kan DUMU–YA DUMU.DUMU–YA QA_TAMMA anda šar-ni-in-ki-iš-ki-id-du “And just as I protect Kuruntiya and keep compensating him for anything lost by him, so if it becomes difficult for the seed of Kuruntiya, let my son (and) my grandson keep compensating him in the same way” Bronze Tablet ii 74-77 (treaty w. Tarhuntašša, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:18f. (“entschädigen”); (In a household one person has died because of the plague) [(n–at punušmi) n]–at–kan anda šar-ni-ik-mi “I will investigate it and make restitution for it” KUB 31.58 rev. 10 (vow of Puduhepa), w. dupl. KUB 31.51 rev. 6, ed. StBoT 1:30f.; (“For whatever god there is no ‘man of the god’”) […]x–kan IŠTU É.DINGIR-LIM anda šar-ni-kán-zi “they shall replace [≥…] from the temple” KBo 13.72 rev. 6 (vow, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 290, 429.
2' w. āppa: (Palla requisitioned and killed two wethers that had already been anointed for the yearly festival. It is suggested that another priest return (EGIR-pa pāi) two wethers, but the god rejects the suggestion) nu pān<zi> µPallašš–a 2 UDU.NITA ANA DINGIR-LIM EGIR-pa šar-ni-ik-zi kattann–a zankilatar IŠTU NINDA KAŠ pāi duddu[nuw]anzi–an “Should they go (and) should Palla too give back compensation to the deity for the two wethers? Should he also give a penalty of bread and beer along with it? Should they pardon him?” KBo 14.21 i 36-38 (oracle question, NH); cf. also KUB 23.72 obv. 28.
3' w. arha: paimi–wa–za ŠA ABI–YA šešši-x-x arha šar-ni-ik-mi “Then I will completely make up for the š. of my father” KUB 14.4 iii 26-27 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Forrer, Forsch. 2, de Martino, Eothen 9:28, 36 w. n. 134 (“adempiere”); cf. HUL-lu uttar U[L …] / arha šar-ni-in-k[án-…] KBo 22.117 rt. col. 6-7 (rit. frag., NS); cf. also ibid. 4; […] IŠTU KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI A.ŠÀA.GÀR GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN arha šar-ni<-ik>-zi KBo 20.75 rev. 6 (Kizzuwatna rit., NS); cf. ibid. 1.
4' w. parā: EGIR–ŠU DUGKUKUBIHI.A parā šar-ni-kán-zi “Afterwards they will fully replace the pitchers” KBo 11.32 obv. 8 (fest., OH/NS); cf. šar-ni-in-kán-zi ibid. 14; cf. also frag. ibid. 46; [n]u EZEN›.MEŠ karšanduš parā šar-ni-in-ku-e-ni “We shall fully make up for the festivals which have been neglected” KUB 22.57 obv. 4 (oracle question, NH); mān–ma–aš parā šar-ni-in-kán-za “If it (i.e., the festival) is, however, fully made up for” KUB 16.66 obv. 16, 30 (oracle question, NH); (Whatever evil deeds the person has committed) n–at IŠTU SAG.D[U–Š]U karū parā šar-ni-ik-ta “he has already fully compensated for it with his head” KUB 21.19 ii 15 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Süren-hagen, AoF 8:92f.; cf. KUB 21.27 iv 36 (prayer, Puduhepa); (“If I defeat the enemy, and when I return from the campaign, I will come up to Mt. Tagurka”) [n]u–tta LˆMHI.A […] pehhi parā šar-ni-ik-mi “and I will give you thousands […], I will give full compensation” KBo 13.162 rev. 14 + KBo 12.58 rev. 6-7 (prayer, Tudh. IV), ed. Lombardi, Mem.Imparati 499f.; cf. parā 7 d.
5' w. šer: see Laws §§ 95 and 99, above, a 1' and KUB 8.81 iii 3-5, above, a 2'.
The verb šarnink- without preverbs is a three-place verb in its fullest extension:
absolute to give compensation cf. a 1' nu   šarnikzi LH §95
+ acc. to compensate for some- cf. a 1' passim
thing/make up for some-
thing
(+ acc.) + abl. to compensate (for some- cf. a 2' several  thing) with something exx.
+ dat. + acc. to compensate someone  cf. a 1' LH §28,  for something c (first quote)
The predicative participles agree with this: it is the object compensated for that turns into the subject (but see below). The theoretically possible construction: + dat. + acc. + abl. “to compensate someone for something with something” does not seem to be attested—not surprising since Hittite usually avoids such complicated syntax. The dat. can be reinforced by šer (LH §§ 95, 99) or be expressed with the OH combination of šer + poss. pron.
Deviating from this pattern is the syntagm –kan anda šarnink- in the Bronze Tablet, where the person compensated appears in the acc. (instead of the dat.): see section e. However, the first and third ex. under e have the acc. again for that for which compensation is given, just like with the simplex šarnink-. So, syntactically, –kan anda šarnink- seems to behave in two ways. 
If the part. in the unpubl. (see Neu apud Haase, GsKronasser 34 without further reference) šarninkanza–wa–za Ëš is to be taken as passive (“You shall be compensated”) it follows the syntax in the Bronze Tablet. However, it could also be taken as act. as Haase does (“Sei ein Schadensersatzpflichtiger!”). 
The Hittites conceived of their relationship to their gods in legal and juridical terms. When they spoke of praying, they often used terms for presenting an argument in court (arkuwai-, arkuwar, etc.). Some of the prayer types, e.g., the so-called “Plague Prayers,” were extended arguments of self-exoneration. When the gods were offended by human actions, they required compensation (šarnikzil) for their injuries and levied punitive fines (zankilatar). Bribes to judges and legitimate propitiatory gifts to the gods shared the same term (maškan). In battles the gods acted as judges and rendered decisions by giving the victory to the side in the right (šarazziyahh-, šarlai-). For this reason, we do not propose to use a different translation for šarnink- or šarnikzil when it occurs in a religious context (šarni(n)k- b-c, šarnikzil b-d), as opposed to a purely juridical one (šarni(n)k- a, šarnikzil a).
Goetze, KlF 1 (1930) 190-192; Petschow, ZA 55 (1963) 248; Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 124; Haase, Beobachtungen (1995) 21-24.
Cf. šarkanti-, šargašam(m)i-, (¬)šarqatt-, šarkiwali-, šarnikzel-, šarnikzileške-; hapuš-, zankila-, zankilatar.
[šarninkuwa-] adj.
Since the form šar-ni-in-ku-e-eš KBo 2.2 iv 8 (NH) remains the sole example thus far of an inflected gerundival form derived from the gen. of the verbal noun šarninkuwaš and could also be a mistake brought on by the preceding kuiËš, it seems preferable to not yet posit a stem *šarninkuwa-. The passage is discussed under šarnink- b.
šarnišnili-, šarrišnili- adj.; (describes bread/cake); from OH.†
pl. acc. com. šar-né-eš-ni-li-uš KUB 34.86 rev. 5 (MS), šar-ri-iš-ni-le-eš KUB 10.39 iii 4 (NS); broken šar-ni-iš-n[i-li-…] KUB 34.86 rev. 3 (OH/MS), šar-ri-iš-ni-l[i-…] 758/u:14 (StBoT 28:112 n. 21, NS).
LÚ.MEŠ É.GAL LÚABUBˆTI 3 NINDA.GUR›.RA šar-ri-iš-ni-le-eš udanzi “The palace servants (and) the intendant bring three š. thick-breads” KUB 10.39 iii 3-5 (NS); 1 N[INDA …] 1 NINDAm[ūriy]alaš šar-ni-iš-n[i-li-uš] LÚAG[RIG URUHatti] ANA LÚSANGA dKampiw[(ūuit pāi)] § ≠30?± [NINDA.GUR›.RA GAL] šar-né-eš-ni-li-uš dIM-aš N[(A›huwašiya)] “One […]-bread, […] (and) one š. mūriyala-bread the (storehouse-)admini[strator of Hatti] gives to the priest of Kampiwuit. § Thirty(?) š. [big thick-breads(?) …] to the stela of the Stormgod” KUB 34.86 rev. 2-5 + KBo 16.68 iii! 23-27 (MELQ´TU lists, OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 30.19 rev. 2-3, translit. StBoT 28:112; cf. 30 NINDA.GUR›.RA GAL šar-ri-iš-ni-l[i-…] 758/u:14, translit. StBoT 28:112 n. 21 | for the muriyala-bread as a bread or pastry in the form of a cluster of fruit see CHD s.v.
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 182 (related to the city name Šarišša?). 
šarnu- v.; (mng. unkn.).†
[…] harapašun šar-nu-ut šargamuš / […] KUB 57.66 iii 17 (rit?, NS).
š. can be either an imp. sg. 2 (cf. the imperatives iii 12, 14, 15) or a pret. sg. 3 (cf. iii 16, 18, 19). Given the likely verbal status of š., the hapax harapašun (cf. HW2 H s.v.) is probably an sg. acc.  com. Considering the presence of the adjective šarku- in the immediate context, one cannot rule out emending to šar<-ga>-nu-ut.
Cf. šarganuwant-?, UZUšarnum(m)ar.
UZUšarnum(m)ar n. neut.; (a body part which grows wool); wr. syll. and UZUMAŠ.GIM; from OH/MS.†
nom.-acc. [UZ]Ušar-nu-um-mar KBo 20.116 obv.? 13 (NS), UZUšar-nu-mar KUB 43.54 v 18 (NS); acc.? UZUšar-nu-ma-≠an± KUB 33.52 iii 5 (OH/NS); d.-l. šar-nu-um-ni Tel Aviv 2:91:22, [UZ]Ušar-nu-um-ni KBo 13.13 obv. 12 (MS); gen. UZUšar-nu-um-ma-aš KBo 8.91 obv. 4 (MS), UZUšar-nu-ma-aš KBo 23.21:21 (MS/ENS?), 942/z rev.? 5 (StBoT 44:370), UZUšar-nu-um<-ma>-š(a) KUB 44.15 i 9 (NS); broken šar-nu-um[-…] KUB 12.63 obv. 4 (OH/MS).
For the inflection of š. as a regular -mar/-m(a)n- noun see Melchert, Die Sprache 29:13. It cannot be determined whether the form šarnuman is an endingless locative to the regular -mar/-m(a)n- stem or nom.-acc. of a pure n-stem. The gen. sg. šarnum(m)aš shows assimilation of -m(m)n- to -mm-, for which cf. NINDAšaramm- beside NINDAšaram(m)n-. 
(“(S)he takes one thick-bread. (S)he puts cedar-oil and […]”) ANA GEŠTU UDU tepu [k]uerzi UZUšar-nu-um-<ma->š–a [(SÍG BABBAR t)]epu kuerzi “(S)he cuts a little from the sheep’s ear. She cuts a little of white wool of the š. (and dumps them into the hearth with the thick-bread)” KUB 44.15 i 8-10 (fest. for IŠTAR of Nineveh, NS), w. dupl. Bo 3727, cf. Otten/Rüster, ZA 64:48; cf. in malformed newborn (IZBU) omens [takku IZBU …UZ]Ušar-nu-um-ni–šši [kittari(?)] KBo 13.13 obv. 12 (omens, MS? or NS?), ed. StBoT 9:60f., for the date see Neu, FsNeumann 207f., Soysal, JANER 4:102; (They sacrifice various breads, cheese, stew and pulp to Išhara) šerr–a–ššan [UZ]Ušar-nu-um-mar dāi “And on top (s)he places a š.” KBo 20.116 obv.? 12-13 (hišuwa-fest., NS); (“While the liver cooks beside the temple of Hebat, the priest goes to the side of the temple of Teššub. …”) nu–kan UZUGABA UZUÚR UZUMAŠ.GIM QADU UZUÉLLAG.GÙN.A danzi “They take breast, loin, š., along with the ‘speckled kidneys.’ (The liver and heart they […] and place them before Teššub. § The priest crumbles one thin-bread, one […-bread and one ]barley-thick-bread. On top he places cut up liver and heart. He sacrifices the breast with wine and places it before Teššub)” [UZUÚ]R UZUšar-nu-mar-r–a ITTI UZUGABA dāi “He places [lo]in and š. with the breast” KUB 43.54 v 7-18 (fest. for Teššub, NS); cf. similarly KUB 41.48 iv 19-23 (NS); n–ašta UZUšuppa hūišu danz[i…(?)] UZUGABA UZUÚR UZUMAŠ.GIM QADU UZUÉLLAG.GÙN.≠A± [danzi] UZUNÍG.GIG–ma UZUŠÀ happinit zanuanz[i] “They take fresh meat. [They take] breast, loin, š. together with ‘speckled kidneys,’ while they cook the liver and heart over an open flame. (The priest crumbles one thin-bread. On top he places fresh breast (and) cut up liver and heart. He sacrifices the breast with wine. Then he places it back before Hebat. He libates wine. §)” UZUÚR–ma UZUMAŠ.GIM QADU UZUÉLLAG.GÙN.A ANA UZUGABA awan katta dāi “He puts down loin, š. (UZUMAŠ.GIM) together with ‘speckled kidneys’ on the breast” KBo 22.180 i 9-11, 17-18 (fest., NS); cf. similarly KBo 3.14:5-6 (NS), KBo 20.109 i 11 (NS), KBo 8.93 i 15; […]x UZUMAŠ.GIM P¸NI […] ibid. 21 (rit., MS?); EGIR–ŠU–ma 1 NINDA.GUR›.RA at[t]aš DINGIR.[MEŠ] parš[iya …] / UZUšar-nu-um-ma-aš \ UZ[USA]G?.DU GÙB-lašš–a UZUkudur ≠dā±i n[–a]t–š[an ištanāni] EGIR-pa dāi “Then [(s)he] bre[aks] one thick bread for the ancestor gods, takes […] of š., half the [he]ad and a left shank and puts [th]em back [on the altar]” KBo 21.37 obv. 13-14 + KBo 8.91 obv. 4-5 (Kizzuwatna rit., MS), translit. Trémouille, Mem.Imparati 847 (ll. 14-15) | depending on what is to be restored after parš[iya …], UZUšarnummaš could be dependent on a noun in the break as above, or alternatively dependent on the following noun (“half a [he]ad of š.”), or a free standing gen. (“that of the š.”).
All known occurrences of š./UZUMAŠ.GIM refer to animals only. Especially frequent is the sequence “breast, loin, š. with the kidneys.” The fact that it can have (white) wool speaks for an outer part of the body. The collocation with breast, loin and kidney points, as Riemschneider, StBoT 9:65, saw, to the belly area. It is not clear why š. QADU UZUÉLLAG GÙN.A “š. with ‘speckled’ kidneys” should be identical to š. alone, as Haas/Wegner, AoF 28:121, suggest, nor why š. should be “hip (meat).”
Riemschneider, StBoT 9 (1970) 65 (“einen Körperteil oder eine Körperstelle am Bauch des Tieres oder in der Nähe der Geschlechtsteile” = UZUMAŠ.GIM); Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 148 n. 84; Melchert, Die Sprache 29 (1983) 13; Rieken, StBoT 44 (1999) 370f.; Haas/Wegner, AoF 28 (2001) 121 (“Hüftfleisch mit bunter Niere (= Niere im Fettmantel)”).
Cf. šarnu-.
(GIŠ/KUŠ)šarpa- A n. com.; (an object on which one can sit), a cross-legged chair(?); from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom. KUŠšar-pa-aš KBo 5.2 i 31 (MH/NS); collec. nom.-acc. GIŠšar-pa KBo 18.172 obv. 10, 17 (NH), KUB 42.21 i 9 (NH), šar-pa VBoT 1:36 (MH/MS), GIŠšar-pa 1883/u:3 (Neu, StMed. 7:204, NS). 
pl. (or collec.?) d.-l. GIŠšar-pa-aš KUB 33.21 iii 2, KUB 33.19 iii (1) (both OH?/NS), KUB 52.96 obv. 5 (NH).
[… GIŠ]≠šar-pa-aš e-ša-at±[ …] “[the returning god] sat down on a cross-legged chair(?) (… the cloud released [the door] and [window]. [The smoke] released [the house]. Nature returned to normal)” KUB 33.19 iii 1 (missing deity of Harapšili, OH?/NS), translit. Myth. 63, tr. Hittite Myths2 25 (no tr. of š.), Moore, Thesis 53 (“sat (down) [under(?)] the šarpa-trees”) | note that šar-pa-aš, if locative, is a plural collective; cf. […] P¸NI DINGIR-LIM / GIŠšar-pa-aš eš[at …] KUB 33.21 iii 1-2, translit. Myth. 60, tr. Hittite Myths2 25 (“sat down on a wooden sarpas-chair”) | the det. GIŠ was later added by the scribe before the beginning of the line in the intercolumnium; [1-NU?] GIŠšar-pa KÙ.GI GAR.RA 1-NU GIŠGÌR.GUB KÙ.GI GAR.RA “[One] cross-legged chair(?) inlaid with gold, one footstool inlaid with gold” KUB 42.21 obv. 9 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 138f., translit. THeth 10:47; 1-NU GIŠšar-pa GIŠESI KÙ.GI tiyan[ta?] “one š. of ebony inlai[d] with gold” KBo 18.172 obv. 17 (cult inv., NH); cf. [1]-NUTUM GIŠšar-pa GIŠx[…] 1883/u:3 (Neu, StMed 7:204, NS); 2-ta GIŠšar-pa TUR.TUR ŠÀ.BA 1 GIŠESI “Two small cross-legged chairs(?), one of which is ebony” ibid. 10, ed. Eichner, IE Numerals 52; 2 GAD GIŠšar-pa-aš “two cloths for a cross-legged chair(?)” KBo 18.186 l.e. 3 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 10:170, Siegelová, Verw. 379; 1 TÚGGUZ.ZA! iškallanzi ANA 2 GIŠšar-pa-aš “They tear apart one GUZ.ZA-cloth for two cross-legged chairs(?)” KUB 52.96 obv. 5 (NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 358f.; 3 GIŠGU.ZA GIŠESI šar-pa BAN[Â KÙ.G]I(coll.) GAR.RA 10 GIŠGU.ZA ŠA GIŠESI IŠTU ZU· A[M.SI] UHHUZ “Three thrones of ebony, (i.e.) beautiful cross-legged chairs(?), inlaid [with go]ld, ten thrones of ebony inlaid with ivo[ry]” VBoT 1 (= EA 31):36-38 (letter of Amenhotep III to Tarhuntaradu of Arzawa, MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:335f., tr. Haas apud Moran, Amarna Letters 101 (“overlaid with beautiful šarpa [and gol]d”), cf. Güterbock, Oriens 10:356f., 362, coll. by E. Gordon, apud Moran, Amarna Letters p. 103 n. 12; cf. KUŠšarpašši-; 1 GIŠŠÚ.A 1 GIŠGÌR.GUB 1 KUŠšar-pa-aš 1-NUTIM TÚGNÍG.LÁM.MEŠ 1 TÚG TÚG.GÚ.È.A HURRI … n–at ANA dU tianzi “One chair, one foot-stool, one cross-legged chair(?), one set of festive robes, one Hurrian style tunic … They place them before the Stormgod” KBo 5.2 i 31-32, 34 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH/NS).
Our understanding of this word derives from Forlanini’s, Hethitica 7:76f., suggestion equating Mt. Šarpa with the hierogl. DEUS.MONS.THRONUS of the Emirgazi altars and seeing the THRONUS sign as one of the cross-legged chairs often depicted in Hittite art, sometimes covered with a cloth or drape (see Symington, Furniture 120f.); cf. Hawkins, AnSt 20:86f. (differently). 
For bibliography see GIŠšarpa- B.
Cf. šarpašši- A, KUŠ/GIŠšarpašši- B. 
(GIŠ)šarpa- B n. com.; 1. (sharp) point, 2. harrow; from MH/MS.† 
sg. acc. GIŠšar-pa-an KUB 10.92 v 13 (NS), ChS Erg 1 iv 32 (ENS), KBo 38.210 obv. 3 (here?). 
gen. GIŠšar-pa-aš VBoT 24 iii 14, 30 (MH/NS). 
abl. GIŠšar-pa-az KUB 24.4 obv. 13 (MH/MS), KUB 24.3 ii 23 (Murš. II), KUB 14.11 iv 24 (Murš. II), Bo 4371:17, GIŠšar-pa-az-za KUB 53.58:7 (MH/NS).
1. point — a. in general: (“‘We have placed here now on the spot these substitutes for all those evil sins of the king …’”) [nu–war–aš? URUD(UZI.)KIN.BAR-aš G]IŠšar-pa-az (var. [GIŠša]r-≠pa±-az-za) šekūËn “‘[and] we have sewn(?) [them] with the point of a ne[edle]. (You, O Sungoddess of the Earth, take note of these substitutes)’” Bo 4371:17 (subst. ritual, MH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 42.94 rev. 23 (MH/NS) and KUB 53.58:7 (MH/NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 52f., 69, 72, w. disc. 130-136, idem.,  ArOr 67:676, 681 (differently) | for šekūËn see šekuwa-.
b. (in the phrase šeppikuštaš šarpaz kunk- describing a predicament) “to dangle/sway from the point of a pin/needle”: (“Whatever sins you gods see, let an ecstatic come and tell about them, or let oracle priestesses (and) priests ascertain them, or let them come to a mortal in a dream”) n–ašta URUDUšepikkuštaš (var. URUDUZI.KIN.BAR) GIŠšar-pa-az kunku[eni] “W[e are] dangling from the point of a needle (and let the gods then have mercy on Hatti)” KUB 24.4 obv. 13 (prayer to the Sungoddess of Arinna, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 24.3 ii 23 (Murš. II), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:28f., disc. 90-93 (idiomatic expression drawn from ordinary life meaning “we will make amends”), Lebrun, Hymnes 161, 169 (“Alors, [nous] suspen[drons] des bracelets en bois šarpa”), 175 (objet en bois), tr. Hittite Prayers 52 (“We shall stroke(?) by means of the thorns(?)/pins(?) of a sarpa”), Bernabé, TLH 269 (“luego colgaremos prendedores de madera de sarpa”), HED K 248 (“We shake [copper] spikes from the [wooden] harrow” … “this was apparently a metaphor for ‘defanging death’”), Ünal, TUAT II/6:806 w. n. 23a (“(so daß) [wir] (es) mit dem Kratzer der Spange putzen können” = “völlig bereinigen”), Kühne, NERT 174 w. n. v (“We will hang the bronze clasp(?) from the sarpa wood.” “an obscure practice (a pendulum oracle?)”; (“It must be found out why there is dying”) nu–kan URUDUZ[I.K]IN.BAR-aš [(G)]IŠšar-pa-az kunkūeni “We are dangling from the point of a needle. (May the Stormgod of Hatti, my lord, save me and remove the plague then from Hatti)” KUB 14.10 iv 19-20 (PP2), w. dupl. KUB 14.8 rev. 48, KUB 14.11 iv 24, ed. Forrer, Forsch. 2:18 (“Dann reißen(?) wir die Nägel aus dem Kerbholz”), Götze, KlF 1:218f. (no tr.), 234f. (“Wahrscheinlich … eine religiöse Handlung an einem heiligen Symbol”), Lebrun, Hymnes 210, 215 (“Nous suspendrons des broches en bronze de šarpa”), tr. Hittite Prayers 60 (“We shall stroke(?) by means of the pins(?) of a šarpa”), 68 n. 5 (disc. w. lit.), Ünal, TUAT 2:806 (“wir es mit dem Kratzer der Spange putzen können”); cf. also KBo 22.78:6-7.
2. harrow: A.ŠÀterippiaš GIŠšar-pa-aš hašduir 9 NA›paššilaš A.ŠÀterippiaš “Brush of the harrow (i.e., gathered up by the harrow) of a harrowed field (and) nine pebbles of a harrowed field (… They bring nine pebbles and brushwood to be removed from the harrowed field and scatter the pebbles into the hearth)” šer–a–ššan GIŠšar-pa-aš hašduir merranda warnuzi “On top he burns the brush of the harrow that was removed” VBoT 24 iii 14-15, 29-31 (Anniwiyanni’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112-13 (“brushwood”), CHD merr- a 2' a' (no tr. of š.); (“Afterwards, standing [they drink?] the Protective Deity”) EGIR-ŠU GIŠAPIN GIŠšar-pa-an G[UB-aš akuanzi?] “Afterwards, st[anding they drink?] the plow (and) the harrow” KUB 10.92 v 13 (offerings in fest., NS), cf. Gurney, Prayers 90, Güterbock, Oriens 10:357 (the plow and “the cushion or upholstered seat,” as symbols of work and rest), Taracha, Ersetzen 135 (“Acker und Ödland”); nu LÚAZU 1 GIŠAPIN-an 1 GIŠšar-pa-an 1 GIŠiugan 1 GIŠišhawar IŠTU Ì.DÙG.GA iškizzi “The exorcist anoints one plow, one (wooden) harrow, one yoke, (and) one išhawar with fine oil” ChS Erg 1 iv 32-33, ed. ibid. 7, 19.
The newly discovered text ChS Erg. 1 iv 32-33 indicates that a GIŠš. is some kind of an agricultural tool. Two other newly available and duplicating texts Bo 4371:17 and KUB 53.58:7 employ the verb šekuwa- “to sew” with a š. This text further leads one to the conclusion that šeppikuštaš is a genitive dependent on š., thus “š. of a pin/needle.” It thus appears that in mng. 1 š. means “a point.” The use of the det. GIŠ with mng. 1 may indicate that the original mng. of this word was “thorn.” A harrow is an agricultural implement characterized by a number of points, a characteristic which allows a connection between mngs. 1 and 2. These meanings, if correct, appear to create an insurmountable difficulty in connecting GIŠ/KUŠšarpa- A with GIŠšarpa- B.
For the alleged GIŠšar-pa in KUB 26.50 obv. 1 (estate of Šahurunuwa, NH), w. dupl. š[ar-…] KUB 26.43 obv. 12, now read GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN “vineyard” see Imparati, RHA XXXII:49f. 
Note PNs µŠarpa and µŠarpa-dLAMMA Noms 1128-1129 and Noms Suppl. 1129, Herbordt, BoHs 19 no. 363. 
Forrer, Forschungen 2 (1926) 18 (“Kerbholz”); Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 234f. (a religious symbol); Sturtevant, Chrest. (1935) 123f. (“brushwood” related to Latin sarmentum “brushwood,” sarpo “trim, prune”); Gurney, AAA 27 (1941) 90-92 (a manufactured object generally for secular usage); Friedrich, HW (1952) 187 (GIŠšarpa- “ein Baum und sein Holz?,” GIŠšarpa- “Gerät, vergöttlicht neben dem Pfluge,” KUŠšarpa- “Kissen, Polster(?) (aus Leder)”); Sommer, apud HW (1952) 187 (“Zypresse”); Rost, MIO 4 (1956) 338-340 (not a type of wood); Güterbock, Oriens 10 (1957) 356f. (not a tree, (1) “cushion, bolster,” (2) an implement [Anniwiyanni]); Laroche, Noms (1966) p. 340 (“un outil”); Ivanov, Etymologija 1976 (1978) 159f. (“sickle, scythe”); Popko, Kultobjekte (1978) 129; Kühne, NERT (1978) 174 w. n. v; Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 47 (“a kind of seat”); Forlanini, Hethitica 7 (1987) 76f. (identifies the DEUS.MONS.THRONUS with Mount Šarpa); Ünal, TUAT 2 (1991) 806 w. n. 23a (“Kratzer”); Siegelová, RlA 8 (1995) 333 (“eine feste Konstruktion (wohl Sitzgelegenheit) aus Holz (…) oder weich aus Leder”); Symington, Furniture (1996) 114; Taracha, ArOr 67 (1999) 676-681; idem, Ersetzen (2000) 133-136 (two homonyms: GIŠš. “Dorn(strauch), Stachel, Spitze, Stift” and “Hocker mit Polster aus zottigem Fell”); Oettinger, Mem.Imparati (2002) 613-615 (one word, compares Latin sorbus “sorb(-tree)”); Sava®, Mem.Imparati (2002) 707 (“sandalye, iskemle”); Singer, Hittite Prayers (2002) 68.
šarpašši- A adj., Luw. lw.; of/belonging to a cross-legged chair(?); from MH/MS.†
sg. nom. com. šar-pa-aš-ši-iš KBo 15.32 i 10 (MS), […]šar-pa-aš-ši-iš KUB 51.22 i? 9 (NS).
1 GIŠŠÚ.A–ma 1 GADA 1 KUŠNÍG.BÀR šar-pa-aš-ši-iš […] / [(I)]TTI DINGIR-LIM–pat kittari “One stool, one cloth, one (leather) drape belonging to a cross-legged chair(?) […] lies right next to the deity” KBo 38.251:3-4 + KBo 15.32 i 10-11 (Kuliwišna rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 38.224 i 8-9, ed. Glocker, Kuliwišna 18f. (differently); [ANA dU] URUKuliwišna 1 GIŠŠÚ.A–ŠU […]šar-pa-aš-ši-iš “[For the Stormgod] of Kuliwišna one stool, […] belonging to a cross-legged chair […]” KUB 51.22 i? 8-9 (Kuliwišna rit., NS), ed. Glocker, Kuliwišna 20f.
The word is a Luw. gen. adj. in -ašši- of šarpa- A, q.v.
For bibliography see GIŠ/KUŠšarpa- A.
Cf. GIŠ/KUŠšarpa- A, KUŠ/GIŠšarpašši- B.
KUŠ/GIŠšarpašši- B n. com.; a drape, chair-cover; from MS.†
sg. nom. KUŠšar-pa-aš-ši-iš KUB 30.29 obv. 2 (MS), GIŠšar-pa-aš-ši-iš ibid. 3.
pl. acc. KUŠšar-pa-aš-ši-š(a-kán) ibid. 4.
(When a woman is giving birth, the midwife prepares the following) [2 GIŠkupp]iš 3 KUŠšar-pa-aš-ši-iš nu–ššan kuedaniya [ANA] 1-EN GIŠkuppišni 1-EN GIŠšar-pa-aš-ši-iš kitta § [1]-EN KUŠšar-pa-aš-ši-š–a–ka[n] GIŠkuppišnaš ištarna tagān išparanzi “[two stoo]ls and three drapes. On each stool is placed one drape. § And they spread out [on]e drape between the stools on the ground. (When the child begins to fall (i.e., be born), [then] the woman seats herself on the stools. And the midwife holds the receiving blanket with her hand)” KUB 30.29 obv. 2-5 (MS), ed. StBoT 29:22f. | for the form of kuppiš see Melchert, AHP 150f., StBoT 44:396f.
š. may be attested twice in Akk. texts from Emar: 2 uttallu Z[ABA]R ša šar-ba-aš-ši Huehnergard, RA 77:22-25 Text 4:20 (“two b[ronz]e utallu's of cushion shape(?)”), w. comm. 34 (“šar-ba-aš-ši … may be Hittite šarpašši- ‘cushion’”); 1 uttallu ZABAR ša šar-ba-aš-ši J. Westenholz, Cuneiform Inscriptions in the Collection of the Bible Lands Museum: The Emar Texts (Cuneiform Monographs 13) 14:10 (“1 bronze uttallu-vessel of šarbašši”).  Unfortunately the meaning of Akk. uttallu, listed in inventories and inheritance records remains unknown.
The word is a derivative in -ašši- from 
GIŠ/KUŠšarpa-, q.v. The det. KUŠ “leather” refers to the drape itself, while the det. GIŠ “wood” is a holdover from the word šarpa- “cross-legged chair(?)” with which it is used. Note that the Hieroglyphic Luwian sign THRONUS (see (GIŠ/KUŠ)šarpa- A, end) is often depicted covered with a drape.
For bibliography see GIŠšarpa- B.
Cf. GIŠ/KUŠšarpa- A, šarpašši- A.
[˚šaršašami-] KUB 5.24 ii 43 see šargašam(m)i-.
šart-, šartai-, šartiya- C v.; to smear(?), to wipe; from OS.
pres. sg 3. šar-ta-i KBo 17.43 i 14 (OH/NS?), KBo 17.42 vi 4, šar-ta-iz-zi KBo 21.20 obv. 11 (NH), [šar]-da-a-iz-zi Bo 4869 ii 3 (StBoT 25:103).
pret. sg. 1 šar-ti-ia-nu-un VBoT 120 iii 10 (MH/NS); pl. 3 šar-te-er KUB 36.104 obv. 5 (OS), KBo 13.44 + 44a i 7, šar-ti-er KUB 48.77:3. 
imp. sg. 3 šar-ta-a-id-du KBo 3.8 ii 32 (NS).
verbal noun gen. šar-ta-u-wa-aš KUB 46.32 rev. 5 (NH).
a. performed on a person: (“Pappa was an urianni-man. In [Taru]kka he embezzled soldier breads and marnuan-beer. [They squashed(?)] šarr[uwa-]breads”) µPappan–a LÚuriannin šarā š[(ar)]-te-er (var. šar-ti-er) [AN]A GAL m[arn(uandaš)] MUN-an šuhhaer š–an–ašta eukta “And they smeared Pappa, the urianni-man up. Into a cup of m[arn]uan they poured out salt and he drank it up” KUB 36.104 obv. 5-6 (anecdotes, OS), w. dupl. KBo 13.44 i 7 (NS), KBo 3.34 i 6-8 (NS), KUB 48.77:3-4, ed. Dardano, L'aneddoto 30f. (differently), Soysal, Diss. 10, 83, tr. Ünal, FsHoffner 379 | Ünal’s tentative restoration (“[…squashed]”) in KUB 36.104 obv. 4 and the resulting literal rendering of š. is to be preferred over all previous interpretations; cf. Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri 267 (“sopra spalmarono”), StBoT 23:143 (“‘spülte’ man nach oben”), Melchert, JAOS 122:327.
b. performed on feet: [(LÚhartag)]aš LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·-an GÌR.HI.A–ŠUNU šËrhit šar-ta-i (var. [šar]-da-a-iz-zi) ta namma tarukzi “The man (with) a bear mask (lit. bear man) wipes the feet of the performers with šerha-cloth(?); then he dances” KBo 17.43 i 14 (fest., OS), w. dupls. KBo 17.99 i 5-6 (MS), KBo 17.18 ii 16 (OS), KBo 17.42:3-5 (OH/NS), Bo 4869 ii 1-2, translit. StBoT 25:105.
c. performed on a tongue: nu–za MUNUShāšauwaš [B]A[PP]IR dāu n–an–kan EME–ŠU šar-ta-a-id-du EGIR–ŠU!–ma–an IŠTU Ì.NUN iškiddu namma–an IŠTU LÀL!-it EME–ŠU arha ānšdu “Let the hašawa-woman take [beer w]ort(?) and smear his tongue. Then let her anoint it with butter. Then let her wipe off his tongue with honey” KBo 3.8 ii 31-34 (incant., NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:155f., AlHeth 21.
d. performed on an unknown body part: n–aš kuwapi–pat SAﬁ-ešzi nu k≠Ë±(?)[…] menahhanda IŠTU DUGÚTUL zanu[zzi … ] šer wahnuzzi n–at kuwapi [ …] GAM-ta šar-ta-iz-zi “And when it (i.e., the herb) becomes red, this(?) […] opposite he cooks […] in a kettle. He waves […] over […] And when/where it […], he smears […] down” KBo 21.20 i 8-11 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 19:42f.
e. object fine oil: (“When the patient washes himself. The Old Woman says: ‘I washed myself with water on the road. Wash yourself with rainwater. I stepped on a flint, but in the house […]’”) nu–kan ŠA É.GAL-LIM <(šuhhi)> Ì.DÙG.GA šer ≠šar±-ti-ia-nu-≠un± “‘And I have smeared the fine oil <on the roof> of the palace’ (She calls the patient by name)” VBoT 120 iii 9-10 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 33.119:12 (NS), ed. ChS I/5:139 (“habe ich … gestrichen”).
f. performed on a house by a flood: (“The fool’s house is built in the path of the flood”) karaÏz lāh[uanza] n–at parā šar-ta-i n–a[t–kan] aruna [pedai] “The flood will flow, wash (lit. wipe) it away and [carry] it to the sea” KUB 36.110 iii 19-21 (benediction of Labarna, OS), ed. parā 1 nn, Hoffner, AlHeth 20f. (no tr.), StBoT 23:143 (“spült es nun hinaus”), Archi, FsMeriggi2 50f. (“la spazzano via”). 
g. as a name of a festival: 1 EZEN› Ëšhar šar-ta-u-wa-aš “One festival of smearing/wiping (of) blood” KUB 46.32 rev. 5 (cult inventory, NH), cf. Neu, GsKro-nasser 126 (“Fest des Blutspülens(?)”) | unfortunately the context provides no clue whether the blood is the substance smeared or stands for the substance to be wiped away.
Normally, the person or object that is being smeared(?) stands in the acc. The substance or instrument with which one “smears” in that construction is expressed with an instr. only once (b). Only in usage e does the substance function as the obj. with a dat.-loc. for the place where it is being applied. In general, the verb seems to denote the application of a viscous liquid substance or emulsion. 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 20f. (“sprinkle, rub”); Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 143 (“spülen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 476 (“bestreichen, umspülen”); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 161 (“bestreichen, umspülen”); Pecchioli Daddi, Hethitica 8 (1987) 365 (“enduire, graisser, belayer, frotter, effacer”); Dardano, L’aneddoto (1997) 78; Melchert, JAOS 122 (2002) 326f. (“to wipe, smear” but also more violently “to slap”).
Cf. URUDUšartal.
URUDUšartal n. neut.; a trowel(?), spatula(?); ENS?.†
nom.-acc. URUDU šar-ta-al KBo 22.142 iv 11 (pre-NS/ENS).
(“1 bronze knife/sword, […] bronze […], one large bronze ax, one small bronze ax, […] wrapped together, 1 leather halzāšši- of a leatherworker”) [… šiwa]n (dupl. […]x URUDUšiwal) daššu 1 šiwan (dupl. šiwal) SIG 1 URUDUšar-ta-al § “[One?] heavy [aw]l/punch, one thin (i.e., light?) awl/punch, one trowel(?)” KBo 22.142 iv 11 (pre-NS/ENS?), w. dupl. KBo 46.15:10 + HFAC 13:3 (NS), ed. StBoT 44:450. 
The paragraph contains no exclusively military implements (i.e., weapons) since GÍR “sword, knife” and PA_ŠU-axes, although used in battle, are also domestic tools. For šiwan/l see below, s.v. The mention of the KUŠhalzišši- of a leatherworker seems to indicate that this is a list of tools, some sharp. If this word is related to the verb šartai- then perhaps this is a tool that spreads or smears, i.e., a trowel or spatula.
For the derived nouns in -al see van Brock, RHA XX/71:67-168, Oettinger, “Indo-Hittite” Hypothese 16f., Starke, StBoT 31:317-336.
Cf. huhupal, išhiyal, GIŠniniyal, puriyal, GIŠtarmal, etc.
Soysal, Or NS 58 (1989) 185 n. 54 (“vielleicht … eine Hieb- und Stichwaffe”); Melchert, JAOS 122 (2002) 327 (“either a kind of ‘scraper’ or a tool used to apply some substance”).
Cf. šart-/šartai-/šartiya-.
¬šardi- A n. com.; (mng. unkn.).†
sg. nom. ¬šar-di-iš KUB 52.91 ii 5 (NH).
(“Thus spoke the priest of Zinduhi: ‘When I laid down to sleep’”) nu–wa–kan ¬šar-di-iš UGU išparzaš nu–wa nahšarinun nu–wa–kan UGU išparzahhun x x x EGIR-pa šuppariyanun “A š. jumped up. I became afraid and I jumped up. [π…] I fell asleep again” KUB 52.91 ii 5-iii 1 (oracle question, NH), ed. Soysal, JANER 4:76 n. 4 (“the support” (of the bed)), tr. Archi, KUB 52 iv.
This could be an example of šardiya- “ally” (as Archi, KUB 52 iv, suggests w. his tr. “Gefährte,” see also StBoT 18:56 n. 61). However, due to its marker wedges and the lack of -ia- in the stem and because it makes little sense to be afraid of an ally, it has, for the time being been kept separate.
Soysal, JANER 4 (2004) 76 n. 4 (“the support (= a mounting or frame of the bed?).”
Cf. šardi- B, (LÚ)šardiya- A, šardiyatar. 
šardi- B n.; help; from MH/MS.†
d.-l. šar-di-ia KUB 14.1 obv. 53, 68 (MH/MS), KBo 16.27 i 20 (MH/MS), KUB 31.45 left col. 20 (MH/MS), KUB 36.127 obv. (12) (MH/MS), HKM 65:10 (MH/MS), KUB 19.13 ii (37) (Murš. II), 573/s:4 (StBoT 18:56, NS), šar-ti-ia KBo 16.44:13 (MS), KUB 40.2 obv. 6 (NS).
Theoretically these forms could also be an allative from an -a-stem šardiya-.
(“And if the king of Mittanni begins hostilities with Kizzuwatna, and [if it pleas]es His Majesty”) (Akk.) dUTU-ši ištu ÉRIN.MEŠ[h]uradiya ana ti-il-lu-ti-ka allak “My Majesty will go to your aid with my soldiers” KBo 1.5 iii 4-5 (Akk. Šunaššura treaty), ed. PD 100f. = (Hitt.) n–aš ANA µŠ[un]aššu[ra šar]-di-ia paizzi “He will go to Šunaššura to help” KUB 36.127 obv. 11-12 (Hitt. Šunaššura treaty, MH/NS), ed. del Monte, OA 20:219 (“in appoggio”).
(Madduwatta, the tributary ruler of Zippašla was defeated and fled with only a few of his supporters. “Wh[en the father] of My Majesty [heard]”) [nu] µPišenin [GAL LÚ.MEŠo IŠ]T[U] ÉRIN.[MEŠ] ANŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A ANA µMadduwatta šar-di-ia IŠPUR “He sent Pišeni, [the chief of the …], to Madduwatta [with] infantry and horse troops to help” KUB 14.1 obv. 53 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 14f., tr. DiplTexts™ 156; (“Dalawa began hostilities. Madduwatta wrote to Kišnapili suggesting: ‘I will go attack Dalawa. You (pl.) go to Hinduwa. I will attack Dalawa’”) nu–wa namma ÉRIN.MEŠ URUDalauwa ANA URUHinduwa šar-di-ia UL uizz[i] “And after that the troops of Dalawa will not come to Hinduwa to help. (You (pl.) can destroy Hinduwa)” KUB 14.1 obv. 67-68, ed. Madd. 16f., tr. DiplTexts™ 156; cf. […] LÚ.KÚR-ya šar-di-ia lË uwa[tteni] “Do not come to the enemy to help” KUB 13.27 obv.! 13 (treaty w. Kaška, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 118 (“zu Hilfe”); cf. […š]ar-di-ia–ma ANA dUTU-ŠI […] KBo 8.35 i 16 (treaty, MH/MS); (“Regarding the two Malazziyan men—Pišiššihli and Naištuwarri—whom <you hold> captive: Secure(?) them hands and feet, then mount them on horses”) ÉRIN.MEŠ–ya–šmaš šar-di-ia tiyaddu “and let a troop stand ready to help you (pl.)” HKM 65:10 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 242f. (“Ihnen soll auch die Fusstruppe zu Hilfe treten”); (“When the king (lit. man) of Assyria [heard], he [came] with his infantry and horse troops and he […-d] in Taidi”) [n]–aš ANA µŠuttarna šar[-di-ia uit] “He [came] to Šuttarna (ruler of Mittanni) to he[lp]” KUB 19.13 + KUB 19.14 ii 35-37 (DŠ frag. 35), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:111 (“to the help”), tr. del Monte, L’annalistica 141 (“[andò] a Taita in aiuto 
di Šuttarna”); nu–wa kūš DINGIR.MEŠ dMu[wanuš dMuwattalliš U DINGIR GIBIL] dIM-ni šar-ti-i[a …] “These gods: Mu[wanu, Muwattalli and the ‘new’ god, …] to the Stormgod to help” KUB 40.2 obv. 5-6 (cult of Išhara in Kizzuwatna, NS), ed. Kizz. 60f. (“came to the Stormgod’s rescue”); nu–tta šar-di-ia–ma x[…] KUB 31.45 left col. 20 (MH/MS); probably here […]-ši–kan šar-ti-i[a…] KUB 48.87:6 (hist., NS); […] šar-di-ia lË x[…] KBo 16.27 i 20 (treaty w. Kaška, Arn. I/MS), translit. Kaškäer 135; šumeš–a–šši šar-ti-ia / […-te]ni “You will […] to help him” KBo 16.44:13 (treaty frag., MS); n–aš dU-ni šar-di-ia tiËt “He went to the Stormgod to help (and the Stormgod defeated his enemy)” KUB 31.147 ii 25-26 (rit., MH/NS); cf. par. KUB 41.4 iii 2-3.
The translation of the dative expression with the English infinitive is solely due to the necessities of English. 
Ungnad, OLZ 26 (1923) 572 n. 3 (“Helfer”); Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 167 (also “Hilfe, Hilfsheer”?); Neu, StBoT 18 (1974) 56 (“Hilfe” > “(der Mann) der Hilfe” > “Helfer”(?)); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 117-127 (“ally,” “helper from outside” = ÉRIN.MEŠ TILLATU “troops sent by one ally/tributary to another”).
Cf. (LÚ)šardiya- A; warri-.
(LÚ)šardiya- A n.; com.; ally, supporter, helper; written syll.; from OS.†
sg. nom. šar-di-ia-aš KBo 6.3 ii 29 (OH/ENS), KBo 13.31 iv 10 (MS), KBo 5.13 ii 9, 10, 12, 16 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 39, 43 (Muw. II), KUB 21.5 iii 59 (Muw. II), LÚšar-di-aš KUB 37.223 obv. C2 (OS), šar-ti-ia-aš HroznŸ, CH pl. V = LH pl. 1a ii 13 (OS), KBo 26.20 iii 21 (NS); acc. šar-ti-an HroznŸ, CH pl. V = LH pl. 1a ii 14 (OS), šar-di-aš(-ša-an) (for šardian–šan) KBo 3.22:37 (OS) [claimed as a gen. by some; see below], šar-di-ia-an KBo 6.3 ii 32 (OH/NS).
pl. nom. [šar-d]i-i-eš HroznŸ, CH pl. V = LH pl. 1a ii 10 (OS), [LÚ].MEŠšar-te-e-eš KBo 8.37 rev. 10 (MH/NS); [gen. (see comments on KBo 3.22:37, usage a, below)].
broken šar-ti-i[a(-) …] KUB 48.87:6, š[ar?-…] KBo 6.4 iii 29 (NH). 
According to Neu, StBoT 18:56 n. 61, the sg. nom. ¬šar-di-iš belongs here as a syncopated variant of šardiyaš (cf. hantezziš/
hantezziyaš). For this word see ¬šardi- A.
(Sum.) [É]RIN.KASKAL.KUR.LÁ = (Akk.) ti-el-la-tù = (Hitt.) [ša]r-ti-ia-aš KBo 26.20 iii 21, ed. MSL 17:111, cf. Del Monte, OA 20:210 n. 16 and Beal, THeth 20:117; there is no advantage to “ILLAT.LÁ” instead of MSL 17’s purely descriptive writing KASKAL.KUR.LÁ since the function of the LÁ, which is not attested in the Mesopotamian writings, is by no means clear. Perhaps KASKAL.KUR had a TIL˛ reading, cf. Akk. tillatu.
a. in military context: (“For a second time Piyūšti, king of Hatti came”) šar-di-aš-ša-an-na kuin uwatet š–uš ≠URUŠal±[(amp)i …] “and in Šalampa [I/he …-d] his ally whom he had brought” KBo 3.22:37 (Anitta, OS), w. dupl. KUB 36.98a:6-7 (NS), ed. StBoT 18:12f., StMed. 13:32f. | we cannot follow Neu, StBoT 18:13, 56, 142, D. Yoshida, THeth 13:88, Beal, THeth 20:117 and Carruba, StMed. 13:32f., 146, who interpret šardiaššanna (< šardian–šan–a) as an OH genitive in -an, a partitive genitive dependent upon kuin; see doubts expressed by Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:79 n. 51; ANA LÚ LÚšar-di-aš edi nea “An ally will desert the Man (i.e., the king). (They will overthrow the cities. The enemy will defeat the Man)” etc. KUB 37.223 obv. C2 (omen apodosis, OS), ed. nai- 3 b 1' b' 2", DBH 12:139f., Güterbock, FsReiner 152 (“the man’s helper will turn away”), StBoT 9:78f. (“sein Bundesgenosse”); […] šar-di-ia-aš–šiš kiša “[… ] will become his ally” KBo 13.31 iv 10 (omen apodosis, MS); […]x Mizran PAP-ši URUM[izr-…] / [LÚ.]MEŠšar-te-e-eš Ëštu KBo 8.37 rev. 9-10 (Kuruštama treaty, MH/NS) | the lack of agreement between the plur. š. and the sing. Ëštu may be due to an ad sensum construction in which “the allies” are perceived as a collective; n–aš–šan ŠU.HI.A–ŠU GÌR.MEŠ–ŠU–ya SIGﬁ-atten namma–aš–ka[n] ANA ANŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A tittanutten ÉRIN.MEŠ–ya–šmaš šar-di-ia tiyaddu “Secure them (i.e., prisoners) hands and feet, then put them on horseback, and let a troop accompany them for help (i.e., as an escort)” HKM 65:8-10 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 242f.; for ÉRIN.MEŠ TILLATU see THeth 20:117-127.
b. (in treaties) one person to another: nu–za ANA dUTU-ŠI warriš GÉŠPU-ašš–a šar-di-ia-aš Ëš katta–ma–za ANA DUMU.MEŠ dUTU-ŠI N¸R¸RUM šar-di-ia-aš GÉŠPU-ašš–a Ëš § katta–ma tuel ŠA µKupanta-dLAMMA DUMU.MEŠ–KA hašša hanzašša NA_RA_RU GÉŠPU šar-di-ia-aš-ša ašandu § … nu–šmaš–za UL warriš UL–<š>maš–za GÉŠPU šar-di-ia-aš “Be a help and a force (and) an ally for His Majesty. And later be a help, ally and force for the children of His Majesty. § Later may your children, all future generations, O Kupanta-LAMMA, be a help, a force and an ally §” (If in the future you Kupanta-LAMMA do not protect His Majesty (and) the children of His Majesty for lordship, and you step aside) “and you are not a help for them; and you are not a force (and) ally to them” KBo 5.13 ii 8-12, 15-16 (Kupanta-LAMMA treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:122f., tr. DiplTexts™ 77 (“effective and strong helper”); nu–za zik µAlakšanduš ANA µKupanta-dLAMMA NA_RA_RUM (var. nawi) šar-di-aš (var. šar-di-ia-aš) GÉŠPU-ašš–a Ëš … nu 1-aš 1-edani warriš (var. warri) šar-di-ia-aš GÉŠPU-ašš–a Ëšdu “You, Alakšandu, be a help, ally and force for Kupanta-LAMMA. (Protect him and let him protect you. …) Let one be a help, ally and force to the other” KUB 21.5 iii 54-55, 58-59 (Alakš. treaty, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.1 iii 38-39, 43, ed. SV 2:72f., tr. DiplTexts™ 90f. (“effective and strong helper”), cf. Hagenbuchner, BMECCJ 7:101f. (GÉŠPU-aš š. “‘starker Helfer’ (wörtl.: Helfer der Stärke)”) | the interpretation of GÉŠPU-aš as gen. founders on the various sequences of the three terms and of the placement of -ya.
c. (in the laws): (“If someone elopes with a woman (lit.: causes a woman to run away)”) n[u–kan šar-d]i-i-eš āppan anda pā≠nzi± (var. EGIR-anda–m≠a–šmaš±–k[an [ša]r-≠di±-ia-aš paizzi) “and supporters (of the parents) go after (var. a group of supporters goes after) them, (if two or three men die, there is no compensation)” KBo 6.2 + HroznŸ CH pl. V = LH pl. 1a ii 10 (Laws § 37, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 29-30 (ENS), ed. LH 44; takku LÚ.U⁄·.≠LU.MEŠ± hannešni appā[nt]eš nu (var. nu–šmaš) šar-ti-ia-aš (var. šar-di-ia-aš) kuiški p[(aizzi)] takku hannešnaš išhāš lË[la]niatta (var. n–ašta [hann]ittalwaš kartimmi~
yantari) [ o ]x? šar-ti-an-n[a (var. šar-di-ia-an) (walhz)i] “If people are engaged in a lawsuit and some supporter (of one of them) goes (var. adds: to them), if (one) party to the lawsuit becomes enraged and strikes the supporter (so that he dies, there shall be no compensation)” KBo 6.2 + HroznŸ, CH pl. V = LH pl. 1a ii 13-17 (Laws § 38, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 31-33 (ENS), ed. LH 44f. (“supporter”); similarly KBo 6.4 iii 28-30 (Laws § XXXII, NH).
d. other: in broken context: […] / šar-di-aš-ša ≠x x± [?] pár-ga[-…] KBo 22.129 obv. 14 (MS); unclear if here or šarti- B: [pahh]aššanuwan arnut šar-d[i-…] KUB 26.7 i 5 (protocol, MS). 
One other ex., mostly broken away, was proposed by Beckman, JAOS 118:592: [… LÚ.MEŠšar-di-]ú-uš Ëšten KUB 26.29 obv. 13 (protocol, MH?/NS), ed. Klengel, ZA 57:227, de Martino, Eothen 5:77f. (both reading -ú-uš, without restoration or tr.) | there would seem no reason for a plene writing -ú-uš on šardiya-. 
With Neu, this word perhaps began as a free-standing genitive of the word šardi(ya?)- “he of help” and became a declinable noun. Cf. tayazzilaš “(he) of theft” > tayazzila- “thief.” Alternatively, it could be a -ya- derivation on the stem šardi-, with the same semantic development.
Ungnad, OLZ 26 (1923) 572 n. 3 (“Helfer”); Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 167 (“Hilfe, Hilfsheer”); Sommer, AU (1932) 180f. n. 3 (“Helfer, Beistand”); Riemschneider, StBoT 9 (1970) 82 (= Akk. rÏœu “Bundesgenosse”); Neu, StBoT 18 (1974) 56 (“Hilfe” > “(der Mann) der Hilfe” > “Helfer”(?)); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 117-127 (“ally,” “helper from outside,” ÉRIN.MEŠ TILLATU “troops sent by one ally/tributary to another”); Hagenbuchner, BMECCJ 7 (1993) 101f., 105 (on expressions of help in treaties); Haase, WO 34 (2004) 51f. (“rescuer, Befreier”).
Cf. šardi- A(?), šardi- B, šardiyatar.
šardiya- B n. see šardi- B.
šartiya- C v. see šart-.
šardiyatar n. neut.; alliance, help.†
nom.-acc. šar-di-i[a-tar] KBo 1.33:1.
d.-l. šar-di-ia-an-ni KUB 59.64 ii 13, [šar-di]-an-ni KBo 10.2 ii 15.
(Sum.) [NAM].Á.DAH = (Akk.) […] = (Hitt.) šar-di-i[a-tar] KBo 1.33:1, ed. MSL 13.145.
ERÍN.MEŠ–ya–šmaš ŠA KUR URU[Halpa šar-di]-an-ni kattan Ëšta “And the troops of Aleppo were with them in alliance” KBo 10.2 ii 14-15 (ann., Hatt. I/NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 18:3 (“for help”), Imparati, SCO 14:48f. (“[per aiut]o”], StMed 12:52f. (“in alleanza”); […]x-ti šar-di-ia-an-ni uwandu “and let them come […] in alliance/for help [to …]” KUB 59.64 ii 13 (rit., NS), cf. StBoT 18:56 as Bo 3090.
The word means “the state of being an ally/supporter” rather than “a contract for support,” for which see takšul and išhiul. 
Neu, StBoT 18 (1974) 56 (“Hilfe”).
šartū n.?; (a dance step); MH/NS.†
(“The dancers dance: …” §) EGIR–ŠU–ma tūwaza šar-tu-u 1–ŠU § EGIR–ŠU–ma tūwaza šar-tu-u ānki § EGIR–ŠU–ma pedi–ši šar-tu-u 1-anki § EGIR–ŠU–ma pedi–ši šar-tu-u ānki § EGIR–ŠU–ma lahšanili § EGIR–ŠU–ma huppiššanili § “Next, far apart, š. once. § Next, far apart, š. x-times. § Next, on the spot, š. once. § Next, on the spot, š. x-times. § Then, in the manner of (the town of) Lahšan (= URULihz/šina/URULahzina). § Then, in the manner of (the town of) Hupišna. §” KUB 4.1 iv left col. 35-40 (MH/NS), ed. Eothen 2:36-38; cf. § EGIR–ŠU–ma lapatiš šal?kupariš § EGIR–ŠU–ma tūwaz šar-tu-u šupanni § EGIR–ŠU–ma kalliparÏ § ibid. iv right col. 33-35 | Puhvel, HED 1-2:73, de Martino, Eothen 2:39, and Eichner, IE Numerals 42f., consider a-an-ki to be equivalent to 1-anki = 1-ŠU. However, this would make the first and second sentences identical to one another, and the third and fourth identical to one another. The a is unlikely to be a miswritten 2 since it occurs twice, and the text is otherwise carefully written. 
De Martino, Eothen 2:38, suggests that š. is an Akkadian noun derived from sâru “to whirl, circle, dance” (cf. CAD S s.v.), which is semantically appealing, but problematic from a morphological point of view: as a middle u verb the noun should be and is attested as sûrtu (cf. CAD S s.v.). Apart from that the plene writing of the final vowel would be hard to explain. We therefore take it as “Hittite” (perhaps a Hattic lw.) until shown otherwise.
GIŠšartuliya- A n. com.; (mng. unkn.); pre-NH/NS.†
sg. nom. [GIŠša]r-tu-li-ia-aš KUB 39.41 rev. 12 (pre-NH/NS); sg. acc. GIŠšar-tu-li-ia-an KUB 39.41 rev. 11.
GIŠšar-tu-li-ia-an kuw[api tiyanzi(?)] / [GIŠša]r-tu-li-ia-aš–wa ā[ra Ëšdu] “Wh[en they place(?)] the š., [the Old Woman(?) says:] ‘[Let] the š. be p[ermitted … ]’” KUB 39.41 rev. 11-12 (funerary rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kassian et al., Funerary 648f., Otten, OLZ 57:231f. | for the restoration āra Ëšdu see lines 14 and 17, which restore each other; for tiyanzi see line 1 (THeth 24:36f. n. 158); on ll. 13f. see THeth 24:36f. n. 158. š. must be nom. in l. 12 on analogy with šelin (l. 10) and šËliš (l. 13). Since the words are uttered simultaneously w. the actions, kuwapi must be temporal.
For discussion and lit. see šartuliya- B, šartu~
liyalli-.
šartuliya- B v.; (an action performed at the threshing floor); pre-NH/NS.†
pres. pl. 3 [ša]r-tu-li-ia-an-zi KUB 39.43:4 (pre-NH/NS), šar-[tu-li-ia-an-zi] KUB 39.45 obv. 14 (pre-NH/NS), [šar-tu-li-i]a-an-zi KUB 39.6 ii 12 (pre-NH/NS).
§ [IN]A UD.10.KAM–ma ŠA GIŠA[(PIN UD-az KISLAH-i) (ša)]r-tu-li-ia-an-zi [(GEﬂ-ti–ma–an x-x) …] § “The tenth day — the day of the plow: They š. on the threshing floor. At night, however, […] it/him” KUB 39.43:3-4 (funerary rit. outline, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 39.6 ii 11-12, KUB 39.45 obv. 14, ed. HTR 48f., Kassian et al., Funerary 628f., 634f., tr. Christmann-Franck, RHA XXIX:73 (no tr.).
The fact that this action is done on the threshing floor might point to the word meaning “to thresh” or “to winnow.”
Cf. GIŠšartuliya- A, šartuliyalli-.
šartuliyalli- n. neut.; (mng. unkn.); pre-NH/NS.†
nom.-acc. šar-tu-li-ia-al-li KUB 39.14 iv 1; nom.-acc. or sg. loc.(?) šar-tu-li-ia-li KBo 40.311 obv. 1 + KUB 39.14 ii 5, šar-tu-[li-ia-li] ibid. iii 1.
broken: šar-du-li-i[a-…] KBo 46.289:5 here?, so according to Haas, OLZ 100:61.
[… na]mma DUG.HI.A KAŠ [DUG.HI.A GEŠTIN] DUG.HI.A tawal [DUG.HI.A w]alhi šannapila / [o-]x šar-tu-li-ia-li [du]warniyanzi “Then they [s]mash empty beer jugs, [wine jugs], tawal jugs, [w]alhi [jugs …] and/on the š.” KUB 39.14 ii 2-6 + KBo 40.311 obv. 1-2 (10th day, funerary rit.), ed. Otten, HTR 80f. (no tr.), Kassian et al., Funerary 456f. (no tr.), 465 (suggesting to restore [IŠTU] before š. (“they break empty vessels with the help of the š. object”), tr. Christmann-Franck, RHA XXIX:73 (acc., no tr.); šar-tu-[li-ia-li]-ša-an / ≠x-x±[o o(?)-]≠eš±zi(?) nu x[o o o(?)]x apāš dāi / GUD.H[I.A–m]a kuiËš [t]ūriyanteš n–uš had[dan]zi “(on?) the š., […]-s and […] (s)he takes/places, while they sla[ugh]ter the oxen which are harnessed” KUB 39.14 iii 1-4 + KBo 40.311 rev. 1-2, ed. Kassian et al., Funerary 458f. (“[(The person) w]h[o …] š.-ob[ject?]” reading [k]u-i[š?] at the beginning of line 2); šar-tu-li-ia-al-li–ya–wa–šši–šan <šarrezzi> lË kuiški hannari–ya lË kuiški “Let no one <withdraw> the š. from him, and let no one legally contest (his right to it)” KUB 39.14 iv 1-2, ed. HTR 82f., Kassian et al., Funerary 462f. (both no tr.) | for the emendation see the similar passage in a funerary rit. in šarra- D 2 b. The construction with šarre- and -šan “to withdraw something from someone” has the person to be deprived in the dat.(-loc.) and that which he should be deprived of in the acc. Thus šartuliyalli- in KUB 39.14 iv 1 should be an acc., and as a consequence š. should be neuter. The form šartuliyal(l)i- may be either sg. or pl./coll. In the first two passages š. might be either nom.-acc. or dat.-loc. It is probably derived from GIŠšartuliya- q.v. For derivatives in -al(l)i- with single and double spelling of the -l- as Luw. loanwords or Luwian influenced nouns see Rieken, HS 107:42-53.
A possible tr. “threshing sledge(?)” is based on the existence of a verb and noun šartuliya-, and on the fact that 1) the verb’s action is performed on the threshing floor, 2) no verb “to thresh” is yet attested in Hittite (unless it is huek- with AlHeth 31), 3) the action is done on day ten of the royal funerary ritual which is called “the day of the plow,” 4) the context of KUB 39.14 iii 1-4 which suggests that oxen were harnessed to it, and oxen often are used for pulling threshing sledges. Although threshing is only done at harvest time, whereas the funerary ritual presumably occurred soon after a death that could occur in any time of year, an acted-out, symbolic plowing or threshing might have accompanied the king’s funeral. Kronasser’s EHS 1:212f. translation “(rechtlicher Begriff; Art Servitut)” seems unlikely since the ending -alli- is not generally used to form abstracts.
Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 212f. (neut., “(rechtlicher Begriff; Art Servitut oder Symbol dafür?)”); Kassian et al., Funerary (2002) 465f. (“probably nomen instrumenti” derived from GIŠšartuliya-, or a substantivized adj. from an original stem in -alla-); Stefanini, apud Kassian et al., Funerary (2002) 465 n. 5 (“cudgel”?).
Cf. GIŠšartuliya- A, šartuliya- B .
[GIŠ?]šartūpa- n.; (mng. unkn.); pre-NH/NS.†
KBo 17.58 i 3 (rit., pre-NH/NS); it could also be read [n]etūpa-, q.v.
šāru A n. neut.; booty, plunder; from MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. ša-a-ru KBo 5.8 iii 37, iv 13 (Murš. II), KUB 8.34 iii 12, 20 (NS); dat.-loc. ša-a-ru-i KBo 5.8 i 39 (Murš. II), ša-a-ru-ú-i KBo 4.4 iv 13 (Murš. II); pl. nom.-acc. ša-a-ru-wa KUB 26.73:4, ša-a-ru-w[a?] KUB 34.26 iv 11 = KBo 14.3 iv 36 (Šupp. I).
For nom.-acc. neut. šāru KBo 34.29:12, 13(?) (MS), KBo 34.25:4, 5 (MS?), see šāru B. For ša-a-ru-un KUB 34.23 ii 29, sg. acc. com according to HW 187, read ša-a-ru-un-t[i-eš(?)] with Güterbock, DŠ 85 (frag. 26) and Weitenberg, U-Stämme 440 n. 416 for which see šaruwe-/šaruwai-. For gen. šarwaš KBo 34.29:12 (MS), KBo 34.25:4 (MS?), KBo 34.27:5 (MS) see šaru- C.
[nu]–kan URUAripšān zahhiyaz katta! (text: UL) dahhun [n]–an URUHattuši hūmantÏ ša-a-ru-ú-i maniyahhun “I took the city A. in battle, and turned it over to all the Hittites for plunder” KBo 4.4 iv 12-13, ed. AM 134f. | for its passive counterpart (“to be plundered”) compare the inf. I šārūwauwanzi of the v. šaruwai- q.v. in KBo 4.4 iv 21, 24; nu KARAŠ.HI.A ša-a-ru-i tamedaz pan Ëšta [nu]–za halkin GEŠTIN–ya daškit “The army had gone for booty elsewhere [and] started taking grain and wine” KBo 5.8 i 39, ed. AM 150f.; mahhan–ma EGIR-pa uwanun nu ša-a-ru kuit NAM.RA GUD UDU AKŠUD LÚ.MEŠŠU.DIB–ya kuin epper n–an INA URUAltanna arha dalahhun “As I came back, I left in the city of Altanna, the booty—people to be resettled, cattle (and) sheep—which I found (there) and the prisoners of war whom they (i.e., Hittite soldiers) had seized (and I advanced to Mount Kaššu)” KBo 5.8 iii 37-39, ed. AM 158f.; nu–mu–kan ša-a-ru kuit NAM.RA GUD UDU mekki makkiššan Ëšta nu–kan namma ammuk IŠTU KARAŠ arha UL pāun “And because the booty—people to be resettled, cattle, (and) sheep—had become far too numerous for me, I no longer set out with the army” KBo 5.8 iv 13-15, ed. AM 160-163; nu m[ahha]n LÚ.KÚR ša-a-ru-w[a(-)…] išhuwaiš “[When] the enemy had cast (away) the boot[y(pl.)], ([he] fled)” KBo 14.3 iv 36 + KBo 40.293:10 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:76 (without KBo 40.293), translit. Groddek, NABU 1998:84; (In the apodoses of omen texts) zahhiya LÚ.KÚR hull[ami nu?] ša-a-ru udumeni ”[I will] defeat the enemy in battle [and] we shall bring back booty” KUB 8.34 iii 11-12 (sign of KI.GUB, NS), ed. DBH 12:100, 102 (differently); cf. ibid. 20; […hā]ršta šar-wa-aš ša-a-ru[(-)…] KBo 34.29 rev. 12.
Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 172.
Cf. šaruwe-/šaruwai-, ˚šarušša-.
šāru B n. neut.; (an evil force); MS(?).†
nom.-acc. ša-a-ru KBo 34.25:4, 5 (MS?), KBo 34.29 rev.? 12, (13) (MS?), KBo 34.27 i 5 (MS?).
[… išh]anāš ša-a-ru kištāti šarwaš š[a-a-ru] / [kišt]āti halhaltaniyaš ša-a-ru kištā[ti] “[…;] the š. of the [bl]ood was extinguished; the š. of the šarwa- was [ex]tinguished; the š. of the halhaltani(ya)- [was] extinguished” KBo 34.25:4-5 (rit., MS?); [… ša-a-ru hā]ršta šarwaš ša-a-ru [hāršta] / [halhaltaniyaš?] ša-a-ru hāršta […] KBo 34.29 rev.? 12 (MS?); [š]arwaš ša-a-r[u …] / GIŠ≠w±arpin[(-)…] / parhta lalān 
[ …] “[She …-ed] the š. of the šarwa-, she expelled the wooden warpin[(-)…]; [she …-ed] the tongue” KBo 34.27 i 5-7 (MS?) | the ša signs were collated from the photograph by Košak (pers. comm.). For the joining of the three fragments see StBoT 39:21 and hetkonk under 214/b, 224/b and 826/c. [… iš?-h]a?-na-a-aš shows the plene writing of the final syllable found in some OH (KBo 17.1 iv 8, OS) and MH texts (KBo 15.10 i 1, 20, 32, etc., MH/MS).
We have attributed these occurrences to a šāru B and distinguished it from šāru A “plunder” or (NINDA)šarwa-. šāru B in its contexts denotes an evil force (like papratar, pahhur, etc.) which must be broken up like hard ground(?) (harš-), or extinguished (kišt-).
šaru- C n.; (an anatomical term); MS(?).†
gen. šar-wa-aš KBo 34.25:4 (MS?), KBo 34.29 rev.? 12 (MS?), KBo 34.27 i 5 (MS?).
For transliteration and translation of the exx. see šāru B. Two out of the three genitive nouns dependent upon šāru B in these exx. are parts of the human body (ešhar, halhaltani(ya)-); on the latter cf. HW™ H 27 (“Körperteil möglich”). Note also the presence of the tongue in KBo 34.27 i 7. The third dependent genitive, šar-wa-aš, might belong to šāru A “plunder” or to (NINDA)šarwa-. But considering the meaning of the other genitives, it is more likely that it too is a previously unattested anatomical term, šaru- C.
NINDAšarwa-, NINDAšarruwa- n. com.; (a type of bread or pastry); from OS.†
sg. nom. NINDAšar-wa-aš KBo 25.81 obv. 2 (MS), KBo 24.90:2, 7 (NS); acc. NINDAšar-wa-an KBo 26.190 iii 4 (NS), NINDAšar-ru-wa-an KBo 20.94:4 (MS), NINDAšar-r[u- …] BoTU 12A i 6 = KBo 3.34 i 6, NINDAša[r-…] KUB 36.104 obv. 4 (OS); dat.-loc. NINDAšar-ru-i KBo 17.1 i 30 (OS), šar-ru-i KUB 52.73 obv. 8 (NH).
pl. nom. NINDAšar-ru-ú-e-eš KBo 21.90 obv. 5 (OH/MS).
(“Pappa was an urianni-official. In [Taru]kka he embezzled soldier-bread and marnuwan-beer”) NINDAšar-r[u-an(?) markta(?)] “[He embezzled(?)] š.-bread” BoTU 12 A i 6 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 30f. (“sottrase … il pane šarr[uwa-]”), Soysal, Diss. 10, 83 | the reading follows Dardano 30, 78 and traces copied by Forrer, BoTU 12A. The photo, Das Altertum 33:119 seems to support Forrer, but the traces copied by Figulla in KBo 3 look more like -r[i-]; NINDAšar-ru-i–m[(a–šš)]an ÉRIN.MEŠ-az Ëšzi “The troops are sitting on the š.-bread” KBo 17.1 i 30 +ABoT 4a obv. 15 (fest., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 24, ed. StBoT 8:20f.; 5 NINDAšar-wa-aš 30-iš ŠÀ.[BA …] KBo 24.90:7 (fest. frag., NS); cf. ibid. 2, translit. StBoT 8:99 (as 159/k); […] 50 NINDAšar-ru-wa-an 50 NINDAkah[ari-…] KBo 20.94:4 (fest. frag., MS); NINDAšar-ru-ú-e-eš kui≠Ë±š x[…] KBo 21.90 obv. 5 (OH/MS), translit. StBoT 8:99 (as 483/c); in a list of items: 10 NINDAšar-wa-aš KBo 25.81:2 (MS); […]x LUGAL šar-ru-i EGIR-an […] KUB 52.73 obv. 8 (NH).
Otten/Souc√ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 99f.; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 182; Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 161.
Cf. NINDAšarruwant-.
šaruwai- see šaruwe-.
NINDAšarruwant- n; a type of bread or pastry; OS.†
dat.-loc. NINDAšar-ru-wa-an-ti KBo 17.1 ii 7, 26 (OS).
(“When they have caught a live eagle, they bring it while I make soldiers out of clay”) nÚa(n)Úšßan NINDAßar-ru-wa-an-ti t[e?-ehhi] “I p[ut] them on the ß.-bread/pastry” KBo 17.1 ii 7 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:24f.; (“A palace-servant takes the cup (teßßummi-) from the hands of the king and queen; he takes those from the throne and hearth as well”) tÚa(n)Úßßan NINDAßar-ru-wa-an-ti ÉRIN.MEÍ-ti ße¢r d[a¢(i)] “He puts them on top of the troops on the ßarruwa-bread. (He carries the troops and cups and the bronze-spear to the inner-chamber)” KBo 17.1 + KBo 25.3 ii 25-26 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.6 ii 21 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:8, ed. StBoT 8:26f. (without KBo 25.3).
According to Otten/Souc√ek, StBoT 8:99f., š. in KBo 17.1 + KBo 25.3 ii 26 (= StBoT 8 ii 40) is an adj. in -ant- derived from NINDAšarwa-, NINDAšarru(w)a- (q.v.) modifying ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti: “on the troops of/that belong to the šarwa-/šarru(w)a-bread.” These are the troops and the š.-bread mentioned earlier in ii 6-7 (= StBoT 8 ii 20-21). If one reads NINDAšar-ru-wa-an-ti É[RIN.MEŠ-ti tËhhi] in the latter passage this would imply that troops of clay were placed on “troops of šarwa-/šarru(w)a-bread.” Since in the immediate sequel before the second mention of the š.-bread in ii 26 troops are referred to several times (ii 12, 17, 18, 19, 20 = StBoT 8 ii 26, 31, 32, 33, 34 respectively) without any further specification, it would be unclear which of the groups of troops were meant. If, however, in ii 6-7 one does not restore É[RIN.MEŠ-ti] but, for instance t[e-e-eh-hi], the preceding š. is likely to be a noun, as would be by extension the same form in ii 26. Pending the publication of further attestations we therefore prefer to see š. as a noun with Hoffner, AlHeth. 182. For nouns of identical meaning with and without -ant- (apart from the erg. or personifying suffix) see Oettinger, Anatolisch und Indogermanisch 303-305.
Otten/Sou√ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 99f. (“zum ßarruwa-Brot gehörig”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 182 (variant of NINDAßar(ru)wa-); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 161 n. 477 (prefers Otten’s interpretation as adj. because of join piece KBo 25.3).
šaruwe-, šaruwai- v.; to plunder/loot (something), to take (something) as plunder/loot; from MH.
pret. sg. 3 ša-ru-u-wa-it KBo 14.20 i 24 (Murš. II), KUB 34.34:2, 6 (Murš. II), KBo 14.19 ii 31 (Murš. II), ša-ru-wa-it KBo 16.42 rev. 21 (MS), KUB 34.34:4 (Murš. II), KBo 14.19 ii 13 (Murš. II), ša-ru-wa-a-it KUB 19.37 iii 30 (Murš. II), KBo 2.5 ii 13 (Murš. II), šar-wa-it KUB 23.21 obv. 30 (MH/NS). 
pl. 3 ša-ru-wa-er KUB 26.69 vi? 9, ša-ru-wa-a-er KUB 19.37 iii 38, 44 (Murš. II), ša-ru-u-e-er KUB 17.21 ii 5, iii 3 (MH/MS), ša-ar-wa!-er KBo 12.132 obv. 3 (NS). 
inf. ša-a-ru-wa-u-wa-an-zi KBo 4.4 iv 21 (Murš. II), [ša]-a-ru-u-wa-u-wa-an-zi KBo 4.4 iv 24 (Murš. II). 
part. pl. nom. com. ? ša-a-ru-un-t[i-eš] KUB 34.23 ii 29 (NH).
For the stem šaruwe- see the MS pret. plur. 3.
a. to plunder/loot (something): nu KUR URUTapāpanuwa arha warnuer IŠTU NAM.RA.MEŠ–ma–at (var. –ma–an) GUD UDU URUHattušaš ša-ru-wa-a-it “They (i.e., ŠUTI-troops) burned down the land of Tapāpanuwa and (the men of) Hattuša plundered it, including people to be resettled, cattle, (and) sheep” KUB 19.37 iii 29-30 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 16.16 iii 22, ed. AM 174f., tr. del Monte, L’annalistica 123 (“fecero bottino della popolazione (e) il bestiame bovino (ed) ovino”) | the –at of KUB 19.37 resumes neut. KUR, while the –an of the dupl. KBo 16.16 resumes com. URU; cf. similar KBo 7.17 + KBo 16.13 i 7-9 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:171, 180, similar KBo 14.20 + KUB 34.33 + KUB 34.34 i 24, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35 (ann., Murš. II) (line count according to ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:170, 178f.); KBo 14.19 ii 13, 27, 31 (ann. Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:174f., 182f.; KUB 19.37 iv 13-15 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 178f.; n–at huldalānun n–at UL ša-ru-wa-a-er “I spared it (i.e., the enemy town); so they (my troops) did not plunder it” KUB 19.37 iii 37-38 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 176f., similar ibid. iii 43-44; (“I defeated the enemy and killed him”) nu–šši–kan NAM.RA.HI.A GUD UDU arha dahhun n–an tuzziaš–miš ša-ru-wa-a-it “I took from him people to be resettled, cattle, (and) sheep and my army has plundered him” KBo 2.5 ii 12-13 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 182f., tr. del Monte, L’annalistica 126 (“ne fece bottino”); (The enemies beseeched Muršili II as follows:) BE_LI–NI–wa–nnaš ŠA URUAripšā iwar URUHattuši ša-a-ru-wa-u-wa-an-zi lË maniyahti … nu namma dUTU-ŠI URUDukkaman URU-an [ša-]a-ru-u-wa-wa-u-wa-an-zi UL tarnahhun “‘Our lord, do not turn us over to the Hittites to be plundered like the city of Aripša!’ … So, then I, My Majesty, did not allow the city of Dukkama to be plundered” KBo 4.4 iv 20-21, 23-24 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 136f. | for a similar construction with the dat.-loc. šarūi of the noun šāru- A “booty,” q.v., compare KBo 4.4 iv 12-13; LÚ.KÚR.M[EŠ]–ma māhhan KUR URUHatti [GUL-ahher] KUR-e ša-ru-u-e-er n–at–za dāer “How the enemies [struck] Hatti land, plundered the country and took it (that we want to tell you, O gods)” KUB 17.21 ii 4-5 (prayer of Arn. I and Ašm., MS), ed. Kaškäer 154f., Lebrun, Hymnes 135, 144, tr. Hittite Prayers 41; here? kuiËš URU.DIDLI.HI.A x[…] ša-a-ru-un-t[i-eš(?)] “The towns which were loot[ed by …]” KUB 34.23 ii 28-29 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:85, alternatively a form of ˚šarunta/i-, q.v.
b. to take (something) as plunder/loot: (“We defeated the enemy”) NAM.RA.MEŠ–ma GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A [tu]zziyanza šar-wa-it “But the [a]rmy took as plunder people to be resettled, cattle, (and) sheep” KUB 23.21 obv. 29-30 (ann., Arn. I, MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:168f. (“erbeutete … das Heer”), tr. de Martino, Eothen 5:42 (“[l’eser]cito predò”); nu–za KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI BIBRIHI.A ≠GAL±.HI.A ŠA KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI ≠kunnanaš± UN¨T´MEŠ–KUNU–ya ŠA ZABAR TÚG.HI.A–KUNU ša-ru-u-e-er n–at–za arha šarrer “They (i.e., the Kaškeans) took as plunder silver, gold, rhyta, cups of silver, gold, and copper, as well as your implements made of bronze (and) your clothes and divided them among themselves” KUB 31.124 ii 13-15, (prayer of Arn. I and Ašm., MS), w. dupl. KUB 17.21 iii 1-3 (MH/MS), ed. Kaškäer 156f., Lebrun, Hymnes 137, 145, tr. Hittite Prayers 42 | this passage is the only one where š. is attested with the particle -za, reinforcing the notion that they take the items mentioned “for themselves.”
c. broken, this word?: µKumarb[i- …-]an hatrāit […] anda uw[a- … š]a?-ru-wa-it GIŠpatalha[…] ANA µUw[a- …] uwanun KBo 16.42 rev. 20-22 (hist. frag., MS) | restored as ≠a±ruwait s.v. (GIŠ)patalha-. 
Cf. šāru A, ˚šarušša-.
(˚)šarunta/i- n. com.; spring; NH.†
sg. acc. ˚ša-ru-un-ti-in KUB 31.77 i 10 (NH).
abl. TÚLša-ru-un-ta-az KUB 29.4 iii 46. 
(“In a dream there was someone like my father, even come to life again”) nu–wa–kan ˚ša-ru-un-ti-in mān kuinki annallin ŠA ABI ABI–YA (eras.) šarā ūnheškizzi nu–war–an–kan ūhta mān nu–wa–kan wātar mān šarā hūittiyanneškizzi “He was, as it were, sucking up the old spring of my grandfather. He seemed to suck it (dry) while he was, as it were, continually drawing up water” KUB 31.77 i 8-14 (dreams, NH), ed. Otten, Pud. 13f. w. n. 24 (“Wie im Traume mein Vater wieder am Leben (war) und wie er einen alten — (aus den Tagen) meines Großvaters (datierenden) — Brunnen? aushebt?, wie er ihn freilegte, wie er nun Wasser heraufzieht”), de Roos, Diss. 266, 404 (“in de droom was mijn vader op een of andere manier weer in leven en een of andere bron? van vroeger, van mijn grootvader, wekte hij tot leven en hij voedde hem als het ware, en hij haalde een soort water omhoog”) | for this use of mān see mān 1 d; perhaps here KUB 34.23 ii 27-30 (DŠ frag. 26), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:85, rather than šaruwai- a, q.v.; nu DINGIR-LAM URU¸ggataz URUKÁ.DINGIR.RA-az / URUŠūsaz URUElamtaz URUHUR.SAG.KALAM.MA-az / INA URU-LIM ŠA TARAMMI HUR.SAG-az ÍD-az / arunaz hāriyaz welluwaz TÚLša-ru-un-ta-az / nepišaz taknaz IŠTU 7 KASKAL.MEŠ U IŠTU 7 KA.GÌR–ya / huittiyanzi EN.SÍSKUR EGIR-an iyattari § “They draw the deity from Akkade, from Babylon, from Susa, from Elam, from Hursagkalamma, in the city that you love, from the mountain, from the river, from the sea, from the valley, from the meadow, from the spring, from the sky, from the earth, from the 7 roads and from the 7 paths. The sacrificer goes along behind” KUB 29.4 iii 43-48, ed. Kronasser, SchwGotth. 26f. (misread as uššaruntaz but translated as “Quelle”; similarly Tischler, HHwb 188), StBoT 46:292, tr. Collins, CoS I:176 (no translit.). 
The determinative TÚL of KUB 29.4 iii 46 confirms the reading ˚šarunti- previously read as ušarunti- (so Otten and de Roos). The change between a- and i-stem reflects the Luwian i-motion for which cf. Rieken, HS 107:42-53.
Otten, Puduhepa (1975) 13f. (“Brunnen?”); De Roos, Diss. 407 (“bron?”) (both translit. u-ša-ru-un-ti-in). 
šarupp- v.; (mng. unkn.).† 
inf. ša-ru-up-pu-wa-an-z[i] KBo 10.36 rev. 11 (NS).
verbal subst. gen. [ša-ru-]up-pu-u-wa-aš KUB 12.16 i? 13 (MH/NS), ša-r[u-…] Bo 3465 i 14 (coll. Akdo©an).
EGIR-anda–ma ša-ru-up-pu-wa-an-z[i …] / TU‡.HI.A hū[manda] ANA ALAM t[ianzi …] “Afterwards [they] p[ut down] for š.-ing a[ll] the stews for the statue” KBo 10.36 rev. 11-12 (rit., NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 84f. (“zu schlürfen”); (in a list of ingredients for a ritual:) TU‡ BA.BA.ZA [(TU‡ memal) TU‡(.HI.A ša-r)u-]up-pu-u-wa-aš “porridge, meal soup(?), soups for š.-ing” KUB 12.16 i? 12-13 (substitution rit., MH/NS), w. dupls. Bo 3648 obv. 21 (MH/MS), Bo 3465 i 14 (MH/NS), ed. Taracha, Ersetzen 30f. (reading (ša-a)r- in dupl. Bo 3465, but coll. by Akdo©an shows it to be ša-r[u-…). 
Taracha, Ersetzen 108, takes šarupp- as a further variant of the verb šara(p)p-, šarip- “to sip,” q.v. Since we assume the latter to be an onomatopoetic formation (cf. Engl. slurp, Ger. schlürfen), adding a third form may be possible. However, the lack of similar vowel alternation suggests caution and leaves open the possibility of a separate verb.
Cf. šara(p)p-/šarip-. 
(˚)šarupa n.? neut.?; (mng. unkn.); NH.†
ša-ru-pa KBo 5.4 obv. 31 (Murš. II), KUB 6.44 iv 25 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 23, ša-ru-ú-pa KBo 5.4 rev. 16 (Murš. II), KUB 6.41 iv 23 (Murš. II), ša-r[u- …] KBo 5.4 rev. 20 (Murš. II), ˚ša-r[u-pa] KBo 10.8:6 (Murš. II).
(“Furthermore, since humans are deceitful, if rumors circulate and thereupon someone whispers to you … You must meanwhile write that matter to My Majesty, and if it is true, when I write back to you”) zig–a lË nuntarnuši nu harpu ša-ru-pa (var. ˚ša-r[u-…]) l[Ë iyaši nu ITT]I dUTU–ŠI idālu lË iyaši “Don’t act rashly. [Do]n’t [do] h. š. Don’t do evil toward My Majesty. (If you act rashly and do evil toward My Majesty, you thus transgress the treaty)” KBo 5.4 obv. 31-33 (Targ., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 10.8:6, ed. SV 1:56f. (“feindlichen Zwist”), tr. DiplTexts2 70 (no tr.); similarly ibid. rev. 16-17, KUB 6.44 iv 25 (Kup.); nu–šmaš kuit DˆNU nu–šmaš–at dUTU-ŠI / [punu]šmi nu–šmaš–kan IŠTU DˆNI KASKAL-ši tehhi šumāš–ma lË nuntarnuttËni nu harpu ša-r[u-pa] / [l]Ë iyatteni nu–kan lË idalāuËštËni “And whatever lawsuit you will have, I, My Majesty, will ask you about it and I will set you on a path by means of the lawsuit. Do not act rashly, don’t do h. š. and do not become evil” KBo 5.4 rev. 19-21 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:62f., tr. DiplTexts2 72 (no tr.).
The translation by Friedrich, HW 188, “Zwist(?), Streit(?)” is based on the assumption that the word harpu that occurs in pair with šarupa is the same word as the harpuš that occurs in the soldiers’ oath KBo 6.34 i 27, which HW translates “feindlich, unein-ig, abtrünnig” and a link with the noun harpanalli- “enemy, adversary”; so too Beckman, BiOr 42:139f. However, the harpuš in the soldiers’ oath is pl. acc. from harpa- “pile” (see StBoT 22:26) and the connection of harpanalli- to other harp- words is very speculative, see HED H 182. We are left with the above context for both h. and š. Doing h. š. is something disapproved by the Hittite king. It could be an intensification of “acting rashly” or of “doing evil” or something similar. Kammenhuber, KZ 77:169 n. 3, followed by Weitenberg, U-Stämme 100f., suggests that h. may yet be derived (“harpu- ‘feindlich’ zu harp- ‘absondern’”) from the verb harp-. Weitenberg’s translation of h. š., “gesondertes Benehmen(??),” could fit the context, but depends on the disputed meaning of the alleged adj. harpū and is much less specific for š. For further thoughts on the verb harp- see Melchert, GsNeu (forthcoming). Puhvel, HED H 180, suggest analyzing š. as šaru- “booty” + the particle -(a)pa and translates harpu šarupa as “piled spoils, heaped-up booty,” seeing the combination as “figuratively adverbial for something like ‘helter skelter.’” The position of the alleged particle, however, makes this impossible.
Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 83f. (“Zwist, Streit, Kampf”); Kammenhuber, KZ 77 (1961) 169 n. 3: Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 100f. (h. š. = “gesondertes Benehmen(??)”); Beckman, BiOr 42 (1985) 139f.; Puhvel, HED H (1991) 180.
Cf. [šaruppašiya-].
[ßaruppaßiya-]
§ [A]NA LU¿.MEÍSAGÚkan x[…] / [ß]a?-ru-up-pa-ßi-ia-a[ß…] / [µx.]SAG-iß µ.dSÊN-≠d±[IM?…] / [µLUGA]L-dSÊN µPiy[a-…] § KUB 52.31 i 16-19 (oracle question, NH). The reading of the key term follows Beckman, BiOr 42:139f., but is read by Archi, KUB 52 v [µT]aruppaßiyaß. Beckman considers the term to be ßarupa + -aßßi-, and using HW’s meaning for ßarupa comes up with a translation “party to a dispute(?).” Since HW’s meaning for ßarupa is very unsure (see CHD s.v.), Beckman’s translation of ßaruppaßiya- is even more so. Also this word has a double p while ßarupa does not, which casts further doubt on the equation. In view of the PN-s in the lines following, Archi’s view seems more likely. For the PN compare also µTa-ru-up-ši-ia-aš KUB 54.67 rev. 9; for a DN dTarup(pa)šani- see van Gessel, OHP 1:452f.
Cf. (˚)ßarupa-.
šarūpi (mng. unkn.); MS.†
In broken context […(-)š]a-ru-ú-pí URUDU ŠA LÚ.MEŠhāpieš KBo 16.68 i 16 (KI.LAM fest., MS), ed. StBoT 28:113, 166 (“a (metal) ornament”); perhaps the end of a longer word.
˚šarušša n. neut. (mng. unkn. “booty”?); NH.†
Luw. sg. nom.-acc. ˚ša-ru-uš-ša.
(“[If] the first [uriy]anni-bird [comes/goes] across tarwiyalli […] not(?). Let the king go. […] and [the troops?] will be well. He/They will defeat the enemy”) […-z]i ˚ša-ru-uš-ša-ia […-a]zzi “He(?) will […]. š. […] will […]. (But if it (the bird) [goes/comes] across […])” KUB 18.1 rev.? 9-13 (bird omens), translit. Archi, SMEA 16:126, cf. also idem, BBVO 1:293 n. 47. Since the word probably begins a sentence, one could interpret it as šarrušša–ya “and the š.,” that is, as a sg. nom.-acc. neut. from a root šaruš- “booty(?)” as was done by Starke, StBoT 31:118, followed by Melchert, CLL 192. The meaning fits the context well since the term probably has something to do with the army: apodoses refer to the king defeating the enemy (5) or vice versa (8), and to the troops being well (6).
Cf. šaru- A.
[šaš] = šu + -aš qq.v.
šaš- v. see šeš-.
šāša- A, šāšša- n. com.; (a wild member of the goat family); from OH/MS.†
sg. nom. ša-a-aš-ša-aš KBo 21.103 rev. 27 (OH/MS), ša-a-aš-ša<-aš> KBo 21.90 rev. 51 (OH/MS); nom. sg. or pl.? ša-a-ša-aš KUB 29.1 iii 43 (OH/NS); acc. ša-a-ša-an KBo 3.8 iii 12 (pre-NH?/NS); gen. ša-a-ša-aš KBo 16.61 rev.? 4, 14 (MS), KUB 41.23 ii 15 (OH/NS), KUB 9.31 i 9 (MH/NS), KBo 9.105:(9) (NS), ša-ša-aš KBo 3.8 iii 13, (31) (pre-NH?/NS), KBo 22.170:5 (OH/NS), 503/s:6 (StBoT 4:62, NS). 
pl. nom. ša-a-ša-aš KUB 29.1 iii 43 (OH/NS), ≠ša±-a!-še-eš Or. 90/1325 obv.? 8 (OH/MS, courtesy A. Süel via Soysal).
Luw. pl. nom. com.? ša-ša-an-zi KUB 42.78 ii? 17 (NH).
here? ša-a-aš-ša-x[...] HFAC 113:4.
ša-a-ša-an in KBo 22.231:4, 8 seems to be synonymous with ša(-a)-ša-an-na-an “lamp,” q.v. and therefore does not belong here.
a. characteristic behavior expressed by the verb kunk-: (“The ‘lords of the house,’ i.e., the king and queen (and) the secondary wives sit down”) n–at–za–kan ša-a-ša-aš (var. Ortaköy ≠ša±-a!-še-eš) mahhan kunkiškantari “They are swaying(?) like š.-animals (or: like a š.-animal) §” KUB 29.1 iii 43-44 (rit. for a new palace, OH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 51.56:7 (cf. Hoffner, HS 108:192f.) and Or. 90/1325 obv.? 8 (courtesy Süel via Soysal), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 18, 30 (“Ils sautillent(?) comme des cerfs(?)”), Marazzi, VO 5:158f. (“e a mo’ di šaša si sistemano/prendono posizione”), CHD mahhan 1 a 1' b' (“They set themselves in order(?) like the š.-animal”), StBoT 5:102 (“wie š. richten sie sich auf”), Collins, JAC 5:43f. (no tr.), HED K 249 (“they sway like mountain goats”) | for the tentative meaning “to sway” for the verb kunk- cf. HED K 248-250 and above (GIŠ)šarpa- B 1 b. If šāšaš is a pl. nom. like šāšeš the ending -aš is to be attributed to the NH copyist. A sg., however, is equally possible.
b. tied to the huratti and producing milk: (“‘Bearded’ snakes were bound in the coil (hulališni). § The stag (DÀRA.MAŠ) was bound under the eya-tree. The leopard was bound in the strong place. The wolf was bound in the high (place). The lion was bound in the zamni-”) ša-a-ša-an hūratti–šan hamikta ša-ša-aš GA hamikta “The š. was bound in the huratti-. The š.’s milk was bound. (The throne of dLAMMA was bound. … The ‘bearded’ snakes were released in the coil. The stag was released under the eya-tree. The leopard was released in the strong place. The wolf was released in the high (place). The lion was released in the zamni-(den?)” [ša-a-š]a-aš hūratti–šan lāttat [ša-a]-ša-aš GA lāttat “The š. was released at/in the huratti (its characteristic abode(?)). The milk of the š. was released. (The throne of dLAMMA was released)” KBo 3.8 iii 12-13, 30-31 (rit., pre-NH?/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:157, 159 (no tr. of key words), Collins, JAC 5:39f. (no tr.), Oettinger, AOAT 318:349f. (“Wildziege (o.ä.)”), tr. Archi, Eothen 1:36 (š. hūrattišan “antilope élégante”) | despite its irregular placement we take -šan following huratti- as the sentence particle -šan (see also -šan B 2 a) with Melchert, CLL 76. For Starke’s interpretation (StBoT 31:39) as sg. dat.-loc. of a Luw. gen. adj. in -ašša/i- see CLL 76. Kellerman’s suggestion (Hethitica 7:140f.) that it is a sg. acc. *hurattin–šan is unlikely because of the single -š-; compare in the same text UZUpantūha(n)–ššan (KBo 3.8 +) KUB 7.1 iii 6, and UZUarra(n)–ššan ibid. 7.
c. associated with lambs (SILA›): (“He stands by night, he stands by day”) SILA›-aš ištanzanan dā ša-a-ša-aš (dupl. ša-ša-aš) ha[(lu)kan dā] “Take the ‘mind/soul’ of the lamb; take the ‘message’ of the š.’” KUB 41.23 ii 15 (incant., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 22.170:5 (OH/NS), ed. Collins, JAC 5:42 (differently), Giorgieri, RIL 124:259, 261 (“il mes[saggio] della capra selvatica?!”) | we attribute this passage to š. A instead of B both because of the pairing with the lamb and because of the plene spelling of the first syllable; cf. SILA›-aš mÏuš halugaš “the gentle haluga- of a lamb” KUB 17.10 iv 32 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 38, tr. Hittite Myths™ 18 §30; (The NIN.DINGIR(?)-priestess goes to the inn and says:) [(šerr)]–a–wa–ššan hankuriya ša-a-aš-ša-aš (dupl. ša-a-aš-ša-<aš>) SILA› [(nu–wa–ššan mān pāi)]mi nahi–mu par<(š)>ni UR.BAR.RA-ni “‘Above, on the hankuri- (are) a š. (and) a lamb (or: is the lamb of a š.). When I go up there (-šan), it frightens me with respect to the leopard (and) the wolf” KBo 21.103 rev. 27-28 (fest. of Tetešhabi, OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 21.90 rev. 51-52 (OH/MS), ed. Collins, JAC 5:42, Archi, Eothen 1:34 (“bouquetin”), CHD nah(h)- a 1' c' (all interpreting the nahi clause differently) | the double š is odd, but the association with the lamb and the plene spelling of the first syllable, similar to the previous example, leads us to list this example here; for the impersonal construction compare German mich fürchtet, Latin me veretur, and cf. Hoffner/Melchert, Hittite Grammar [forthcoming]).
d. a festival was named after it: EZEN› ša-ša-aš 503/s:6 (NS) (StBoT 4:62, Carruba, Kadmos 6:90 n. 7) | animals after which festivals were named include: GUD.MAH “bull” KBo 41.129 obv 3, UDU “sheep” KUB 16.16 obv 14, ŠAH “boar/pig” KUB 55.5 iv 13, AYALU “stag” KUB 13.4 i 39, SILA› “lamb” KUB 25.27 i 25, MÁŠ “goat” KUB 38.25 i 11; cf. list in Hoffner, EHGl 39-41. 
e. unclear passages: ŠA KUŠ.HI.A ša-a-ša-aš “of the hides of š.-animals” (or “š. of the pelts,” i.e., š. intended to be slaughtered for their pelts?) KBo 16.61 rev.? 4 (dep., NH); ŠA KUŠ ša-a-ša-aš KBo 16.61 rev.? 14 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:60f. (“Das šāša-Tier <zur> Fell(gewinnung?)”), Collins, JAC 5:41 (“pelts of the šaša-”) | note the mention of shepherds (LÚ.MEŠSI[PA...]) in KBo 16.61 rev.? 15 and cattle (GUD.HI.A) rev.? 2, 8, 9, 10, (11), 12, from which Collins suspects the š. “may have been maintained in herds”; [LÚ.MEŠ?] UR.GI‡ / [ne?]kummanteš / [tar?k]u?wanzi § [nu–ka]n!? 7(!, text 5) UZUNÍG.GIG.HI.A / [p]a?rā appanzi / [Š]A? PÌRIG.TUR [U]R.MAH / [Š]AH.GIŠ.GI AZ / [a-l]i-i[a-n]a-aš / [ša-]a-ša-aš DÀRA.MA[Š] § “The ‘Dog men’ [da]nce(?) [na]ked(?). § They present seven(!) livers: [o]f(?) a leopard, a lion, a wild boar, a bear, a deer, a š., (and) a stag §” KBo 9.105:1-9 (fest. frag., NS) | the enumeration of wild animals, and especially the close pairing of stag and š., is reminiscent of the group depicted on the Kastamonu bowl, cf. Emre/Çınaro©lu, FsNÖzgüç 684-703 w. figs. 23-24. Note the presence of what the authors identify as stags, does, and ibexes in the frieze of the fourth zone (685f., 693f.); (“The house[-owner] does as follows. § I hang up a […] kËlu-. Its huppali is bronze. Its […-u]lli is of shaggy lion’s pelt. Its stool is of basalt. And its hazziul is of lapis lazuli. (Its?) šišai is the strong šišai of a bear”) [SAG?].KI–ma ša-a-ša-aš § “(Its) fore[head(?)], however, is (that) of a š.” KUB 9.31 i 9 (Zarpiya’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Schwartz, JAOS 58:334f. (differently), Collins, JAC 5:43 (“But he [hangs the …] of a šaša-,” restoring [ga-an-]ki), translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:276; if we translate line 8 as above and not “(Its) šišai is strong (like) a bear’s šišai,” this composite object would actually be using parts of animals, and the broken noun [x-x-]ki in line 9 would denote a part of the kelu- that is actually made from a part of the š. animal similarly named (“Its x is (the x) of a š.”); here? Luw. pl. nom. com.?: ša-ša-an-zi NUNUZ KÙ.GI “š. of pearl(?) and gold” KUB 42.78 ii? 1 (NH) 7, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 462f.; cf. also CLL 192.
Prior to the publication of the Ma®at letter HKM 44 (cf. šašā- B) there was no evidence that the word š. might indicate a bird. With this new evidence it becomes necessary to distinguish two near homographs, šāša- A (which appears to be a wild mammal of the goat family) and šašā- B (a bird). The names of these two are near, but not complete homographs: clear examples of the bird have a plene writing in the second syllable, while clear examples of the mammal have plene writing of the first syllable. Writings with no plene writing must be assigned according to the context in which they appear. Since deer, leopards, wolves, and lions are all mammals and so produce milk, but yet KBo 3.8 (cf. b, above) does not mention that their milk was “bound” and “released,” this text seems to indicate that the milk-producing properties of the š.-animal were one of its primary characteristics. Thus one thinks of female animals known for milk producing, many of which in Hittite were a-stems: cows (usually written ÁB(-a-)), and nanny goats (usu. UZﬂ(-a-)), and perhaps ewes (UDUU⁄‚(-a-)), and mares (usu. ANŠE.KUR.RA.MUNUS.AL-(a-)). (Note that GUD, UDU and ANŠE.KUR.RA when undifferentiated by biological gender are usually u-stems, only rarely i-.) This, as well as the reference to the š. at the beginning of a paragraph in KBo 16.61 that also refers to shepherds (cf. e, above), leads one to agree with Collins that the š. is probably kept. The characteristic behavior of the šāša- denoted by the obscure verb kunk- cannot be determined since that verb’s meaning is still controversial. If the hieroglyph sà is supposed to depict the head of a šāša-, it might be a gazelle, as Hawkins’ Latin name for the sign GAZELLA would indicate.
Ehelolf, ZA 45 (1939) 72; Gurney, AAA 27 (1940) 104 n. 2 (an animal which produces milk); Schwartz, OrNS 16 (1947) 44 (“figure, figurine, plaything (doll!?)”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 188 (“(ein Säugetier)”); Sommer, apud Friedrich, HW (1952) 188 (“Hase”); Laroche, Syria 31 (1954) 109 n. 45 (“Antilope” = UDU KUR.RA, based on HH 104 = sà/GAZELLA); Kronasser, Sprache 7 (1961) 161 (“kaum ‘Hase’, eher ‘Antilope’”); Goetze, JCS 16 (1962) 29 w. n. 12 (= DARÀ “mountain goat”); Ertem, Fauna (1965) 167f. (= LU.LIM “deer”); Carruba, Kadmos 6 (1967) 90 w. n. 7 (“Hirsch?”); Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 62 (“weder ‘Antilope’ noch ‘Hase’, sondern eher eine Haustierart”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 102 (doubts both hare and antelope); Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 66 (“un mammifère ongulé ruminant ... traduction provisoire ‘cerf’”); Collins, Diss. (1989) 274-280; eadem, JAC 5 (1990) 39-48 (“Capra aegragrus = bezoar goat”); Trémouille, SMEA 37 (1996) 96.
šašā- B n. com; (an oracle bird); from MH/MS.†
sg. nom. [š]a-ša-a-aš HKM 47:40 (MH/MS); acc. [š]a-ša-a-an HKM 47:35 (MH/MS); gen. ša-ša-a-aš KUB 44.6 obv. 5. 
a. in augury (together with eagles, šalwini- and āršintara-birds): n–ašta [š]a-ša-a-aš āršintarašš–a peran SIGﬁ-az zilawan SIGﬁ-az nu šaluinin TI°MUŠEN–ya taru.-an aumen “and a š. bird (came) in front from a favorable (direction) and we observed a šalwini-bird and an eagle taruyallian” HKM 47:31-42 (report of augury in a letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 204-207.
b. as an animal-shaped vessel (BIBRU): [B]IBRU ŠAH ZABAR x[...] / [B]IBRU ša-ša-a-aš ZABA[R] “A bronze rhyton of a pig [...], a br[onze] rhyton of a š. [...]” KUB 44.6 obv. 4-5 (NS) | we tentatively put this ref. here under š. B because of the plene writing of the last syllable; Trémouille, SMEA 37:83, 88 w. comment 96, suggests that we understand [… DU]G KUKUB KÙ.BABBAR–ya ša-ša-an(-)n[a-…] KUB 46.48 obv. 19 (in cumulative line count obv. 35) as “le récipient KUKUP en argent en forme d’antilope …,” but the -a/-ya after š. argues against taking ša-ša-an(-)n[a …] as a gen. dependent upon what precedes, and there is also the fact that there are no other examples of animal-shaped KUKUB-vessels.
c. as a statue?: ALAM ša-ša[-a-aš] KUB 38.29 obv. 11 (NH), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:189 (suggesting restoration with a form of šašant- “concubine”), StBoT 4:62; however this restoration as well as the interpretation of the passage is very unsure.
š. is not the only Hittite bird name not marked with the determinative MUŠEN (cf. aršintara-, kakkapa-, pattarpalhi-). For a partial listing of Hittite bird names see Hoffner, EHGl 22-23. For discussion and bibliography see above under šāša- A.
šaša- C see DUGšašan(n)a-.
LÚšašalpatalla- n. com.; (a cultic functionary?); from OH?/NS.†
sg. nom. LÚša-šal-pa-tal-la-aš KUB 10.69 ii 5 (NS), [LÚša-ša-a]l-pa-tal-l[a-aš] KBo 41.86 i 1.
unclear LÚša-šal-pa-ta[l-la-...] KUB 28.101 iii? 6 (OH?/NS). 
§ [...] LÚša-šal-pa-tal-la-aš / [anda uizz]i nu–kan DAM.MEŠ / [LÚ.MEŠALA]N.ZU· šalpāizzi / [...]x pānzi § “The š.-man [enter]s and šalpai-s the wives of(?) the performers. [Then] they leave” KUB 10.69 ii 5-8 (fest. frag., NS); this enables us to restore the following: [LÚša-ša-a]l-pa-tal-l[a-aš anda uizzi] / [n–ašt]a DAM.MEŠ LÚALAN.ZU·.HI.A [šalpāi]zzi “A š.-man [enters and šalpai-]s the wives of the performers” KBo 41.86 i 1-3 (fest. frag.) | the trace in line 1, a vertical wedge, ensures the reading [LÚša-ša-a]l-pa-tal-l[a-aš] rather than [LÚša-ša]l-pa-tal-l[a-aš]; § UGULA LÚ.MEŠALAN.Z[U· …] / t–aš lūli[ya paršnān harzi] § ŠAH.TUR–ya har[zi ……] / LÚša-šal-pa-ta[l-la-...] § 3 LÚ.MEŠAL[AN.ZU· …] / paršdu[n …] / šarā[ …] “The chief of the performers […-s]. He [is crouched in] a vat § and holds a piglet. […] A š.-man […-s]. § Three per[formers …] a bud [and …] up […]” KUB 28.101 iii? 3-9 (fest. frag., OH?/NS).
The word is apparently a noun in -(a)talla- (cf. Sturtevant, CGr2 77f.; Götze in FsPedersen 488-495; Berman, Diss. 158f.; van Brock, RHA XX/71 67-168; Oettinger, KZ 99:43-47) derived from a reduplicated form of the verb šalpai- (cf. addendum at end of CHD Š volume). The š. performs this action on the wives of the performers. Tischler, HdW 69, followed by Jin Jie, RetrGlos 11 also lists with no reference an unreduplicated šalpatalla-. We cannot locate such a form. The only other reduplicated deverbal -(a)talla- noun attested is built to a -ške- base: wiwiškatalla-. 
Melchert (pers. comm.) notes the possibility that this word is etymologically related to the PIE source of English “salve” (German salben). Since Hittite had another verb (išk-) in the same general semantic range, it is possible that the latter was specialized for official (installation of kings, priests) and ritual anointings, while š. was confined to cosmetic actions suitable for women. The LÚšašalpatalla- would then have been something like a “makeup person.”
Laroche, RA 48 (1954) 47 (“nom d’agent en -talla-,” < šalpai-); Friedrich, HW 1.Erg. (1957) 18 (“Kultischer Funktionär?”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 81; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 120, 176, 570; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 259.
Cf. šalpai-.
(DUG)šašan(n)a-, šaša- C n. com.; lamp; written syll., Sum. DUGIZI.GAR and Akk. (DUG)N¨RU; from MS.
sg. nom. DUGNU-U-RU Bo 4207 obv. 6 (Ehelolf, ZA 43:193).
acc. DUGša-ša-an-na-an KUB 5.5 ii 27, 28 (NH), ša-ša-an-na-an KUB 20.61 vi 2 (NS), KUB 38.25 i 25 (NS), DUGIZI.GAR KUB 18.14 iii 10 (NH), IZI.GAR KUB 60.93:3 (NH), NU-U-RU KUB 42.91 ii 19 (NH), ša-a-ša-an KBo 22.231:4, 8 (NS).
pl. nom. [DUG]ša-ša-an-ni-iš KBo 24.5:14 (pre-NH/NS).
acc. ša-a-ša-nu-uš KBo 30.160:3 (MS), ša-ša-nu-uš KBo 8.82 obv.? 7, 8, 9 (MH/MS), KUB 39.54 obv.? 10, 17 (NS), KBo 45.140 obv.? 2 (NS), KUB 17.37 i 14 (NS), ša-ša-an-nu-uš KBo 2.13 rev. 9 (NH), DUGša-ša-nu-uš Bo 5230:11 (Ehelolf, ZA 43:191), DUGša-ša-an-nu-uš KUB 46.16 obv.? 4, rev.? 2 (NS), ša-ša-an-na-aš KUB 31.113:15 (NS), DUGNU-U-RIHI.[A] KuSa I/1.4:4 (LNS).
d.-l. ša-ša-an-na-aš KUB 44.4 obv. 3 (NH).
broken: [ša-a?-š]a-na-aš KBo 24.6 obv.? 8 (MS), w. dupl. […]-≠an?-na-aš± KBo 24.5 obv.? 15 (pre-NH/NS).
Note that all MS attestations have a single writing of the -n-, which is sometimes continued into the NS manuscripts. Until a Hurr. n. *DUGnurihi- (so Wilhelm, KuSa I/1 p. 21) for either a vase or a drink has been established with certainty, we prefer to read KuSa I/1.4:4 as the Akk. pl. acc. N¨RIHI.[A].
mahhan–ma i[š]panz[a kišar]i [INA] É.ŠÀ ša-a-ša-nu-uš tianzi “When it [becom]es night, they set up lamps [in] the inner chamber” KBo 30.160 + KBo 23.29 rev. 2-3 (MS), translit. Groddek, AoF 21:335; GIM-an–ma GEﬂ-za DÙ-ri ša-ša-an!-na-an–kan tianzi “As soon as it becomes night they set up a lamp” KUB 38.25 i 25 (cult of Nerik, NS); (“They entertain the deity and the singers sing”) GIM-an–ma GEﬂ-za DÙ-ri ša-ša-nu-uš tianzi GAM-an išhuwauwaš GAM-an išhūwanzi “But when it becomes night, they set up lamps. What has to be poured out(?) underneath(?), they pour out(?) underneath(?). (The next morning …)” KUB 55.60 iv 12-13 (cult inventory, NH), ed. Ehelolf, ZA 43:191 (as Bo 2351) | for the expression kattan išhuwa- as possibly having to do with the hearth being made ready for the night see Neu, GsKronasser 141f.; GIM-an nekuzza mehur kišar[i] nu–kan ša-ša-an-na-aš dāi “When it become[s] evening, he sets up the lamps (They close up the temple. The priest and the diviner/exorcist sleep before the door)” KUB 31.113:14-15 (instruction?, NS), ed. Haas, KN 130f., Ehelolf, ZA 43:191 (as Bo 5455); GEﬂ-za DÙ-ri ša-ša-nu-uš tianzi “At nightfall they set up the lamps” KUB 17.37 i 14 (cult inventory, NH); (At dawn they carry the statues of deities to Mt. Pišqarana and offer them different offerings) ša-ša-an-nu-uš tianzi “They set up the lamps” (end of text) KBo 2.13 rev. 9 (cult inventory, NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 108, 114; ša-ša-an-nu-uš tianzi § lukatti–ma … “They set up lamps. § But in the morning ...” KUB 17.35 iii 17-18 (cult inventory, Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 130, 143, similarly ibid. i 34 (<-uš>), iv 15, 37, ed. Carter, Diss. 125, 133, 135, 138f., 147, 149; cf. also KUB 20.61 vi 2; DUGIZI.GAR–wa INA É.ŠÀ tiešker “They used to set up a lamp in the inner chamber” KUB 18.14 iii 10 (oracle question, NH); (“They put them (i.e., the bones) on a spread out bed”) ša-ša-an-n[a-an] / Š[A x+?]1 GÍN IŠTU Ì.DÙG.GA haštiyaš peran tiyanzi “They set up a lamp of [x] shekels (filled) with fine oil in front of the bones” KUB 39.11 obv. 49-50 + KBo 41.26 i 1 (pre-NH/NS), ed. HTR 68f., Kassian et al., Funerary 272f.; NU-U-RU tiyanzi “They set up a lamp” KUB 42.91 ii 19; DUGNU-U-RU artari “A lamp is set up (lit. stands)” Bo 4207 obv. 6 (Ehelolf, ZA 43:193); (list of items concluding with:) 2 DUGNAMMANDU Ì.NUN ša-ša-an-na-aš […] [ANA?] É.GAL šiyannaš pianzi “They give [to] the seal house … (and) two measuring vessels of ghee for lamps” KUB 44.4 obv. 3 (cult inv., NH); cf. KUB 46.30:11 (cult inventory, NH); DUGša-ša-an-na-an kuit INA MU.2-TI karšer nu–kan 1 DUGša-ša-an-na-an ¬gallaranni tianzi “Concerning the fact that they have omitted (setting up) a lamp for two years (or: in the second year), they shall set up one lamp against (lit. for) the unfavorableness” KUB 5.5 ii 27-29 (oracle question, NH), cf. StBoT 31:358 n. 1267; 2 ša-ša-nu-uš ZABAR in fragmentary context KBo 8.82 obv.? 8, 9 (rit., MH/MS); cf. also ibid. 5, 7; (“Then they sing and they stay awake overnight […]”) [DUG]≠ša±-ša-an-ni-iš–šan kiya[nt]a […] […]-≠an?-na-aš±-ma (var. [ša-š]a-na-aš-ma) 1 NAMMA<N>D[(U Ì)…] “The lamps are set up, [and they give] one measure of oil (or: gh[ee]) for (lit. of) the lamps” KBo 24.5 obv.? 14-15 (rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 24.6 obv.? 8 (MS); (§ [When it becomes night(?)]) […š]a-a-ša-an tianzi / [ o o o L]ÚSANGA dIM–ya UŠK[ENNU] / [n–at–k]an parā pānz[i...] § [kui]tman UD.7.KAM pa[izzi] / [n–aš]ta ša-a-ša-an [pËdanzi?] / [NINDA.SI]G NINDAšiluwān[…] / [n]–aš P¸NI GIŠNÁ t[ianzi] § mahhan–ma UD.7.[KAM …] / nu GIŠNÁ šar[ā …] / [n]–at EGIR-pa […] “They place the [l]amp. […]. [The … ] and the priest of the Stormgod bow and leave. § While the seventh day passes, [they carry(?)] out the lamp. [They …] a th[in-bread and] a šiluwā-bread. They p[lace(?)] them before the bed. § When the seventh day [is complete, they pick] up the bed and [carry] it back […] §” KBo 22.231:4-13 (fest. frag.). 
Ehelolf, ZA 43 (1936) 190-194; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 139, 183.
šašant- n. com.; concubine; from OS.†
nom. ša-ša-an-za KBo 3.7 iv 19 (OH/NS), KUB 17.6 iv (16) (NS); acc. ša-ša-an-da-n(a-x[…]) KBo 8.69:4 (NS); d.-l. ša-ša-an-ti KUB 8.41 ii 7 (OS), [ša-š]a-[a]n-di VBoT 124 ii 10 (OS).
kuit–a [(dZalinui)]šaš DAM–SU dTa[(zzu~
waši)]ša ša-ša-an-za (dupl. + -aššiš) ... “But although Zalinuiša is his (i.e., Zašhapuna’s) wife, Tazzuwaši is his concubine, ...” KBo 3.7 iv 18-19 (Illuy., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 17.6 iv 15-16 (NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:17, 20, tr. Hittite Myths2 14, LMI 54; mān DUMU-aš dIM-naš ša-ša-an-ti-i–šši (par. [ša-š]a-[a]n-di-i–šši) huekzi “When the prince (lit. child) recites an incantation to the concubine of the Stormgod. (The singer recites: ‘To mankind you are Tašimmeti, among the gods IŠTAR, the Queen’)” KUB 8.41 ii 7 (OS), w. par. VBoT 124 ii 10 (OS), ed. Laroche, JCS 1:187f., translit. StBoT 25:183, 189.
This word is a substantivized participle of the verb šeš- “to sleep/lie down,” q.v.
Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 161 n. 478.
Cf. šeš-.
šaššanu- see šašnu-.
[GADšašara] in GADša-ša-ra-at–kán NA›-ta wedan KBo 21.22:37 (Benedictions for Labarna, OH/MS) read, with Kellerman, Tel Aviv 5:200, 202, kat-ta!-ša-ra–at–kan NA›-ta wedan “It was built with stone from top to bottom.”
šašha- see šešha-.
šaššiyatar n. neut.; (mng. unkn.).†
nom.-acc. ša-aš-ši-ia-tar 1055/u:6 (StBoT 32:301, cited without its broken context, NS).
šašie- v.?; (mng. unkn.); NS.†
pres. sg. 3? ša-a-ši-e-e[z?-zi?] KUB 8.40:8, ša-ši-e-[…] HT 39 obv. 4 (NS).
§ mān LÚ x[...] / ša-a-ši-e-e[z?-zi? ...] / dEN.ZU–ma [...] / našma MUNUS-i a[-...] / KUB 8.40:7-10 (rit. outline?); [(§) ... (x É LÚ.MEŠ) ...] / GAL? 
MUNUS.MEŠ[zintuheš ...] / 1-edani [...(x GÙB-laz) ...] / nu MUNUS.MEŠzi[(ntuhËš) ... ] / arha ša-ši-e-[ ...-(t?eš) ...] / 6 MUNUS.MEŠzintu[(hËš) ...] / ZAG-az ešan[ta ...] / GÙB-la[(zziy)]a 6 MUNUS.M[EŠzintuh(Ëš)] / eša[nt]a (dupl. ašanzi) § HT 39 obv. 1-8 (fest. frag., NS), w. dupl. KUB 25.11 i 11-16.
šašnu-, šaššanu- v.; 1. to make (someone) lie down, to put to bed, (w. kattan) to cause (someone) to have sexual intercourse with (someone), 2. make (someone) fall asleep, (šašnumaš SÌR = lullaby); from OS.†
pres. sg. 2 ša-aš-nu-ši KUB 48.123 iii 20 (Hatt. III).
pl. 3 ša-aš-nu-an-zi KBo 17.36 rev. rt. col. 2 (OS), KBo 13.120:14 (MS), ša-aš-ša-nu-an-zi IBoT 1.29 rev. 51 (MH?/MS?), KUB 25.37 iv 19 (OH/ENS), ša-aš-nu-wa-an-z[i] IBoT 4.15 obv. 5 (NS).
pret. sg. 3 ša-aš-nu-ut KUB 33.118:24 (NS).
verbal subst. ša-aš-nu-ma-aš 371/v:6 (NS), KUB 12.5 iv (9) (MH/MS).
imperf. pres. pl. 2 ša-aš-nu-uš-ga-at-te-ni KBo 7.28 obv. 24 (OH/MS); pl. 3 ša-aš-nu-uš-kán-zi KUB 25.37 iii 9 (OH/ENS), ša-aš-ša-nu-uš-kán-z[i] KUB 51.50 iii? 13 (LNS).
broken: ša-aš-nu-[…] KBo 9.139 obv. 6 (pre-NS).
1. to make (someone) lie down, to put to bed, (w. kattan) to cause (someone) to have sexual intercourse with (someone) — a. to make (someone) lie down: (The prince goes to the inn. “That night they purify the prince in the same way”) [namma]–an ša-aš-ša-nu-an-zi “[Then] they make him lie down. (They place two thick-breads on either side of his head and on either side of his feet and draw a circle around him with beer and they bring in the prostitutes)” IBoT 1.29 rev. 51 (fest. of begetting, MH?/MS?), ed. Güterbock, Midwest AOS (1969) 103, 101 = AS 26:112f.; [(n–a)n ... išta]nani peran ša-aš-nu-an-zi “They make him lie down in front of the altar” KBo 13.120:14 (rit., MS), w. dupl. KBo 13.119 iii 33 (“archaic”/NS); duwaddu taknāš dUTU-waš ÌR.MEŠ–ŠU ša-aš-nu-uš-ga-at-te-ni–a[n kuiËš] / ≠x±-aš-nu-uš-ki-it-ta-ni–ya–an kuiËš ki–ma šumenzan Ëš[tu ...] “Mercy! O servants of the Sungoddess of the Netherworld—you [who] put her to bed, you who ... her, let this be yours” KBo 7.28 i 24-25 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, RSO 32:219, 221 (“Gnade, (ihr) Diener der Sonnengöttin der Erde, die ihr [sie] zu Bett bringt, (und) aufweckt(?),” understanding the second v. as a previously unknown v.), tr. Hittite Prayers 23 (following Friedrich), cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:380 (reading the second verb [š]a-aš-nu-uš-ki-it-ta-ni yielding: “You [who] put her to bed, you who put her to bed),” Hoffner, NABU (forthcoming) (suggesting that this is a rhyming construction in which the second word is made up and has no independent meaning); “taknaš dUTU-un ša-aš-ša-nu-uš-kán-z[i] “They put the Sungoddess of the Earth to bed” KUB 51.50 obv.? iii? 13 (rit., NS); […] šarā tit[(tanuanz)i … …-]x-anza nu–kan šašta[(š GIŠparl)ai … ]x-an–kan GIŠparlai še[r (ša-aš-nu-wa-an-z)i n–ašt]a IŠTU TÚG kariya[(nzi)] “They set up [… And … is] …-ed. [They …] the wooden parlai- of the bed. They cause [(someone)] to lie down on the parlai-.  [They] cover (him) with a cloth” 482/u:2-5 (IBoT 4 p. xxvi) (rit., NS), w. dupl. IBoT 4:15:3-6 (NS); [...]x–šan GIŠ.NÁ-aš ša-aš-ša-nu-x[...] KBo 8.72 obv.? 6 (rit., NS); mānn–a–mu–kan DINGIR-LUM GAŠAN–Y[A ...] GIŠ.NÁ-aš ša-aš-nu-ši nu […] nu–kan É.ŠÀ GIŠnath[it]a išparranzi “And if you, O goddess, my lady, make me lie down in bed […] and […] and [they will] spr[ead] the bed in the inner chamber” KUB 48.123 iii 19-21 + KUB 15.28 iii! 1 (vow of Pud. to IŠTAR of Lawazantiya), ed. de Roos, Diss. 306, 445f., cf. also (GIŠ)nathi(t)- b 1' | it is unclear whether šašnu- is the verb of the mān clause or whether it belongs to a separate clause.
b. (w. kattan) to cause (someone) to have sexual intercourse with (someone): [...] HUR.SAG.MEŠ-aš ištarn[a] LÚUB¸RUM mān [… n]u–mu–za katti–šši ša-aš-nu-ut “He […-ed] among the mountains like a guest-stranger. He caused me to have sexual intercourse with him. (... The 9th month passed and the 10th month arrived)” KUB 33.118:23-24 (Kumarbi and Mt. Wašitta, NS), ed. Friedrich, JKF 2:151f., translit. Myth. 189, tr. GeschRel 89, cf. Gonnet, RHA XXVI/82:151 w. lit.; cf. Friedrich, JCS 1:302; here?? [...]-tan ša-aš-nu-[...] KBo 21.21 ii 9 (medical text, MS), translit. StBoT 19:37.
2. cause (someone) to fall asleep — a. in general: here?: [...-a]n(?) LÚNAR ša-aš-nu-[uz-zi(?)] “The singer causes [...] to fall asleep” KBo 9.139 obv. 6 (fest. for Huwaššanna?, pre-NS?) (possibly to be restored differently, perhaps [...]x LÚNAR ša-aš-nu-[ma-aš SÌR SÌR-RU] “the singer [sings a lull]aby” see 2b); possibly also KUB 48.123 iii 19-21 + KUB 15.28 iii! 1, see 1, above.
b. šašnumaš SÌR “lullaby”: nu LÚNAR ŠA DINGIR-LIM ša-aš-nu-m[a(?)-aš SÌR ....] KUB 12.5 iv 9 (IŠTAR of Tamininka rit., MH/MS); cf. / ša-aš-nu-ma-aš SÌR [...] 371/v:6 (NS).
Friedrich, JCS 1 (1947) 302; Hoffner, JNES 31 (1972) 31 (šašnu- tends to be older, šaššanu- newer).
Cf. šeš-.
(TÚG)šašt(a)- n. com.; 1. lying down, sleep, reclining, 2. bedding, bedroll, bed, place for lying down/sleep; from OH/MS.
sg. nom. ša-aš-za KUB 33.8 iii 19 (OH/NS), KBo 22.84:7 (NS), ša-aš-ta-aš KUB 50.90 obv. 4, 8, 12, rev. 27 (NH), KUB 16.40 obv.? 5 (NH), KBo 12.90:7 (MH?/NS). 
acc. ša-aš-ta-an KBo 5.11 iv 10 (MH?/NS), KUB 16.9 ii 5 (NH), KUB 24.8 ii 8 (NH), ABoT 17 ii 8 (NH?), KUB 16.40 obv.? 12 (NH), KUB 20.2 iv 28 (NH), ša-aš-da-an KUB 36.59 i 7 (NH), KBo 12.70 ii! 12 (NS).
dat.-loc. ša-aš-ti KUB 30.10 rev. 18 (OH/MS), KUB 30.11 rev. 15 (OH? or MH/MS), KUB 29.40 ii 19 (MH/MS), KBo 4.4 iii 36 (Murš. II), KUB 36.67 ii 24, 25, 28 (NS), KUB 30.23 ii 14, 21 (NS), VBoT 111:12 (NS), ša-aš-te KUB 31.127 iii 5 (OH/NS), KBo 34.105 i 2 (NS), TÚGša-aš-ti KBo 29.87 rev. 7 (MS), KUB 31.118:4.
gen. ša-aš-ta-aš KUB 15.42 iii 29 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 22.57 rev. 5 (NH), Bo 3790:7 (Alp, Tempel 368), IBoT 4.15:4 (NS).
abl. TÚGša-aš-ta-az KBo 29.87 rev. 14 + KBo 7.39 rev.? 7 (MS), ša-aš-ta-az KBo 34.186:4 (NS), KBo 42.30 obv.? 9 (NS), ša-aš-ta-za KUB 41.1 iii 11 (MH/NS).
pl. acc. ša-aš-du-uš KUB 29.51 iv 3 (MH/MS), KUB 29.52 i 4, iv 6 (MH/MS), KBo 5.11 rev. 20 (MH?/NS), ša-a-aš-du-uš KBo 5.8 ii 28 (NH), ša-aš-du-š–a KUB 29.50 i 35, 42 (MH?/MS), KUB 29.40 ii (18) (MH/MS).
dat.-loc. ša-aš-ta-aš KUB 42.94 i 4 (NS).
The form [š]a-aš-da(sic)-an-(ta) KUB 36.59 i 7 is taken as an all. (“in dein Bett”) and emended to ša-aš-da«-an»(-ta) by Rieken, StBoT 44:130 w. n. 598, because the all. would be the lectio difficilior for the NH copyist instead of an acc. of direction as proposed by Siegelová, StBoT 14:7 n. 26. Since the acc. of direction in the NH period was as little productive as the all. and the latter requires an emendation, we have listed the form as an acc. followed by the 2 sg. clitic pers. pron.
1. lying down, sleep, reclining — a. in figura etymologica: nu–za (dupl. adds ITTI) DAM–KA āššu ša-aš-ta-an (dupl. ša-aš-da-an) šeški našma(sic)–ta (dupl. ša-aš-da-an-ta) DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pianzi 1-an DUMU.NITA-an “Sleep well the sleep with your wife; and the gods will give you one son (dupl. adds: into the bed)” KUB 24.8 ii 7-9 (Tale of Appu, NH), w. dupl. KUB 36.59 i 6-7, ed. StBoT 14:6f. (uses dupl. šašdan–ta = “ins Bett”), tr. Hittite Myths 64; šuppin ša-aš-ta-an EGIR-pa šešzi “He sleeps again a holy(?) sleep” KUB 16.9 ii 5 (oracle question, NH); perhaps this figura etymologica means instead of “to sleep a sleep” rather “to sleep a bed (i.e., in a bed)”; outside figura etymologica perhaps KUB 17.1 ii 14-15 (Tale of Kešši, NH), w. dupl. KUB 36.62:1-2, see below 2 a.
b. in “bed” oracles (see Hoffner, FsHallo 116-119 for discussion of the genre): IGI-ziš UDU-iš IGI-z[i] hāli IGI-ziš ša-aš-ta-aš ZAG-aš EGIR-p[a] kamzuriti pakmariti–ma–za arha pippaš “The first ram in the first pen — its first reclining was right-hand. Afterwards (it) was at kamzuriti; but at the pakmariti it rolled over” (A liver oracle follows) KUB 50.90 obv. 4-5 (NH), ed. Hoffner, FsHallo 117 | for UDU-iš standing for UDU.ŠIR-iš see Hoffner, FsHallo 117; IGI-ziš UDU-iš IGI-zi hāli IGI-zeš ša-aš-ta-aš GÙB-aš EGIR-ann–a–za ZAG-≠an hui±nut kamzuriti pakmariti UL kuitki iyat “The first ram in the first pen—its first reclining was left-hand. Later it changed to the right. At the kamzuriti (and) pakmariti it did nothing” (a liver oracle follows) KUB 18.11 rev. 4-5 (NH); EGIR UDU-eš IGI-zi hāli IGI-zi ša-aš-ta-aš GÙB-aš EGIR-ann–a–za ZAG-an arnut kamzuriti–kan EME ZAG-za parā udaš n–an waqaš EGIR-pa–ma–an–kan UL namma pËdaš “The last ram in the first pen — its reclining was at first left-hand. Later it changed to the right. At the kamzuriti it stuck out (its) tongue on the right and bit it. But it did not stick it out any longer. (It did nothing, however, at the pakmariti)” (a liver oracle follows) ibid. rev. 7-9; cf. ibid. 13-14, 15-17; KUB 50.90 obv. 7-8, 12-13, rev. 27-28; KUB 6.27:8-9 (NH); KUB 16.40 obv.? 5-6 (NH); ša-aš-ta-an–kan ištarna arha ariuË[n] “We have investigated the reclining throughout” ibid. 12 (sort of colophon ending a “bed” and exta oracle text).
2. bedding, bed, place for lying down/sleep — a. in general: nu–ššan pāun KUR URUPigga~
inarešša ša-aš-ti walahhun “I went (and) struck the land of Piggainarešša in (their) bed” KBo 4.4 iii 36-37 (ann., Muršili II), ed. AM 128f. (“während er schlief” w. n. a: “Wörtlich: auf dem Bette”); išpanti–mu–ššan ša-aš-ti-mi (par. ša-aš-te-mi) šānezziš tešhaš [n]atta Ëpzi “At night in my bed pleasant sleep does [n]ot come to me” KUB 30.10 rev. 18 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), w. par. KUB 36.79a iii 22-23 + KUB 31.127 iii 5-6 (OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 115, 117 (“lit”), tr. Hittite Prayers 33 (“bed”); n[u GIM-an l]ukkatta dUTU-uš–kan kalmaraz uit µKiššiš [šanezz)]iyaz ša-aš-ta-az!(text -aš) arāiš “The next day, as the sun came in its radiance, Kešši rose from (his) pleasant bed (or: sleep). (He proceeded to tell the dreams of night to his mother)” KUB 17.1 ii 14-15 (Tale of Kešši, NH), w. dupl. KUB 36.62:1-2 (NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:238f. (“vom [sü]ßen Lager”), tr. Hittite Myths2 88 (“from a sound sleep”); µImpākruš ša-aš-ti pait n–aš–za ≠katta± šešta µGurpāranzahašš–a ša-aš-ti pait ... n–aš–kan ša-aš-ti šer IŠTU GIŠKUNﬁ pai[t] “Impakru went to bed and laid down to sleep. Gurparanzaha too went to bed. (They sprinkled fine oil in front of him. They laid ‘roads’ made of cloth. In the [inner?]-chamber ...]). By stairs he went up onto the top of the bed” KUB 36.67 ii 24-25, 28 (Gurparanzahu), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:86f., cf. StBoT 44:130; [o-]x ŠÀ É.ŠÀ KÙ.GA zilaš GIŠi-x[...] [IN]IM ša-aš-ta-aš–pat DINGIR-LUM–ma namma dam[mai ...] “Within the pure inner chamber, the oracular outcome [...] (If it is) only the [ma]tter of the bed, and you O deity [nothing] fur[ther ...]” KUB 22.57 rev. 4-5 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 24.8 ii 7-9, above, 1 a; cf. also 482/u:2-5 (NS), w. dupl. IBoT 4.15:3-6 s.v. šašnu- 1.
b. for sexual intercourse: dElkuniršaš DAM–ŠU–ya TÚGša-aš-ti–šši ≠e±rir nu–šmaš–at katta šeš[er] “Elkunirša and his wife came to her bed and slept together” KUB 36.37 ii 8-9 + KUB 31.118:4 (Ašertu, NS), ed. Otten, MIO 1:142f., tr. Hoffner, RHA XXIII/76:10, Hittite Myths2 91, translit. Myth 141 (Otten and Laroche read the det. as GIŠ, otherwise unattested with this word, but the copy has TÚG); nu–tta tarrun ša-aš-da-an uËk[z]i ≠MUNUSKAR??.KID?±-dann–a–ta uË≠kzi± “And (if) he seeks a spread/stretched-out(?) bed(-roll) from you and he seeks a whore(?) from you, (give her the price. But (if) you do not give her a price, [...] she will send you on an unknown road)” KBo 12.70 ii! 12-13 (wisdom), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:780, Keydana, UF 28:70 | for tarru- see StBoT 5:134 n. 3, Weitenberg, U-Stämme 141, HEG T/D 237; cf. Bo 3790:6-7 below f and cf. KUB 24.8 ii 7-9, above, 1 a. 
c. grouped with other domestic furniture (for magical purposes): nu ŠA MUNUS-TI GIŠŠÚ.A GIŠBANŠUR ša-aš-ta-an (dupl. [ša-aš-d]u!-uš or [GIŠN]Á!-uš) [(GIŠGANNU)M] harnaūn MUNUS–ya (dupl. adds: [LÚp]ātiliš) IŠTU MUŠEN HURRI wahnu[zzi] “The patili-priest wave[s] with a shelduck over the chair, the table, the bed, the pot-stand, (and) birth-stool of the woman and the woman herself” ABoT 17 ii 8-9 (birth rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 9.22 ii 12-14, ed. StBoT 29:90f. | Siegelová, RlA 8:333, points to the sequence GIŠŠÚ.A GIŠBANŠUR GIŠNÁ in KUB 32.113:5 (rit., MS) for the partial overlap of šašta- and GIŠNÁ; (“But the table from which I was accustomed to eat as well as the cup from which I was accustomed to drink”) ša-aš-ti–ya–zza–kan kuedani šeškeškinun “and the bed in which I was accustomed to sleep, (and the basin from which I was accustomed to wash myself, … nothing was taken)” KBo 4.2 iv 30-31 (aphasia of Murš. II), ed. MSpr. 10f. (rev. 18), Lebrun, Hethitica 6:107, 111; cf. also KUB 20.2 iv 27-29 (fest. frag., NS), ed. AS 25:29; [... I]ŠTU SAG.DU–ŠU RAM¸NI–≠ŠU± [ ... GIŠZ]A.LAM.GAR-az GIŠNÁ-az ša-aš-ta-a[z ...] “[Remove the sorcery f]rom his head, from his body (lit. self) [...] from [the t]ent, from the bed, [from] the bed roll [...]” KBo 19.145 iii 9-10 (rit., MH/MS), translit. ChS I/5:212, cf. StBoT 14:20; cf. KUB 24.10 ii 3-28 below 2 d 2'. 
d. describing a type of bed — 1' a bedroll on or low to the ground and portable: (“When they say ‘halinduwa’ (i.e., ‘to the palace complex’), the royal bodyguard calls out ‘kāzzue’ (i.e., ‘the cup(?)’) to [the gateman(?)]”) nu ša-aš-ta-an šarā dāi n–an–kan katta pËdai “And he picks up the bedroll and carries it down” KBo 5.11 iv 10 (instr. for gatemen, MH?/NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 110f. | for the Hattic kāzzue see Soysal, Kratylos 44:164f.; cf. nu ša-aš-du-uš ša[rā] danzi n–aš ANA LÚ.MEŠŠU.I (dupl. LÚŠU.I) pianzi “They pick u[p] (their) bedrolls and give them to the barbers (var. barber)” KBo 5.11 iv 20-21 (instr. for gatemen, MH?/NS), w. dupl. KUB 26.28 iv 5-6; [dag(an)] ša-aš-ta-an išparranzi ≠nu± [(1?)] ≠TA±[(PAL KUŠNÍG.BÀR)] IŠTU 4.TA.ÀM ŠAPU^ [išpar(ranzi)] šerr–a–ššan 2 TÚG.BÁR išp[a(rranzi)] ta–aš–za–kan ša-aš-ti halie[zi] (var. hāliyari) “They spread out a bedroll [on the grou]nd. They [spr]ead out one set of curtains, with each four thick(?). On top they spread out two rough cloths. He falls down on the bedroll” KBo 13.106 i 3-6 (Hutuši’s rit., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 28.82 i 2-6 (NS), partially ed. StBoT 5:35 w. n. 6.
2' a bed roll that lies atop a bedframe (GIŠNÁ): (“karaš-wheat, barley, bread crumbs, a bow and three arrows she places in a basket”) n–at GIŠ!NÁ-aš kat[(tan dāi n–a)t–š(i kattan šešzi GIŠNÁ-š–a–šš)]an SÍGešaran [(kitkarza ¬padumma)]zzi–ya (dupl. U INA RAPŠI) hamank[(i)] § [(INA UD.2.KAM m)]ān lukkatta (dupls. add: nu) pattar GI[(ŠNÁ-az kattan a)]rha dāi ... n–ašta GIŠNÁ-az SÍGašaran [(tuhša)i ... § ... §§ 1 DUGDÍLIM.GAL MUŠEN QADU ALAM.HI.A DU[H.LÀL] GIŠNÁ-aš kitkarza ME-i 2 DUGD[ÍLIM.GAL…] GIŠNÁ-aš kËz kezzi–ya [(d)āi] n–at GEﬂ-ti GIŠNÁ-aš kattan šeš[(zi)] … (dupl. §) kË–š[ši(–kan SAG.DU-za)] karpandu kË–ma–šši–ka[(n ša-aš-ta-za)] karpandu “She places it below the bed and it passes the night below it. She binds a wool string at the head and foot(?) of (dupl. across(?), lit. in the ‘wide’(sic) of) the bed(frame). § When it is morning on the second day, she takes away the basket from below the bed(frame). (She waves it over the person saying ... give this sorcery back to the sorcerer. ...) She cut[s] the wool-string off the bed(frame). ... § ... §§ On the third day…) One bowl in the shape of a bird together with the wax statues she places at the head of the bed(frame). Two [...]-bowls [she places] on either side of the bed(frame). During the night they sleep (sg.) below the bed(frame). (She says: Let them lift this from here for it/him (the bed/patient). Let them lift this from that for it/him (the bed/patient)) § Let them lift this from its (i.e., the bed’s)/his (the patient’s) head and let them lift that from its/his bedroll” KUB 24.10 ii 3-7, 10, 21-24, 26-28 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 24.11 ii 24-28, 31 (MH/NS), KUB 41.1 iii 5-7, 10-11 (MH/NS), KBo 10.41 3-7, 11 (MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:38-43 (ii 45-iii 1b) | a reason for translating “its (the bed’s) head/bedding” rather than “his (the patient’s) head/bedding” is that the “head” (kitkarza) of the bed(frame) (GIŠNÁ) had strings tied to it then cut off, magically removing the sorcery from it. A basket was placed and then removed from beside the bed, presumably having the same effect on the lower part of the bed. Vessels were placed and removed from the head and sides of the bed as well. Considering the sudden change of words, GIŠNÁ to šašta-, one suspects that the ritual of the third day was designed to get rid of sorcery specifically from the man’s head(-board) and bedroll (cf. KBo 19.145 iii 10 above 2 c). If this is the case then it would appear that the difference between GIŠNÁ and šašta- was that the former was the wooden frame, while the latter usually referred to the bedroll/bedding that lay on top; [...] ANA 6 TAPAL GIŠNÁ.HI.A [o-]x išparranzi [o-o-o-o-]x.HI.A ša-aš-ta-aš išparranzi “They spread [...] on six beds. They spread [... -]s on the bedrolls” KUB 42.94 i 3-4 (rit., NS).
e. for laying out/displaying a corpse: (“The cupbearer takes a gold cup, and, in the room in which the deceased lies, he gives it to a palace servant. Then the palace servant holds it out to the deceased”) n[amma–a]n–kan ša-aš-ti peran katta ANA GAL.GIR› lā[(huwai)] “He pours it into the terracotta vessel down in front of the bed” KBo 40.348 rt. col. 1 (+?) KUB 30.23 ii? 14 (funerary rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 39.27 ii 9, ed. HTR 74f., Kassian et al., Funerary 162f.; cf. KBo 25.184 ii 8-9.
f. šaštaš tunnakkiš(n)- “bedroom”: MAY¸LU (var. TÚGMAY¸LU, TÚGMAˆLU)–ma–šši ša-aš-ta-aš É.ŠÀ-ni išparranz[a] “A bedding is spread out for him in the bedroom. (The lords who accompanied (lit.: were taken with) him keep watch over him during the night)” KUB 17.31 i? 24 (royal subst. rit.), w. dupls. KBo 15.2 iv 24, KBo 15.9 ii 17, ed. StBoT 3:62f.; (He puts kangati in the hearth, at the door-bolt, and beside the hearth) EGIR-ŠU–ma kangati ANA É.ŠÀ ša-aš-ta-aš (over erasure) x[...] “Afterwards he [...-s] kangati in the bedroom” KUB 15.42 iii 29 (rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 14:21 (reading the traces as ša-aš-ta-an); n–ašta LÚHAD¸NU DUMU.MUNUS–ya [... š]a-aš-ta-aš É.ŠÀ-ni anda pānzi “The son-in-law and the daughter go into the bedroom” Bo 3790:6-7, ed. Alp, Tempel 368.
g. hideout (lit. sleeping place): (“Hudupianza protected Palā. He had no army at his disposal”) nu–za–kan HUR.SAG.MEŠ-aš anda ša-a-aš-du-uš Ëššešta “So he created hideouts (lit. sleeping places) for himself (and the few men he had at his disposal) in the mountains” KBo 5.8 ii 28, ed. AM 154f. (“Schlupfwinkel”), tr. del Monte, L’annalistica 109 (“giacigli”). 
h. bed(ding) for people/gods made of foliage: nu–ššan iyahhut GIŠšahiš GIŠhapp[uriyaš] ša-aš-za–tiš nu–za–kan šeški “Go on (it)! šahi- and happ[uriya-]woods are your bed (i.e., it is made of š. and h.-branches). Lie down on it” KUB 33.8 iii 18-19 (Tel. myth, second vers., OH/NS), translit. Myth. 44, tr. Hittite Myths 19 | the added value of the -ške- suffix here is inceptive, for which see Hoffner/Melchert, GsImparati 384f.; cf. KUB 17.10 ii 30-31 (Tel. myth, first vers., OH/MS), for disc. see (GIŠ)šahi(š)-; nu–wa–kan hahhallaš ša-aš-ti UH‡-aš šešd[u] “Let the sorcerer sleep in a bed of underbrush” VBoT 111:12 (rit.), ed. HW2 H 4b.
i. bedding for animals, litter: [š]a-aš-du-š–a–šmaš ŠA IN.NU katta[n iyanz]i(?) [...]x [...na]mma–šmaš ša-aš-ti katta [...-]anzi “They put down for them (i.e., the horses) straw beddings ... Then they [...] for them down in/on the bedding” KUB 29.40 ii 18-19 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 180f., cf. StBoT 44:130; ša-aš-d[u-š–a–šmaš ŠA IN.NU] kattan iyan[zi nu GEﬂ-an hūmandan azzikk]a[nzi] šeškiškanzi–ya–at–za “They put down [for them (i.e., the horses) straw] beddings. They e[at all night] and sleep” KUB 29.40 iv 24-25 + KBo 16.92:9-10 (hipp., MH/MS); cf. Hipp.heth. 188f., and cf. par. KUB 29.50 i 42-43, ed. Hipp.heth. 210f.; nu–šmaš ša-aš-du-uš kattanarha(sic) ≠danzi± “They pick up their bedding” KUB 29.52 iv 6 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp. heth. 196f.; [...]x 5 ša-aš-ta-aš UDU.HI.A kar-x[...] KUB 16.53 obv.? 9 (oracle question, NH); perhaps here mān ša-aš-za UR.MAH hū[-...] KBo 22.84:7 (myth frag., NS).
With Rieken, StBoT 44:130f., we take “lying down, sleep, reclining” as the original meaning of š. from which its secondary meaning “bedding, bedroll, bed, place for lying down/sleep” developed. š., GIŠ/TÚGNÁ, and TÚGMAY¸LU all appear to have been used at Bo©azköy to mean “bed, sleeping place.” š. is attested without determinative, or rarely with TÚG. NÁ usually bears the determinative GIŠ, but is occasionally preceded by TÚG. MAY¸LU in Akkadian means “sleeping place, bed.” All four could be “spread” (išparre-). š. and GIŠNÁ were equated by Ehelolf in 1926 and thus entered into HW. However Siegelová, StBoT 14:20f., pointed out that the two terms occur side by side (KBo 19.145 iii 10, above 2 c), while admitting, RlA 8:333, the possibility of a partial overlap. Normally GIŠNÁ appears to be neuter (cf. GIŠ[N]Á–[m]a–kan parā udanzi n–at GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-aš É.ŠÀ-ni išparranzi “They carry the bed out and spread it out in the tent’s inner chamber” IBoT 3.148 i 31-32, NS) and pl. tantum (cf. nu–war–aš–kan apËtaš–pat GIŠNÁ-aš šeškeškit “He used to sleep in that bed” KUB 16.83 obv. 28 (oracle question, NH)) and cf. the erg. pl. (takku–kan UN-an GIŠNÁ-anteš kattan šarā šiyanzi “If a bed pushes a person up from below” KUB 29.9 i 26-27 (omen, NS) but an exception in sg. is GIŠNÁ?-i in KBo 29.83 i 10 unless one wishes to emend -i to TUR. On the other hand š. has both singular and plural forms and is common gender (cf. šašza–tiš KUB 33.8 iii 19 (OH/NS); š. taken up by -an KBo 5.11 iv 10-11 (NH) and the acc. pl. šašduš.) MAY¸LU occurs beside GIŠNÁ (KBo 21.12:11, KBo 18.175 v 13-16 ed. s.v. GAD/TÚGlakkuššanzani- a), and in close proximity to š. in another text (KUB 17.31 i? 24, above, 2 f). Also GIŠnathi(t)- (q.v.) occurs next to GIŠNÁ. (GIŠ)nathi(t)- sometimes is attested in a pair with (d)nam(m)ulli- (q.v.) “couch.” Therefore we seem to have four or even five closely related but different words for bed or sleeping place in Hittite. It is likely that GIŠNÁ (note the GIŠ determinative, and phrases such as “1 ivory GIŠNÁ, 4 lion-feet plated with gold” KBo 18.175 v 13-14 and “one bed of boxwood” KUB 42.43 obv. 12) was the bed-frame, while šašta-, especially when used in connection w. GIŠNÁ, was a sort of bedroll/mattress that could be placed on top of this or used by itself on the ground, but could also stand for “bed, sleeping place” in general.
A Hittite bed/couch can be seen depicted in the second register of the ∫nandık vase, see T.Özgüç, ∫nandık pl. 51.1.
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 277f.; Ehelolf, OLZ 29 (1926) 988 (= GIŠNÁ, “Bett, Lager(stelle), Schlafe” < šeš-/šešd-); Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 73f.; Götze/Pedersen, MSpr. (1934) 66f.; Siegelová, StBoT 14 (1971) 20f. (šašta- = “Bettzeug,” GIŠNÁ =“Bettgestell,” TÚG (ŠA) GIŠNÁ = “Tuch des Bettes,” MAY¸LU =“Bett(zeug)”); eadem, RlA 8 (1995) 333 (Hittite beds); Symington, Furniture (1996) 126-128 (on beds as part of Hittite furniture); Rieken, StBoT 44 (1999) 129-131 (orthography and stem formation; gives reasons why š. and GIŠNÁ are to be kept apart as separate words); Schuster, HHB 2 (2002) 223-225. 
Cf. šašant-, šaš(ša)nu-, šeš-; GAD/TÚGlakkuššanzani-, (GIŠ)nathi(t)-, GIŠNÁ.
[šāšu] in [1 A.ŠÀ] ša-a-šu µApanuw[a ... ] / IŠTU GÍD.DA 30[+20?...] / IŠTU DAGAL–ma–šš[i …] KBo 19.12:4-6. Since Akk. šâšu “that” makes no sense, the passage is probably to be read [1 A.ŠÀ] ŠA ÍD ... “One field along the river” in spite of the lack of word space between ŠA and ÍD, compare KUB 8.75 i 16, 59, 68, iii 6-26, ed. Souc√ek, ArOr 27:10f., 14-17.
˚šaššūmāi- v.; to make (someone) sorry/contrite(?); NH.†
 imp. sg. 2 ˚ša-aš-šu-u-ma-a-i KUB 36.35 i 20 (NH).
(Ašerdu propositions Baªal who refuses and tells her husband Elkunirša. The latter tells Baªal:) Ït–war–an ˚ša-aš-šu-u-ma-a-i ˚?x-x[... / dAšerdun DA]M–≠YA± n[u–w]ar–an lūriyah “Go and make her sorry/contrite(?) [... (= imp. vb.)] my [wif]e [Ašerdu], (or: Go and make her sorry/contrite, (viz.) my [... (= adj.) wif]e [Ašerdu]) and humiliate her” (Whereupon the Stormgod reports to her that he has killed all her sons) KUB 36.35 i 20-21 (Ašertu myth, NH), ed. Otten, MIO 1:126f. (“Um mit ihr zu schlafen”), translit. Myth. 140, tr. Hoffner, RHA XXIII/76:8 (“sleep with”), Hittite Myths2 91 (“threaten(?)”), cf. Hoffner, Unity&Diversity 141f.
The translation of this hapax is very uncertain. Güterbock apud Otten, reasonably, suggested that the word was related to Hittite šeš- and that Elkunirša was suggesting that Baªal humiliate Ašertu by sleeping with her. CHD s.v. luriyahh- noting that Baªal immediately after conferring with Elkunirša announces to her that he has killed her children, suggested that Elkunirša told him “to bereave” her. Hoffner has several times suggested that Baªal was “to threaten” her. But since killing her children or saying that he had done so is not directly “threatening” her, perhaps he was told to “make her contrite/sorry” for her adulterous proposition.
Güterbock apud Otten, MIO 1 (1953) 132f. (Luw. cognate of Hitt. šeš-/šaš-); Laroche, DLL (1959) 87 (s.v. šašša(i)- “coucher, reposer,” imp. 2 is šašša, while š. is considered “forme incertaine”); Hoffner, RHA XXIII/76 (1965) 8f. w. n. 21 (“sleep with”); idem, Unity & Diversity (1975) 141f. (“sleep with(?),” or perhaps not related to šeš- but rather “threaten, reprimand(??)”); Morpurgo Davies, FsSzemerényi1 (1979) 579 (š. in discussion of Luw. forms in -ai as pres. 3 sg.); CHD (1980) s.v. luriyahh- (“bereave(?),” based on Baªal’s subsequent words to Ašertu); Hoffner, Hittite Myths (1990) 69 (“threaten(?)”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 192 (“?,” “‘beschlafe’ is mere guess and difficult formally”).
šašza see šašt(a)-.
*šat- see šazke-. For ša-ta-a-an KUB 53.1 i 12 see discussion under šeš-.
(GIŠ)šatta- n. neut.; 1. shovel(?) or bucket(?), 2. (a body-part); from MH.†
sg. nom.-acc. GIŠša-at-ta-an KUB 30.35 i 4 (MH/NS), KUB 39.102:5 (MH/NS), KUB 15.32 ii (8) (MH/ENS).
pl. nom.-acc. GIŠša-at-ta KUB 15.31 ii 14 (MH/NS). 
abl. ša-at-ta-za KUB 24.13 ii 16 (NS). 
1. a shovel(?) or bucket(?): (During a purification ritual to clean a settlement of blood, oath and slander they use the following tools and ingredients) GIŠAL ZABAR GIŠMAR ZABAR GIŠša-at-ta-an ZABAR Ì LÀL NINDA.SIG.MEŠ “A bronze hoe, a bronze spade, a bronze š., oil, honey, (and) thin breads” KUB 30.35:4-5 (Iriya’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 39.102 i 4-5, ed. Francia, Or NS 73:394; (They dig out 9 offering pits on the ground using 5 different tools) hūdāk–ma–za GIŠAL dāi nu paddāi EGIR–ŠU–ma–za TUDITTUM dāi apËz paddāi EGIR–ŠU–ma–za GIŠša-at-ta (var. [... š]a-at-ta-an) GIŠMAR GIŠhūpparann–a dāi nu–kan šarā lÏšaizzi “He then promptly takes a hoe and digs (with it). Then he takes a clothing-pin and digs with it. Then he takes a š., a spade, and a huppara-container, and he clears out (the pit with them)” KUB 15.31 ii 12-15 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 ii 6-9 (MH/ENS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:156f. (no tr.), tr. Collins, Magic and Ritual 227 (no tr.), see also leššai- b. The š. could be either another digging tool like the spade or another soil container like the huppar-.
2. a body part: alwanzenaš kue uddār Ëšta arha–ta–kkan anšan Ëšdu alwanzatar MUNUS-annaza haššannaza UZUÚR-za genuwaz kattan–ma–ta–kkan ša-at-ta-za anšan Ëšdu alwanzatar EGIR-anta–ta–kkan UZU-naz pËran–ma–ta–kkan ≠ŠU±.SI-az anšan Ëšdu alwanzatar šankuiš–at–kan paprannaza anšan Ëšdu GÌR.MEŠ–at–kan anšan Ëšdu patalhaz–at–kan anšan Ëšdu HUL-lu ≠al±wanzatar “Concerning the words of (i.e., spoken by) the sorcerer, let the sorcery be wiped off from your female reproductive powers, male reproductive powers, sexual parts and loins. Under you may the sorcery be wiped from your š.; behind from your limbs; and in front of you may it be wiped from your finger. Let it be wiped from (your) nails together with impurity. Let it be wiped from (your) feet. Let the evil sorcery be wiped from the soles of (your) feet” KUB 24.13 ii 13-22 (Allaiturahi’s rit., NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:104f. (no tr.), ChS I/5:110 (no tr.) | for the reading ÚR in line 15 see HZL no. 213, for šankuiš–at–kan see šankuwai-/šankui- 1 a. Although kattan in line 16 is likely to be used parallel to the following EGIR-anta and pËran, it does not necessarily imply that š. is a lower body part since it could also mean “let the sorcery be wiped from under your š.” Haas/Thiel incorrectly read MUNUSannaza and considered all the items in the preceding sentence to be kinship terms or euphemisms for kinship terms.
Sommer/Falkenstein, HAB (1938) 102 n. 2 (“nach dem Kontext wohl Körperteil”); Rosenkranz, JEOL 19 (1967) 504f. (compares etymologically with šai-/šiya-); Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 177 (“Gerät zur Bodenbearbeitung(?)”); Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 123 (“Bedeutung unklar”). 
Cf. GIŠšādu-.
[šatai- n.] KBo 5.1 i 17, cf. Pap. 2*f., 89, emend to šagai- so already Pap. 99; cf. šagai- 1 b.
šādayan n. neut.; (a garden plant or flower); from MH/MS.†
sg. nom.-acc. ša-a-da-ia-an KUB 7.1 i 24 (pre-NH/NS).
Luw. neut. sg. in -ša ša-a-ta-ia-an-za KBo 34.108:4 (MH/MS), [ša?]-≠a?±-ta-ia-an-za Or. 95/3 obv.? i/ii 21 (MH/MS).
The -za in the two MH/MS examples is the Luwian case in -ša.
(In a long list beginning:) (“All the plants of the garden”) ... ša-a-da-ia-an ... KUB 7.1 i 24 (Ayatarša’s rit., pre-NH/NS), translit. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:143, Ertem, Flora 38, Haas, FsOtten2 126; […]x ŠÂDU ≠MUN x x x x± / [… GIŠal]anzaš paršduš § / [… tuh]huišar tariyatariya / [… GIŠtapa]lkušdaniš ša-a-ta-ia-an-za / […-a]š halkinānza welluwaš hašte[rza(?)] § KBo 34.108:1-5 (rit., MH/MS); in a botanical lexical list from Ortaköy: (Sum.) […] = (Hitt.) [ša?-]≠a?±-ta-ia-an-za Or.95/3 obv.? i/ii 21 (MH/MS), ed. Süel/Soysal, FsHoffner 353 (without rest.).  
Ertem, Flora (1974) 163; Neumann, HS 112 (1999) 277 n. 16; Neumann, Würzburger Jahrbücher für die Altertumswissenschaft 23 (1999) 18 (considers a link with Gk. ﬁ†‡†é¬™d∆›, a kind of medlar).
šadandi/e- n. Hurr.; (mng. unkn.); from MH/MS.†
sg. d.-l. or Hurr. essive ša-ta-an-ti-ia KUB 15.34 iv 23 (MH/MS?), KUB 15.31 iii 4, 31 (MH/NS), KUB 47.42 iv 6 (MH/MS?), KUB 32.50 obv. 13 (MH/MS), ša-ta-an-te-ia KUB 15.33a iv 9 (MH/NS?).
nu 8 (var. 7) MUŠEN.HI.A wa!rnuanzi ŠÀ.BA 1 MUŠEN [...(-teya)] 1 MUŠEN ša-ta-an-ti-ia (var. ša-ta-an-te-ia–ya (or «ya»)) 1 MUŠEN hūwa[lziya dal(ahulziya)] 1 MUŠEN hāriya 1 MUŠEN hazziz[ziya 1 MUŠEN aš(apšiya)] 1 MUŠEN enumaššiya warnuan[zi] “They burn eight (var. seven) birds. Of these they burn one bird for [...]-te, one bird for š., one bird for hūwalzi, (and) dalahulzi, one bird for hāri, one bird for hazziz[zi, one bird for aš]apši, one bird for enumašši” KUB 15.34 iv 22-25 (evocation rit., MH/MS?), w. dupl. KUB 15.33a iv 8-11 (MH/NS?), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:204f., translit. ChS I/9:45; [1 MUŠEN–ma h]ā[riya] hāziziya unihiya [1 MUŠEN–ma ...-h]iy[a š]a-ta-an-ti-ia [... dāriy]a [dupur]puriya KUB 15.31 iii 30-32 (evocation rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:162-65, translit. ChS I/9:40; [(1 MUŠEN–m)]a hËlihiya [(dapihiya 1 MUŠEN–m)]a ša-ta-an-ti-ia unalziya [1 (MUŠEN–ma ananišh)iya unihiya KUB 15.31 iii 3-5 (evocation rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. 1321/u:4-6 (NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:160-163, translit. ChS I/9:40; [...-t]iya ša-ta-an-ti-ia 1 MU[ŠEN ...] KUB 47.42 iv 6 (Kizzuwatnean rit., MH/MS?); ... hāriya haziziya aga[-... ša]-ta!-an-ti-ia utuhhulziya kišarinniya daliya pahm[iya ...] KUB 32.50 obv. 12-13 (Kizzuwatnean rit., MH/MS), translit. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:245; Laroche, Ugar. 5:501 and Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:96, report that the term appears in Ugaritic alphabetic texts as tdndy KTU 1.116:4.
š. is a Hurrian noun, probably derived from the root šad- for which Wilhelm, FsNeve 102 n. 78, suggests a meaning “to give back, replace, compensate” and which would be attested in the Hittite royal PN Šadanduhepa, possibly Tašmišarri/Tudhaliya III/II’s first queen. For the interpretation of such Hurrian offering terms in -ya as Hitt. d.-l. or Hurrian essive see Janowski/Wilhelm, Religionsgeschichtliche Bezie-hungen (OBO 129) 147-151.
Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 96 (listed under “Heilsbegriffe”); Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 211 (“lieu ou objet cultuel”); Haas, ChS I/9 (1998) 241 (“ein Vokationsterminus”).
šātar n. neut.; irritation(?); from OH/MS.†
nom.-acc. ša-a-tar KBo 17.54 i 15 (OH/MS), KUB 9.4 iii 44 (NH), KUB 9.34 i 27, iv 3 (MH/LNS), IBoT 3.102:4 (MH/NS), ša-a-a-tar VBoT 88 rev. 8, 9; unclear ša-a-t[a-...] KUB 44.61 obv. 1 (NS).
a. an undesirable condition removed from a sick individual by ritual magic: UZUmei<lu>liyaš (var. mÏlul[iyaš]) pahhur ša-a-tar mu!dāizzi (text píd-da-a-iz-zi, cf. mudai- 2) “She removes (text: “carries off”) the fever (and) irritation(?) of the flesh(?)” KUB 9.4 iii 43-44 (NH), w. par. HT 6 obv. 7 (NH), ed. mÏluli- (“m.’s fire (and) anger”), Beckman, Or NS 59:39, 47 (“the burning of skin? and anger”); [... pa]hhur ša-a-tar mutaizzi “She removes the [fe]ver (and) irritation(?) [of the flesh] ” KUB 9.34 iv 3; similarly ibid. i 27 and KBo 17.54 i 15 (OH/MS); [... a]ndurza inanaš ša-a-t[a- ...] “[If …] on the inside, [the … of(?)] illness [and] of irrita[tion…] (and he cannot/does not eat)” KUB 44.61 obv. 1, ed. StBoT 19:18f. (“[Wenn ... d]rinnen (Krankheit) von inan (und) šātar(?)[...]”), cf. Josephson, Heth.u.Idg. 93 (“When inside [a man?] the sādar of illness [...]”).
b. a condition deliberately induced by medical means as a stage in the curing of a patient: (“He/she crushes white herbs and [ ...-s them] with beer or with wine [...])” [...] ša-a-a-tar tÏËzzi § [mān a-pé-e-e]z(?) ša-a-a-tar UL [tÏËzzi] “irritation(?) will appear. § [But if] as a result of [that] irritation(?) [does(?)] not [appear]” VBoT 88:8-9 (medical text).
Josephson’s translation “pain(?)” and Ševoroškin’s “Leid” were based on both contextual and etymological considerations. However, with the semantic progression “anger” > “flushed appearance, inflammation” attested in other languages, a derivation from ša- “to be sullen > to be angry,” is more likely. Especially suggestive is the pairing of œirihtu “anger; inflammation” and IZI (Akk. išātu “fire”; Akk. ummu “fever”) in Akkadian medical texts (cf. CAD Œ 207 s.v. œirihtu A).   Deliberately inducing blisters in the skin in order to cure a patient (cf. b) is known as “counter-irritation.”  A translation “irritation” for š. would be closer to the original meaning of šā(y)e- “to be sullen.”  Friedrich’s, HW 2.Erg. 23, meaning “Übel der Weichteile” is based on the combination of š. with UZUmÏluli “skin(?), flesh(?), soft tissue(?),” but there is no indication that mÏluli refers to the genitals. Scholars who assume this (Ünal and Erginöz) may have been misled by the second meaning of Goetze’s German “Weichteile” (Tunn. 77), by which he meant only “flesh” (Tunn. 115).
Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 52 (“Beziehung(???) zu šā- mit šāuwar “‘Groll, Zorn’”), 412 n. 26; Friedrich, HW 2.Erg. (1961) 23 (“(Übel der Weichteile)”); Josephson, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 93 (“an evil,” a symptom of illness; cf. Avestan sādra- “pain”); Ünal, Belleten XLIV/175 (1980) 491 w. n. 100 (“Cinsiyet uzuvlarındaki belirsiz bir rahatsızlık” referring to HW 2.Erg.); Ševoroškin, GsKronasser (1982) 210 (compares Old Irish 
sāe-thar “Leid” < IE sai- “Schmerz, Krankheit”); Hutter, Behexung (1988) 72f.; Erginöz, Anatomi (1999) 140f. (“Cinsi uzuv-lardaki bir hastalık?”); Rieken, StBoT 44 (1999) 380 n. 1913 (“‘Schmerzen, Wüten’ (zu šā- ‘wüten’)”).
Cf. šā(y)e-/šai- A.
(˚)šattawartanna adv., derived from Indic; (in) seven turns(?); MH.†
ša-at-ta-wa-ar-ta-an-na KBo 3.2 rev.! 8 (MH/NS), ˚ša-at-ta-wa-ar-ta-an-na ibid. obv.! 18, ša-at-<ta->wa-ar-ta-an-na KUB 1.11 ii 43 (MH/NS).
parhai–ma 1 DANNA anda ša-at-<ta->wa-ar-ta-an-na šittanna halziš!šanzi–ma 7 uwah!nuwar “He makes (them, i.e., the horses) gallop one double-hour’s distance (in) seven turns(?) (Hurr.) seven, that is to say seven turns” KUB 1.11 ii 42-44 (Kikk. 3rd tabl., MH/NS), ed. Potratz, 138f. w. n. 38, Hipp.heth. 114f. (no tr.), tr. Masson, L'art de soigner 87 (“sept tours”) | šittanna = Hurr. *šitta- assimilated variant of šinda/i “7” + -nna (Potratz 208, Hipp.heth. 19f., 365, and StBoT 41:74f. n. 171, and w. less certainty, GLH 237). Wilhelm, pers. comm., says the -nna could be: 1) a word ending in -ni + “article” pl. -na, or 2) a word with the suffix -nni in the essive case, or 3) an “associative”-form 
(-nni) in the essive case, or 4) the enclitic pronoun sg. 3 -nna; cf. parhai–ma–aš 1 DANNA ˚ša-at-ta-wa-ar-ta-an-na auzumiewaaš uwahnuwar–ma 7 halziššanzi KBo 3.2 obv.! 18-19 (Kikk. 4th tabl., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 128f. (“Siebener-Runde”), tr. Masson, L’art de soigner 98; n–aš auzumiewaa ša-at-ta-wa-ar-ta-an-na 1 DANNA parhai uwa!hnuwar–ma 7 halziššanzi ibid. rev.! 8-9, ed Hipp.heth. 136f. (“Siebener-Runde”), tr. Masson, L'art de soigner 103  | auzumiewa seems to be Hurrian auz- (cf. perhaps in a Nuzi personal name, Auzana, HSS 16.456:24 [Wilhelm, pers. comm., apud Lacheman manuscript correction] + me (word building suffix; cf. purame “slave”) + dat.; cf. also ibid. rev.! 61.
Jensen, SPAW 1919:367-372 (> old Indic saptá “sieben” + vāra “-mal” + Akk. -tāna/i); HroznŸ, BoSt 3 (1919) XIf. (> saptá “sieben” + vártanam “das Drehen”); Sommer, BoSt 4 (1920) 2-4; Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 258-260; Potratz, Hipp. (1938) 205-208; Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. (1961) 19f., 114 n. 40 (-wartanna > old Iranian *wart- “drehen, wenden” = heth. wahnumar); Mayrhofer, Indo-Arier (1966) 15f. (saptá + Vedic vartaní- “Weg, Bahn, Lauf” ); Kammenhuber, Die Arier (1968) 200f., 204f. (follows Mayrhofer); Starke, StBoT 41 (1995) 63-65, 75-77. 
šatti- n. com.; (mng. unkn.); NS.†
sg. acc. ša-at-ti-in KUB 20.75 ii 10 (NS).
unclear ša-a-at-te-[...] KUB 12.17:9.
[MUNUS.MEŠ?h]ušanalliš ša-at-ti-in SÌR-RU “The hušanalli-[women/woman] sing(s) a song(?) (or: sing(s) a š.-song)” KUB 20.75 ii 10 (cult of Huwaššanna, NS); here? [... k]urkurÏezi kuiša ša-a-at-te-[…] KUB 12.17:9 (rit., NS).
The verb išhamai- (SÌR-RU) takes as an acc. the word “song” and as an acc. the subject of a song (i.e., a deity); there is no case where a musical instrument is the object of (as opposed to the subject of an intransitive) išhamai- see Kümmel, FsOtten 172f. Cf. Cun. Luw. šatti- CLL 193 s.v.
šatlašša-, šatliša- n.; (mng. unkn., always modifying EZEN› “festival”); from MS.†
gen. ša-at-la-aš-ša-aš KUB 46.47 obv. 26 (MH/ENS), KUB 13.4 i 41 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 31.92:9 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 22.246 iii 22 (NH), KBo 26.156 rev. (3) (NH), Bo 6251 obv. 16, Bo 7832 rt. col. 2, 7 (both Souc√ek/Siegelová, ArOr 42:51 n. 32), ša-at-li-ša-aš KBo 8.82 rev. 13 (MS).
[(nu–za ui)zzi EZEN›] ša-at-li-ša-aš iyazi [(EGIR–ŠU–ma–za DINGIR-LAM) …] “(S)He proceeds to perform [the festival] of š. Next [(s)he/they … ] the deity” KBo 8.82 rev. 13 (Kizzuwatnean rit., MS), w. dupl. KBo 38.110:11-12 (NS); [(an)da–m]a EZEN› ITU.KAM EZEN› MU-TI EZEN› AYALI EZEN› zen[and]aš EZEN› hamešhandaš EZEN› tethešnaš [(EZ)]EN› hiyaraš EZEN› pūdahaš EZEN› išuwaš EZEN› [š]a-at-la-aš-ša-aš EZEN› BIBRI EZEN›.MEŠ šuppayaš LÚSANGA-aš EZEN›.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ ŠU.GI EZEN›.MEŠ 
MUNUS.MEŠAMA.DINGIR-L[IM] EZEN› dahiyaš EZEN›.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠubatiyaš EZEN›.MEŠ pūlaš EZEN›.MEŠ hahrannaš našma–aš kuiš imma kuiš EZEN›-aš URUHattuši–kan šer “Furth[erm]ore, the festival of the month, the festival of the year, the festival of the stag, the festival of the autumn, the festival of the spring, the festival of thunder, the hiyara-festival, the pudaha-festival, the (h)išuwa-festival, the š.-festival, the rhyton festival, the festivals of pure priests, the festivals of the elders, the festivals of the ‘mother-of-god’ priestesses, the dahiya-festival, the festivals of the ubati-men, the festivals of the lot, the festivals of hahratar, whatever (other) festival there is up in Hattuša, (if you do not perform them correctly, you will cause the offerings to fall short of the gods’ will)” KUB 13.4 i 39-45 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 31.92:8-11 (NS), KUB 13.17 i 11-14 (NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 26-29, tr. McMahon, CoS 1:218, cf. Souc√ek/Siegelová, ArOr 42:51; (“There are thirteen festivals for the Stormgod of Aleppo”) ŠÀ.BA EZEN› p[ud(ahaš)] EZEN› hiyaraš EZEN› ša-at-la-aš-ša-aš EZEN› na[-...] 1 EZEN› GURUN EZEN› TÚL-TI EZEN› HUR.SAGTatta [...] EZEN› TËnu 2 EZEN› šËnaš ašešanumanz[i] “Including a p[ud]aha-festival, a hiyara-festival, a festival of š., a n. festival, a festival of fruit, a festival of the spring, a festival of Mt. Tatta[...], a festival of Tenu, two festivals of seating/installing the (god’s) image” KBo 22.246 iii 21-24 (fest. for Teššub and Hebat, NH), w. dupl. KBo 26.156 rev. 2-5 (NH), ed. Trémouille, Eothen 7:93 n. 319.
Souc√ek/Siegelová, ArOr 42 (1974) 51 w. n. 32; Süel, Direktif Metni (1985) 112; Trémouille, Eothen 7 (1997) 93f.
GIŠšādu n.; (an agricultural implement); NS.†
1 GIŠša-a-du <1?> GIŠmūÏl 1 GIŠhah[haraš ...] “One š. (and) <one>? m.-implement, one ra[ke ...]” KUB 42.97:2 (rit., NS) | other occurrences of (GIŠ)muil(a)- (q.v.) show that it is an implement and not a material.
The Akkadian words resembling this are (GIŠ)œaddu “sign, signal” and GIŠšaddu “a chest or container” see CAD s.v. It might also be the vessel from which the measure is derived (correct Akk. sâtu, pl. of sūtu), the singular of which the Hittites often write 1 ša-a-du. There is thus a good chance that this is actually an Akkadogram.
Cf. GIŠšatta-.
GIŠšaddu(wa?)- (a type of tree/woody plant); from MH/MS.†
sg. nom. GIŠša-ad-d[u(-)…] KBo 24.114:(3); gen. GIŠša-ad-du-wa-aš KBo 5.7 rev. 1 (Arn. I/MS).
/ [o-(o) GE]ŠTIN 10 GU[N ... ] / 10 GUN GIŠša-ad-d[u(-)...] / hūman INA É dI[M ...] § “[...] grapes(?)/wine(?), ten talents of [...], ten talents of š.-timber [...], all […] into the temple of the S[torm]god” KBo 24.114:2-4; [o IKU] A.ŠÀ GIŠša-ad-du-wa-aš 14 IKU wËllu 4 IKU 3 gipeššar GIŠKIRIﬂ[.GEŠTIN ...] “[#] IKU of field containing š.-trees, fourteen IKU of meadow, four IKU three gipeššar of vineyard [...]” KBo 5.7 rev. 1 (land grant to Kuwatalla, Arn. I/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:348f. | for the measures see van den Hout, RlA 7:521f. The appearence of ten talents of š.-wood suggests that the š. in this context is timber.
Laroche, Onom. (1951) 114 (“nom d’arbre”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 188 (“(eine Nutzpflanze?)”); Laroche, RHA XIX/69 (1961) 86 (“nom de plante potagère”).
MUNUSšātuhe- n. com.; (a disrespectable category of women); NH.†
sg. acc. MUNUSša-a-tu-he-en KUB 4.3 iii 4 (NH).
MUNUSša-a-tu-he-en–za MUNUS-an! lË ME-t[i] “Do not take as a wife (lit. woman) a. š.-woman” KUB 4.3 iii 4 (bilingual wisdom, NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:781 (no tr). The Akk. col. has [...]x ana kuštarÏti (emend to anaku iš!tarÏti?) lūpulka / [...-]ta u kabtūtka / [...in]a bÏt abika nabû šumka ibid. iv 4-6. The Akkadian is unclear. It is also unclear whether or not the Hittite is a translation just of Akk. iv 4 or a paraphrase of iv 4-6, or for that matter, whether the Hittite scribe understood the Akkadian at all. No Akk. word *kuštarÏtu is attested. The emendation has the advantage of perhaps linking the šātuhe- with the ištarÏtu, one of the categories of women that a man is not to marry according to a different Mesopotamian wisdom text: “Do not marry a prostitute, whose husbands are legion. Do not marry an ištarÏtu who is dedicated to a deity. Do not marry a kulmašÏtu whose contacts are many” BWL 102f.:72-74. 
The word is possibly Hurrian since the -uhe ending could be explained as the ubiquitous adjectival ending –he following the derivative vowel -o- which replaces -i or -e/i stems. The lexeme should be a noun *šadi or possibly *šatti. *šadi would be derived from šad- “to give back, replace, compensate” (Fincke apud Dinçol/Dinçol/Hawkins/Wilhelm, IM 43:102 n. 78, see also šadandi/e-, above), so a MUNUSšātuhe would literally be “a woman who pertains to repaying, compensating.” On the other hand *šatti would be derived from šatt- = Akk. œabātu “to take, seize” (Ugarit trilingual, André-Salvini/Salvini, SCNNH 9:15) so in this case a MUNUSšātuhe would literally be “a woman who pertains to taking” (Wilhelm, pers. comm.).
Laroche, DLL (1959) 87 (pl. acc. or dat.(?) of *šatuhi- = Hitt. SALzintuhi); idem, RHA XXIII/76 (1965) 48; idem, Ugar. 5 (1968) 783 (withdraws DLL’s Luw. interpretation).
[šadupšāhi-] KBo 2.18 rev. 25 (MSpr 43, HW 188), read ŠA dupšahi (Laroche, RA 48:47, Friedrich, 1.Erg. 18).
šawayai- v.; (mng. unkn.); pre-NH/NS.†
pret. sg. 3 ša-wa-ia-it KUB 44.56 obv. 11 (pre-NH/NS).
[... a]nda ša-wa-ia-it x[...] KUB 44.56 obv. 11 (pre-NH/NS); note 3 pret. verb tamašta in obv. 9.
[GADšawalga-] among other linen items in a list of presents (to be?) sent by Amenhotep III of Egypt to Tarhuntaradu of Arzawa, EA 31 (= VBoT 1):33 (MH/MS). Thus translit. by Rost, MIO 4:335f., Friedrich, HKL no. 7a, and Haas apud Moran, Amarna Letters 101. However, Knudtzon, Arz. 37 n. 29 (repeated verbatim in EA p. 273 n. t) transliterated “1 me kitûan-wa-al-ga-an” and remarked in a footnote after the AN sign: “Hier ist ein kleiner Zwischenraum; es befindet sich aber in ihm ein gestrichener Kopf eines senkrechten Keils. Auch das folgende wa ist über etwas anderes geschrieben.” Despite the space, Bugge, Arz. 81f., took anwalgan as one word and suspected a sg. acc. neut. of a compound consisting of an- privativum and *walga- “feucht”: “nicht feuchtes (Kleid), wasserdichtes (Kleid).” Photos of the lower edge on which line 33 is written confirm Knudtzon’s reading. After GAD there is an unmistakable AN followed by a small space, the size of a usual word space, in which the remains of what seems to have been a vertical wedge is visible. This results in a reading 1 ME GAD-an wa-al-ga-an. walgan is probably the sg. nom.-acc. neut. part. of the v. walg- q.v. 
[ša?uwaniyawant-] KUB 33.120 i 42, thus read by Güterbock, Kum. *3, 36, followed by HW 188, Myth 155; but read i?-ya?-u-wa-ni-ia-u-an-za by Forrer, FsCumont 694, followed by Dressler, Plur. 235 and HED 1-2:353; but read ¬ia(col. photo)-u-wa-ni-ia-u-an-za and cf. iyawaniyawant-.
šawant- in [(d)a]ldanniš ša-wa-an-ta-aš TÚLŠaniyaš ... KUB 38.6 iv 9-10 (cult inv., NH), w. dupl. KUB 38.10 Zusatz 8, translit. Rost, MIO 8:187, is the name(?) of a spring (aldanni-) following Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:224 and Tischler, RGTC 6:547. Since it does not have a TÚL determinative but is preceded by written out aldanni-, it is possible that this is a real word used as a name. The form of the nom. (-antaš, not -anza) suggests that a poss. adj. in -ant-/-want- has been given a a-stem as is common with place names cf. URUŠapagurwanta < šamankur + -want-).
šāwar (verbal subst. of the verb šā(y)e-/šai- A); sullenness, anger; from OH.
sg. nom.-acc. ša-a-u-wa-ar KUB 17.10 iii 20, 23, 25, 27 (OH/MS), KUB 33.1:11 (OH/MS), KUB 33.3:10 (OH/MS), KBo 17.105 ii 32, iv 10 (MH/MS), KBo 12.78:3 (OH/NS), KUB 33.8 iii 4, 11 (OH/NS), KBo 26.130 ii 7 (pre-NS), KBo 15.30 ii 4 (NS), KUB 33.28 iii 12 (OH/NS), KUB 33.34 rev.? 5 (OH/NS), KUB 33.49 ii 4 (OH/NS), KUB 33.54 ii 9, 11 (OH/NS), KUB 33.65 ii 7 (OH/NS), KUB 34.76 i 11 (NS), KUB 39.103 rev. 7 (MH/NS), KUB 43.34:13 (NS), VBoT 24 iii 41, 44, iv 5 (MH/NS), IBoT 3.141 iv (2), 4, (6) (OH/MS), HKM 116:6, (11), 31 (NS), ša-a-wa-ar KBo 29.94:2 (MS), KUB 30.34 iv 9 (MH/NS), KUB 33.21 iv 21 (NS), ša-a-u-ar KUB 17.10 iii 2, 12, 16, iv 3, 7, 9, 19 (OH/MS), KUB 33.30 iii 4 (OH/MS).
coll. nom.-acc. or dat.-loc. ša-a-u-wa-ar-ri KBo 11.1 obv. 8 (NH).
a. last in a series of divine angers: (“Telipinu came in anger, he thunders together with lightning. Below he strikes the Dark Earth. Kamrušepa saw him and moved (for) herself [with(?)] the eagle’s wing”) n–an ar[āit] karpiš n–an arāit kardimiy[az n–at wašdul(?)] arāit ša-a-u-ar arāit “And she st[opped] it, namely, the anger, she stopped it, namely the wrat[h], she stopped [it, namely, sin], she stopped sullenness” KUB 17.10 ii 36-iii 2 (Tel. Myth 1st version, OH/MS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 128f. (“el rencor, (lo) detuvo”), Mazoyer, Télipinu 47, 76 (“la rancoeur”), translit. Myth. 94, tr. Moore, Thesis 23 (“The hate ceased to move (him)”) (all differently), Hittite Myths 16 (“she [Kamrušepa] stopped sullenness”) | in the overall context it is the goddess Kamrušepa that put an end to Telipinu’s angry behavior. We therefore assume that karpiš and kardimiy[az] are right-dislocated objects in the nom.; for a left-dislocated object in the nom. cf. µHuidudduwalliš n–an URUŠallašna ašašer “as for Huidudduwalli, they settled him in Šallašna” HKM 113:14-15, ed. del Monte, OAM 2:131f.; dTelipinuš karpin tarna kardimiy[attan tarna] ša-a-u-wa-ar tarna “Let rage go, Telipinu, [let] ang[er go], let sullenness go” KUB 17.10 iii 24-25 (Tel. Myth 1st version, OH/MS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 130f., (“abandona la rabia!”), Mazoyer, Télipinu 49, 77 (“laisse (ta) rancoeur”), translit. Myth. 95, tr. Moore, Thesis 24 (“Let go hate!”), Hittite Myths 16; cf. par. IBoT 3.141 iv 3-4 (Tel. 2nd vers., OH/MS), VBoT 24 iii 40-41 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 114f. (w. arha tarna-); n–ašta dTelipinui tuggaz–šËt idālu–ššit dāhhun uš[d]ul–šet dāhhun karpi(n)–ššan dāhhun kardimiyatta(n)–ššan dāhhun ¬warku(n)–ššan dāhhun ša-a-u-ar dah[hun] “From Telipinu’s body I took his evil, I took his offense, I took his rage, I took his anger, I took his pique(?), (and) [I] took (his) sullenness” KUB 17.10 iii 9-12 (Tel. Myth, OH/MS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 128f. (“he tomado su rencor”), Mazoyer, Télipinu 48, 77 (“la rancoeur j’ai ôté”), translit. Myth. 94, tr. Hittite Myths 16; cf. par. KUB 33.1:9-12 (Tel. Myth 1st version, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 96 which instead of ¬warku- uses [idālun] EME-an; idālun kardimiyattan ša-a-u-wa-ar arha namma peššiyaten “Throw the evil anger (and) sullenness away again” KBo 17.105 ii 32-33 (incant. for dKAL and dIMIN.IMIN.BI, MH/MS); paiddu dTelipinuwaš karpiš kardimiyaz wašdul ša-a-u-ar parnanz–at tarnau … miyantili<–at?> A.ŠÀ-ni GIŠKIRIﬂ-ni GIŠTIR-ni lË paizzi taknaš–at dUTU-aš KASKAL-an paiddu “Let the rage, anger, offense, (and) sullenness of Telipinu go away. May the house let them go. … Let them not go into a crop-bearing field, a garden or a grove. Let them go on the road of the Sungoddess of the Earth” KUB 17.10 iv 8-13 (Tel. Myth, OH/MS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 134f. (“¡Que se vayan … la rabia!”), Mazoyer, Télipinu 50f., 79 (“Que … la rancoeur … s'en aillent”), translit. Myth. 97, tr. Moore, Thesis 25f. (“hate”), Hittite Myths 17; cf. KUB 33.8 iii 3-4 (Tel. Myth 2nd version, OH/NS), translit. Myth.103; hāšta LÚÌ.DU° 7 GIŠIG āppa huittiyat 7 GIŠhattalu kattan dankui taknÏ ZABARpalhi arta ištappulli–šmet A.BÁR-aš zakki(š)–šmeš AN.BAR-aš kuit andan paizzi n–ašta namma šarā UL uizzi anda–ad–an harkzi U ŠA dTelipinu karpin kardimiyattan wašdul ša-a-u-ar (var. [š]a-a-u-wa-ar) anda Ëpdu n–at āppa lË uizzi “The doorkeeper opened the seven doors, he pulled back the seven bolts. Down in the Dark Earth stand bronze storage vessels. Their lids are made of lead; their latches are made of iron. Whatever goes into (them) does not come up again; it perishes therein. May they also hold the rage, anger, offense, (and) sullenness of Telipinu therein, (so that) they may not come back” KUB 17.10 iv 14-19 (Tel. Myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.3:5-11, ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 134-137 (“Que encierren, … la furia”), Mazoyer, Télipinu 51, 79 (“Que (les chaudrons) prennent … la rancoeur”), translit. Myth. 97, tr. Moore, Thesis 26 (“hate”), Hittite Myths 17; similarly with small variants the same passage occurs in KUB 33.8 iii 7-14 (Tel. myth 2nd ver., OH/NS), translit. Myth. 103f., KUB 33.54 ii 5-9 (missing DINGIR.MAH, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 139 and Bo 7615:2-8 (missing god), ed. Otten, JCS 4:130f.; (“It (i.e., the šūrašūwa-bird) either sat down on the roof of the palace, or it sat down on the roof of the temple. But now, purify the palace and the temple. (or: But now it purified the palace and the temple.) Wherever this sickness, blood, and perjury go, you (sg.) šūrašūwa-bird go (pl.) there”) nu Ëšhananza linkiyaz Éhalinduwa É.DINGIR.MEŠ lË Ëpzi § nu kartimmiyaz lË kuitki nu ša-a-wa-ar (par. ša-a-u-wa-ar) lË kuitki “And let blood (and) perjury not seize the palace (and) temple. Do not let the anger (seize) anything; do not let the sullenness (seize) anything” KUB 30.34 iv 7-10 (rit. for purification of a town, MH/NS), w. par. KUB 39.103 rev. 4-7; (“Just as they have burned these sticks of brushwood”) dTelipinuwašš–a karpi[š] kardimiyaz waštul ša-a-u-ar Q¸TAMMA warā[nu] “Let Telipinu’s rage, anger, offense, (and) sullenness likewise burn up” KUB 17.10 iii 15-16 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 130f., Mazoyer, Télipinu 48, 77, translit. Myth. 94f., tr. Moore, Thesis 24, Hittite Myths 16; cf. KUB 3.49 iii 6-12 (missing DINGIR.MAH, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 143, KUB 33.28 iii 8-12 (missing Stormgod, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 117; (“Just as this fire [is extinguished]”) karpiš–a kardimiyaz ša-a-u-ar Q¸TAMM[A kištaru] “Let the rage, anger, (and) sullenness similarly be extinguished” KUB 17.10 iii 23 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 130f., Mazoyer, Télipinu 49, 77, translit. Myth. 95, tr. Moore, Diss. 24, Hittite Myths 17; cf. similarly IBoT 3.141 iv 1-2 (Tel. myth), translit. Myth. 103; cf. HKM 116:5-6 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, Anadolu Ara®tırmaları 10:206, 208; cf. KBo 15.30 ii 3-4 (frag. of mugawar, NS); (“Just as malt is [ineffective...]”) dTelipinuwašš–a karpi[š kardimiyaz] wašdul ša-a-u-wa-ar Q¸TAMMA tepšauËš[du] “In the same way may Telipinu’s rage, [anger,] offense, (and) sullenness be ineffective” KUB 17.10 iii 19-20 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 130f., Mazoyer, Télipinu 48, 77, translit. Myth. 94f., tr. Moore, Thesis 24, Hittite Myths 17; HKM 116: 7-11 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, Anadolu Ara®tırmaları 10:206f., 208; (“Just as (the water in) a drainpipe does not flow backward”) dTelipinuwašš–a [karpiš kardimiyaz] ša-a-u-wa-ar āppa Q¸TAMMA lË u[izzi] “In the same way let [the rage, anger,] (and) sullenness not c[ome] back” KUB 17.10 iii 26-27 (Tel. Myth, OH/MS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 130f., Mazoyer, Télipinu 49, 78, translit. Myth. 95, tr. Moore, Thesis 24, Hittite Myth. 17, LMI 81f. (“la furia”); cf. IBoT 3.141 iv 4-7 (Tel. myth 2nd ver., OH/NS), ed. Myth. 103; [na]mma–ya ammel ŠA DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU.MEŠ uttanānteš dTelipinui karpin kardimiyattan ša-a-u-ar Q¸TAMMA arandu “In addition, may the words of me, a mortal, likewise stop Telipinu’s rage, anger, sullenness” KUB 17.10 iv 6-7 (Tel. Myth, OH/NS), ed. Trabazo, TextosRel. 134f., Mazoyer, Télipinu 50, 79, translit. Myth. 96, tr. Moore, Thesis 25, Hittite Myths 17, LMI 83; cf. similarly KUB 33.21 iv 20-23 (missing god of Ašmunikal, NS), translit. Myth. 122, KUB 33.65 ii 3-8 (missing Stormgod of Kuliwišna), ed. Eothen 6:28f. (“den Groll”); for a comparison with withered branches (hašduir) see VBoT 24 iii 42-45 (rit. of Anniwiyani, MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 114f., cf. merr- 1 a 2' a'; for a comparison involving hawthorns pulling out tufts of hair see KUB 34.76 obv. 1-16 + KBo 40.21:1-7 (missing DINGIR.MAH), w. par. KUB 33.54 + KUB 33.47 ii 13-19, translit. Myth. 139; cf. also the analogic magic using a cart KUB 33.49 iii 1-5 (missing DINGIR.MAH, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 143. 
b. other attestations: n–aš ANA ŠA dU ša-a-u-wa-ar-ri EGIR-pa lānni ku≠tr±uwanni artar[i.....] “And he (i.e., the Sungod) stands to witness the dispelling of the Stormgod’s sullenness” KBo 11.1 obv. 8 (prayer of Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate/Josephson, RHA XXV/81:105, 114, tr. Hittite Prayers 82 | although we took šāuwarri as a sg. d.-l. s.v. šā(y)e-/šāi- A (q.v.), a collec. (nom.)-acc. obj. of the verbal noun lānni- seems equally possible.
Cf. šā(y)e-/šāi- A, šarauwar; haršalant-, karpi-, kartimmiyatt-.
(SI)šawatar, (SI)šawitra- n. neut.; horn (a musical instrument), horn (a drinking vessel), (as opposed to karawar “horn (of animals)”), wr. syll. and SI; from OH. 
sg. nom.-acc. ša-a-ú-i-it-ra-an KBo 20.20 obv.? 4 (OS), [š]a-ú-i-it-ra-an KBo 20.56 obv. 10 (NH), ša-wa-[tar] KUB 25.37 iii 20 (NS), SIša-wa-tar KUB 38.1 i 34 (NH), ša-a-wa-tar KBo 15.69 i 2 (NS), KBo 20.60:1 (NS), ša-wa-a-tar KBo 15.52 v 10 (MH?/NS), IBoT 3.48:5 (NS), ša-a-wa-a-tar KUB 35.163 iii 18 (OH/NS), ša-ú-wa-tar KBo 15.52 i 3 (MH?/NS), KBo 15.58 v 4 (MH?/NS), KBo 24.106:22 (NS), ša-ú-wa-a-tar KUB 45.53 iv 7 (NS), ša-a-ú-wa-tar KBo 15.69 i 10 (MH/NS), IBoT 4.88:1 (NS). 
Luw. sg. nom.-acc. ša-a-ú-wa-tar-ša KUB 25.37 iii 26 (NS), SIš[a-wa-tar-š]a KUB 25.37 iii 18 (NS).
gen. ša-a-wa-a-tar-aš KUB 34.119:7 = KBo 17.1 i 35 (OS), ša-a-wa-ta-ra-š–a KBo 17.1 i 37 (OS), SI[š]a-ú-i-it-ra-aš KUB 35.135 rev. 15 (NS).
inst. SI-it KBo 2.14 iii 11, 15, IŠTU SI-it ibid. iv 17, 23 (OH/NS).
abl. SI-az KUB 20.42 v 15 (NS).
pl. nom.-acc. ša-ú-i-it-ra KBo 25.138:1 (NS), SIša-wiﬁ-it-ra KBo 4.11:25 (NS), KUB 55.38 iii 4 (NS), SIša-a-ú-i-it-ra KUB 25.39 i 25 (NS).
a. horn (a musical instrument) — 1' described: 1 SIša-wa-tar 2 AŠRU KÙ.BABBAR GAR.RA “One horn, silver plated in two places” KUB 38.1 i 34 (inventory, NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 12f., tr. Rost, MIO 8:179.
2' blown: 1 LÚ.MEŠBALAG.DI–ma–kan ŠA DINGIR-LIM KÁ-aš anda artari ša-wa-a-tar pariparāi “But one lyre player(!) stands at the gate of the deity (and) blows the horn” KBo 15.52 v 9-10 (hišuwa-fest., MH?/NS), ed. Polvani, SEL 6:17; nu LÚ.MEŠBALAG.DI ša-a-ú-wa-tar 2-ŠU par[anzi] “The lyre players bl[ow] the horn two times” KBo 15.69 i 10 (hišuwa-fest., MH/NS); cf. KBo 24.106 ii 22 (MH/NS); nu–kan MUNUS.ŠU.GI parā paizzi nu–kan ÉhÏli ša-a-wa-a-tar pariparāi “The Old Woman goes forth and blows the horn in the courtyard” KUB 35.163 iii 17-18 (rit. containing Palaic, OH/NS), ed. Kammenhuber, RHA XVII/64:68f.; LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· lūliyaz ariyan[z]i ša-wa-tar-r–a 3-ŠU pariyanzi “The performers rise from the vat and blow the horn three times” KUB 2.3 ii 28-30 (KI.LAM-fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:64; EGIR-ŠU–ma SIša-wi-it-ra šuhhi parriyanzi “Afterwards they blow the horns on the roof” KBo 4.11:25 (Ištanuwa rit., NS), translit. DLL 164, StBoT 30:340; cf. parai- A 1, pariparai- | the reduplicated form pariparai- is never used when numbers of times (e.g., 2-ŠU) are indicated.
3' held: […]ša-a-ú-i-it-ra-an (var. ša-ú-i-it-ra) huhupall–a harkanz[i] “They hold the horn and the huhupal-instrument” KBo 20.20 obv. 4 + KBo 25.54 i 10 (fest., OS), ed. Eothen 2:57 (“corno”), translit. StBoT 25:120.
b. (the one) of the horn = a horn player — 1' wr. syll.: LUGAL-un–kan 3-ŠU x[…]-zi MUNUS.LUGAL-ann–a ša-a-wa-a-tar-aš halzai “He […-]s the king three times and the horn player calls the queen” KBo 17.1 i 35 (rit. for royal couple, OS), ed. StBoT 8:20f., translit. StBoT 25:6; cf. ša-a-wa-ta-ra-š–a hal-za-≠a-i± ibid. 37.
2' wr. LÚSI.BÚN?: LÚ.<MEŠ>SI.BÚN pa-ap-ri-an-zi (or: pa-«ap-»ri-an-zi) “The horn players blow” IBoT 2.103 iv 12 (cult inv., NH), cf. papriya-.
c. horn (a drinking vessel)— 1' wr. syll.: nu–kan SIš[a-wa-tar-š]a akuanzi halziššanzi–ma kiššan w[in]iyandan winiyandan eku≠zi± nu mahhan ša-≠wa±-[tar] šarā danzi n–at–kan wetan≠az± arha šanhanzi “They drink (from) the h[orn]. They shout as follows: “The w[in]e, he drinks the wine!” When they pick up the ho[rn], they clean it out with water (and pour the water out in front of the stela)” KUB 25.37 iii 18-20 (Lallupiya rit., NS), ed. Güterbock, FsHouwink ten Cate 69, translit. DLL 173, StBoT 30:347 | for the possibility of haplography for ša-≠wa±-[tar]-<ša> before ša-ra-a see Neu apud Oettinger, Heth.u.Idg. 199 n. 15.
2' wr. SI?: LUGAL-uš … SI-az ekuzi “The king drinks (deities) from a drinking horn KUB 20.42 v 13-15 (ANDAHŠUM-fest.); EGIR–ŠU–ma dUTU-un GUB-aš 3-ŠU SI-it akuwanzi “Afterwards, standing, they drink the Sungod three times with a drinking horn” KBo 2.14 iii 10-11 (fest., OH/NS); cf. ibid. iii 15-16; cf. EGIR–ŠU–ma dUTU GUB-aš 3-ŠU IŠTU SI-it akuwanzi ibid. iv 22-23; cf. ibid. iv 15-18.
d. attribute of a deity: (The king and queen drink) SI[š]a-ú-i-it-ra-aš dMāliya[n] “Māliya of the horn” KUB 35.135 rev. 15 (Ištanuwan rit., NS), ed. Oettinger, Heth.u.Idg. 198 (differently), translit. DLL 165f., StBoT 30:322.
The horn seems not to be depicted on surviving scenes of music-making (cf. ∫nandık vase etc.). The earliest exx. we have are from Neo-Hittite Kargamiš (cf. Alp, Song 32). Drinking cups with stag and ox protomes are shown, Bittel, Die Hethiter pl. 169, 178, but not actual horn shaped vessels.
Von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1943) 50-52; Otten/Souc√ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 61f.; Kümmel, RlA 4 (1975) 469f.; Gurney, Schweich (1977) 34; Oettinger, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 197-203; Starke, KZ 95 (1981) 142 n. 2, 157; Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 162 nn. 479-480; idem, HZL (1989) p. 134; Polvani, SEL 6 (1989) 15-21; Melchert, JAC 8 (1993) 105-113; idem, AHP (1994) 88; de Martino, RlA 8 (1997) 483-488.
šawitišt-, šaudišt- n. com.; weanling; from OS.†
sg. nom. ša-ú-di-iš-za KBo 6.2 iii 23, 26, 27, (30), 34, 36, (52) (OS), KUB 29.16:4, 8, 10 (OS), [ša]-≠a±-ú-te-eš-za KBo 19.3 i 21, ša-a-ú-ti-eš[-za] KUB 13.13 ii 6 (OH/NS), ša-ú-di-iš<-za> KBo 19.1 iii 41 (OS), ša-ú-i-ti-iš-za KBo 6.3 iii 26, 30, 38, 42, 47, ša-a-ú-i-ti-iš-za KBo 6.3 iii 29 (OH/NS), ša-a-ú-i-ti-iš!-za KBo 6.3 iii 33 (OH/NS), ša-a-ú-i-te-eš-za KBo 6.6 i 33, 37, 40 (OH/NS), KBo 19.3 i (7), 14 (OH/NS), ša-a-ú-i-ti-eš-za KBo 6.6 i 45 (OH/NS).
gen. ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-aš KBo 6.26 ii 32, 42, iii 10 (OH/NS), ša-a-ú[-i-ti]-iš-ta-aš KUB 30.47 + KBo 31.25 iv 10 (NS).
pl. gen. ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-aš KBo 6.26 iii 17 (OH/NS).
Note that the spelling ša-ú-di-i is attested in OS only.
(“If someone steals a bull”) takku GUD ša-ú-di-iš-za (var. B: ša-ú-i-ti-iš-za, D: ša-a-ú-i-te-e[š-za]) natta GU[(D.MAH)]-aš [(takk)]u GUD yu≠g±aš natta GUD.MAH-aš takku GUD tāiugaš apaš GUD.≠MAH±-aš “If it is a weanling, it is not ‘a bull’; if it is a one year old, it is not ‘a bull’; if it is a two year old, that is ‘a bull.’” (In compensation, the thief shall give fifteen oxen:) 5 GUD tāyugaš [(5 GUD yugaš 5 GU)]D ša-ú-di-iš-za (var. B: ša-a-ú-i-ti-iš-za, D: ša-a-ú-i-te-eš-za) pāi “He shall give five two year-old oxen, five yearling oxen, and five weanling oxen” KBo 6.2 iii 23-26 (Laws § 57, OS), w. dupls. B: KBo 6.3 iii 26-29 (OH/NS), D: KBo 6.6 i 33-37 (OH/NS), ed. LH 68f. (“weanling”); similarly concerning stallions KBo 6.2 iii 27-30 (Laws § 58), ed. LH 69f.; (“If someone finds a stallion and castrates it. (When) its owner recognizes (and claims) it, he (the finder) shall give seven horses”:) [(2 ANŠE.K)]UR.RA MU.2 3 (vars. B & F add: ANŠE.KUR.RA) MU.1 2 (var. F adds: ANŠE.KUR.RA) ša-ú-di-iš-za (var. B: ša-ú-i-ti-iš-za) pāi “He shall give two two-year-old horses, three one-year-olds, two weanlings” KBo 6.2 iii 36 (Laws § 61, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 iii 41-42 (OH/NS) and KBo 19.3 i 14 (OH/NS), ed. LH 72f.; similarly concerning the castrating of a bull KBo 6.2 iii 33-34 (Laws § 60), ed. LH 71f., and concerning the theft of a plow ox KBo 6.2 + KBo 19.1 iii 40-42 (Law § 63), ed. LH 74f., or cow KBo 6.2 iii 51-52 (Law § 67), ed. LH 77; (“The price of a plow ox is twelve shekels of silver; the price of a bull is ten shekels of silver; the price of a cow is seven shekels of silver; the price of a yearling plow ox or cow is five shekels silver”) nu ŠA 1 GUD ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-aš 4 GÍN KÙ.BABBAR pāi “He shall give four shekels of silver, (the price) of one weanling ox” (… while the price of a calf is two (var. three) shekels)” KBo 6.26 ii 32-33 (Law § 178, OH/NS), ed. LH 141f.; cf. for the price of a colt or filly KBo 6.26 ii 42-43 (Law § 181); (“The price of the hide of a large ox is one shekel of silver”) ŠA 5 KUŠ GUD ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-aš 1 GÍN KÙ.BABBAR “(The price) of five hides of weanling-oxen is one shekel” KBo 6.26 iii 10-11 (Law § 185), ed. LH 147; (“The buyer of the meat of two yearling oxen pays one sheep”) 5 GUD ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-aš UZU[–ŠUN]U kuiš wāši 1 UDU pāi “The buyer of the meat of five weanling-oxen pays one sheep. (The buyer of the meat of ten calves pays one sheep)” KBo 6.26 iii 17 (Law § 186), ed. LH 147f.
It is quite clear from the above examples that a š.-ox is an ox that is younger than a (yuga-/MU.1-ox) but older than a calf (AMAR). If the yuga-/MU.1-ox is a yearling, then the AMAR (calf) can be assumed to be the suckling animal and the š. the weanling. š. can also describe the young of other animals. Starke, StBoT 41:24-26, discussing horses, argues that yuga-/daiyuga- means “of the first/second year under the yoke” (fifth/sixth years from birth), and that a š. horse is one in its preparatory year before being yoked (its fourth from birth). Starke’s suggestion would then give no clear meaning to the verb šawitištai-, which otherwise makes good sense as “to wean.” 
HroznŸ, SH (1917) 93 n. 2 (“halbjährig”); Zimmern/Friedrich, HGes (1922) 15 w. n. 3 (“unter einem Jahr” or “(noch) saugend”); Goetze, ANET1 (1950) §181 (“weaned”); Friedrich, HG (1959) 131 (“Säugling (d.h. saugendes Jungtier)”); Güterbock, JCS 15 (1961) 74 (“weanling”); Melchert, AHP (1994) 168, 173 (“of the same year” > “of this year, new-born”); Starke, StBoT 41 (1995) 24-26 (š. =  the preparatory (year) of a horse (i.e., its fourth), before they start being yoked).
Cf. šawitištai-.
šawitištai- v.; to wean; NH.†
pres. sg. 3 ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-iz-zi KUB 30.67 left col. 5 (NH).
verbal subst. gen. ša-a-ú-ti-iš-ta-a-u-w[a-aš] KUB 30.47 iv 9 (NH).
(“[One tablet: the w]ords of Ninallā, wife of Tazzitta”:) mān DUMU-an [...] ša-ú-i-ti-iš-ta-iz-zi “If [the mother(?)] weans a child (this is the ritual: complete)” KUB 30.67 left col. 4-5 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 171f. (“Quand […] sèvre(?) un enfant”); “[DUB.1.BI GU]D ≠ša±-a-ú-ti-iš-ta-a-u-w[a-aš] ≠m±ān–kan [˜?] / […kiša?]ri nu GUD ša-a-ú-[i-ti]-iš-ta-aš hun[e?-…] / […]-ta lahmi≠uš± tepu kuerzi  “[One tablet] of weaning an ox, when [… take]s [place(?)] and the … of the weanling ox […](s)he cuts off a little of (its) lahmi-s” KUB 30.47 + KBo 31.25 iv 9-10 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH p. 184 (without KBo 31 join).
Cf. šawitišt-.
(SI)šawitra- see (SI)šawatar
šaummatar n.? Hurr.; (a recipient of offerings); NH.†
ša-um-ma-ta-ar KUB 27.1 i 63 (NH). 
1 NINDA.SIG dNupatik 1 NINDA.SIG dU.GUR (dupl. adds: KI.MIN [1 NINDA SIG]) ša-um-ma-ta-ar TUŠ-aš KI.MIN “Sitting they ditto (sc. break) one flat-bread to Nupatik, one flat-bread to dU.GUR (and/the?) š.” KUB 27.1 i 62-63 (fest. of Šaušga of Šamuha, NH), ed. ChS 1/3-1:34, 38 (no tr.), w. dupl. KUB 47.64 ii 33-34 (NH), translit. ChS 1/3-1:57, Lebrun, Samuha 77, 88 | for Ugurun as the Hurr. reading of dU.GUR see Laroche, CRAIBL 1989:1:11. 
š. is probably identical to the divine name dŠaumat/dari-; cf. e.g., dŠa-ú-ma-ta-ri URUKaittana “Š. of Kaittana” KUB 15.19 obv. (3), 9, 11, 13 (dream/vow, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 240, 378; for further attestations see van Gessel, OHP 1:383 w. lit.
Von Brandenstein, ZDMG 91 (1937) 565 w. n. 2 (epithet of Nergal); Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 219 (“nom divin, ou epithète divine”).
Cf. šum(m)atani.
šauri- n. Hurr.; weapon; from MH/MS.†
Hurr. abs. sg. ša-ú-ri KUB 27.1 i 45 (ša-ú!-ri), iv 2, 4 (NH), KUB 27.18:5, KUB 28.7 iv (7), ša-a-ú-ri KUB 34.102 ii 25 (MH/MS), KUB 32.84 iv 5 (MH/MS), dša-a-ú-ri KUB 27.16 iv 13 (NS), dša-ú-ri KUB 27.16 iv 29 (NS), KUB 10.27 iv 16 (NS); abs. pl. ša-a-úr-ra KBo 8.86 obv. 18 (MH/MS).
In Hittite context the -i forms could be interpreted as sg. nom.-acc. neut. (cf. KUB 27.1 iv 2, 4) or sg. dat.-loc. (cf. KUB 27.1 i 45).
EGIR–ŠU–ma LUGAL-uš GUB-aš dIŠTAR LÍL dNinatta dKulita pantani ša-ú-ri dIŠTAR-pi 3-ŠU ekuzi KI.MIN (= 1 NINDA.SIG paršiya) § EGIR–ŠU–ma LUGAL-uš dIŠTAR LÍL dNinatta dKulitta pātani ša-ú-ri dIŠTAR-pi dU–ya GUB-aš 2-ŠU ekuzi 1 NINDA.SIG parš[iy]a “Afterwards the king, standing, drinks three times Šaušga of the Steppe, Ninatta, Kulita, (and) Šaušga’s right-side weapon. Ditto (= He crumbles one thin bread). § Afterwards the king, standing, drinks twice Šaušga of the Steppe, Ninatta, Kulitta, Šaušga’s right-side weapon and Teššub. He crumbles one thin bread” KUB 27.1 iv 1-5 (fest. of Šaušga of Šamuha, NH), ed. ChS 1/3-1:50, 52f. (“die rechte Waffe”), Wegner, AOAT 36:78f.; 1 NINDA.SIG waandanni ša-ú!-ri (dupl. [ša]-ú-ri) dGAŠAN-wii paršiya KI.MIN n–at L[ÚAZ]U PA_NI GIŠTUKUL.HI.A ZAG-az <(dāi)> “He (i.e., the exorcist) crumbles one thin bread to the right-side weapon of the Divine-Lady. Ditto. The exorcist places it on the right before the weapons” KUB 27.1 i 45-46 (fest. of Šaušga of Šamuha, NH), w. dupl. KUB 47.64 ii 14-15 (NH), ed. ChS 1/3-1:33, 37 (“die rechte Waffe”), Wegner, AOAT 36:96 w. n. 337 | on the basis of the dupl. and because the Hurrian absolutive case cannot have the “article” we emend to ša-ú!-ri (pers. comm. G. Wilhelm); cf. patani š[(a-ú-ri)] ibid. iii 41, ed. ChS 1/3-1:47, 49, w. dupl. KUB 27.6 i 10 (NH), translit. ChS 1/3-1:70; EGIR-anda–ma 1 NINDA SIG ša-a-ú-ri wer[i] dTeššuppina KI.MIN “Next he ditto (= crumbles) one thin bread to the weapon, swor[d(?)] of Teššub” KUB 34.102 ii 25-26 (offerings to Hurr. deities, MH/MS), translit. ChS 1/9:181; cf. in Hurr. context KBo 8.86 obv. 18 (rit. for Mt. Hazzi, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:262f., translit. ChS 1/9:172; 1 NINDA SIG dŠa-a-ú-ri abūbi paršiya “He crumbles one thin bread to the deified weapon of the deluge” KUB 27.16 iv 13 (NS); cf. dŠa-ú-ri ibid. iv 29; for further attestations of š. with a divine det. see van Gessel, OHP 1:383f.
Laroche, JCS 2 (1948) 119 (= GIŠTUKUL); Diakonoff, Epigrafika Vostoka 6 (1952) 106-111 (on Urartian šuri-); Benedict, Urartian Phonology and Morphology (1963) 123 n. 9; Haas, OA 11 (1972) 233 (“Waffe” = Urartian šuri- and Sum. ša.ur [the latter apparently a misreading by Haas of Sum. dšár.ur(›), see Frankena, Tākultu 113]); Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 219f. (= GIŠTUKUL); Popko, Kultobjekte (1978) 103 (= GIŠTUKUL); Wegner, AOAT 36 (1981) 24 (repeating Haas and = Kurdish šur “sword”).
šaudišt- see šawitišt-.
šazziya- v.; (mng. unkn.); MS.†
inf. or verbal subst. ša-az-zi-ia-u-w[a-...] KBo 8.18 rev. 11; broken ša-az-z[i-...] ibid. rev. 12.
(“The men of Durmitta, however, [...] / [be]came very bad [...]”) / kuit ša-az-zi-ia-u-w[a-...] / [n]u–ššan ša-az-z[i-...] “Because ... [...] and ... [...] ([…] of Your Majesty only)” KBo 8.18 rev. 11-12 (letter to the king), translit. THeth 16:47.
Cf. šazke-.
šazke- imperf. v. mid.; push(?), shove(?); OH/NS.†
mid. pret. sg. 3 ša-az-ki-it-ta KUB 1.16 ii 58, (59), KBo 13.119 iii 15 (both OH/NS).
a. with acc. obj.: § [lË–ma–šši–za–k]an kāš kūn EGIR-pan ša-az-ki-it-ta kāš–a–za–kan kūn / [peran–šit ša-az-k]i-it-ta “One [should not] shove(?) the other from behind. One should not [pu]sh(?) the other [from the front]” KUB 1.16 ii 58-59 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 8f. (“zurückdrängen(?) ... Vorschub leisten(?)”), StBoT 5:155, Oettinger, Stammbildung 329 (“zurücksetzen ... nach vorne setzen (protegieren)”) | coll. photo in HAB shows space for two more signs in the break than the copy would allow for lines in 58-62.
b. with d.-l.: n–an parā / [parā šal]lanniy[a]n?zi hūmanza–ma–šši EGIR-an ša-a[z?]-ki-it-ta / […]x § “They [dr]ag(?) him forward, and everyone pushes(?) behind him” KBo 13.119 iii 14-15a (rit., OH/NS), translit. šallannai-/šalai- C mng. c (without tr.) | coll. photo shows possible additional line before §.
HAB (1938) 102f.; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 155; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 329.
Cf. šazziya-.
-še, -ši A (enclitic pron. of the third person singular dative); to him/her/it, for him/her/it, from him/her/it; from OS.
(Akk.) u ina kutalli–šu [as]anahhar–šu KUB 1.16 i 4-5 = (Hitt.) nu–šši āppan huwaišk[inun] “and I was looking after him” KUB 1.16 ii 5 (Testament of Hatt. I, NS), ed. HAB 2f., tr. Beckman, CoS 2:79.
(Hurr.) fabni hāš–i–m–ai p/far–u ištan(i)–i–da “Hearing (this, i.e., the curse of the deer) the mountain became sad at heart” KBo 32.14 i 8 = (Hitt.) HUR.SAG.MEŠ-ašš–a mahhan ištamašta nu–šši–kan ŠÀ-ŠU anda ištarakkiat “And when the mountain heard (this), it became sick in its heart” KBo 32.14 ii 9-10 (Hurr.-Hitt bil., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:74f., tr. Hittite Myths™ 69 | Hitt. -ši has no equivalent in the Hurr. version. Hurrian has no clitic dat. pron. of the third person, neither is a dat. sg. attested for the free-standing pers. pron. man(n)i/e- “he, she, it, they.” 
a. writing: The writing -še is OH only; the writing -ši is found throughout from OS onwards. When a vowel precedes -še/-ši, the š is most often doubled.
b. position in the chain of sentence particles is the same as for the other dative enclitics — 1' -še/-ši always precludes the occurrence of other enclitics that can have the value of a dative (-mu, -ta/-du, -naš, -šmaš) in the same chain.
2' It can be preceded in the sentence enclitic chain by -a/-ya, -a/-ma, -wa(r-), -aš, -at, -e, -an, and -uš.
3' It can be followed in the chain by the reflexive -z(a), and the particles -an, -ašta, -šan, and -kan. Forms of the enclitic pron. -a- (see 2') may follow only if they have already preceded -ši, see Hoffner, FsGüterbock™ 93.
4' irregular position: mān–ma–ši(y)–at–kan KUB 14.3 iii 60 (Tawagalawa, NH); nu-uš-aš-ši in KUB 10.13 iii 18 is a scribal error for nu-uš-ši. For the sequence –še–ya (wr. -še-e-a) in the Laws (see below c 1' a') see Güterbock, Or NS 52:75, and Hoffner, LH 269 s.v. anda adv. (anda–šše–ya).
c. use — 1' w. intransitive verbs — a' in OH: [dH(annahannaš)]–≠a±–še (var. –šše) āppa tezz[i] “And Hannahanna speaks to him” KUB 43.25:9 (myth of Inara, OS), w. dupl. KUB 33.60 rev. 9 (OH/NS), translit. Myth. 94, tr. Hittite Myths™ 32; Labarnaš LUGAL-uš inarawanza nu–šše–pa utniyanza hūmanza anda inarahhi “The Labarna, the King, is full of vigor; the entire populace is invigorated in union with him” KUB 36.110 iii 11-12 (benedictions for Labarna, OS), ed. Archi, StMed 1:50f.
b' in MH: nu–šši kūrura kuiËš KUR.KUR-TIM (var. nu–šši KUR.HI.A-TIM [kuiËš k]ūru[a]š) nu–šši apË–a gËnuwaššan (i.e., genuwan–šan) kattan uiddu “Those countries which are hostile to him, let them (sg.) too come down to his knees for him (i.e., the king)” KBo 11.72 ii 35-36 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 11.10 ii 31-32 (MH/NS), ed. Popko, CTH 447:25, 36 w. n. 2 (“Und auch die Länder, die ihm feindlich (sind)”) | for a discussion of kūrura as either a pl. neut. or as kūrur–a see Neu, FsMeriggi2 421, Starke, StBoT 31:356f. n. 1264 and Popko, CTH 477:48; nu–šše apāš tÏË[t] “and he stepped up to him” (saying) KBo 8.42 rev. 8 (OH/MS).
c' in NH: 8 IM.MEŠ-aš–ši arāer nu–kan [ANA dHuwawa] IGI.HI.A-wa EGIR-pa walhi[šk]anzi nu–šši UL parā i[y]anniyauwa[nzi] «UL (eras.)» kišari UL–ma–šši EGIR-pa ti[(y)auwanzi] kišari “The eight winds arose against him and they struck Huwawa’s eyes. He was not able to move forward nor was he able to s[tep] back” KUB 8.53:16-20 (Gilg.), w. dupl. KUB 33.123:2, ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:12f., tr. Beckman, in Foster, Gilg. 161; [a]mmuk–ma–wa–šši UL memahhun “I did not tell him” KUB 48.118 i 15 (dream of Pud.?), ed. de Roos, Diss. 295, 434; ANA GIŠTUKUL–ma–šši LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙ artar[i] “A baker is available to him as a GIŠTUKUL” KUB 56.1 i 14 (vow of Pud.), ed. StBoT 1:30f. (“Für die Dienstleistungen steht ihm? aber ein Brotbäcker zur Verfügung(?)”), cf. Beal, AoF 15:286f.
2' with transitive verbs — a' in general — 1" in OH: nu–šše 6 GÍN KÙ.BABBAR pāi “He shall pay him six shekels of silver” KBo 6.2 i 19 (Laws §10, OS), ed. LH 23f.; takku mekki ta[(Ïzzi me)]kki–še išhianzi takku tËpu taÏz[(zi)] tËpu–še (dupl. B: tepu–šši, O: [t]epu–šše) išhiyanz[i] “If he steals much, they impose much on him, if he steals little, they impose little on him” KBo 6.2 iv 42-43 (Laws §94, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 iv 40-41 (OH/ENS), KUB 29.18:4-6 (OH/NS), ed. LH 92f.; ūk–war–an–ši dLAMMA maniyahhun “I, the tutelary-deity administered it for him” KBo 9.114:10 (OH/MS?); nu hantezziyaš LÚ-aš kuit kuit p[ešta] ta–šše šarnikzi “(For) whatever the first man has paid, he shall pay compensation to him” KBo 6.3 ii 6-7 (Laws §28a, OH/ENS), ed. LH 37f.; henkan–še lË takkišši “Do not seek death for him” KBo 3.28:15 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Laroche, FsOtten 187 (“Ne lui forge pas la mort”).
2" in MH: nu–šši kuin URU-an LÚB´L MAD~
GALTI [(maniyahzi nu–za happar apiya iË)zzi] “Let him conduct trade there in the city which the Governor of the Border Province assigns to him” KUB 13.27 rev.! 16-17 + KUB 23.77:87 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 122; nam[ma–š]ši ar[kamm]an piddānniwan dāer “and they began to render him tribute” KUB 14.1 obv. 74 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f., tr. DiplTexts™ 157; nu–war–an–ši āppa pe[hh]i “I will give them (collec.: the people to be resettled) back to him” KUB 14.1 rev. 89, ed. Madd. 38f., tr. DiplTexts™ 160.
3" in NH: nu–šši KUR URUKalāšma mani~
yahhūwanzi pehhun “I gave him the land of Kalašma to govern” KBo 16.17 iii 26-27 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Otten, MIO 3:172-174 (as 1041/f); apāt–ši parā pehhun “I have handed it (i.e., the property of Arma-Tarhunta) to her (i.e., Šaušga)” KUB 1.1 iv 68 (apology, Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:28f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:204; DINGIR.MEŠ–war–aš–ši–kan anda lË tarnanzi “May the gods not let them in to him” KUB 31.71 iii 23-24 (queen’s dream, NH), ed. van den Hout, AoF 21:310, 312 | for the referents of -aš and -ši see van den Hout, AoF 21:317; namma–šši SISKUR pehhi “I will give him (i.e., the Zawalli-deity) an offering” KUB 22.67:3 (oracle question, NH).
b' w. -ši with verbs expressing the person from whom something is taken, sought, etc.: [n]u–šše harātar a≠rha± dā “Take away the crime from him” KBo 41.21 obv. 15 (rit. frag., MS); nu–šši–kan ¬lapanalianza lË danzi “They shall not take from him that which pertains to the salt lick” Bronze Tablet ii 6-7 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f. 
3' in nominal sentences — a' in OH: takku–šše ≠A.ŠÀ±.H[(I.A)-aš mekkiš] piyanza “If t[he larger part of] the the land has been given to him/her” KBo 6.2 ii 38-39 (Laws § 46, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 25 (OH/NS), ed. LH 54f. | rest. from KBo 6.2 ii 46 (§ 47B); man–at–ši natta kattawatar “Would it not be a grievance for him?” KUB 30.10 obv. 23 (Kantuzzili’s prayer, OH/MS), tr. Hittite Prayers 32.
b' in MH: mān–ši UL–ma aššu n–aš UL uizzi “But if it does not please him, he does not come” KUB 36.127 obv.? 10 (Šunaššura treaty, MH/MS), ed. del Monte, OA 20:219, tr. DiplTexts2 26; mān ANA LÚB´L É-TIM–ma ZAG-an … mān–ši UL–ma ZAG-an “If it is good for the house owner … but if it is not good for him” KUB 12.19 ii 15 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 15.34 ii 17, 19 (MH/NS), ed. Eothen 6:48f., Moore, Thesis 94, 98; cf. KUB 27.29 ii 20-iii 1-2 below 4' b'; see also c 1' b', above. 
c' in NH: KUR-TUM–ya–šši kuit hūman n–at–ši hūman–pat kuit hantezziuš auriuš “And since the whole country belongs to him (i.e., Kuruntiya, usage 4') and since it constitutes, as a whole, for him the foremost watch post” (let no one mobilize levies from there) Bronze Tablet iii 43-44 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:22f.; nu–šši apāt BÀD.KARAŠ irhāš [ed]iz–ma–šši URUTašma[(h)]az URUZiyantiškaš irhāš edizza–ma–šši Kazzapaz BÀD.KARAŠ ŠA ABI dUTU-ŠI irhāš edizza–ma–šši URUTapapanuwaz nu–kan MULÛ parkuin EGIR-an šarā uwaši nu šarāzziyatar irhāš “That fortress is the boundary for it. On this side toward Tašmaha Ziyantiška is the boundary for it. And on that side toward Kazzapa, the fort of the father of My Majesty is the boundary for it.  And on the far side toward Tapapanuwa —when you climb up the Bare Peak from behind — the summit is the boundary for it” KUB 19.37 ii 26-33, w. par. KUB 31.39 rev. 4-7, ed. AM 168-71; (“1 field of river land in the direction of Taqqapašuwa”) 3 PA. NUMUN–ŠU … IŠTU GÍD.DA 1 ME 50 KI.MIN [IŠ]TU DAGAL–ma–šši 15 KI.MIN “Three measures are its seed. … On the long side (it is) one hundred fifty ditto (= gipeššar). On its broad side there are for it fifteen ditto (= gipeššar)” KUB 8.75 i 68-71 (field list, NH), ed. Souc√ek, ArOr 27:10f.
4' dat. of possession — a' in OH: takku LÚ-aš [(MAHAR DAM ŠEŠ–ŠU šeškizzi)] ŠEŠ-aš–ma–šši (var. ŠEŠ–ŠU–ma) [(hūišwanza)] “If a man has intercourse with his brother’s wife when his brother is living” KUB 29.33 iii 1-2 (Laws §195A, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.26 iii 49-50, ed. LH 153f.
b' in MH: nu–šši NIN.MEŠ–ŠU ŠA MÁŠ–ŠU ŠA NUMUN–ŠU meqqaËš ašanzi “She has many sisters of her own family (and) of her extended family” KBo 5.3 iii 26 (Huqq., Šupp. I/NS), ed. SV 2:124f., tr. DiplTexts2 31; nu–šši–kan kuit dUTU-ŠI t[uzzin] kiššari tehhi “Because I, My Majesty, put the troops in his hand” KUB 13.20 i 17-18 (instr., MH/NS); nu–šši–kan iššÏ anda allapahhanzi “They spit into its (i.e., the sheep’s) mouth” KBo 39.8 ii 29-30 (Mašt. rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 46:73f., Rost, MIO 1:354f.; UL-a–šši kuiš annaš … UL–ma–šši kuiš addaš … UL–[ma]–šši kuiš ŠEŠ-aš … “She who is not his mother … he who is not his father …he who is not his brother …” KUB 27.29 ii 20-22, iii 1 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:142f., ChS I/5:136.
c' in NH: ABIMEŠ–ŠU–ya–šši meqqaËš “He (i.e., His Majesty) has many forefathers” KUB 26.1 i 9-10 (instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 9; nu–šši zilatiya ŠA KUR URUHatti lahhiyanni 1 ME ÉRIN.MEŠ GÌR iyattaru IŠTU É tuppaš–ma–šši KARAŠ lË šanhanzi nu–šši KARAŠ kuwapi nininkanzi nu–šši 1 ME ÉRIN.MEŠ nininkiškandu ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ–ma–šši UL Ëšzi “In the future let one hundred of his foot soldiers go on a Hittite campaign. From the storehouse they shall not seek troops from him (usage b). When they mobilize his troops, let them mobilize one hundred soldiers; he does not give horses/horse troops” Bronze Tablet iii 35-38 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1: 22f.; for ibid. iii 43-44 see above 3' c'; mān–ši (par. omits -ši) NUMUN DUMU.NITA–ma UL Ëšzi “If he doesn't have a son” Bronze Tablet iii 17, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:20f., w. par. KBo 4.10 obv. 12, ed. StBoT 38:24f.; nu–šši–[ššan LÚHUL-l]u ŠUM-an Ëšdu “Let his name be ‘Bad’” KUB 24.8 iii 11 (Appu myth, NS) ed. StBoT 14:10f.; [n]u–šši ¬dušdumiš UL Ëšta ¬lalame–šši UL Ëšta “He did not have a dušdumi, he did not have an itemized list” KUB 13.35 i 5-6 (dep. of Ukkura, NH), ed. StBoT 4:4f., tr. Hoffner, CoS 3:57.
5' dat. governed by local adv. — a' in OH: [takk]u ≠B´L±–ŠU tezzi šer–wa–šši (var. A: šËr–šit–wa, P: šer–še<t>–wa) šarnikm[(i)] “If his (i.e., the slave’s) owner says: ‘I will make compensation for him’” KBo 6.3 iv 46 (Laws §95, OH/ENS), w. dupls. A: KBo 6.2 iv 47-48 (OS), P: KUB 29.19:(5-)6 (NS), ed. LH 93f.; (The zintuhi-woman sings in the following way) [1-aš h]alzāi ulÏwā ulin apË–ma–šše Q¸TAMMA[–pat kattan] arkuwanzi “[One of them c]alls out ‘ulÏwā ulin’ and the others (lit. they) recite the [very] same way [along with] her” KBo 20.26 + KBo 25.34 obv. 14-15 (rit., OS), ed. Melchert, JCS 50:47 (“arku- [just] the same [along with] her”), translit. StBoT 25:89; zigg–a–šši dUTU-uš katte–šši pāiši “And you, Sungod, will walk together with him” FHG ii 13 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 97, 103, tr. Hittite Prayers 37 (“you, O Sun-god, shall go to him”); cf. par. zig–a dUTU-uš katti–ši paiši KUB 30.10 obv. 4 (prayer of Kantuzzili, MH/MS), tr. Hittite Prayers 32 (“to him”).
b' in MH: [nu]–šše–ššan mān B´L–ŠU šer UL [š]arnikzi “[And] if his owner does not pay compensation for him” KUB 8.81 iii 4-5 (Šunaššura treaty, MH/MS), ed. šarnink- a 2'; peran–a–šše LÚSANGA huyanza “A priest is going in front of him” KBo 23.74 ii 12 (KI.LAM fest., MS), translit. StBoT 28:70; nu–šši kuiš LÚ[MEŠE]DI pera(n)–ššit artari nu–šši tezzi “He tells the guard who stands in front of him (i.e., his immediate superior?)” IBoT 1.36 i 35-36 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:8f.; mān–ši peran–ma kuwapi KASKAL-iš hatkuš “If anywhere in front of them (i.e., soldiers, collective sg.) the road is narrow” IBoT 1.36 ii 63, ed. AS 24:22f.; (“She places it (i.e., a basket) beneath/below the bed”) ≠n±–at–ši kattan šešzi “and it spends the night under it (or: with him (i.e., the patient))” KUB 24.9 ii 46 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:38f.; n–aš–ši katti–ši šešzi “and (if) she (the goddess) sleeps with him (i.e., the patient)” KUB 7.5 iv 4 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:276, 279.
c' in NH: nu–šši DUMU.LUGAL EGIR-an paizzi “The palace servant goes behind him” KUB 9.16 i 5 (nuntarriyašha-fest., NS), w. dupl. IBoT 4.81:5 (NS), ed. Nakamura, Nuntarriyašha- 17, 19; nu–šši EGIR-an tiyanun [(nu–š)]ši EGIR-an pāūn “I backed him and supported him” KBo 4.7 i 12-13 (Kup.), w. dupl. KUB 6.41 i 14, ed. SV 1:108f., tr. DiplTexts2 74; [NINDA-an–ši per]an azzikker wātarr–a–šši peran akkušk[er] “They were eating [bread in fro]nt [of her] and they were drinking water in front of her” KUB 26.89:13 (letter, NS), ed. THeth 16: 336f. | for -ši as possibly referring to Hattušili III’s daughter, married to the Babylonian king Kudur-Enlil see Houwink ten Cate, AoF 23:56; Ït–wa–šši KUR–K[A p]eran pahšanuwan hark “Go and keep your land protected before him” KBo 2.5 iii 3 + KBo 16.17 iii 33 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 188f., Otten, MIO 3:173f. (reading KUR-TU[M] with hand copy of KBo 2.5 but contrary to translit. in KBo 16.17); nu–šši KUR URUHatti hūman peran SIGﬁ-in iyanneš nu–šši […] GUD UDU peran makkešta “In his time, the whole of Hatti was doing (lit. going) well. In his time, [people], cattle and sheep became numerous” KUB 14.14 obv. 30-31 (PP1), ed. Götze, KlF 1:168f., Lebrun, Hymnes 194, 199; nu–šši menahhanda linkta “He swore to him” KBo 4.3 ii 28 (Kup.), ed. SV 1:128f., tr. DiplTexts2 78, CHD s.v menahhanda 3 c; nu–mu DINGIR.MEŠ ABI–YA peran hūiËr [(nu–š)]ši–ššan LÚ.KÚR šer kuenun “And the gods of my father ran before me, and I killed the enemy on his behalf” KBo 4.7 i 13-14 (Kup.), w. dupl. KUB 6.41 i 15, ed. SV 1:108f., tr. DiplTexts2 74; namma–šši awan arha tiyat “Then he deserted him” KBo 4.3 iv 13 (Kup.), ed. SV 1:144f., tr. DiplTexts2 80; µŠipa-LÚ-š–a–šši DUMU µ.dSÎN-dU GAM-an Ëšta “And Šipaziti, son of Armatarhunta, was with him” KUB 1.1 iv 3-4 (apology, Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:22f.; nu–šši INA URUŠamuha ukila kattan pāūn “I myself went to him in Šamuha” KBo 6.29 ii 28-29 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 50f.
HroznŸ, MDOG 56 (1915) 36 w. n. 6; idem, SH (1917) 132; Götze/Pedersen, MSpr (1934) 67; Güterbock, Or NS 52 (1983) 75-77.
-ši- B, -ša- enclitic poss. pron.; his, her, its; from OS; wr. syll., and Akkadographically -ŠU (masc., wr. -ŠU, ŠÚ, -SÚ), -ŠA (fem., -ŠA, -SÀ).
sg. nom. com. -šiš, -šaš: (Vš)-ši-iš: KBo 6.2 iv 14 (OS), KBo 21.22 rev. 43 (OH/MS), KBo 7.28 obv. 6, 9, 20, (31), 35 (OH?/MS), KBo 13.13 obv. 13 (MH/MS), KUB 13.4 iii 81 (MH/NS), (C)-ši-iš KBo 17.15 rev.! 5, 9 (OS), KUB 33.5 iii 6 (OH/MS), KUB 57.63 ii 28 (OH/NS), KBo 13.13 obv. 13, rev. 10 (MH/MS), KUB 48.76 i 7 (MH/NS), KUB 39.41 obv. 11 (pre-NH/NS), (Vš)-še-eš KUB 34.91:8 (pre-NH/NS), (C)-še-iš HKM 116:2 (pre-NH/NS), (Vš)-ši-š(V) KBo 6.2 + KBo 19.1 i 43, 46, 54, iii 33, 35, 38, 49, iv 56 (OS), KUB 29.30:5 (OS), KBo 6.3 i 63, iii 53, 61, 65, iv 4 (OH/NS), (Vš)-še-š(V) KBo 6.3 iv 55 (OH/NS), KUB 29.34 iv 13 (OH?/NS), (V)-ši-iš KBo 6.2 ii 54 (OS), KBo 27.16 rev. 4 (MH/NS), KUB 13.9 iii 13 (MH/NS), (V)-ši-š(V) KBo 6.2 iii 49, 56, iv 11 (OS), KUB 43.53 i 24 (-ša!-; OH/NS), uncertain (Vš)-ša-aš KBo 25.72 rt. col. 16 (OS).
acc. com. -šan, -šin: (Vš)-ša-an < (Vn)–šan KUB 36.104 i 15 (OS) = KBo 3.34 i 17 (OH/NS), KUB 17.10 iii 11, 12 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 i 37, 39 (OH/NS), KBo 32.14 iii 4 (MH/MS), KUB 7.1 iii 6, 7, 18 (pre-NH/NS), (-Vn)-ša-an KUB 2.5 v 11 (OH?/NS), (Sum.)-ša-an KUB 36.110 iii 5 (OS), KUB 41.7 i 6 (OH?/NS), (Vš)-ši-in < (Vn)–šin KUB 34.19 iv 8 (pre-NH/NS), (Sum.)-ši-in KBo 6.4 iv 6 («-iš»-ši-in; cf. LH 54 n. 168) (NS), uncertain KUB 17.18 iii 14 (NS).
sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: (C)-še-et KBo 17.1 i 15, 16 (OS), KBo 6.2 i 38 (OS), KBo 38.206 obv. 8 (MH?/MS), KUB 9.28 iv 14 (MH/NS), (V)-še-et KBo 21.22:25 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 ii 2 (OH/NS), KUB 57.105 iv 2 (OH/NS), KBo 13.13 obv. 2, 3 (MH/MS), KUB 9.28 i 17 (MH/NS), (V)š-še-et KUB 36.99 rev. 5 (OS), KUB 17.10 i 38 (OH/MS), KBo 10.2 i 5 (OH/NS), (-Vn)-še-et KBo 6.3 ii 50 (OH/NS), KUB 13.15 rev. 3, 6 (OH/NS), (V)š-še-et < (Vn)–šet KBo 6.2 iv 5 (OS) = KBo 6.3 iii 77 (OH/NS), KBo 42.4 obv. 11, 13, 15 (MS), (V)š-še-t(V) KUB 36.110:6 (OS), KBo 3.7 iii 18 (OH/NS), KUB 43.53 i 22 (OH/NS), (Vš)-še-t(V) KUB 43.53 i 21, (V)-še-t(V) KBo 17.3 iv 32 (OS), KBo 6.3 ii 2 (OH/NS), SBo 1.6 obv. 8 (MH/MS), (V)-še-d(V) KBo 6.2 iii 43 (OS), KBo 21.22:38 (OH/MS), KBo 18.151 obv. 8 (pre-NS), (C)-še-t(V) KBo 13.49 rt. col. 7 (pre-NH/NS), (C)-še-d(V) KBo 19.1 iii 43 (OS), (Sum.)-še-et KBo 6.2 i 24 (OS) = KBo 6.3 i 33 (OH/NS), (C)-ši-it KBo 6.2 iv 47 (OS), KBo 7.28 obv. 4 (OH/MS?), KUB 11.1 ii 2 (OH/NS), KBo 15.68 iii 10, 14, iv 7 (MH/NS), (V)-ši-it KBo 6.5 ii 9 (OH/NS), KUB 28.98 iii 5 (OH?/NS), (V)š-ši-it KUB 17.10 iii 10 (OH/MS), KBo 24.11 obv.? 7 (MH?/MS), KUB 8.30 rev. 15 (NS), (Vš)-ši-it < (Vn)–šit KBo 17.3 i 26 (OS), KBo 38.70 ii 5 + KBo 30.137:7 (OS? or MS?), KBo 27.42 i 17 (pre-NH/ENS?), (C)-ši-t(V) KUB 43.53 i 4 (OH/NS), (Sum.)-ši-it KUB 23.40:7 (pre-NS), KUB 41.19 rev. 13 (MH/NS).
sg. gen. -šaš: (Vš)-ša-aš KBo 6.2 iii 8, 9 (OS), KBo 21.22:14 (OH/MS), KBo 3.1 i 2, 24, ii 41 (OH/NS), KBo 3.34 ii 25 (OH/NS), KBo 19.58:14 (MH/MS), KUB 36.49 i 8, 9 (MS?), KUB 13.4 iv 67 (MH/NS), ABoT 58 rev. 7, 8 (MH/NS), (C)-ša-š(V) KBo 6.3 ii 3 (OH/NS), (V)-ša-aš KBo 6.26 iii 26 (pre-NH/NS).
sg. dat.-loc. -ši/e: (V)š-ši KBo 3.22:48 (OS), KBo 6.2 i 17, ii 62, iv 5, 13, 45, 57 (OS), KUB 36.44 i! 8 (OH/MS), KBo 3.27:12 (OH/NS), KBo 25.109 ii 3, iii 7, 21 (MS), KUB 13.4 iii 77 (MH/NS), KBo 3.4 iii 25, 30 (Murš. II), KUB 23.45:5 (NH), (V)š-še KUB 33.121 iii 6? (pre-NH/NS), (V)-ši KBo 6.5 i 6 (OH/NS), KBo 31.74:6 (MH/MS; katti–ši–ia, but previous two lines have -iš-ši- in same form, likewise ibid. 9, 11), KUB 13.2 iii 26 (MH/NS), KUB 13.17 iv 24 (MH/NS, dupl. KUB 13.4 iv 65 -šš-), KUB 5.6 iii 32 (NH), KUB 50.113 i 7 (NH), (V)-še KUB 13.30:6 (OH/NS), (Sum.)-ši KUB 29.36 rev. 9 (OS), KUB 13.4 iii 32 (MH/NS), KUB 33.121 iii 11 (pre-NH/NS), RS 25.421 rev. 66 (NS), KUB 41.21 iv 4, 9, 15 (Šupp. II).
sg. all. -ša: (V)š-ša KBo 22.1:28 (OS?), KUB 17.10 iv 20 (OH/MS), KBo 26.136 obv. 18(?) (OH/MS), KBo 3.34 i 12 (OH/NS), KBo 12.49 ii 14 (OH/NS), KBo 25.109 iii 21 (MS), IBoT 1.36 iii 61 (MH/MS), KUB 24.8 i 24, ii 6, 10 (pre-NH/NS).
abl.-inst. -ši/et: (-az)-še-et KBo 25.12 ii 12 (OS), KBo 22.195 ii! 9 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 iv 28 (OH/NS), (-az)-še-e-et KUB 17.10 iii 10 (OH/MS), (-za)-ši-it KBo 6.7:13 (OH/NS).
pl. nom. com. -še/iš: (Vš)-še-eš KBo 3.67 i 3 (OH/NS), KBo 12.4 ii 11 (OH/NS), KBo 32.13 ii 30 (MH/MS), (Vš)-še-š(V) KBo 3.60 i 9 (OH/NS), (Vš)-ši-eš KUB 34.89 rev. 3 (MS), KUB 36.109:8 (OH/MS), (Vš)-ši-iš KBo 3.1 i 24, ii 41 (OH/NS), (Vš)-še-iš KUB 11.1 i 13 (OH/NS), (Vš)-ši-š(V) KBo 3.1 i 13 (OH/NS), (Sum.)-še-eš KBo 17.22 iii 9 (OS), KBo 37.48 rev.! 5 (OH/NS), KBo 21.14 obv. 26 (MS).
pl. acc. com. -šuš: (Vš)-šu-uš KBo 3.35:8 (OH/NS), KUB 43.75 obv. 19 (OH/NS), KUB 57.105 ii 2, 8 (OH/NS), KBo 16.47:33 (MH/MS), KBo 38.57:9 (MH/MS), KUB 35.61:4 (NS), (V)-šu-uš KBo 13.34 iv? 15 (MH?/MS), (Sum.)-šu-uš KBo 25.20 obv. 9 (OS), KUB 57.105 ii 3, 5 (OH/NS).
coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: (V)š-še-et KBo 6.2 i 5 (OS), KBo 6.18 iv 1 (OH/NS?), (C)-še-et KBo 32.16 ii 9 (MH/MS), (V)-še-et KUB 43.26 iv 20 (OS), KBo 17.74 i 31, iv 27 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 i 12 (OH/NS), KBo 13.34 v 1 (MH?/MS), KUB 33.115 i 6 (pre-NH/NS), (V)š-ši-it KBo 6.26 i 2, 4, 5, 9, 12, 15, 17 (OH/NS), (V)-ši-it FHG 1:9 (OH/NS), uncertain (-i)š-it KUB 5.7 obv. 21 (NH, see below g).
pl. dat.-loc. (Vš)-ša-aš KBo 17.15 rev.! 10 (OS), KUB 39.8 iii 26 (pre-NH/NS), (Sum.)-ša-aš KUB 43.53 i 3 (OH/NS).
In the above overview of all possible spellings not only the vocalism of the poss. pron. is accounted for but also the writing of the initial sibilant as well as final stop if applicable; C stands for all obstruents other than /s/, for the assimilation of -nš- > -šš- see below. For the original vocalism of the sg. and coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -šet (and pl. -šmet “their”) vs. the abl.-inst. -šit (and pl. -šmit “their”) see Melchert, Phon. 122-126, and Francia, VO 10:213-216; cf. however the abl.-instr. -še-et KBo 25.12 ii 12 (OS). The relevant forms in the morphological section have been arranged accordingly. Secondarily restored sequences -nš- in the sg. acc. com. (e.g., TÚGšiknunšan “his robe” vs. TÚGšeknuššan; cf. below c 2') and sg. nom.-acc. neut. (e.g., peranšet “in front of him/her/it” vs. peraššet) are attested in OH/NS manuscripts only (cf. Melchert, AHP 109). This pattern is also seen with -šmi- “your, their” and -šummi” “our.” In the morphological section a distinction has been made between original -šš- (e.g., aÏš–šet “his/her/its mouth” or āššu–ššet “his/her/its good”) and -šš- < -nš-. Unlike the d.-l. -še of the clitic pers. pron. -ši “for him/her/it” (q.v.) the writing -še for the d.-l. of the poss. pron. is not attested in OS. With Güterbock, Or NS 52:75 n. 10, MDOG 101:24, 26, both may be considered “false archaizing.” The vocalization in the sg. acc. com. -šin is attested in NS only. The only ex. of -šaš for the sg. nom. com. is old but not certain. Likewise uncertain is mi-u-ri-še![- ... ] KBo 17.17 obv.! 4 (translit. StBoT 25:24; cf. StBoT 26:122, where it is interpreted as miureš–šeš “his/her/its miuras). All attestations in NH compositions are frozen forms: see below g.
Akk. masc. -ŠU and fem. -ŠA are already attested in OS; for -ŠU see below a 1', 4', and 11'. For -SU compare [LUGA]L-≠uš± TÚG-SÚ dāi “[The kin]g takes his cloth” KBo 20.10 ii 3 (rit. OS), translit. StBoT 25:132, tr. von Bredow, Altanat.Gotth. 37; for other OS attestations see StBoT 26:302. For MH/MS compare mān–kan ABU DUMU[-R]U–ya našma MUTU DAM-SÚ–ya naššu–ma ŠEŠ NIN–ya hallūwanzi “If a father and son or a husband and his wife or a brother and sister quarrel” KBo 39.8 iv 33-34 (Maštigga rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 46:106, 108. The Akk. fem. poss. pron. ŠA is rare: see below a 2' (OS), c 2' (OH/NS) and d 2' (MH/MS); the -Š[A] of KUB 29.32:1 (cf. LH 136) is very uncertain.  Note LÚMUSSAŠU “her husband” where Hittite misunderstanding of Akk. LÚmutu “husband” + ša “her” > LÚmussa resulted in Hittites writing it with two possessive pronouns LÚMUSSAŠU “her husband” LÚMU-SÀ-ŠU KBo 17.65 obv. 20 (MH/MS), KUB 9.4 iii 15 (NH), [LÚMU-U]S-SÀ-ŠU KBo 9.116 obv. 3 (MS).
(Sum.) ki-bi lu-na-me in-pa-a-da KUB 4.5 ii 9-10 = (Akk.) [a]šar–šu mamman ul uwadda “No one assigns (him) his place” KBo 12.72:9-10 = (Hitt.) nu–šši LÚ-tar-ši-i[t] UL kuiški ši[šhai(?)] “No one as[signs] him his manhood (LÚ-tar–šit)” KUB 4.5 iii 9-10 (NS), ed. Laroche, RA 58:72, 74, translit. pišnatar bil. sec. | although the Hitt. scribe obviously misunderstood the Sum. and Akk. entries (cf. Laroche, RA 58:77) the poss. -šit probably reflects the Sum. poss. -bi and the Akk. –ŠU.
(Hurr.) at-ta-i a-mu-u-lu-tu-u-um (= attai–i am–ol–u–d–o–m) KBo 32.14 iv 4 = n–ašta namma at-ta-aš-ša-an anda UL aušzi “He no longer looks at his father (attan–šan)” KBo 32.14 iii 4 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:82f. | although the Hurr. poss. morpheme -i for the 3rd pers. sg. merges with the stem vowel of attai- “father,” its presence may be assumed (cf. StBoT 32:164); the Hitt. abl. tu-e-eg-ga-a[z-še/it] HUR.SAG-aš KBo 32.14 ii 1-2 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:74f., restored on the basis of the alleged Hurr. i-te[-e-]≠i±-né-eš pa-pa-an-ni-iš KBo 32.14 i 1 with suffix doubling in the following papanniš (paban–ne–z√) is grammatically impossible because the ablatival -ne does not trigger suffix doubling. It is better to restore a gen. in both languages: (Hurr.) i-te[-i-wi]≠i±-né-eš pa-pa-an-ni-iš (ide–i–wi–ne–z√ paban–ne–z√) = (Hitt.) tu-e-eg-ga-aš[-ša-aš?] HUR.SAG-aš “the mountain of his body” (i.e., “his personal mountain”) (pers. comm. G. Wilhelm).
(Hatt.) eš-ta-a-an-hu le-e-wee-e-el a-an-te-eh KBo 37.1 i 6-7 = nu–za dUTU-uš É-er-še-et wetet “The Sungod built himself a house (lit. his house, É-er–šet)” KBo 37.1 ii 6, ed. StBoT 37:638f., HHB 2:156f. | for the Hatt. poss. prefixes l(e/i)- and š(e/i)- see Soysal, HWHT 228f., 238f., and GsForrer 613f., 624-626; tu-ú-[mi-iš] / [ta]-ba-ar-na le-e-li-i-iš ta-ba-ar-n[a-an] / [li]-≠i±-li-iš te-wuu-u-ti-ia te-e-ha-a-ar-ki-m[a-ah-ha] KBo 37.49 rev. 14-16 = nu–za laba[(rnaš LUGAL-uš) …] MU.HI.A-š–a–z / talugauš d[(āš nu laba)rn]aš MU.HI.A-še-eš ta!lugaËš / palhaËš aš[andu] “And Labarna, the king, ... took himself long years. [Let] the years of Laba[rn]a be long (and) wide” KBo 37.48(+)KUB 28.8 rev. rt. col. 4-6 (Hatt.-Hitt. bil., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 17.22 iii 5-7 (OS), ed. Girbal, AoF 27:367-369, Klinger, MemCarter 158-160, see also below a 8'. 
(Sum.) á-bi-šè = (Akk.) a-na i-ti-šú = (Hitt.) ku-uš-ša-ni-iš-ši “for his wage” KBo 1.42 i 25 (Izi Bo©azköy A, NS), ed. MSL 13:133.
a. in OS — 1' sg. nom.com. -ši/eš, -šaš(?): (“If someone (i.e., a herdsman) causes a wolf to drop a sheep(’s carcass)”) iš-ha-aš-ši-iš UZU.Ì dāi apāš–a KUŠ UDU dāi “its owner (išhaš–šiš) shall take the meat while the aforementioned takes the sheepskin” KBo 6.2 iv 14-15 (Laws §80, OS), ed. LH 85, CHD peš(š)iya/e- 8c, Schwemer, WO 30:189; uncertain LÚ.MEŠ ALAN.ZU· pūriy[an(?) … /] t–an a-ra-aš-ša-aš LÚ ALAN.ZU·-ti INA GÚ–ŠU n[a-? … /] pËdai n–an ANA LÚ.MEŠ HUB.BI […] “The performers […] a pūriya-. His partner (araš–šaš) t[urns(?)] it onto (another) performer’s neck [and] he carries [it] and [brings(?)] it to the dancers” KBo 25.72 ii 15-17 (KI.LAM fest., OS? or MS?) | according to Košak, StBoT 42:27 (368/c +) this frag. is MS while hetkonk. (0.6) identifies it as OS; for the ascription to the KI.LAM fest. see Groddek, AoF 26:42f.; for a spelling -ši-š(a-) see below c 1'.
2' sg. acc. com. -šan: (“They led Šarmaššu and Nunnu off to Mount Tahaya and harnessed them like oxen”) [(µNunnušš–a)] LÚga-i-na-aš-ša-an Ëpper “and they seized Nunnu’s in-law (LÚgaina(n)–šan) (and he (i.e., the Man of the Gold Spear) slaughtered him before Šarmaššu’s and Nunnu’s eyes)” KUB 36.104 obv. 15 (anecdotes, OS), w. dupl. KBo 3.34 i 16-17 (OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 32f., Soysal, Diss. 11, 18, 83, Garrett, FsWatkins 155, see also Neu, FsHouwink ten Cate 231; [(n)]u? a-a-an-da-aš-ša-an [(pi)škimi] “and I will give his equal (or: substitute, āndan–šan)” KBo 17.17 obv.! 7 (rit. of substitution, OS), w. dupl. KUB 43.53 i 18 (OH/NS), ed. Goedegebuure, JANER 2:64, 70; [t]akku GUDÁB arnuandan kuiški walahzi ŠA ŠÀ-BI–ŠA peššiezzi “[I]f someone strikes a pregnant cow causing her to miscarry (lit. (and) she drops (that) of her (-ŠA) inside)” KBo 6.2 iv 6 (laws §77, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 iii 78 (OH/NS), ed. LH 83 | the dupl.  has šarhuwanda (q.v.) omitting the poss. pron. For another OS ex. see below a 3'.
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: [laba]rnaš LUGAL-aš NINDA-šan adu≠e±[ni / wa-a-t]ar-še-ta akueni “W[e] eat the [Laba]rna’s, the king’s bread (lit. of the king his bread, NINDA–šan) while we drink his [wat]er ([wāt]ar–šet)” KUB 36.110 rev. 5-6 (OS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi™ 50f., Starke, ZA 69:82; (“The palace attendant hands the king and queen pure water”) LUGAL-uš 3-ŠU a-i-iš-še-et ārri [(t–a)]t ≠hurtiya±[(liy)]a lāhui MUNUS.LUGAL-š–a 3-ŠU a-i-iš-še-et [(ā)]rri n–at hurtiyaliya lāhui “The king washes his mouth (aÏš–šet) three times and pours it into the bowl(?) and the queen washes her mouth (aÏš–šet) three times and pours it into the bowl(?)” KBo 17.1 i 15-17 (rit. for the royal couple, OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 10-12 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:18f., translit. StBoT 25:5, 12; ≠ÉRIN±.MEŠ-n–an kuiš anda pËtai DUMU.É.GAL-š–a pé-e-ra-aš-še-et (var. -ši-it) ≠GIŠzupāri± harzi “The palace attendant holds a torch in front of the one (< pËran–šet) who brings in the troops. (Then he brings in the troops)” KBo 17.1 i 32-33 (rit. for the royal couple, OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 26 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:20f., translit. StBoT 25:6, 13 | given the fact that the person bringing in the figurines symbolizing the troops is already holding something, it seems most likely that the palace attendant holds the torch in front of that person; for the possibility of the poss. pron. referring to the palace attendant see StBoT 8:72, HW™ A 152a; takku LÚ.U⁄·.LU-aš ELLAM-aš KIR⁄›-še-et kuiški wāki “If someone bites off a free person’s nose (lit. of a free person his nose, KIR⁄›–šet)” KBo 6.2 i 24 (Laws §13, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 i 33 (NS), KBo 6.5 i 12 (NS), ed. LH 26.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: (“If a GIŠTUKUL-man and his partner live together, if they have a falling out, they shall divide their household.”) takku gi-im-ra-aš-ša-aš 10 SAG.DU 7 SA[(G.DU LÚ GIŠTUKUL dāi)] Ù 3 SAG.DU LÚ HA.LA–ŠU dāi GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A gi-im-ra-aš-ša-aš (var. LÍL-aš-ša-aš) Q[(¸TAMMA)] šarranzi “If ten persons belong to (lit. are of) his land (gimraš–šaš), then the GIŠTUKUL-man shall take seven persons and his partner shall take three persons. They shall divide the cattle and sheep of his land in the same way” KBo 6.2 iii 8-10 (Laws §53, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.6 i 14-16 (OH/NS), ed. LH 64f.
5' sg. dat.-loc. -ši: š–an išpandi nakkit dāhhun pé-e-di-iš-ši-ma ZÀ.AH.LI-an anie[nun] “I took it (i.e., the city of Hattuša) at night by force and sow[ed] cress on its place (pËdi–šši)” KBo 3.22 rev. 47-48 (Anitta text, OS), ed. StBoT 18:12f., StMed. 13:36f., CHD peda- A g, tr. Hoffner, CoS 1:183; (“If a (free) man has a free woman (in marriage))” [(ta)] DUMU.MUNUS-ši–ya šaliga ≠hurkil± “and he has sexual intercourse with her daughter (DUMU.MUNUS–ši) as well, it is an offence” KUB 29.36:9 + KUB 29.35 iv 10 (Laws, OS), ed. LH 153f.
6' sg. all. -ša: (“You do not question his (i.e., the rich man’s oppressed) provision carriers. Rather you act in the interest of the rich:”) pár-na-aš-ša paiši Ëzši eukši “you go to his (i.e., the rich man’s) house (parna–šša), you eat (and) drink (and he rewards you)” KBo 22.1:28 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f., tr. Marazzi, FsPuglieseCarratelli 128, Hoffner, CANE 561.
7' abl.-inst. -šet: (“The silversmiths bri[ng] two silver ox heads.”) [LÚK]AŠ›.E [(taruhzi kui)]š ≠2 NINDAwagataš 1± MA.[NA KÙ.BABBA]R ≠LUGAL±-waš [(ki-iš-šar-ra-az-)]≠še-et± dā[i] “The runner who wins, receives (lit. takes) two wagata-breads (and) one [silve]r mi[na] out of the king’s hand (lit. out of his, the king’s hand, kiššarraz–šet)” KBo 25.12 ii 10-12 (OS), w. dupl. KBo 22.195 ii! 8-9 (OH/MS), ed. Tischler, HEG 3:157, translit. StBoT 25:32, StBoT 28:34, tr. von Bredow, Altanat.Gotth. 15; cf. also StBoT 27:75.
8' pl. nom. com. -šeš: (“The labarna, the king [has taken the land for himself], he has taken long years for himself”) nu laba[rn(aš MU.HI.A-še-eš)] talugaËš palhāËš aš[andu … ] māhhanda talugaš p[(alhiš)] labarnaš–a MU.HI.A-še-eš Q[(¸TAMMA ta!lugaËš palhËš) aša(ndu)] “[May] the laba[rn]a’s years (lit. of the labarna his years, MU.HI.A–šeš) be long (and) wide [and] just as [ … ] is long (and) wide, may of the labarna his years likewise be long (and) wide!” KBo 17.22 iii 6-9 (Hattic-Hitt. prayer for the labarna, OS), w. dupl. KUB 28.8 rev. 3b-6b + KBo 37.48 rev.! 5-8 (NS), ed. Girbal, AoF 27:367-369, Klinger, GsCarter 158-160, translit. StBoT 25:208 (without KBo 37.48), see also bil. sec..
9' pl. acc. com -šuš: attested only in frag. context [ … ]x GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-šu-uš [ … ] “[ … ] his tent [ … ]” KBo 25.20:9 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:58. 
10' coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -šet: [LUGAL]-u[š–za a-ni-i]a[-at-t]a-še-≠et± [/ dāi] “[The kin]g [puts on] his [r]o[be]s (aniyatta–šet)” KBo 17.11 iv 1 + KUB 43.26 iv 20 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:68, restored after the identical phrase KBo 17.11 i 16 (-še-e]t dāi), translit. StBoT 25:65 (= i 32), w. dupl. KBo 17.74 i 31 + KBo 34.10 i 32 (MS), ed. StBoT 12:14f. 
11' pl. dat.-loc. -šaš: (“One mare and its foal, provided with annanuzzi-, eight leather cords have been placed around [their … ]”) 1 GUDÁB pa-ta-a-aš-ša-aš [(4 KUŠišh)imāneš] nËanteš 1 KUŠišhimāš INA SAG.DU–ŠU nËanza “One cow, four leather c[ords] have been placed around its feet (patāš–šaš), one leather cord has been placed around its head” KBo 17.15 rev.! 10-11 (fest., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.40 iv 3 (MS), ed. Haas/Wäfler, UF 8:88f., translit. StBoT 25:73, tr. von Bredow, Altanat. Gotth. 64.
b. in OH/MS — 1' sg. nom. com. -šiš: (“The Stormgod’s spring they make. …”) n–ašta dIM-naš tān an-na-a[š-š]i-iš [katt]anta pait n–at–za ešat dIM-ni–aš AMA–ŠU [lab]arni–ma–aš išhešša–ššit “The Stormgod’s mother (lit. of the Stormgod his mother, annaš–šiš) went down a second time and she(!) sat down. For the Stormgod she is his mother but for the Labarna she is (the source of) his mandate(?)” KBo 21.22 rev. 43-45 (benedictions for the labarna, OH/MS), ed. Kellerman, Tel Aviv 5:200, 202, Archi, FsMeriggi™ 47, Melchert, Schwartz Mem. 220, Haas, AoF 28:123 | for išhešša–ššit see below b 10'; [takku–an] ABU–ŠU AMA–ŠU ŠEŠ–ŠU NIN–SU LÚga-i-na-aš-ši-iš LÚa-ra-aš-ši-iš kušduwāizzi “[If] his father, his mother, his brother, his sister, his in-law (LÚgainaš–šiš), his friend (LÚaraš–šiš) slanders [him]” KBo 7.28 obv. 19-21 (OH?/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 84, 87, tr. Ünal, TUAT II/6, 794.
2' sg. acc. com. -šan: kar-pí-iš-ša-an dāhhun kar-di-mi-ia-at-ta-aš-ša-an dāhhun ¬wa-ar-ku-uš-ša-an dāhhun “I have taken his (i.e., the god Telipinu’s) wrath, I have taken his anger, I have taken his warku(i)-” KUB 17.10 iii 11-12 (disappearing deity myth, OH/MS), ed. Mazoyer, Télipinu 48, 77 (poss. not translated), translit. Laroche, Myth. 34, tr. Moore, Diss. 24, Hoffner, Hittite Myths 16 | in all three instances the sg. acc. ending -n (karpi(n)–šan, kardimiyatta(n)–šan, warku(n)–šan) assimilated to the following sibilant of the poss. pron.
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: tuggaz–šËt i-da-a-lu-uš-ši-it dāhhun uš[-d]u?-ul-še-et dāhhun “From his body I have taken his evil (idālu–ššit), I have taken his s[i]n (ušdul–šet)” KUB 17.10 iii 10-11 (OH/MS), ed. Mazoyer, Télipinu 48, 77 (poss. not translated), translit. Laroche, Myth. 34, tr. Moore, Diss. 24, Hoffner, Hittite Myths 16.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: nu–za kuit labarnaš LUGAL-uš iš-ta-an-za-na-aš-ša-aš [ŠÀ-aš-š]a-aš ilāliškizzi n–at–ši arān Ëštu “What of his soul (ištanzanaš–šaš) (and) of [his heart] (ŠÀ-aš–šaš) the labarna, king desires, let it have reached him!” KBo 21.22 obv. 14-15, ed. Kellerman, Tel Aviv 5:199, 201, Archi, FsMeriggi™ 45, 47.
5' sg. dat.-loc.: nu–za arunaš DUGHAB.HAB-a[n?] / [ … ]x hal-hal-da-a-ni-iš-ši daiš “And the Sea placed the HAB.HAB-vessel [ … ] on his halhaldana-“ KUB 36.44 i! 7-8 (myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 22, tr. Hittite Myths 26, see also Neu, FsNeumann™ 322.
6' sg. all. -ša: dTelipinuš āppa pár-na-aš-ša uit “Telipinu came back home (lit. to his house, parna–šša)” KUB 17.10 iv 20 (OH/MS), ed. Mazoyer, Télipinu 51, 79, translit. Laroche, Myth. 37, tr. Moore, Diss. 26, Hoffner, Hittite Myths 17.
7' abl.-inst. -šet: for ki-iš-šar-ra-az-še-et KBo 22.195 ii! 8-9 (OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 25.12 ii 11-12 (OS), see above a 7'; see also -še-e-et in (tu-ug-ga-az–šËt) KUB 17.10 iii 10 above b 3'.
8'-9' pl. nom. and acc. com.: not attested.
10' coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it:  a-ni-ia-at-ta-še-et KBo 17.74 i 31 + KBo 34.10 i 32 (OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:14f., see above a 10'; iš-he-eš-ša-aš-ši-it KBo 21.22 rev. 45 (benedictions for the labarna, OH/MS), see above b 1' | for the latter form as coll./pl.neut. see Melchert, Schwartz Mem. 219f.
11' pl. dat.-loc.: not attested.
c. in OH/NS — 1' sg. nom. com. -šiš: (“If a plow ox, a draft horse, a cow, or a mare strays into (another) corral, …”) iš-ha-aš-ši-š[(a-an (var. iš-ha-ši-ša-an) w)]emiyazzi “(and) its owner (išha(š)–šiš) finds it, (he shall take it (back) in full value)” KBo 6.3 iii 53 (Laws §66, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 + KBo 19.1 iii 49 (OS), ed. LH 76f.
2' sg. acc. com. -šan: ta GAL LÚMEŠEDI LÚSAGI.A TÚGši-ik-nu-un-ša-an (var. TÚGše-ek-nu-uš-ša-an) arha tarnāi “And the chief guard lets go of the cupbearer’s (lit. his) robe (TÚGšeknun–šan)” KUB 2.5 v 10-12 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KUB 25.1 v 45-46 (NS), ed. Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20:94f. (differently); see also KBo 3.34 i 16-17 (OH/NS), above a 2'; takku DUMU.MUNUS-SÀ harzi “If he (i.e., a free man) has her (i.e., a free woman’s) daughter (in marriage)” KBo 6.26 iii 52 (laws §195c, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.34 iv 28 (OH/NS), ed. LH 154 | for the continuation see below c 5'.
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: see KBo 6.3 i 33 (NS), KBo 6.5 i 12 (NS), ed. LH 26, both above a 3'.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: (“They elevated a barber’s chair for Šuppiuman and Marašša”) apūn ú-ba-ti-ia-aš-ša-aš peran ašešer apūnn–a ubatiyaš<–šaš> peran ašešer “One they seated before his regiment(?) (ubatiyaš–šaš) and the other they seated before <his> regiment(?)” KBo 3.34 ii 25-26 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 50f., Soysal, Diss. 13f., 85; see also KBo 6.6 i 14-16 (OH/NS), ed. LH 64f., above a 4' ; see also below haššannaš–šaš KBo 3.1 ii 41 (Tel.pr., OH/NS) c 8' and takkaniaš–šaš KBo 3.35 i 8 (anecdotes, OH/NS) c 9'.
5' sg. dat.-loc. -ši: (“Whoever does evil among both his brothers and sisters, …”) É-ri-iš-ši-iš-ši ANA DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU idālu lË takkiššanzi “do not let them contrive evil against his estate (lit. to his estate to him, É-ri–šši–šši), his wife, (and) his children” KBo 3.1 ii 54 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:34f.; (If a free man has a free woman’s daughter in marriage) [(ta a)]n-na-še–ia na[(šma NIN-iš-ši šalÏga)] hūrkel “and he violates also her mother (anna–še) and sister (NIN-i–šši) , it is hūrkel” KUB 13.30:6-7 + KBo 6.13 iii 8 (Laws §195c, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.26 iii 52-53, ed. LH 153f. | like the writing -še (cf. the discussion after the morphology sec.) the all. anna may be a false archaism by the New Hitt. scribe. The NS dupl. KBo 6.26 iii 52 has the expected dat. anni–šši.
6' sg. all. -ša: (“He does not bring the gold and silver”) kuit uemiezzi apašš–a (var. [ap]āš–a) [(pár)]-na-aš-ša pittaizzi “(Instead), he brings to his house (parna–šša) whatever he finds” KBo 3.34 i 12 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.104 obv. 10 (OS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 32f., Soysal, Diss. 11, 83.
7' abl.-inst. -še/it: (“If a dog devours lard and the owner of the lard finds (the dog), kills it”) n–ašta Ì-an šar-hu-wa-an-ta-az-še-et (var. šar<-hu>-wa-an-ta-za-ši-it) K[A]R-izzi “and retrieves the lard from its stomach (šarhuwantaz–šet) (there will be no compensation (for the dog))” KBo 6.3 iv 28 (Laws §90, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.7:13 (OH/NS), ed. LH 90.
8' pl. nom. com. -še/iš: (“Who in the future will become king after me”) n–apa ŠEŠ.MEŠ–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU LÚ.MEŠga-e-na-aš-ši-iš (var. 
[LÚ.MEŠga-e-]na-aš-še-eš) LÚ.MEŠ haššannaš–šaš Ù ÉRIN.MEŠ–ŠU taruppanteš ašandu “and may his brothers, his sons, his in-laws (LÚ.MEŠgaenaš–šiš), his further family members (lit. men of his family) and his troops be united” KBo 3.1 ii 40-42 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 12.4 ii 11 (NS), ed. THeth 11:32f., tr. van den Hout, CoS 1:197; see also above a 8' for KBo 37.48 rev.! 5 (OH/NS).
9' pl. acc. com -šuš: [ŠA] AHI–YA takkaniaš–šaš pár-hu-uš-šu-uš [ … ] “my brother’s chest’s nipples(?) (lit. [of] my brother of his chest his nipples(?), parhuš–šuš)” KBo 3.35 i 8 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Dardano, L’aneddoto 38f., Soysal, Diss. 21, 87, CHD P 147a; GÍR–ŠU hūittiyati GIŠwa-ar-ša-mu-uš-šu-uš [ …?]/[w]alhiškit “He (i.e., dLAMMA) drew his dagger (and) his sticks (of wood) (GIŠwaršamuš–šuš) [ …?] he started to hit” KUB 43.75 obv. 19-20 (hist. frag., OH/NS), ed. Soysal, Diss. 73, 107 | the referent of the poss. pron. -šuš is unclear. For GIŠwarša(m)ma- as “stick (of wood)” see Watkins,  Mem.Imparati 881f.
10' coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: nu–za–kan DINGIR-LUM apāš ša-ku-wa-ši-it tapu[šza] tamËda nāieš “That deity turned his eyes (šakuwa–šit) asi[de] elsewhere” FHG 1:9-10 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. CHD Š 72b.
11' pl. dat.-loc. -šaš: (“His (i.e., the patient’s) head corresponds to his (i.e., the substitute’s) head …”) [IGI.HI.A–Š]U ANA IGI.HI.A-ša-aš dākki “[h]is [eyes] correspond to his eyes (IGI.HI.A–šaš)” KUB 43.53 i 3 (OH/NS), translit. StBoT 25:25.
d. in MH/MS — 1' sg. nom. com. -šiš: a-an-za-aš-ši-iš nakkuššiezi “and his equal (i.e., his substitute, ānz(a)–šiš) will be the scapegoat” KBo 13.13 obv. 13 (šumma izbu omen, MH?/MS), ed. Soysal, JANER 4:102, translit. StBoT 9:60f. (no tr.), cf. nakkuššešš- | for ānt- “equal” see Goedegebuure, JANER 2:64-68, Soysal, JANER 4:99-105.
2' sg. acc. com. -šan: see attaššan < *attan–šan in bil. section above; (“The king has taken”) ≠ANA± ƒ≠Tum±[- ... ] ... ≠ANA± NÍG.BA–ŠA IDDI[N] “(and) to Tum[- ... ] ... he has giv[en] as her gift” SBo 7:9, 11, ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:366f. (incorrectly transliterating -ŠU).
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: (describing a landed property:) IŠTU HUR.SAGŠithāna A[DI … ] hu-la-le-e-eš-šar-še-et [ … ] “From Mount Šithāna t[o … ] its circumference (hulalËššar–šet) [is … ]” LS 4 obv. 5-6 = SBo 1:4 (land deed, MH/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:360f.; mān–za MUNUS-za hāši nu kÏ ut-tar-še-et “When a woman gives birth, this is her procedure (uttar–šet)” KBo 17.60 rev. 12 (colophon to birth rit., MH?/MS), ed. StBoT 29:60f.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: namma–z uit ABI dUTU-ŠI ≠tuk± µMadduwattan l[i-i]n-ki-ia-aš-ša-aš iËt “Then the father of My Majesty came (and) made you, Madduwatta, his sworn ally (lit. (man) of his oath, linkiyaš–šaš)” KUB 14.1 obv. 13 (indictment of Madduwatta, MH/MS), ed. Madd. 4f., tr. DiplTexts™ 154; (“If your commander speaks favorably of My Majesty in your presence, then listen to him!”) mān–šmaš–kan kiššuwan–ma [ … ] / [wa-a]g-ga-a-ri-ya-aš-ša-aš uttar peran pËhutezzi “but if he brings before you such [ …?] a message of his rebellion (waggāriyaš–šaš), ( … )” KBo 19.58:13-14 (MH/MS), ed. Košak, JAC 5:80, 82 w. commentary 83.
5' sg. dat.-loc.: ANA DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU–ma tu-ek-ki-iš-ši [a]ndan lalukkit har-ša-ni-iš<-ši> ≠KI.MIN± šaku≠w±aš–šaš KI.MIN wālulaš–šaš KI.MIN IGI.HI.A-aš hark[ia]š dankuwayaš KI.MIN ha-an-ti-≠iš±-ši KI.MIN eneraš–šaš KI.MIN laplipaš–ša<š> KI.MIN “It became luminous on the mortal’s body (lit. on the mortal, on his body, tuekki–šši), on his head (haršani–šši) ditto, on his eyes ditto, on his pupils(?) ditto, on the white (and) dark of the eyes ditto, on his forehead (hanti–šši) ditto, on his brows ditto, on his lashes ditto” KUB 33.66 ii 16-20 + KBo 40.333 ii 4-8 (missing deity myth, MH?/MS), ed. Groddek, ZA 89:38, 40 | for the meaning “pupil” of walula- see Poetto, Heth.u.Idg. 206f., for the tentative dating of this text as MH/MS see Groddek, ZA 89: 47; (in a frag. listing of men and troops) [ … -]x kat-ti-iš-ši-ia [ … ] kat-ti-iš-ši-ia [ … -]x (= hu/ar)-ri kat-ti-<iš->ši-ia 5 LÚ.MEŠ URULa[- … ] “and with him (katti–šši) [there are x men from the town of … ] and with him [there are x men from the town of … ] … and with him there are five men from the town of La[- … ]” KBo 31.74:4-6 (list, MH/MS) | for the script and appurtenance of the fragment see Neu, FsBittel 393 (as 457/e).
6' sg. all. -ša: māhhan GIŠhuluganniš pár-na-aš-ša paizzi LÚšalašhaš–ma GIŠŠUKUR.HI.A ANA LÚÌ.DUH pāi “When the cart goes home (lit. to his house, parna–šša), the šalašha-man hands the spears to the gatekeeper” IBoT 1.36 iii 61-62 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:30f.; in broken context [ŠAH-aš(?)] Éhu-u-um-ma-aš-š[a pa]itta “[The pig(?) w]ent to it[s] sty (hūmma–šša)” KBo 26.136 obv. 18 (MH/MS?), ed. Polvani, Eothen 4:70, 72 | another instance of the all. -ša may be in the next l. 19 ([UDU-uš a-ša-ú-n]a[-aš]-ša pait[ta] “[The sheep] wen[t] to its [pen]”).
7' abl.-inst.: not attested but for a restored ex. see KBo 32.14 ii 1 (tu-e-eg-ga-a[z-še-et or -ši-it]) in the bil. section.
8' pl. nom. com. -šeš: kišraš–ma–šši ga-lu-lu-pé-e-eš-še-eš talugaË[š] “Her fingers of her hand are long” KBo 32.13 ii 30 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:225, tr. Hittite Myths 73; kinun–a–wa ANA ƒZi. ad-de-eš-še-eš palhāËš [tu-]≠e-ek±-ke-e-eš-še-eš SIGﬁ-anteš mišriwanteš “Now Zi(plantawiya)’s adda-s (lit. her addeš) are wide, her [l]imbs ([tu]Ëkkeš–šeš) are goodly (and) glorious” KBo 15.10 i 16-17 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth. 1:14f. 
9' pl. acc. com -šuš: isolated in fragmentary contexts [ … h]a-lu-ga-tal-lu-uš-šu-uš [ … ] “his envoys (halugatalluš–šuš)” KBo 16.47:33 (treaty, MH/MS), ed. Otten, IM 17:57, de Martino, Eothen 5:70, 72; [ … ] / pa-a-aš-du-uš-šu-uš namma-x[ … ] “its trims(?) (pāšduš–šuš). Further [ … ]” KBo 38.57:9 (MH/MS).
10' coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut.: (“Zāzalla is a great speaker”) [(nu–šši) tul]iyaš pËdi ud-da-a-ar-še-et [U(L kui)]ški tarahzi “In the assembly nobody surpasses his words (uddār–šet)” KBo 32.16 ii 9-10 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 32.54:8-9 (MH/MS), ed StBoT 32:275; [nu Š]A ƒZi. al-wa-an-za-tar-še-et idālu ud-da-a-ar-še-et Q¸TAMMA [hara]kdu n–at–apa EGIR-pa lË uizzi “May Zi(plantawiya)’s evil sorcery (lit. of Z. her evil sorcery, alwanzatar–šet) (and) her words likewise [per]ish and may they not return!” KBo 15.10 ii 15-16 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth. 1:22f.
11' pl. dat.-loc. -šaš: [nu–šši–š]šan DUMU-an gi-nu-wa-aš-ša-aš tehhi “[and] I place the child on her(?) knees (ginuwaš–šaš)” KBo 17.61 obv. 22 (rit. of birth, MH?/MS), ed. StBoT 29:42f.; for a series of nouns + –šaš (all written -aš-ša-aš) see KUB 33.66 ii 16-20 + KBo 40.333 ii 4-8 (missing deity myth, MH?/MS), d 5' above. 
e. in MH/NS — 1' sg. nom. com. -šiš: (If a temple servant in an unclean state handles the gods’ offerings) [(n)]ašma–an LÚa-ra-aš-ši-iš šakki “or his colleague (LÚaraš–šiš) knows about him” (it is a capital offence and the two shall die) KUB 13.4 iii 81 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.5 iii 48 (NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 72f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220, Klinger, TUAT Erg. 79; cf. in obscure context LÚa-ra-ši-iš “his colleague/accomplice(?, LÚara(š)–šiš)” KBo 27.16 rev. 4 (MH/NS), translit. CHD L-N 169a.
2' sg. acc. com.: not attested.
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: (A statue of Ištar is made: “She is dressed in a robe, she holds extended a small silver skewer, she wears a blue woollen girdle”) SÍG.SAﬁ i-pu-ul-li-še-et “her ipulli- is of red wool” KUB 9.28 i 16-17 (rit. for Heptad, MH/NS), ed. Vieyra, RA 51:132, 136, Wegner, AOAT 36:39f.; cf. in the same text še-er-še-et KUB 9.28 iv 14 | it remains uncertain if ipulli is sg.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: nu–za kāša šumeš LÚ.MEŠ KUR URUIšmirika hūmanteš IT[TI dUTU-]Š[I l]i[-in-k]i-ia-aš-ša-aš nu LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL DUMU.MEŠ[.LUGAL] Ù KUR URUHatti EGIR.UD.KAM pahhašten katta–ma šume[nzan DUMU.MEŠ IT]TI DUMU.MEŠ.LUGAL li-in-ki-ia-aš-ša-a[š] DUMU.DUMU.MEŠ–KUNU–ma–šmaš ITTI DUMU.DUMU.MEŠ.LUGAL linkiyaš–pat “Now, all you men of the country Išmirika, you are sworn allies (lit. men of his oath, linkiyaš–šaš) o[f My Majest]y and you in the future you must protect the king, queen, prin[ces], and Hatti Land while later you[r sons] will be sworn allies (lit. men of his(!) oath) of the princes, and your grandchildren will likewise be sworn allies of (my) royal grandchildren” KUB 23.68 + ABoT 58 rev. 7-9, ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:196f., L-N lingai- 1 c 5' | note the disagreement in number between the second instance of linkiyaš–šaš and its likely plur. referent [DUMU.MEŠ] restored on the basis of DUMU.DUMU.MEŠ in line 9. In the third clause no poss. was added (linkiyaš–pat).
5' sg. dat.-loc. -ši: ANA B´LI–ma–at–šan lË iËzzi ŠEŠ–ya–at–z–šan DAM–ŠU ≠LÚa±-ri-ši-ia lË iyazi “He should not handle it (i.e., a lawsuit) for a superior and he should neither handle it for (his) brother, his wife and his colleague (LÚari–ši)” KUB 13.2 iii 25-26 (instr. for the B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 48, StMed. 14:152-155, tr. Haase, THR 59, McMahon, CoS 1:224.
6'-11' sg. all., abl. and inst., pl. nom. and acc. com. and neut.: not attested.
f. in pre-NH/NS — 1' sg. nom. com. -šiš: [nu] MUNUSŠU.GI MUNUSare–šši menahhanda kiššan tezzi … [MUNUS]≠a±-ra-aš-ši-ša tezzi … [ap]āšš–a tezzi … a-ra-aš-ši-š[a t]ezzi “The Old Woman says as follows to her colleague … then her colleague (MUNUSaraš–šiš) says … and [t]hat one (i.e., the Old Woman) says … [then] her colleague (araš–šiš) [s]ays” KUB 30.15 + KUB 39.19 obv. 29, 31, 32 (funerary rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. HTR 68f., Kassian et al., Funerary, 266f.; cf. MUNUSa-ra-aš-ši-iš-ša in the par. text KUB 39.41 i 11 (pre-NH/NS), ed. Kassian et al.,  Funerary 644f.; an isolated tu-ek-ke-eš-še-eš “his/her/its body (tuekkeš–šeš)” is attested KUB 34.91:8 (missing deity myth, pre-NH/NS) in fragmentary context, for the immediately preceding context see marra- 1 d; [ŠA DING]IR-≠LUM± TUKU.TUKU-uanza ZI–ŠU [ka-r]a-az-še-iš ∑aran pahhur lapta “[The deit]y’s angry soul (and) his [fi]gure (?, karaz–šeš) glowed (like) a burning fire” HKM 116 obv. 1-2 (missing deity myth, pre-NH/NS), ed. Güterbock, FsAlkım 206, 208.
2' sg. acc. com. -šan, -šin: n–aš UZUpa-an-tu-u-ha-aš-ša-an hamiktat n–aš UZUar-ra-aš-ša-an hamiktat “He (i.e., the patient) was bound with respect to his bladder(?, UZUpantūha(n)–ššan), he was bound with respect to his arse” KUB 7.1 iii 6-7 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Alp, Anatolia 2:42f., Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:158f.; cf. UZUpanduha-; (“If a malformed fetus’ penis …”) [ … ]/ at-ta-aš-ši-in kuna[nzi?] ‘[they will] kill its father (atta(n)–ššin)” KUB 34.19 iv 8 (pre-NH/NS), ed. StBoT 9:56f.; uncertain is la-at-ti-en-š[i?-in?] KUB 17.18 iii 14, ed. s.v. latti- 1 c.
3' sg. nom.-acc. neut. -še/it: (“Words of Watti<ti>, woman from the town of Kunaššarwa: If someone devours an adult’s or a child’s innards”) [nu] kiššan ut-tar-še-et “this is her procedure (uttar–šet)” KUB 30.49 iv? 25 (shelf list, pre-NH/NS), translit. CTH p. 166; cf. the par. listing in KUB 7.1 iv 10-12 (ut-tar-ši-it) (rit., pre-NH/NS) which may be the tablet the shelf list refers to | although the shelf list itself may be a NH product the entries listed often refer to or are copied from older compositions; (“If a leššalla- (i.e., a celestial phenomenon) appears”) nu–šši–kan ha-ap-pár-nu-wa-tar-še-et parā mekki lalukešzi “and its radiance(?, happarnuwatar–šet) glows very brightly (then the king of the world will die)” KUB 8.16:8-9 + KUB 8.24 rev. 8-9, ed. DBH 12:145, 147, see also MULleššalla-.
4' sg. gen. -šaš: [(takku LÚ)-i]š apË[(l–pa)]t an-na-ša-aš katta waštai “If a man sins with his own mother (anna(š)–šaš) (it is an unpermitted sexual pairing)” KBo 6.26 iii 26 (pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.34 iv 8 (NS), ed. LH 149; possibly [DINGI]R-LIM-ša-aš “of his [deit]y” KBo 13.143 rev. 7 (funerary rit., NS) in isolated fragmentary context see Kassian et al.,  Funerary 76f.
5' sg. dat.-loc. -ši: (If a temple servant has slept with a woman, he should tell his superior or if he does not dare to tell him) nu LÚa-ri-iš-ši memāu “he should tell his colleague (LÚari–šši)” KUB 13.4 iii 77 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 70f., tr. McMahon, CoS 1:220, Klinger, TUAT Erg. 79;  MUNUSa-re-eš-ši “to her colleague” KUB 30.15 obv. 29 (funerary rit., pre-NH/NS) see f 1', above.
6' sg. all. -ša: n–aš–za EGIR-pa pár-na-aš-ša iyanniš “and he (i.e., Appu) went back home (lit. to his house, parna–šša)” KUB 24.8 ii 10-11 (Appu myth, pre-NH/NS), ed. StBoT 14:8f., tr. Hittite Myths 64; cf. also ibid. i 24, ii 6.
7'-9' abl., inst., pl. nom. and acc. com.: not attested.
10' coll./pl. nom.-acc. neut. -šet: in fragmen-tary context [ … ] IGI.HI.A-wa-še-da (or 
-et) “his/her/its eyes (šakuwa–šed/šet)” KUB 33.115 i 6 (Song of Silver, pre-NH/NS), ed. Hoffner, FsOtten™ 148.
11' pl. dat.-loc. -šaš: (“Next they take the soldier bread”) n–an–šan AN[A ALAM] ge-e-nu-wa-aš-ša-aš šer tianzi “and they put it on the statue’s lap (lit. on the statue, on its knees, gËnuwaš–šaš)” KUB 39.8 + KBo 34.58 iii 25-26 (funerary rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. HTR 44f., Kassian et al., Funerary 572f.
g. in NH — Unequivocal examples of the poss. pron. -š. in NH compositions other than the frozen form pidi–šši (see peda- A h-i) seem to be lacking. Uncertain are: (“Next we questioned the temple personnel and they said: ‘The monthly festival … [ … was sk]ipped.’”) ZAG.GAR.RA–wa ≠ši±-it-ta-ri-iš-it UL unuwanza “The altar’s sun disks (lit. the altar, that is, its sun disks, šittari–šit) were not decorated” KUB 5.7 obv. 20-21, ed. Hazenbos, Habil. 143, 149 (emending thus but translating differently), Tognon, Kaskal 1:62, 67 (not emending but not translating a poss. pron. either) | although a writing -VC-VC is relatively rare, it does not necessarily need emending. However, if the text is emended one might also emend to ši-it-ta-ri«-iš»-it “The altar is not decorated with sundisks”; [ … -]ahhūn ÉRIN.MEŠ LÚUKU.UŠ-≠še-eš± [ … ] “I [ … -]ed. His(?) UKU.UŠ-troops [ … ]” KBo 18.50 obv. 12 (Šupp. I?, ENS?), ed. THeth. 16:96f. | Hagenbuchner, THeth. 16:99, suggests taking -šeš as phonetic compl. rather than the poss. since the latter could probably be excluded for chronological reasons. Although this is circular reasoning, the possibility of a phonetic compl. is real. The fragment KBo 14.18 with the pl. acc. tu-uz-zi-uš-šu-uš “his troops” which was tentatively included by Güterbock as frag. 51 in the DŠ, is now generally attributed to the MH period; cf. Otten, Königshaus 32, Carruba, X. TTKongresi = TTKYayın IX543. 
The several instances of the poss. pron. in the NH revision (PT) of the laws, KBo 6.4 (cf. ŠU-aš-še-et i 2, pé-di-iš-ši i 23, É-er-ši i 23, KIR⁄›-še-et i 33, 35, pár-na-aš-še-e-a i 34, EN-iš-ši iv 5, EN«-iš»-ši-in iv 6) are obvious archaisms taken over from the older copies the NH scribe Hanikuili used. 
With Eichner, Heth.u.Idg. 41-61, we consider the forms genušši, genuššin, and genuššuš as case forms of a noun genušša/i- and therefore as not containing the poss. pron.; cf. differently, however, Puhvel, HED K 151. 
The form iškišitti in n–an iš-ki-ši-it-ti [I]ŒBAT “He seized his back (lit. him, his back)” KBo 12.33 iii 8 (Arn. II, but see differently Korolëv, SL 2:290f.), ed. HW™ E 60b; cf. also HED I 425 (both differently), may be a mistake for iški(š)–šit; for the expected acc. see n–an x[ o 
o ]-an IŒBAT ibid. 7.
For general remarks on the expression of poss. relationships in Hitt. and the chronological development of the poss. prons. see s.v. -mi-, -ma- “my, mine”; for the so-called split genitive construction see Garrett, FsWatkins 155-163. The attestations of the poss. pron. -ši-/-ša- run fully parallel to those of the 1. sg. poss. pron. and suggest that it was lost relatively early. The fact that the corpus of texts from Ma®at Höyük (Level III) dating to the early fourteenth century B.C. contains exx. of the poss. pron. in combination with the adv. katti- only (katti–mi, katti–ti, katti–šummi; cf. Hoffner, GsNeu forthcoming) suggests that its productive period was already over by this time. Forms kept being written, however, in NS redactions of earlier compositions. Forms like LÚ.MEŠ haššanaššiš “men of his clan/family” KBo 3.1 i 13 (Tel. pr., OH/NS)  (correctly dupl. LÚ.MEŠ haššannaššaš–šaš KUB 11.1 i 13, NS) and haššannašan KBo 3.1 ii 45 (Tel. pr., OH/NS) show that sometimes such forms were no longer correctly understood and reinterpreted (here as the pl. nom. and sg. acc. respectively of a new word hašša(n)našša- com. “family member”). 
Friedrich, HE (1960) 64-66, 133f.; Güterbock, MDOG 101 (1969) 24; id., Or NS 52 (1983) 75 n. 10. 26; Melchert, Phon. (1984) 122-126; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 79-82; Francia, VO 10 (1996) 209-259; Garrett, FsWatkins (1998) 155-163.
Cf. -mi-/-ma-, -šmi-/-šma-, -šummi-/-šumma-, -ti-/-ta-.
šappu- šarā B 1 a 2' 
šarā B 1 a 2'  šara B 1 a 7' 
šarā B 1 a 7'  šara B 1 a 10' a' 
šarā B 1 a 10' a'  šara B 1 a 17' 
šarā B 1 a 17'  šara B 1 a 20' 
šarā B 1 a 21'  šara B 1 a 25' 
šarā B 1 a 26'  šara B 1 a 35' 
šarā B 1 a 36' šarā B 1 a 41' b'
šarā B 1 a 41' b'  šara B 1 a 47' c' 
šarā B 1 a 47' c'  šara B 1 a 52' c' 
šarā B 1 a 52' c'  šara B 1 a 55' 
šarā B 1 a 55'  šara B 1 c 2' 
šarā B 1 c 2'  šara B 1 c 4' c' 
šarā B 1 c 4' c'  šara B 2 e 
šarā B 2 e  šara B 2 n 
šarā B 2 o  šara B 3 a 
šarā B 3 a  šara B 4 g 
šarā B 4 h  šara B 4 j 1' b' 
šarā B 4 j 2'  (GIŠ)šarra- A 
šarra- B šarra- B 2
šarra- B 2 šarra- D
šarra- D šarra- D 1 a 1'
šarra- D 1 a 1' šarra- D 1 a 6'
šarra- D 1 a 7' šarra- D 1 c 1'
šarra- D 1 c 1' šarra- D 2
šarra- D 2 a 1' šarra- D 2 a 3' a'
šarra- D 2 a 3' a' šarra- D 3 b
šarra- D 3 b šarra- D 3 e
šarra- D 3 e šarai-
šarai- NINDAšaraman a 1'
NINDAšaraman a 1' NINDAšaraman a 6'
NINDAšaraman a 7' NINDAšaraman c 4'
NINDAšaraman c 4' NINDAšaraman
NINDAšaraman šara(p)p-
šara(p)p- šarašši- A
šarrašši- B šarrašše/i- C
šaratar šarawar
šarawar šaraz(z)i(ya)- A 1 a 3'
šaraz(z)i(ya)- A 1 a 4' šaraz(z)i(ya)- A 1 b 2'
šaraz(z)i(ya)- A 1 b 2' KUŠšarazzi- B
KUŠšarazzi- B šarazziyaz
šarazziyaz 1 šarhanuwami-
šarhanuwami- šarhiya-
šarhuwant- šarhuwant- 2
šarhuwant- 3 (GIŠ)šarhuli-
(GIŠ)šarhuli- (GIŠ)šarhuli- a 4'
(GIŠ)šarhuli- a 4' (GIŠ)šarhuli-
šarhuliya- šariya- B
šariya- B šāriya- B 2
šāriya- B 2 šariyanni-
NA›šāriyanuwant- *šarikuwar a 2'
*šarikuwar a 2' *šarikuwar e
*šarikuwar e (LÚ.MEŠ)šari(ku)wai-
(LÚ.MEŠ)šari(ku)wai- TÚGšarriwašpa-
šark- A šargan(n)iya-
šargan(n)iya- šarkanti-
šarkanti- ˚/¬šargašam(m)i-
(¬)šarqatt- šarkiwali-
šarkiwali- šarku- A
šarku- A šarku- A 1 e
šarku- A 1 e šarku- C
šarkuwe- šarkuwe- b
šarkuwe- b ¬šar-l[a-…]
šarlai-  šarlai- 2
šarlai- 2 šarlaim(m)i-
šarlaim(m)i- (SISKUR)šarlatta- 2 a
(SISKUR)šarlatta- 2 a (SISKUR)šarlatta- 2 c 1'
(SISKUR)šarlatta- 2 c 2' šarli-
šarli- LÚšarmeya- B
LÚšarmeya- B šarnikzil-
šarnikzil- šarnikzil- a
šarnikzil- a šarnikzil- 
šarnikzileške-  šarni(n)k- a 1'
šarni(n)k- a 1' šarni(n)k- a 2'
šarni(n)k- a 2' šarni(n)k- e 1'
šarni(n)k- e 1' šarni(n)k-
šarni(n)k- UZUšarnum(m)ar
UZUšarnum(m)ar (GIŠ/KUŠ)šarpa- A
(GIŠ/KUŠ)šarpa- A (GIŠ)šarpa- B 1 b
(GIŠ)šarpa- B 1 b šarpašši- A
šarpašši- A šart- c
šart- c ¬šardi- A
¬šardi- A (LÚ)šardiya- A
(LÚ)šardiya- A (LÚ)šardiya- A c
(LÚ)šardiya- A c šartū
šartū šartuliyalli-
šartuliyalli- šāru- B
šāru- B NINDAšarruwant-
NINDAšarruwant- šaruwe- b
šaruwe- c (˚)šarupa-
(˚)šarupa- ˚šarušša 
[šaš] šāša- A c
šāša- A c šāša- A
šašā- A LÚšašalpatalla-
LÚšašalpatalla- (DUG)šašan(n)a-
(DUG)šašan(n)a- šašnu- 1 a
šašnu- 1 a (TÚG)šašt(a)-
(TÚG)šašt(a)-  (TÚG)šašt(a)- 2 b
(TÚG)šašt(a)- 2 b (TÚG)šašt(a)- 2 d 2'
(TÚG)šašt(a)- 2 d 2' (TÚG)šašt(a)-
(TÚG)šašt(a)- ˚šaššūmāi-
˚šaššūmāi- šādayan
šādayan šātar 
šātar šatlašša-
šatlašša- MUNUSšātuhe-
MUNUSšātuhe- šāwar
šāwar šāwar a
šāwar a (SI)šawatar a 2'
(SI)šawatar a 2' šawitišt-
šawitišt- šaummatar
šaummatar šazke- a 
šazke- a -še, -ši A c 1' c'
-še, -ši A c 1' c' -še, -ši A c 3' c'
-še, -ši A c 3' c' -še, -ši A c 5' c'
-še, -ši A c 5' c' -ši- B, -ša-
-ši- B, -ša- -ši- B, -ša-
-ši- B, -ša- -ši- B, -ša- a 5'
-ši- B, -ša- a 5' -ši- B, -ša- b 2'
-ši- B, -ša- b 3' -ši- B, -ša- c 6'
-ši- B, -ša- c 6' -ši- B, -ša- d 5'
-ši- B, -ša- d 5' -ši- B, -ša- e 4'
-ši- B, -ša- e 4' -ši- B, -ša- f 6'
-ši- B, -ša- f 7' -ši- B, -ša-

oi.uchicago.edu/OI/DEPT/PUB/SRC/CHD/S2/CHDS2.html
oi.uchicago.edu/OI/DEPT/PUB/SRC/CHD/S2/CHDS2.html
THE
HITTITE DICTIONARY
OF THE ORIENTAL INSTITUTE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

Edited by
HANS G. GÜTERBOCK†, HARRY A. HOFFNER, AND THEO P. J. VAN DEN HOUT

VOLUME Š
FASCICLE 2
šaptamenzu to -ši-

Published by 
THE ORIENTAL INSTITUTE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
2005

VOLUME Š, FASCICLE 2

Editorial Staff
Theo P. J. van den Hout, Executive Editor
Harry A. Hoffner, Jr., Senior Editor
Hans G. Güterbock†, Senior Editor
Richard H. Beal, Billie Jean Collins, Hripsime Haroutunian, Silvia Luraghi, 
Kathleen R. Mineck, O©uz Soysal, and Ahmet Ünal, Assistants
Gary M. Beckman, H. Craig Melchert, and Gernot Wilhelm, Consultants

ISBN 1-885923-37-6
(Set 0-918986-26-5)
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 79-53554
The Oriental Institute
©2005 by The University of Chicago  •  All Rights Reserved

The preparation of this volume of the Chicago Hittite Dictionary was made possible in part by grants from the Program for Research Tools and Reference Works of the National Endowment for the Humanities, an independent Federal Agency, as well as gifts from the Salus Mundi Foundation, Tucson, AZ, and Mr. Howard Hallengren, New York, NY.

Printed and bound in the United States of America by Cushing-Malloy, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan. 
Seal on cover and title page copyright Prof. Schaeffer-Forrer, Ugaritica III (1956) 89. 
Used with permission. 
ADDITIONS TO LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
 ALASP Abhandlungen zur Literatur Alt-Syriens, Palästinas und Mesopotamiens — Münster
Alp, Song S. Alp, Song, Music and Dance of Hittites — Ankara 2000
AS 26 H. G. Güterbock, Perspectives on Hittite Civilization: Selected Writings — Chicago 1997
Catsanicos, VocabFaute  J. Catsanicos, Recherches sur le Vocabulaire de la Faute, Cahiers de NABU 2 — Paris 1991
CHLI Corpus of Hieroglyphic Luwian Inscriptions. Untersuchungen zur indogermanischen Sprach- und Kulturwissenschaft N.F. 8 — Berlin
—— 1 J. D. Hawkins, Inscriptions of the Iron Age — 2000
—— 2 H. Çambel, Karatepe-Aslanta® — 1999 
CHS I/3-2 I. Wegner, Hurritische Opferlisten aus hethitischen Festbeschreibungen II: Texte für Teššub, Hebat und weitere Gottheiten — Rome 2002
DBH Dresdner Beiträge zur Hethitologie — Dresden
DBH 1 A. Hagenbuchner-Dresel, Massangaben bei hethitischen Backwaren — Dresden 2002
—— 2 D. Groddek, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KBo 30 — 2002
—— 4 ____, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KUB 55 — 2002
—— 6 ____, A. Hagenbuchner and I. Hoffmann, Hethitische Texte in Transkription VS NS  12 — 2002
—— 10 see GsForrer
—— 11 D. Groddek, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KBo 39 — 2004
—— 12 K.K. Riemschneider†, Die akkadischen und hethitischen Omentexte aus Bo©azköy — Dresden 2004
—— 13 D. Groddek, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KUB 20 — 2004
—— 14 ____, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KUB 59 — 2004
—— 15 ____, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KUB 51 — 2004
—— 16 H. Roszkowska-Mutschler, Hethitische Texte in Transkription KBo 45 — 2005
Eothen 11 see Mem. Imparati
—— 12 Imparati, Studi sulla società e sulla religione degli ittiti — 2004
Francia, Avverbiali  R. Francia, Le funzioni sintattiche degli elementi avverbiali di luogo ittiti anda(n), āppa(n), katta(n), katti-, peran, parā, šer, šarā, Studia Asiana 1 — Rome 2002
FsDeMeyer Cinquante-deux reflexions sur le Proche-Orient ancien offertes en hommage à Léon DeMeyer. Mesopotamian History and Environment Occasional Publications 2 — Leuven 1994
FsHaas Kulturgeschichten: Altorientalische Studien für Volkert Haas zum 65. Geburtstag — Saarbrücken 2001
FsHoffner Hittite Studies in Honor of Harry A. Hoffner, Jr. on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday — Winona Lake 2003
FsLebrun Studia Anatolica et Varia: Mélanges offerts au Professeur René Lebrun, Collection Kubaba: Série Antiquité 5-6 — Paris 2004
FsPopko Silva Anatolica — Warsaw 2002
FsRamer The Linguist’s Linguist: a collection of papers in honour of Alexis Manaster Ramer — Munich 2002
FsSzemerényi1  Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic, and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi on the occasion of his 65th birthday — Amsterdam 1979
Furniture G. Herrmann (ed.), The Furniture of Western Asia: Ancient and Traditional — Mainz  1996
GsForrer Šarnikzel — Hethitologische Studien zum Gedenken an Emil Orgetorix Forrer, DBH 10 — Dresden 2004
Haas, Materia V. Haas, Materia Magica et Medica Hethitica — Berlin 2003
Haase, Beobachtungen R. Haase, Beobachtungen zur hethitischen Rechtssatzung — Leonberg 1995
Hazenbos, Habil. J. Hazenbos, “Wir stellten eine Orakel-frage”: Untersuchungen zu den hethiti-schen Orakeltexten — Leipzig 2003
——, Organization The Organization of the Anatolian Local Cults during the Thirteenth Century B.C.: An appraisal of Hittite cult inventories. Cuneiform Monographs 21 — Leiden 2003
HHB H. S. Schuster, Die hattisch-hethitischen Bilinguen I/1 (DMOA 17/1), I/2-3 (DMOA 17/2) — Leiden 1974, 2002
hetkonk http://www.orient.uni.wuerzburg.de/hetkonk/hetkonk_abfrage.html 
HittitePrayers I. Singer, Hittite Prayers, WAW 11 — Atlanta 2002
HWHT O. Soysal, Hattischer Wortschatz in hethitischer Textüberlieferung, HbOr I/74 — Leiden, 2004
ICH 4 (Würzburg 1999) see StBoT 45 — 2001
Jin Jie, RetrGlos A Complete Retrograde Glossary of the Hittite Language, PIHANS 71 — Leiden 1994
Kassian, Zip. Kassian, Two Middle Hittite Rituals mentioning ƒZiplantawija, sister of Hittite King µTuthalija II/I — Moscow 2000
Kassian et al., Funerary A. Kassian, A. Korolëv, A. Sidel’tsev, Hittite Funerary Ritual šalliš waštaiš, AOAT 288 — Münster 2002.
Magie A. Moreau and J.-C. Turpin, eds. La Magie, Actes du Colloque International de Montpellier 25-27 Mars 1999 — I: Du Monde Babylonien au Monde Hellé-nistiqe — Montpellier 2000
Masson, Douze Dieux E. Masson, Les douze dieux de l’immortalité — Paris 1989
Mazoyer, Télipinu M. Mazoyer, Télipinu, le dieu au marécage, Kubaba: Série Antiquité 2— Paris 2003
Mem. Carter The Asia Minor Connexion: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter, Orbis Supplementa 13 — Leuven 2000
Mem. Imparati   Anatolia Antica, Studi in memoria di Fiorella Imparati, Eothen 11 — Florence 2002
Nakamura, Nuntarrijašha  M. Nakamura, Das hethitische nuntarrijašha-Fest, PIHANS 94 — Leiden 2002
NHL Neues Handbuch der Literaturwissenschaft
OBO 129 B. Janowski, K. Koch, G. Wilhelm, eds., Religionsgeschichtliche Beziehungen zwischen Kleinasien, Nordsyrien und dem Alten Testament, OBO 129 — Freiburg/Göttingen 1993
Oettinger, “Indo-Hittite”- “Indo-Hittite”-Hypothese und Wort-
Hypothese bildung, IBS-VKS 37 — Innsbruck 1986
OHP B. van Gessel, The Onomasticon of the Hittite Pantheon, HbOr I/33 — Leiden 1998-2001
PdP Parola del Passato — Naples
Popko, CTH 447 M. Popko, Das hethitische Ritual CTH 447 — Warsaw 2003
——, Religions ____, Religions of Asia Minor — Warsaw 1995
Prechel, Išhara D. Prechel, Die Göttin Išhara, ALASP 11 — Münster 1996
Singer see Hittite Prayers
SL Studia Linguarum: De omnibus linguae rebus scibilibus et quibusdam aliis — Moscow
Soysal see HWHT
StBoT 45 G. Wilhelm, ed., Akten des IV. Internationalen Kongresses für Hethitologie — 2001
—— 46 J. Miller, Studies in the Origins, Development and Interpretation of the
 Kizzuwatna Rituals — 2004
StMed 12 St. de Martino, Annali e Res Gestae antico ittiti — Pavia 2003
—— 13 O. Carruba, Anittae Res Gestae — Pavia 2003 
—— 14 F. Pecchioli Daddi, Il vincolo per i governatori di provincia — Pavia 2003
Tischler, HHwb J. Tischer, Hethitisches Handwörterbuch, IBS 102 — Innsbruck, 2001
Trabazo, TextosRel. J. Trabazo, Textos religiosos hititas, Biblioteca de Ciencias Bíblicas y Orientales 6 — Madrid 2002
von Bredow,  I. von Bredow, Die altanatolischen
Altanat.Gotth. Gottheiten nach den althethitischen Tex-
 ten — Sofia 1995
Wegner, Hurritisch I. Wegner, Hurritisch: Einführung in die hurritische Sprache—Wiesbaden 2000
comm. comment, commentary, communication
cun. cuneiform
ess.  essive
imperf. imperfective
indir. indirect
obl. oblique
> goes to